Higher speech requires higher energies


Listen to a recording of this dictation (subscribers only)

Ascended Master Gautama Buddha through Kim Michaels, January 7, 2023. This dictation was given during the 2023 New Year’s webinar – Being a spiritual person in a chaotic world.

I AM the Ascended Master Gautama Buddha. The next topic we need to discuss here is the concept of higher speech. Again, many Buddhists have looked at this, they have taken the translation of right speech and they have attempted to define what is the right speech and what is the wrong speech. As I have explained already, this is not the highest approach. How do we go higher? 

Well, you cannot actually understand the concept of higher speech without understanding energy. Now admittedly, this was something that was difficult to explain to people 2,500 years ago, but it has become much easier with the advances in modern science. As already mentioned, Albert Einstein proved that the world is really made out of energy. This means what? It means that everything you do is done with energy. You cannot feel, you cannot think, you cannot hold a sense of identity, you cannot talk and you cannot act without using energy. I realize that many people are aware that their body needs energy and they think that you get this from your food, perhaps from sunlight, perhaps from breathing the air, but this is only the physical aspect of energy. 

It is of course not very relevant when it comes to speech, higher speech. In order to grasp the concept of higher speech, you need to realize that energy is a continuum of vibrations. There are certain energies that make up what you call the material realm, but there are many other energetic vibrations. You know from science, how they can measure energy vibrations that you cannot detect with the physical senses. There is a form of energy that vibrates within what we can call the material frequency spectrum, but beyond that is a form of energy that vibrates in the emotional frequency spectrum, another form in the mental and finally energy that vibrates at the identity level which is the highest level of the material universe. Beyond that of course is the spiritual realm of even higher vibrations that are beyond what can even be measured by physical instruments. 

You are perhaps not aware of this, but there is a limit to what instruments made out of matter can measure. It is comparable to the fact that an optical microscope cannot see any particles that are smaller than the wavelength of visible light. That is why they have constructed electron microscopes to detect smaller particles. Likewise, there could be constructed other instruments that can measure higher vibrations and some have already been constructed, but there is a limit to what you can measure with instruments created in the matter realm. Thus, you will not be able to create an instrument that can prove the existence of a spiritual realm beyond the material. It simply cannot be done. Nevertheless, these energies exist. 

The linear mind, the intuitive mind and objectivity

Now you may look at what scientists have discovered where they on the one hand have formulated the theory of the Big Bang. They say that, at the time of the Big Bang, there was really no matter as you understand matter today because everything was energy that was compressed into this infinitely small point, called a singularity. This idea of a singularity is really an outcome of the linear mind and we need to briefly touch upon this. I have said that the linear mind looks at current phenomena, it looks at the complexity that is there now, but it wants to break it down and say that the complexity comes from a simpler state guided by a few simple natural laws. If you therefore continue to go back to these lower states or more fundamental states, you eventually reach the end of the line where you have the original cause. 

According to science, this is the singularity that existed in this brief interval of time before the Big Bang. Nobody can really explain what a singularity is. Nobody can really explain how all of the energy that has created this vast, vast universe could be compressed into a single point. This is a theory created by the linear mind where it says you must be able to go back towards stages that are simpler and more fundamental until you reach the ultimate stage, the ultimate cause. It is the same as saying that sometime in the past, in the primordial soup, a lightning hit and the first single-celled organism appeared. Well, is this really the only way that this could be conceived? It is the only way by the linear mind, but what about the mind that is not linear? Today, more and more people are becoming aware of intuition. More and more people are realizing that intuition is simply a method for investigating the world you live in, and it can be as valuable and as valid as the linear analytical mind. 

The reason why modern society today is in somewhat of a stalemate in terms of growth and has created so many problems with the environment, for example, is that materialists, when they took over science, wanted to disregard the influence of consciousness. They wanted to disregard intuition because they decided that intuition was subjective and unreliable, and only the rational, linear, logical mind could be objective and reliable. This is a very artificial determination that has had widespread ramifications for modern society and for creating many of the problems you see that seem to have no solution. They have no solution with the linear mind because the linear mind can again only think in distinctions, differences, analytical ways of looking at life that create these dualistic polarities and then implies a value judgment. Once you have the value judgment, you have closed your mind. 

Science started out as an objective process of observing what can be observed. Instead of thinking that a certain doctrine accurately described the universe, even though observations contradicted the doctrine, you were willing to look at what is actually happening. This was an attempt to create some objective way of approaching the world. It is a valid way of doing it, but it is only one side of the coin of the mind’s abilities. Intuition is also a way to step away from subjectivity. When you have this experience that I described where the you, the Conscious You, steps outside of your emotional, mental and identity bodies, this is an objective experience. Having an intuitive experience can be just as valid as using logic and analysis, but scientists decided that it was only the rational mind that was reliable. They attempted to exclude intuition, claiming that this was subjective, whereas the rational mind was not subjective. This of course is a limited claim because what do you do with both minds? Whether you use logic and rationality or you use intuition, you are actually having a direct experience of something beyond your normal level of awareness. 

The question becomes, are you then willing, when you come back into your normal level of awareness, to use the experience to question your awareness, your mind? Or will you try to interpret the experience through your present level of consciousness, wanting it to fit into the perception filter, the mental box that you have? Scientists who interpret scientific observations are in many cases not neutral and objective. They certainly are not if they are materialists who have taken an ideological approach to science. They have formulated an idea of how they want the universe to work and they are superimposing it upon scientific observations, desperately wanting to fit them into their ideology. 

An intuitive alternative to the Big Bang theory

This is how they created the theory of the Big Bang. It has to have started somewhere and if you go with a linear mind to the smallest thing you can imagine, you get something that the mind cannot imagine, but it can label it and call it a singularity. What could this possibly be? Well, what if you use your intuitive mind and say, the Big Bang, or rather the process of manifestation of the material universe, did not start in a singularity.  It started in an opening between the material frequency spectrum and the frequency spectrum above it, a higher vibration beyond the material frequency spectrum. It was not necessary that all of the energy that is currently in the universe was compressed into a single point, which is clearly an impossibility. It was only necessary that there was an opening between a higher realm and a material realm and that energy could enter through that opening. 

Now, of course, you still have this artificial concept that if there was only one opening in one point, it is still quite difficult to imagine that this vast universe should have started in just one point. What if it did not? What if instead there were many openings so that instead of everything having to come through one little hole, there was a large amount of energy that was lowered in vibration from the higher frequency spectrum to the spectrum of the material universe? In other words, a simultaneous manifestation, a simultaneous entering of energy, not from a single point, but from many points. 

Then you get rid of the singularity. Now, of course, the linear mind will say, prove it. I will say, use your intuition and you can experience the reality of it. How can I say this? Because your mind has the potential to be an entry point for energy coming from a higher realm. In fact, if your mind did not have this ability, you could not be conscious. Scientists have, since the advent of materialism, attempted to exclude consciousness from scientific inquiries, saying: “We do not need to study consciousness, it can only be subjective.” 

A good scientist will know his instruments or her instruments and will be willing to look at the limitations of the instrument. Scientists could have taken an optical microscope and used it to observe the smallest particle they could observe that is bigger than the frequency of visible light. If they had been in the same mindset as the materialist, they would have said: “There is nothing beyond this smallest particle. There cannot be anything that is smaller than what we can see in this optical microscope.” You need to know the limitations of your instruments in order to know if you are making accurate observations. Well, what is the primary instrument used by scientists? It is their minds. Not only do they use their minds to formulate theories to construct instruments that they use for observations, but they also use their minds to interpret the observations.

The expansion of awareness leads to new knowledge

Now you can go back 2,500 years to when I appeared on earth and the people at the time had no awareness of anything beyond what they could see with their senses. They did not know, many of them, that there were organs inside the body. They certainly did not know about cells, about molecules, about atoms, about subatomic particles. They could observe energy such as sunlight, but they had no real concept of what energy was. They did not have the concepts of vibration, frequency, wavelengths, amplitude. They even did not have the concept of an energy wave. They could see waves on water, but not conceive of an energy wave. There was no way to have explained this to them. There was in fact no way that scientists could have formulated their current theories based on what people knew at the time. 

What is it that has happened since then? It is that humanity has expanded its awareness, but this is based on discovering but also formulating new concepts. People have many more concepts today than they had 2,500 years ago and that is why they can explain things that could not be explained back then. What scientists are not aware of is that the way you formulate a concept has an impact on how you look at the entire issue. It has an impact on what theories you can formulate, what instruments you can imagine constructing, what measurements you can imagine making, and how you interpret the measurements. You will know, if you have ever studied this, that in quantum physics there is something called the wave-particle duality. Well, what is a particle? A particle is a concept that starts in the mind that sees, that experiences, the world through the senses. 

The so-called wave-particle duality

Your eyes can see a billiard ball. They can see something that is much smaller until you get down to a grain of sand. Therefore, you have the concept of a visible particle, which scientists have then used the linear mind to extend and say there must be smaller and smaller particles until we reach the smallest possible particle. This is what the ancient Greeks called the atom, the indivisible particle. There came a point where modern scientists had discovered something that they thought was the smallest indivisible particle and they called it the atom. Later they discovered that the atom could actually be divided and there were smaller particles. These are normally called subatomic particles and they have various names. 

Experiments have proven that if you observe this subatomic phenomenon in a certain way, it behaves like a particle and if you observe it in another way, it behaves like a wave. Therefore, they have come up with the wave-particle duality, which is supposedly one of the few remaining mysteries of modern physics. The wave-particle duality is a result of taking macroscopic concepts that can be seen by the senses and projecting it on the world that cannot be detected by the senses. If you take Einstein’s theory, it says that all matter is actually energy and energy is a wave, so there are no smallest particles. In fact, at the subatomic level, there are no particles as you conceive of particles with the linear, outer mind. This is just one example of how the concepts you have in your mind influence how you look at the world, the conclusions you make, and therefore what experience you have of the world.

The idea of a personal God

Now there are many, many people who are open to a spiritual teaching and they think that a spiritual teaching can give them insights into how the world works. Of course, many spiritual teachings do that, but many people also hope that a spiritual teaching can help them change their physical circumstances. They look for some kind of magical bullet that is built into the spiritual teaching so that they can change their physical circumstances. The classical example of this is that people have conceived of the idea that up there in a higher realm, there is a personal God who is supposedly an old man on a great white throne who is looking down upon you personally and evaluating everything you do, to see whether it is right or wrong according to his ultimate standard. 

If you do what this God considers right, or rather what some human being, some human priest, a Brahmin, has defined that God says is right, then you will be rewarded by going to heaven. If you do not follow the Brahmins of your religion, you will be punished by going to hell. The hope that is implicit in this worldview is that by doing something that is prescribed by your religion, you can entice this personal God to grant you favors, to take away unpleasant experiences and give you what you desire. 

This is of course an ancient belief, and many people have lived entire lifetimes in this belief. Many people in the modern age have lived in this belief so many lifetimes that they have given up on it because they have realized that it does not actually work. At least there is no systematic way to make it work. They come into embodiment in this day and age with this deep distrust of these traditional religions that talk about the wish-fulfilling God. And the reason for this is that they have experienced that although this gives them hope, it is actually in the end a disempowering belief system. Because if this wish-fulfilling God does not respond to your attempts to manipulate him into doing what you want, then there is nothing you can do. You are literally stuck. You are disempowered. 

An empowering spiritual teaching

The reason I did not talk about a spiritual realm or gods 2,500 years ago is that I wanted to give people a method, a teaching that was empowering. What is empowering? Well, it is that you realize the fact that I mentioned earlier. Your mind is conscious because there is a stream of energy coming from a higher realm into your mind. It comes from your higher self, which we do not need to go into in any depth here, but it enters first into your identity mind. Here the energy is qualified or takes on the form of the images you hold in your identity mind. This qualifies the energy so it takes on a certain form. You can compare it to a kaleidoscope with different levels of colored beads where the light first passes through beads of one color and takes on that color and then passes through other layers. 

First you have the identity mind and here you have your sense of who you are and what you can do. If you sense that you are a passive being who has no power, this is the quality that the energy will take on as it enters your identity mind. Then it passes into the mental mind where you might have other limiting beliefs of what you can or cannot do and now the energy is qualified with that. Finally it enters your emotional mind where you may have some emotional patterns of fear, of doubt, whatever you have, that again qualifies the energy. Then it enters your conscious mind and it takes on whatever beliefs you have at the conscious level. 

What are you doing with all this energy? Well, you are using it to think, to express feelings, you are using it to speak words and you are using it to take actions, physical actions. This is not all you are doing. Your mind is actually a projection apparatus, somewhat like the movie projector in a movie theater. Instead of one film strip, it has four, each of your four lower bodies. You are constantly projecting through the four levels of your mind onto the energy that makes up the material universe. 

The cosmic mirror

You can – and some of you have heard us say this before – you can compare the physical universe to a mirror. What you are projecting out with your mind will be reflected back by the mirror. This means what? Well, this is actually the deeper meaning of the teaching that I gave 2,500 years ago of the interdependent originations. 

Everything in the physical world on planet earth is made up of these four levels, the physical, emotional, mental and identity level. There are four levels of the material universe and everything that is manifest in the physical level is a projection of the images in the three higher levels.  The physical level is like the movie screen that has images projected upon it through the projector. However, the physical universe is connected to the minds of human beings. Human beings are the co-creators. There are self-aware beings who created planet earth from the outside, but human beings are the co-creators who create planet earth from the inside. You do this through your minds by allowing the energy streaming through your mind to take on the images, the mental images, in your mind and projecting them into the cosmic mirror, projecting them onto the energy that makes up the four levels. This is the deeper meaning of the interdependent originations, something that could not be explained 2,500 years ago, but can be explained in a more easy to grasp level with the current knowledge of energy. 

You see that you live in an interdependent system. You do have an actual physical planet. We can debate how real it is, but that is not relevant right now. You do have an actual physical planet, but the physical planet is a projection coming from three higher levels. In other words, as I said about the Big Bang, instead of all of the energy that makes up the current universe being compressed into a singularity, there was a point where the universe was not manifest because there was no energy in the physical vibrational spectrum. All the energy was in the emotional, mental and identity levels. At some point there was a projection that brought energy into a material spectrum. This did not happen in one single point, but at many points that defined a certain space that was the primordial space. 

Energy kept streaming through until it started coalescing as physical particles that then became increasingly complex and organized until you had the formation eventually of all of the galaxies that you see today, or rather, even many of the galaxies that you do not see today because the universe is too big. This was a process that happened from the outside, but it happened in essentially the same way as how you are co-creating, by allowing energy to flow through four levels of the mind until the energies were brought into the physical spectrum. 

The interdependent system

You now have an interdependent system here. There are four levels of what we might call the material universe, but within that material universe there are many individual self-aware beings, human beings, who have an individual mind that exists within the larger energy field of the material realm. You have a conscious mind, an emotional, mental and identity mind. Beyond this, all of the individual human minds are connected and form what we can call a collective mind. Science has even discovered that when certain events happen, there is coherence in the collective mind, which affects random number generators. I am not seeking to prove anything here for the linear rational mind, but simply to trigger your intuitive experiences. 

Everything you do is done with energy, but you are not an island. Even your energy field is not an island because you exist within this whole, this interconnected whole. Now why is this empowering, as opposed to disempowering? Because your physical circumstances are connected to the circumstances in the four levels of your mind. They are projections. Now, it is perfectly true that your physical circumstances are not the exclusive product of the projections coming from your mind. They are also a product of the interconnected effect of the collective mind, and of course the original projections for creating the planet.

This is not a magical belief in some wish-fulfilling God who has all power to set aside the free will of eight billion other people in order to give you the specific circumstances you want, because this is disempowering. What if God does not do this, which in most cases he does not do? With this knowledge, you can take an empowering approach and say: “I may not be able to change every aspect of my physical circumstances, but I can change some aspects by changing what I am projecting out through my mind. Even if there is a physical circumstance that I cannot change this way, I can certainly change the way I experience that circumstance, the way I react to it. I can in fact come to a point where I am free to either choose a more constructive reaction, or I can choose not to react at all.” 

This is empowering, and although this could not have been explained 2,500 years ago, it was still what I attempted to explain. The key to changing any aspect of your life is to start by changing your own mind, raising your level of awareness. This is the essence of the Eightfold Path. You go through eight phases or steps whereby you gradually raise your level of consciousness.

Speech and energy

What does all this have to do with speech and higher speech? Well, speech is a use of energy. Whenever you open your mouth and utter a sound, you are using energy. Now, you are projecting even when you are silent through your identity, mental and emotional mind, but these projections do not have quite as direct of an impact at the physical level as when you either take a physical action or when you speak. In other words, when you produce an effect that can be observed by the physical senses, this has a more direct influence at the physical level than when you project something from one of the three higher levels. 

The use of your voice is a powerful instrument that can be used to qualify energy, and you will never understand the concept of right speech or as I choose to say here, higher speech, if you do not understand that your voice carries and qualifies energy. This energy will have an effect both on other people, your physical circumstances and on yourself. 

You might already be aware, because you have observed this, that many times you can have strong emotions and you can feel that there is a disturbance in your energy field. You may not be very conscious of your energy field, but you can feel that something happens. If you get very angry, it can almost become a self-reinforcing effect, a downward spiral. When you cross a certain line, as people say, you lose it. You express anger often through your voice and it pulls you into a maelstrom, into a downward spiral, that can be very, very difficult to free yourself from. You may have observed it in others, you may have experienced it in yourself. There are of course many other of such vortices or maelstroms that can affect you. This is just an example of how you are using energy. You are qualifying energy and it has a direct effect on your state of mind.

 What you need to become aware of in order to manifest higher speech is how words or your voice qualify energy and project energy. You need to not do this in a logical, linear way. There is always the temptation to set this up in a linear way, and this can be done. You have instruments right now that can measure the human voice and the vibrations of the human voice. You could use this, if you wanted to, to set up a visible, linear scale that could detect different vibrations produced by the human voice. Some have already experimented with this. You will see scientists who, for example, have experimented with sound influencing sand on a glass plate and other similar instruments. The point is that instead of setting this up in an analytical fashion, what will really help you is to develop this intuitive sense for what happens in your own energy field when you use your voice. 

How sound affects your energy field

You know that if somebody is angry with you and yells at you, it affects you. The reason for this is that the person is projecting this energy of a specific vibration into your emotional body. All energy can interact with other forms of energy. If you have certain patterns in your emotional body, if somebody is angry with you, it will stir up these patterns. You can, for example, become angry yourself. Or, you can become shameful or depressed because you feel guilty the other person is yelling at you and accusing you. 

This you can use. You already have this ability, but you can refine it and develop it so that you can sense that there are certain kinds of speech that qualify energy with a lower vibration. You can basically talk about two different kinds of vibration. There is fear-based and there is love-based. There is higher, there is lower. You can learn to feel this. You can very simply center on your heart, the center of your chest, and you can ask yourself: “Do I feel that the energies are higher or lower? Does it raise my energies? Does it lower my energies?” You will be able to feel that if somebody is yelling at you, it lowers your energy. If somebody is talking to you in a positive, loving manner, it raises your energy. 

These are the criteria that most spiritual people can develop fairly quickly. Many have of course done so already. You can evaluate how you use speech and how other people use speech. This gives you a criterion for evaluating: Is this the kind of speech I want to engage in? Do I want to create these lower energy impulses and send them at other people? Because whatever I send out, even though I may think I am directing it at only one person and we are all alone in this room and nobody else can hear me, whatever I send out goes into the cosmic mirror into the four levels of the material universe and it will return to me. 

Karma is really energy impulses

This is one way to explain the ancient concept of karma. Karma is when you use your four lower bodies to project an energy impulse into the four levels of the material universe. That energy impulse starts in your identity body, goes into the mental, into the emotional, into the physical and then is projected out. It first enters the physical realm, then up to the emotional, then the mental, then identity. Here, if it is a fear-based energy, it cannot go further. Now, it is reflected back by what I have called the cosmic mirror, so that it starts hitting you again first in the identity, then the mental, then the emotional and then the physical. This is what has in Eastern religions and philosophy has been called karma. It is simply the return to you of energy you have sent out. 

Now what if you qualify energy with a higher vibration, a loving vibration? Well, the same thing happens. It goes through the four levels of your mind, into the four levels of the universe. When it reaches the identity level, the higher vibration will not be stopped and reflected back to you. It will actually go beyond the material realm into the higher realm to your higher self. Now you will receive more energy of a higher vibration from your higher self. This will increase your creative abilities, your mental capacity. It will also serve to raise your consciousness. In other words, when you qualify energy of a lower vibration, it will be returned to you in a lower vibration. When you qualify it with a higher vibration, it will be returned to you with that higher vibration, but in greater quantity and intensity. To him that has, more shall be added. This is the idea of the multiplication of the talents described in a parable by Jesus.

 We can also say, why is life suffering on earth? Why is there the Sea of Samsara? Well, because the earth is an energy system, but currently the majority of the energy in the system is qualified with a lower, fear-based vibration. There is so much fear-based energy in the energy system and in the collective consciousness that it often overpowers people’s minds and causes them to suffer, feel depressed, feel powerless, feel hopeless, feel angry, whatever you have. All of these lower emotions have to do with the fact that the energy in the collective field overpowers the individual fields of human beings. The way to escape this is to fill your individual energy field with higher energies, higher vibrations, and to purify your individual energy field of lower vibrations. 

You see, I have said that if you send out a fear-based impulse, it will be returned to you, but what effect will it have in your energy field? Well, it will have the effect of reacting with, stirring up, intensifying the lower energies that are already in your field. You become more agitated, more frustrated, more fearful. If you remove the energy that is already in your field and remove the reactionary patterns that cause you to qualify energy with fear, there is nothing for the energy to react to. If you then fill your energy field with higher vibrations, then when the lower vibrations come back to you, they will be transformed by the higher vibration. This is again something that was difficult to explain at the time of the Buddha but is easy to explain today with simple wave dynamics. 

If you take an energy wave of a certain vibration directed at another energy wave, there will be an interference pattern between the two waves, and the result will be a third wave that has a combination of the two waves. In other words, you have an energy wave of a low frequency, you direct a higher frequency wave at that, and you can create a third wave that has a higher wave than the original wave, but a lower vibration than the wave you directed at it. The net effect is that you have raised the low energy to a higher state. 

When you consider that you have had a pattern for several lifetimes where you have qualified energy with anger, and some of this was sent out, and some of this accumulated in your energy field, then you can see that part of this pattern is not just a belief that you need to respond with anger, or that it is the only way to respond. Part of it is the energy that affects your emotions, and the more anger energy you have in your emotional body, the more you are prone to respond, to react with anger in different situations. If you remove that energy, then it will be easier for you to see the reactionary pattern, see the belief behind it, and let it go, so you can be free, and therefore rise to a higher level of consciousness, a higher level of the path. 

Using speech to transform energy

Why am I telling you all this when the topic is speech? Well, traditionally Buddhist teachings or Buddhist movements have used a variety of spiritual tools to raise awareness. They have used silent meditation, but many of them had also used chanting, chanting the Om, chanting other mantras, chanting certain syllables, and this has been used in other spiritual and religious cultures as well. The reason for this is that intuitively people from ancient times knew that using your voice is a powerful way to invoke higher frequency energy and direct it at lower frequency energy, and thereby transform the energy and set you free from the pull that it has on your mind. 

You now see that there are two aspects of having these attachments that I talked about 2,500 years ago. One is that you have a belief that is an illusion, but the other is that you have some energy qualified through that belief, and the energy pulls on your conscious mind. If you have an accumulation of anger energy, it does not take very much for you to react with anger to certain situations. You can see people who over the course of time become more and more prone to react with anger, and the simple explanation is that they have more and more anger energy accumulated in their emotional bodies, and it overpowers their conscious minds. 

By becoming aware of this, and by using appropriate tools to invoke higher frequency energy, you can free yourself from this pull. And the most powerful way to invoke higher frequency energy is to use your voice. You can of course use these traditional Buddhist chants, but there are also more modern versions, sometimes called decrees or invocations, that you can use for this purpose. What you realize here is that the original meaning of the concept of speech, higher speech, is that you learn to use your voice, the power of your voice, to invoke and direct energy so that you transform fear-based energy back into love-based energy, and therefore free your mind to look at the patterns and step up to a higher level on the path. This is the essential realization when it comes to speech. 

Many of you will already feel that when you talk in an angry or derogatory way, it lowers your energies. When you talk in a kind and loving way, it raises your energies. Again, many Buddhists have over time, and many other spiritual people have over time, decided with their outer minds that as a spiritual person, they have to always speak a certain way. They have to avoid speaking with anger, they have to avoid speaking loudly, they have to always speak softly and kindly, and they think this is enough, but what are they doing? They are using force to suppress certain forms of speech and cultivate others. 

What is it I have given you here—the alternative? You are not using force to suppress a tendency to speak with anger. You are using your voice to transform the energy that pulls on your conscious mind, and then you are using your ability to step outside your four lower bodies, look at the patterns in your emotional, mental and identity minds, and therefore dismiss the Maya, the illusion, that caused the pattern that caused you to react with anger. You are freeing yourself from the anger instead of suppressing it. There is a huge and essential difference. 

You may think that by suppressing all kinds of inharmonious speech, you have demonstrated great progress on the spiritual path, but I would rather have you dissolve one pattern than to suppress a hundred patterns. The one pattern will at least take you one step up, whereas suppressing will make you feel that you do not need to take a step up because you are already such an advanced spiritual student. Again, you can step into seeing everything as an opportunity. Many spiritual people have accepted this standard that you must speak softly, you must never lose your harmony, you must never raise your voice, you must never become irritated, and if they do, they feel very shameful, remorseful, and they come down upon themselves or they criticize others. 

Really, why would a spiritual teacher be concerned about this? Yes, if it is a pattern that repeats itself, it is not constructive, but what have I said earlier? You can look at everything that happens in your life as an opportunity to see something in your consciousness and overcome it. If you lose your harmony and speak angrily, there is no point in coming down on yourself for it or feeling shameful about it. Just step back and say: “Oh, this is an opportunity to see a pattern I have in my subconscious mind. What is that pattern? Let me go into it. Let me go into the energy, find the belief behind it, and unravel this until I see it.” This is the constructive way. This is the higher way to use speech, to look at speech, to approach speech. 

With this, I have given you what I wanted to give you on this topic, and therefore I will seal you for now in the joyful speech of the Buddha.

 

Copyright © 2023 Kim Michaels

 

Back to Being a spiritual person in a chaotic world 

You cannot go higher than your intent


Listen to a recording of this dictation (subscribers only)

Ascended Master Gautama Buddha through Kim Michaels, January 7, 2023. This dictation was given during the 2023 New Year’s webinar – Being a spiritual person in a chaotic world.

I AM the Ascended Master Gautama Buddha. What does higher intent mean? What is intent? Normally people would say that I have an intention based on a desire to have something, to experience something, to achieve something. Intent implies past, present and future. It implies that in the past you formulated certain desires, a certain vision. Right now, you have the intent that this vision shall come to pass, but you think it will happen at some point in the future. But is that the highest intent? Is there not another way to look at intent?

What I have said previously is that you are living in a difficult world. Many people have a desire to protect themselves from this chaotic world. They have an intent to be protected from some of the chaos, from being overwhelmed, but they may also have a certain desire to have something, to achieve something, to experience something in this world. Again, there is of course nothing wrong with this. You are who you are right now and based on who you are right now, you look at the world, you look at yourself, you look at life a certain way. Based on this, you have certain intentions, certain desires that you would like to see fulfilled, certain things you would like to have, certain things you would like to avoid. It can be no other way.

When you start the Eightfold Path, you realize that the intent you have right now is not the highest possible intent. Now, it is not that you necessarily need to condemn your intent, to judge it as being wrong or to forcefully suppress it, but you need to realize that there are two aspects to life on a planet like earth. One is, as I have said, that there are certain things you need to do in order to survive, to keep your physical body alive, and the other is that you have a larger goal, a more long-term goal, which is to reach nirvana, inner peace, enlightenment, to walk the spiritual path, to raise your level of awareness however you define it.

You need to start contemplating that you actually have two distinct kinds of intent here. You have an intent that relates to living on earth, being in a physical body on earth, and you have an intent that relates to going beyond earth, going beyond the physical body. The challenge when you become spiritually aware is how to balance those two. This is the eternal challenge, the timeless challenge that people have faced for a very long time. How do you reconcile the fact that you are here with your intent to not be here forever or indefinitely? This is where it requires you to start a process of really questioning your intentions and your desires.

The mental strain of defining right intentions

There are many Buddhists who have looked at this concept of “right” intention, as they see it, and they have again attempted to define in an outer way that certain intentions are right, certain intentions are wrong. I need to avoid, I need to force myself to not have the wrong intentions and instead force myself to have or cultivate the right intentions. This has caused many, many, people to go into this spiral of using more and more mental strain to suppress the intentions that they label as wrong and to always be mindful, have their intention upon having only the intentions that they label as right. This can become a very intense mental effort, a big strain on them as you see not only in Buddhists but many spiritual and religious people, even many other people who are seeking to live up to some kind of ideal.

This is where we need to step back a little bit. We need to recognize here that the path to higher awareness has stages. It has several stages, and you have to start somewhere. You start at whatever level you are at when you find a spiritual teaching in this lifetime. That level varies from person to person depending on your growth in previous lifetimes. For you personally, you came into this embodiment with a certain level of intent, a certain level of awareness. You came to a point where you discovered your first spiritual teaching, you realized there was a spiritual path, there was a procedure you can follow. The way you looked at this at the time was an expression of your general level of awareness, and based on this you formulated certain intents for what you wanted to get out of walking the spiritual path. Again, nothing wrong—what else can you do?

What you need to recognize here is that as you walk the path, as you raise your level of awareness, you need to again look at your intentions for walking the spiritual path and your intentions about life on earth. You cannot simply set up this black-and-white, dualistic determination of what is “right” intentions, what is “wrong” intentions. You cannot force yourself. Or rather, you can force yourself, but it does not help you raise your awareness. It keeps you trapped at this level where you feel that because you have forced yourself to not have the wrong intentions, and force yourself to have the right intentions, you have now reached some advanced stage on the spiritual path and therefore you are better than those who have not done what you have done. This is not, as I have now said many times, not real progress.

A higher evaluation of intentions

The alternative to this is that you do not evaluate intentions based on right and wrong. I have talked about the separation, the illusion of separation and the dualistic consciousness. What is it that actually happens when you define this dualistic polarity of right and wrong? You put yourself in a state of mind where you are open to using force. The extreme outcome is as I said that you are willing to exterminate another group of people that are different from your group as you define it. For a spiritual person, you have already risen to a higher level where you are not so much focused on forcing other people. In fact, most spiritual people are not willing to force other people, but you are often willing to force yourselves. You can very easily get into this state of mind where you feel that you have to use your willpower, your attention, your focus to force yourself and force your mind.

Many spiritual people have gotten the idea that they can achieve progress through meditation, but meditation is often disturbed by what some Buddhists call the monkey mind where the thoughts go all over the place. They have developed this idea that they should force the mind to not be thinking, force the mind to not have thoughts and this can become quite a strain for some people who have done this for a long time. They may think they have achieved various results, but it is all based on force. The alternative is to question this force-based approach and realize that you do not have to use force.

This can be helped along by considering the concept that before you came into this embodiment, you formulated a Life plan. This happened along with your spiritual counselors, whoever they are depending on your background and your personal development. You had advice from more mature, more experienced teachers and based on this you formulated a Life plan. Most people on earth have either no Life plan or a very simple Life plan but as a spiritual person who is open to spiritual teachings you have a more elaborate Life plan. That Life plan has as its overarching goal your growth in consciousness, raising of your awareness to higher and higher levels. You sat down with your spiritual teachers, you evaluated: “Where am I at in consciousness, what are the patterns, the illusions that I have in my emotional, mental and identity bodies that I need to overcome in order to make progress, and how can I best facilitate this in my coming embodiment?”

This was then an overall framework for choosing when and where, under which circumstances to come into embodiment. Most spiritual people chose their parents, chose their family, chose their culture and nationality because there was something in that environment that could help you overcome the illusions, the attachments, the patterns, the reactionary patterns that you wanted to overcome in this lifetime.

Here is where you might say that there is a certain element of force because when you make your Life plan, you have a more clear perspective of what you need to overcome. Of course you know that once you descend into embodiment again, you forget that perspective. That is the nature of overcoming something. If you knew ahead of time what you had to overcome, where would be the challenge in overcoming it? How would you actually overcome it?

You have an illusion. If you know it is an illusion, you have already overcome it. The only way to overcome it is to descend into embodiment with the illusion, forget about the illusion and then while you are in embodiment, you come to see the illusion. That is how you overcome it. You still have some awareness before coming into embodiment that there are certain things you need to overcome, and you choose to put yourself in a situation where you are forced to deal with this particular aspect of your psychology. Your outer situation, the people you embody with for example, parents and siblings, they have certain patterns in their psychology that force you, or that force you to react to them so that you have a chance to see your own patterns. In a sense you could say you are forcing yourself to confront this, but you of course forget this when you come into embodiment, which is why you often react so strongly to parents, family members, your outer situation. The challenge is to reconnect to this.

The mind wants to suppress things

You see what I have said earlier, there is a mechanism in the mind that wants to suppress certain things that it sees as a threat. It could be the threat of being overwhelmed or having to question your beliefs, whatever, but you want to suppress this. When you come into embodiment, this often means that when you are in a difficult situation, dealing with a difficult person, you want to suppress the need to look at yourself. You want to suppress the feelings, the beliefs, the situation you are dealing with so that it does not disturb your equilibrium. This is again natural for a time but if you are a spiritual person, it was in your Life plan that at a certain point you would find a spiritual teaching and become consciously reminded that there is a path to follow.

What you can benefit from is that you take this teaching here and you say: “What was it when I made my Divine plan that I wanted to force myself to see? Why did I put myself in this situation? What was it I wanted to bring out in my own psychology?” By making this conscious decision, you can overcome at least some of the resistance to looking into your own psychology, to seeing why you have this reactionary pattern to certain types of people.

This is part of your formulating a higher intention where you realize that in the here and now, in your immediate situation, you have certain reactionary patterns that want you to suppress looking at your own psychology. You can choose to consciously override these patterns and decide: “No, I am willing to look at my own psychology and my patterns and see them and overcome them.” This means now you are connecting to your own intention behind your Life plan. And when you do connect to this, where is the element of force? Why do you need to force yourself to look at something when you reconnect to your desire to be free of it? When you realize that you want to be free of this, you are not forcing yourself to deal with it.

Who are you?

What you can then begin to contemplate is that there are two levels of intention. As I said, in the here and now, in your present situation, there is a part of your mind, your lower mind, what could be called the ego, that has an intention to maintain your equilibrium, to not be disturbed, to not feel threatened. You want to suppress feelings, suppress thoughts, and suppress how you see yourself. This is what that part of the mind does. It is like a computer program that cannot do anything else. This is not your highest intention. Your highest intention is what is in your Life plan where you wanted to overcome some of these patterns, perhaps all the patterns you have left. Once you recognize this, it is not that you are forcing yourself to abandon the lower intention and accept the higher intention. You reconnect to the higher intention. You realize that the you that you are, you have a higher intention. This is your intention.

The intention to suppress and avoid something is not your intention, it is the intention of the ego, the outer self. Then, you can gradually over some time come to contemplate this. Who are you? What is the you that has a higher intention than the you that has the lower intention?

This is where you can benefit from asking yourself some questions that most people cannot even formulate. For example, who are you right now, who is taking in this teaching? This is a spiritual teaching. It has an intent to help you raise your level of awareness. Who is the you that is taking it in?

You can also ask who is the you that is resisting this teaching? You may be aware that there is some effort in your own mind to make you resist the teaching. There is an effort to take your existing knowledge and beliefs and evaluate this teaching based on those, looking for something, some reason, some excuse to reject the teaching. Many people have found a spiritual teaching and found one little detail that did not agree with their present beliefs, and they have used that to say: “Well the entire teaching is false.”

Who is the you that is studying the teaching and who is the you that is trying to get you to reject the teaching? In other words, who is the you that is open and who is the you that wants you to close your mind? The you that is open is the real you. Whereas the you that resists, that wants you to close your mind is the outer mind, the ego personality that wants you to stay in illusion. This entire ego personality is based on illusion. It springs from illusion, but it wants you to stay in illusion. Who is the you that you are? Well, you can begin by striving for an intellectual understanding of this, but really it all comes down to an experience, so participate in a simple exercise.

Some of you will know this but it will be new to some people. Become aware that you are sitting here taking in this teaching. Become aware that you are most likely sitting in a chair and therefore mentally step outside of yourself, your own mind and visualize, imagine that you are now standing behind your chair looking at your body in the chair. Now realize you are sitting in a specific room but there is something outside the room. Now mentally step further back until you see the room you are in as a whole. You see your body sitting in the chair in the room. Most likely that room is in a building. Step back again, visualize, imagine the entire building, the room in the building, your body sitting in a chair in that room. Now you can step further back to the environment outside the building, look at the building, the room, the chair and so forth. You can step back and back and back, look at the entire earth, look at earth from space, look at the solar system, look at the galaxy and all the time you are looking from this perspective down to where your body is sitting in this chair.

This is a simple exercise, but some people will not be able to do it, and other people will find it easy enough at least to imagine and visualize that you are stepping back. The question now is, what is the you that can step back? What is the ability that you have in your mind to step back from your physical body?

The you that is more than the body and the outer mind

The vast majority of people on earth are so identified with their physical bodies that they cannot even imagine that they could step outside the body and look at the body. If you were able to do this, it means that you are not as identified with the body as most people are. This means there is a you that is not the body, otherwise how could you mentally step outside of it? You are not, as the materialists say, a product of the electrochemical processes in your brain. As a spiritual person you already accept that you are not your physical body. You can then contemplate that you are not your emotional body, you are not your feelings, you are not your thoughts, you are not even your sense of identity as it relates to earth. So, who are you? What are you?

By pondering this, you can eventually come to realize that as you can mentally step outside your physical body, you can step outside your emotions, your thoughts and your sense of identity and you realize that you are really like an actor. You enter a theater, you put on a certain costume, you put on makeup, you even put on a certain voice, a certain way of speaking, a certain outer personality and suddenly, you can go on stage and act as if you were a very different person from the person you are in your normal life. Your four bodies, are just like a costume you have taken on. What is then the you? The you is the core of your being.

I know that your mind is now struggling because the mind wants to do what it always does. It wants to have a description, it wants to have a label, a name, it wants to have characteristics so that it can understand what the you is. You see, when it comes to your earthly identity, your mental mind, your feelings, and your physical body, they have characteristics that can be described by the words and the mental images you use on earth. The you that you are is beyond this, it is more than the four bodies and therefore it cannot be described by the words and the mental images used on earth.

Your outer mind cannot fathom the real you and your outer mind is probably now revolting against this idea, frantically wanting to be able to grasp, label, categorize this concept. It might argue that it is nonsensical to talk about something that is real but has no characteristics that can be described. What is the purpose of a spiritual teaching? It is to help you raise your awareness, and how do you raise your awareness? By transcending your present level of awareness. What is your present level of awareness? It is the contents of your identity, mental and emotional bodies. This is what gives you an outer self, an outer sense of who you are and how you can relate to the environment you are in.

Right now, you have a certain level of awareness and when I give you the concept that there is a part of your being that is beyond this level of awareness, your mind wants to use your present level of awareness to grasp, to categorize, to label, to describe this part of your being. There are spiritual students who have spent decades trying to understand intellectually, with the outer linear mind, spiritual concepts. Some have even tried to understand this concept that there is a part of you that is beyond the mind, the outer mind, but you cannot understand it with your present level of consciousness. You can ponder it and then if you are able to let go of your present way of looking at life, you can come to have what is often called a mystical experience.

This so-called mystical experience is not mystical at all. It is based on the fact that there is a you. We can call it a conscious self or the Conscious You, but there is a you that at some point stepped into your physical body and your emotional, mental and identity bodies. It came from outside, it stepped into it, and it is using these four bodies as a vehicle to interact with your environment on earth. It is not produced by the bodies. It took on the bodies, in a certain sense it even produced the identity, mental and emotional bodies in past lifetimes. The very fact that it came into your present mind also means that this you can step outside of your mind. You might say that right now the you is conscious of itself as being the four lower bodies, but the you has the capacity to step outside those four lower bodies and become conscious of itself as being beyond the bodies, beyond the mind. This is the basis for all growth in awareness.

You may say, if again you want to use a linear awareness, that this path can be likened to a staircase that has separate steps. Right now, you are at a certain step on the staircase. The question is how do you rise to the very next step up? Who is it that rises? Well, it is not your emotional, mental and identity bodies. It is not your current sense of self, of who you are, that rises, because your current self is tied to your current step. What rises? It is the You that rises.

Self-observation is the core of the spiritual path

This happens when you look at yourself, for example, a reactionary pattern. You see that you have a tendency to react in a certain way in certain situations. Instead of thinking this is the only way to react, or this is the right way to react, you now come to a point where you say: “Why do I react this way?” I do not really want to become angry when somebody does not do what I want. I do not want to have this experience of anger. How can I be free of it, if I think it is the only way to react? Let me look at it, let me look at what is behind this. Why do I think this is the only way to react?”

Then you can come to realize that other people do not react the same way to similar situations; there are other ways to react. In fact, what the Buddha said is that there is always another way to react that is based on non-attachment. In other words, you do not have a pattern that makes you attached to reacting a certain way. This, the you can come to realize, and you can come to see that there is an illusion that made you believe this was the only way to react. When you see through that illusion, when you see that it is an illusion, that it is limiting you, holding you back, then you will, when you see this, spontaneously let go.

There is an old story used by various spiritual teachers that if you are in the dark and you grab onto something and you think it is a rope, then you might hold on to it. But if the light is turned on and you see it is a snake, then you do not have to go into a sophisticated and lengthy intellectual analysis. You just spontaneously open your hand and let go of the snake. The same here. When you see that what you thought was the only way to react or was the truth, is actually an illusion, you spontaneously let go of the illusion and then you rise to the next level up. Of course, you take with you the remaining illusions in your three bodies. As you examine the next illusion and let go of that, you rise to the next step up and this is how you gradually walk the path. But this can be done only by the You that is not the mind because the mind cannot look at itself.

Computers will never become self-aware

There is an elaborate movement in scientific circles of creating what they call artificial intelligence because many behavioral scientists, for example, have realized that human reactions are almost like a computer and for most people, this is actually true. You expose them to a certain situation—they will react the same way that they reacted the last ten times they were in that situation. The reason for this is, as I have explained, that you have patterns in your subconscious mind. A pattern normally lies dormant but when you are in a particular situation, it triggers the pattern, it takes over your reactions and now you are reacting that way. Your subconscious mind truly is like a computer in many ways. There are programs and when they are triggered, they take over your reactions, you react a certain way and then perhaps later you regret it or perhaps later you reason that: Oh, that was the only way you could have reacted.

Where the artificial intelligence people have misunderstood this is that this is not the only way to be for a human being. A human being has the potential to consciously and deliberately change its patterns so that even though you may have reacted that way the last hundred times, you can suddenly choose not to react that way in the next situation. A computer will not be able to do this. Why? Because it does not have self-awareness. It does not have a self that is aware. The you that I have talked about is the you that can become aware of itself. It becomes aware of yourself in the beginning, but also aware that it is not the outer self. That is why you (as a human being and all human beings) have the potential to consciously and deliberately change your reactions and your actions. You can choose a different reaction than you have had in the past. In the past you may have reacted based on a program where you really did not make a choice. Well, you made a choice in the distant past when you created the program but when the program kicks in, you are not making a conscious choice. That is actually why some scientists have discovered that there is a reaction in your brain before you make a conscious choice in a certain situation. That is because there is a subconscious program that has already made the choice before you become aware of it at the conscious level.

The bigger issue here is you have the potential to become self-aware. Not only about your reactions but about higher levels of self-awareness, who you really are. You are not the reactions, you are not your feelings, you are not your thoughts, you are not your outer sense of identity. You are what some people call a spiritual being. You came from beyond this environment that you call earth. In a sense the Eightfold Path, whatever you want to call the spiritual path, is a process of becoming gradually more and more self-aware. The you that you are becomes more and more conscious of what it is and what it is not.

No instant enlightenment

Now again your outer mind will say: “Well then why don’t you just give me the ultimate level of self-awareness, the ultimate secret about self-awareness so I can skip all those steps and go into Nirvana right now? I can become enlightened instantly.” You see, this cannot be done. There is no instant enlightenment and the reason is very simple. The you that you are did not come to earth originally to attain enlightenment. You came to earth to have certain experiences here that could facilitate your process towards enlightenment. You did not come to earth just to get out of here, you came to earth to have certain experiences. In order to have these experiences, the you that you are had to create contents in your identity mind first, then your mental mind, then your emotional mind. It is these concepts that set the parameters for the experiences you have had on earth, and the purpose for this was to have the kind of experiences you can have on earth until you have had enough of those kinds of experiences, and you want something more.

That is when you are ready to start the path. Until then you are having the kind of experiences you can have on earth, which currently is that you are a separate being who is in a world of other separate beings, and you are struggling against them. You may say with your conscious mind: “I never desired this kind of struggle. That is not why I came to earth.” In reality, it is. When you step back from your current experience, you realize that this is why you came to earth. You may have had different reasons for it, different motivations, different intentions behind it, but this is why you came to earth: To have the kind of experiences you can have on earth. There comes the point after many lifetimes of having these kinds of experiences where you have had enough of them and now you want something different. That is when you become open to the spiritual path in whatever version you can grasp it.

The purpose of the spiritual path is now to help you gradually become conscious of the contents that you put into your emotional, mental, and identity minds, gradually discard them so that you have less and less contents in those minds. You become more and more free. Enlightenment is really the point where you have no more contents in your mind that are based on the illusions of duality and separation. You have overcome all of the illusions that you are a separate being and that you can use some dualistic polarity to justify doing whatever you want to do as a separate being. That is when you are enlightened. You can say that as you move towards enlightenment, you take one content at a time from your mind and discard it, you let it go, one illusion at a time until you have no more dualistic, separate illusions left.

Do you lose your personality?

Now some will object to this and feel that, does that mean I no longer have any opinions, beliefs, theories about life, emotional patterns, does it really mean that I have no personality, no identity? Yes, that is exactly what it means. You have no personality and identity as it is defined on earth based on the illusions of maya, the illusions of separation and duality. You lose what most people see as their personality and identity. It does not mean you become a nobody because you have an individuality in your higher being that you can then begin to express on earth. It does mean you lose what we might call the human individuality, personality, and identity. This was, if you are open to a spiritual teaching, your greater intent before making your Life Plan.

This means that when you now look at your life and your activities, you do not have to do what many Buddhists have done, of evaluating again, what is right intention, what is wrong intention. I need to force myself to not have the wrong intentions. What you can do instead is you can say: “What is in my Life Plan about a specific aspect of my life right now?” Let us say that you identify in yourself that you have a desire to have a certain type of experience. There can be many different things on earth but for many people, you decide to have a personal relationship and you desire to have sex with another person. This is a very common desire even among spiritual people.

There are many, many misunderstandings about this among spiritual people where you still see many, many Buddhists who have taken the teachings and used the outer mind to say: “Well, any activity that is not spiritual is wrong and I need to avoid it.” There is another consideration that can be made here. Let’s say that you are making your Life Plan, you have a broader perspective than you have right now. You realize that you still have a desire to experience a personal relationship, even a physical relationship. You decide to put yourself in a situation where you can meet a person and have that kind of relationship. What could possibly be wrong with having that experience, if you evaluated that I need to have that experience for a certain amount of time so I can have had enough of it. I can therefore be free of it, and I can now focus on other experiences that I want for the rest of this lifetime. What could possibly be wrong about this?

It is part of your Life Plan, which ultimately leads you towards higher levels of awareness. Instead of forcing yourself to suppress a certain experience, you are going into the experience until you have had enough of it, you are saturated with it, and then you can evaluate, not necessarily that you have to give up the outer situation, but you can come to a point where you are free of any compulsive desires to have it. There is nothing inherently unspiritual about sexual activity, but if you are attached to it, if it is obsessive compulsive, then of course it can hinder your growth towards higher levels of awareness. If you come to a point where you overcome the attachment, overcome the compulsion, overcome the illusion that you need this in order to feel complete, then you can either choose to stop the activity or to continue with it in a different way without the attachment. Either way, it facilitates your growth in awareness.

You see again, what is your greater intent here? Is it to resolve the illusions, the maya in your mind? Or is it to use a spiritual teaching to cover over the illusions so you at the conscious level can pretend that you do not have them? You can say: “Well I understand this very advanced spiritual teaching and I have spent countless hours practicing these spiritual practices, therefore I am beyond this desire, this intent.” But you are just pretending. You are covering over the desire, and this does not help you rise to the next level on the ladder or the staircase.

Reconsider your intentions

This is the next step on the Eightfold Path, to reconsider your intentions. Your overall intention is ultimately to be free of earth, but you cannot force yourself to be free of earth. If you suppress a certain desire, you will have to come back into another embodiment in order to come to the point where you can consciously let go of the desire. Many spiritual people have forced themselves to live in a monastic situation where they had to suppress their desire for sex. They may have been able to live that way an entire lifetime, perhaps even several lifetimes, but there comes a point where they realize, when they are out of embodiment, that they have not freed themselves from the desire, they have only suppressed it. They will need to come back, experience the activity (whatever it is) until they can consciously and voluntarily let go of the desire: “I have had enough of this experience.” This cannot be forced, and unfortunately, many, many people have used a spiritual teaching to create this idea that they have to force themselves. If you really want to make spiritual progress, your intention must be to resolve, to let go, to surrender, to overcome your attachments, your patterns, the contents of your emotional, mental and identity bodies. This must be the overall intent, and when you rise to that level and become conscious of this, you can evaluate all of your other intentions.

Again, you have to make a living to feed your body and keep it alive. You may have obligations towards family and others. How do you balance being a spiritual person who is aware of this spiritual teaching with a normal family life? You can only do this by realizing that any activity (well, most activities on earth) can facilitate your growth in awareness. The whole idea that you have to renounce a worldly life and withdraw into a monastery in order to make spiritual progress is not universally true. There may be some people who have to do this for one or several embodiments, but it is certainly not the case for all people. In fact, in the specific time you are living in, it is more important than in previous ages that people are walking the spiritual path by living an active life in society. This is how many more people than in the past can be inspired to open their minds to the path when they see that they do not have to renounce a normal existence and withdraw into a monastery in the mountains in order to be spiritual.

This is an age, this is a time, where a great number of people have volunteered to come into embodiment in this time in order to demonstrate that you can find a balance between a worldly existence and spiritual growth, growth in awareness. Now, I say this is more important than ever because of the times, but this is not to say that it was not important in the past. Why do you think I called it the Middle Way? Now again, the Middle Way is an unfortunate translation of a more complex concept. Nevertheless, the Middle Way is neither the extreme asceticism that I practiced in my youthful folly, nor the completely blind worldly existence that most people practice. It is something that transcends both, where you can live an active life in society with family obligations, but you are still walking the spiritual path because your intention is to use your worldly activities to facilitate your growth in awareness.

How do you do it? Well, partly by looking at your reactions to your worldly situations. Partly by realizing that you can inspire other people by your example. What is it that happens when people withdraw from society, become monks and nuns, and live in a monastery? They avoid many of the pressures of everyday existence that trigger their reactionary patterns. They live in a controlled environment where, once they have accepted the parameters for that environment, there may not be very much that triggers their reactions.
They can make themselves believe that they no longer have the reactions, that by choosing to be in a situation that does not trigger my patterns, I have overcome the patterns, but you have not. You have of course only suppressed them.

What the Middle Way really means

The entire concept of the Middle Way is that you do not define the spiritual path in terms of two dualistic polarities, where you are either a completely worldly person or you must withdraw from the world to be a spiritual person. There is an alternative to the either-or to the black-and-white. You can find a way to be spiritual while being active in society. This is the deeper meaning of higher intention and all of a sudden, everything gains a different shading. You gain a different perspective on every aspect of your life. Suddenly, you can begin to reconsider what has been one of the greatest hindrances for spiritual people. It is the distinction between what is spiritual activities and what is not spiritual activities or even anti-spiritual activities. This of course is a topic I will return to when I talk about higher action. But still it is important when you consider your intentions that you need to overcome this dualistic view of the spiritual path.

What is one of the foundational teachings of Buddhism? It is that everything is the Buddha nature. Of course, human beings on earth do not see that everything is the Buddha nature. Why do they not they see that everything is the Buddha nature? Because their minds are blinded behind the veil of maya. But what is it that makes up the veil of maya? It is this dualistic consciousness that always creates two polarities that are opposite in a black-and-white way, implies a value judgment and says these activities are not spiritual and these activities are spiritual. If everything is the Buddha nature, does it give any meaning to say: This is spiritual, this is not spiritual? Does it not give more meaning to realize that the real goal of the path is to overcome illusion? An illusion is what covers over the Buddha nature that is within everything. This means that the real goal of the path is not to define this is spiritual, this is anti-spiritual, so I must avoid the anti-spiritual and focus on the spiritual.

The real goal of the spiritual path, the Middle Way, is to come to see that most activities on earth can facilitate your growth in awareness when you approach them with the intent to grow in awareness, the intent to look at yourself and your reactions, your illusions. That is when an activity is spiritual. To say that a certain activity is not spiritual and therefore participating in that activity, such as having a family, will destroy your spiritual growth is simply a lower level of understanding of the path. Of course, there are certain activities that will not facilitate your growth in awareness because they trap you even further behind the veil of maya, but any activity can actually be used to help you see the illusions behind that activity. I am not thereby saying that going out and killing people will facilitate your growth in awareness, but coming to see the illusions behind killing people can actually facilitate your growth in awareness.

Again, the dualistic mind always wants to create distinctions and separations to set up the polarity, but the path, the Eightfold Path, is about seeing beyond this veil of maya so you see that everything is the Buddha nature. The Buddha nature is within everything so the real intent is to come to see this, not to come to identify that this thing or this activity is spiritual, and this is not. What helps you see the Buddha nature behind the veil of maya? If something helps you see that, how could it not be spiritual? If something ties you to dualistic illusions, even using a spiritual teaching to reinforce those illusions, well how could that be spiritual?

With this I have given you what I wanted to give you in this installment. Shock waves have certainly been sent into the collective consciousness, stirring up many of the demons of Mara who are growling and screaming and trying to get people to deny these impulses and again engage in the struggle of the Sea of Samsara.

You who are open to these teachings can avoid this by turning the teachings into the Prajna boat, but you can only do this by striving to always reach a higher level of intention than you have right now. I have fulfilled my intention for giving you this teaching. I hope it can help you fulfill your intention for this embodiment.

 

Copyright © 2023 Kim Michaels

 

Back to Being a spiritual person in a chaotic world

From right understanding to higher understanding


Listen to a recording of this dictation (subscribers only)

Ascended Master Gautama Buddha through Kim Michaels, January 7, 2023. This dictation was given during the 2023 New Year’s webinar – Being a spiritual person in a chaotic world.

I AM the Ascended Master Gautama Buddha. The Eightfold Path is something that many people throughout the ages who have called themselves Buddhists have used considerable mental activity to try to follow to the best of their ability, which really means their level of awareness and how many patterns they had in their emotional, mental and identity bodies. As described, it is not an easy path to follow, so I will give some thoughts about how you in today’s world can gain a new perspective on this path.

Normally, the path has been defined as eight steps, eight stages, eight qualities and they all begin with the word “right,” right understanding and so forth. But is right the right word to use when you consider the teachings about the pairs and of the duality consciousness that always wants to divide everything up into at least two polarities and then impose that value judgment that one is right, one is wrong, one is good, one is evil. Instead of using the word right, let us use the word higher, higher understanding, higher intent, higher speech and so forth.

Let us begin with what has traditionally been considered the first step, Higher Understanding. You see what has happened here is that we have now shifted. The word “right” implies finality, some ultimate stage. Right understanding implies to many people, and has done so throughout the ages, that you can reach some ultimate understanding. And if something is truly right, it should be, in the mind of many people, the highest, the highest understanding. It could not be expanded upon. It could not be transcended. It could not be exceeded. But then why did the Buddha give understanding as the first step of a path with eight steps?

There is not ultimate understanding

If at the very first step you reach some ultimate understanding, why would you need the other seven steps? You see that by switching to Higher Understanding we imply that there is always a higher understanding to be gained. There is nothing final. And certainly, it is extremely productive for people to recognize that as long as you are in embodiment on a dense planet like Earth with such a dense collective consciousness, there is no ultimate understanding that can be achieved.

This is partly because of the density of matter itself, but also the density of the collective consciousness. Now of course, over time the collective consciousness can be raised and has been raised. There may come a point in the future where people can reach a higher understanding than can be reached today, but it will still not be the ultimate understanding. This is why the Buddha did not give a religion that had a complicated cosmology that said this is how the universe really works. The Buddha recognized that the human mind, the human awareness, is limited.

Twenty five hundred years ago the collective consciousness was lower than it is today. There was even more of a limit to what people could grasp in terms of cosmological insight. Today the consciousness has been raised considerably, partly because of the influence of science. And therefore, people have a better foundation for understanding the greater truth. But it is still essential to recognize that the current level of understanding that can be achieved is limited and will be limited for the foreseeable future.

This mean as a sincere spiritual student who strives to attain enlightenment, you can never stop and allow yourself to believe that now I have achieved the ultimate understanding. Many people have done this by taking an outer teaching, be it a Buddhist teaching or any other teaching, and saying this is now the ultimate truth. Because I understand this teaching, I have the ultimate understanding. But this is a misunderstanding of what understanding means.

The limitations of the linear mind

Now, I have said that people have a higher awareness today than they had 2,500 years ago and that this has partly been brought about by science. Yet science is very much based on the rational, analytical, linear mind. What do I mean with the linear mind? Well, it wants to see everything in terms of cause and effect. It has to be possible to look at life on earth and clearly define that here is a separate cause, and this condition has an effect that started at some point. Through a series of linear steps leading from this to the next to the next, the present condition was produced.

You see many examples of this in science, but take the theory of evolution, where supposedly one cell first came into being, then two-celled organisms. Then more complex and gradually, step by step, in a linear fashion, the current species were brought forth. This is, without commenting further on the theory of evolution, an example of linear thinking. We take current conditions. We project a series of steps going from the current conditions to more simple causes. And we end up at some ultimate stage where the process began. This is, in the minds of some people, the crowning achievement of science.

It is, of course, not what I taught 2,500 years ago, when I taught about the interdependent originations. In reality everything is interconnected. There are aspects of science that have actually discovered this and recognized that you cannot separate anything. This does not mean that science has now been invalidated. There is, of course, value in looking at a particular phenomenon and trying to describe it and isolate a certain cause, so the scientific method of looking at separate phenomena and trying to find the cause is not invalid. What is invalid is when some people superimpose a philosophical, ideological overlay on this process and say that it has some objective, ultimate reality that a phenomenon can be considered separate and, therefore, it has a cause that is separate. In other words, you can look at this specific phenomenon and the steps that led from the original cause to the phenomenon, and now you can know everything there is to know about the phenomenon.

Well, clearly this cannot be higher understanding because there is no room for expansion, for transcendence, into a higher understanding. It may be fine if you take a billiard table and you place some billiard balls on it. You take a cue and you hit one ball with a cue and make it roll into another ball. Then, you measure whatever you can measure in that situation, and you say: “The original cause was the cue that struck the first ball, which then, through its direction and momentum, transferred a certain force to the next ball. Which then hit another ball, and so forth.” This is perfectly fine for describing a particular phenomenon.

How is that billiard table a separate phenomenon? How did it come into being? Was it not invented by human beings? Was it not based on certain general principles for what can be done in the material universe? Where did those principles come from? You see, as quantum physicists have discovered, you cannot actually look at a subatomic phenomenon and isolate it. Then, you use a macroscopic mental image and superimpose it upon it and say: “This is now a separate particle. And we can study that subatomic particle as we would study a billiard ball on a billiard table.”

Quantum physicists have discovered beyond any doubt whatsoever that in the quantum world there are no separate particles. They are part of a larger whole. They can be separated by a distance, but they are still connected so that a change in one particle instantly results in the change of another, separated by considerable distance. This is what one part of science has discovered. It has not invalidated the scientific method of studying particular phenomena, but it has invalidated the ideological overlay of saying that it is possible to isolate a phenomenon and reach the conclusion that this phenomenon has an isolated cause. There are no isolated phenomena and there are no isolated causes.

Seeking to control the world of separate causes

Why is this important? Well again, what did we start out by talking about? You live in a world that in the last few years has become more chaotic, more unpredictable, causing many people to feel insecurity about the future. The reaction of many people is, as I said, they want to maintain their sense of equilibrium. Their first desire is to find a way to control the world. When they realize they cannot control the world, they use then the reaction I described of denying feelings, thoughts and a sense of identity, pushing them below the level of conscious awareness so they can maintain that sense of equilibrium.

As I also described, there is a higher way, and that is to look at why you feel this way, why you think this way, why you identify yourself this way and realize that these are not separate phenomena. There is a reason for it and you can discover it. This then is higher understanding, but there is more to higher understanding. Why have I talked about the fact that there are no separate phenomena in the subatomic world? Well, because everything is made out of subatomic particles, or at least everything in the matter realm. What you normally consider the matter world, which you can detect with your senses or with scientific instruments, you see this defined in a very specific way. You see it as made up of separate things that you superimpose a mental image upon.

But what quantum physicists have proven is that there are no separate things. Billiard balls are not separate things, because billiard balls are made up of molecules, atoms, subatomic particles. Then, the even deeper layer that makes up subatomic particles, or that produces or manifests subatomic particles. This means that nothing you see in the matter world can be separated from the subatomic world. It is made out of that world.

Now furthermore, Albert Einstein proved that matter really does not exist because matter is energy that has taken on a specific form. The deeper layer, the deepest layer of matter is not actually particles. It is energy. Energy, of course, is something that really cannot be isolated as you can isolate a particle. An energy wave extends through space. It has no specific separate location. You cannot isolate an energy wave. You cannot freeze it and say now we have an accurate view of the wave, because a wave is something that is constantly moving. When I talked about the interdependent originations, it was simply another way of talking about what quantum physicists have discovered, namely that everything that you see is an expression of something unseen and that this is ultimately the expression of an interconnected, interdependent whole.

You are not separated from your environment

How does this relate to the Buddha’s teachings about enlightenment? Well, what is it you experience as a human being in embodiment on earth? Begin with the physical body. You have been brought up, even over many lifetimes, to see your physical body as a separate, somewhat isolated unit. You experience that your body is a coherent unit. You can decide to get up from your chair and take a walk outside and your body moves through the outside space as a separate unit. It may be affected by certain things, such as, if a car comes, it could potentially hit you. Or if the rain falls from the sky, you get wet, your body gets wet. But in general, you have the impression that you are a separate unit and you can move as you want throughout space as it is in your local environment.

You know, if you think about this, that the reason you can walk around on the surface of the earth is that there is an invisible force, called gravity, that is keeping you on the surface so you do not float off. You know intellectually that there are forces that are affecting your body, which means your body is not actually separated. Of course, you can go further and realize your body is made up of atoms and molecules and subatomic particles and energy waves. Therefore, it cannot be separated from this energetic environment in which you live. But still, because of the impressions from the physical senses, because of the upbringing that you have received on earth in this lifetime and the impressions from past lifetimes, most people tend to view their physical bodies as separate.

Most people also tend to view their emotional bodies, if they consider that they have an emotional body, as a separate unit. The same with the mental and the identity body. You tend to think that you have your emotions, but do you not see how many times you are affected by impressions coming from the outside, by what other people do or say to you? If somebody comes to you and is angry with you, do you not see that this affects your emotional body? How is your emotional body separate? 

Have you not experienced that somebody comes and tells you something and you are affected by this? You tend to either believe them or disbelieve them. You may go into an argument with them. Obviously your mental body is not an isolated unit.

Most people have not considered that their sense of identity is also something that is greatly affected by their environment. They do not realize how much they are brought up to have a certain sense of identity. Neither do they realize how, over many lifetimes, they have been programmed to accept themselves as human beings who are separate beings. When you start to strive for higher understanding, you need to look at this. You need to consider that at the macroscopic level, the level of the senses and the outer, linear mind, you view phenomena as separate. There is an enormous programming in your subconscious mind and in the collective consciousness that is focused on identifying differences, separate objects, separate phenomena.

Now of course, there is a very practical reason for this. You need to be able to identify separate phenomena. This is part of what makes it possible to live in the practical reality you have. Is this dangerous for me? Is this substance dangerous to take into my body? Will it kill me? Will it kill my body? And many other considerations like this. 

Again, there is nothing inherently wrong about it. The problem comes in when you superimpose an ideological overlay upon the impressions coming to you through your senses and the outer mind. Then, there is another part of the outer mind that says those things really are separate. And what you experience through the senses and the outer mind is an objective reality. There are separate things out there that are separated from your physical body, from your mind. Therefore, if your physical body cannot act on them, your mind can do nothing about it. This, of course, also influences how you relate to other people. They are separate from yourself.

Human beings cannot kill human beings

If you look at animal species, you will see that most animal species do not kill members of their own species but human beings obviously do. Now, the reality here is that a human being cannot kill another human being. If you see that person as a human being, as yourself, you cannot kill that human being. This is simply a survival mechanism at the species level. You know, because scientists have told you, that there is an individual level and a level of an entire species. Sometimes certain individuals need to do something to secure the survival of the species. This can be propagation, protection, many different things.

In order for a species to survive, there is a certain programming. There is even a certain programming in your physical body that says: “Do not kill your own species, because killing your own species is a very poor survival strategy.” All species are programmed to survive. How is it possible that human beings can kill each other and have done so for as long as you have recorded history? It is possible because you can take the sense impressions and the perception filter of the outer mind and you can create the mental image that this other person is not a human being like myself. I am not connected to that person. Therefore, I can kill that person and it will not affect myself. This is the only way that a human being can kill another human being.

What this leads to is at least the suggestion of an understanding that human beings can create a mental image that is out of touch with reality. Science has shown that everything is interconnected but human beings have throughout history created these mental images that they are separated from each other and, therefore, can kill each other without affecting themselves. Yes, of course, you have the experience that somebody can use their physical body to kill another physical body, but their physical body does not die. Of course, you also have a big part of the world that believes in karma and therefore, you are affected by killing another human being, even in coming lifetimes. So, there is a certain connection there.

Certainly in much of the modern world that has left off from any religious teaching talking about karma, you have this separate mindset that causes people to believe that what you do to others, you are not doing to yourself. You will see that almost every religion contains this admonishment: Do not do to others what you do not want others to do to you. It is, of course, based on this recognition that everything is interconnected, so what you do to others affects yourself.

Separateness leads to value judgments

What is the beginning of Higher Understanding as the first step of the Eightfold Path? Well, it is to begin to question this sense of separateness, this illusion of separateness. What is the basis for creating this illusion that you are separate beings? Well, it is what I called the pairs 2,500 years ago, but which with a more modern expression we can call the duality consciousness or the dualistic consciousness. It is this very idea that you can look at life, you can look at reality and you can say: “Here is one phenomenon that is distinct and different from this other phenomenon.” To make it more concrete, here is one group of people that are distinct from this other group of people. They have a different skin color, therefore, they are different. Here you have taken what really is just a discernment of differences in the outer characteristics.

Now, you go further. Instead of just saying this group has that skin color and that group has that skin color, you now say: “There is some ideological significance to this.” To use a classical example, there was a time not so long ago, and some people are still stuck in it, where people with a white skin color considered that everybody else with a different skin color belonged to an inferior race. This is where you take the dualistic mind and you say: “Here are some differences, differences in skin color, but they are not just physical differences.” Nay. It is not as if you took a lily and a tulip and said: “Well, they are different flowers, they have different shapes, they have different colors, but they are both beautiful flowers.” Instead you say: “Here is one human being with a white skin color. Here is one human being with a black skin color. And the skin color makes them fundamentally different. They are not simply two variations of human beings as two flowers are variations of flowers. They are fundamentally different beings.”

Not only that, they can be put into a dualistic system, which says: “This skin color is in a fundamental way different from another.” You can even impose this overlay that God created the one race superior to the other race. Then you can do a further dualistic trick of imposing the value judgment that I have talked about. You are saying the white race is superior and the black race is inferior. You can even go further, saying that it is perfectly acceptable that the white race subdues the black race and turns them into slaves. If the black race resists this, then it is perfectly acceptable that the white race kills them. Or you can have another race where you say: “The Aryan race is superior to the Jewish race. And it is perfectly acceptable, even necessary for some epic cause, that the Aryan race exterminates the Jewish race.”

You will see that when you look at history and again look at: “What have people done to kill other human beings,” you see that in most cases – and certainly in the larger cases, such as war or genocide – it is not just a killing that springs from passions, where somebody is afraid that another person is going to kill them. No, it is justified. You have a justification for why the white race enslaves the black race. You have a justification for why the Aryans attempt to exterminate the Jews. This is the duality consciousness. It is based on the sense of separation, the illusion of separation, but it takes it further and creates the dualistic polarities, imposes the value judgment. Now, those who firmly believe in that value judgment can justify almost any violation of the group of people that they have labeled as the inferior group.

The experience of superiority as the origin of suffering

What you see here is that throughout history people have come up with many, many different justifications for violating other human beings. They have all been based on the sense of separation, the dualistic consciousness, the creation of polarities and the imposing of a value judgment. Now, from a certain perspective you can say: “But this is what gives these people a specific experience.” I have talked about those who have a desire to feel superior to others. This duality consciousness, this value judgment is just an excuse that gives people this experience that they are superior.

Certainly, this can be said to be the case but what is the consequence of this? The consequence is that when you go into this dualistic consciousness, this sense of separation, you can only suffer. You can say that the dualistic consciousness, the sense of separation, is actually the origin of suffering. You can also say that there is no way to escape suffering as long as you are in this dualistic, separate state of consciousness. Which is what I, 2,500 years ago, called Maya, illusion. This is the deeper meaning, the higher understanding of Maya: You are in this illusion that you are a separate being.

What happens when you identify yourself as a separate being? Well, suddenly you are separated from other people, you are separated from your environment here on earth, and you are separated from anything outside your environment, meaning outside the material universe. You are not alone on earth. There are billions of other people here. There is a physical environment that sometimes manifests natural disasters. As a separate being, you will see yourself as being threatened by conditions in your environment.

This is what causes people to go into this attempt to gain some control over their environment. People do this at the physical level through physical force, violence, by either subduing other people so they can be controlled or by seeking to exterminate those other people so they are not there. People also do it at the emotional level, where many people are engaged in this constant process of seeking to control the emotions of people around them in order to avoid negative or unpleasant emotions in themselves. Likewise, many people are engaged in this game of seeking to control other people’s thoughts, beliefs, understanding, and even control their sense of identity.

The irony of separation

Can you perhaps begin to see the irony here? Here is a person. He identifies himself as a separate being, a separate human being. He has a separate physical body. He has a separate emotional body, mental body, identity body. He is afraid that something is going to happen in his environment that will kill his physical body. He attempts to use physical means to control his environment. This is, however, very difficult to accomplish, and no one has ever fully accomplished it. No matter how powerful of a dictator they have become, they have not been able to fully control their environment.

The person also attempts to control the emotions and the mental minds and the sense of identity of other people around him. But why is he doing this? He is doing it to avoid certain emotions, certain thoughts, and a certain doubt about his sense of identity. In other words, the person is seeking really to control his own mind but because he is in the state of separation, the consciousness of duality, he thinks the only way to control his own mind is to control his surroundings, his physical situation, the emotions of other people, the thoughts of other people, the sense of identity of other people.

This, of course, means that this person is in a perpetual struggle against other people. Those other people also see themselves as separate. When the first person tries to control person number two, person number two feels threatened by this, feels that the first person is aggressive towards him or her. They resist this. This is the Sea of Samsara. Most people on earth are trapped in the sense of separation, the consciousness of duality, and they are seeking to control other people in order to attain some state of equilibrium, peace in their own minds.

Now again, you can say: “Well, people have free will, so aren’t they allowed to have any experience they want?” Of course. I am only pointing out that the experience that people have through Maya, through separation, through duality, is a struggle experience, and a struggle experience can only create suffering. It may give you a temporary elation, where you feel now you have achieved some ultimate state of power or control or peace. But it will always be threatened and you will always know this. Why will you know this? Because if you attain a state of power through force, you are aware of force. You are aware that there might be other people who will try to take away what you have attained through force by using more force than you used to get it.

Look at how dictators, almost all of them, become increasingly paranoid throughout their lives. No matter how much power and control they have in their country, they are always afraid that somebody can take it away. That is why they must continually have a secret police that seeks to identify and kill those who could potentially be a threat. Look at how many billionaires have more money than they could ever spend, but they are always afraid that somebody might try to take that money. They have to protect it or they have to make even more. It becomes a never-ending spiral, because you are trying to do the impossible. You are trying to control your state of mind through controlling your environment. Again, perfectly acceptable if you want to be in the Sea of Samsara, but then you do not need the Eightfold Path.

The Eightfold path is the alternative to suffering

The Eightfold Path is not what many Buddhists have come to see it as. It is not the only road to salvation or Nirvana. It is not a superior path. It is not something that was ever meant to be forced upon people. It was never actually my goal that these teachings should be spread throughout the earth and that all people should belong to an outer religion of Buddhism and that this should be forced upon them. The Eightfold Path is an offer to people who have had enough of being tossed about by the waves in the Sea of Samsara. They are looking for something else, and they are open to the thought that in order to get something else, they cannot continue to do what they have been doing so far. They need to do something different.

What is the first step towards a higher understanding? It is first of all to recognize that your mind has limitations. You do not have the highest understanding right now. In fact you do not have a higher understanding. Because at the present moment you have a certain level of understanding, but there are higher levels possible. In order to get those higher levels of understanding, you have to do something different. Something you are not doing now. What is it that is different? Well, it is that you have to at least grasp the necessity of transcending Maya, illusion, the illusion of separation, the illusion of duality, the dualistic polarities, the value judgment, the sense of superiority and inferiority. You have to question this entire mindset. You have to start questioning it.

It cannot be done all at once. There is a need for a certain continuity. It is a gradual path of questioning these illusions of Maya. It takes time. In fact it takes lifetimes, but many people in embodiment today – especially in the more modern, more developed nations – they have done this in past lifetimes. They have started the process in past lifetimes and all they need to do now is to reconnect to the reality that they need to question their minds, the way they look at life, their approach to life, especially this illusion of separation, the pairs, the dualistic polarities.

The human mind can become a closed system

This begins with this recognition that again was difficult to give 2,500 years ago, but it can be given today. The recognition is that the human mind has a tendency to become a closed system. You are not an island. No human is an island. You are not a separate being. You are connected in many different ways beyond the visible level. Not only to other people, but to the environment you live in and to some source beyond your environment, which we do not need to go into right now. But you need to know that there is something outside the matter world. This is who you are. This is how you came into being.

You do not see that right now. The reason you do not see it is because your mind has become clouded by Maya, by many different illusions and reactionary patterns in your emotional, mental and identity bodies. The Eightfold Path is a process of gradually, step-by-step, one at a time, bringing these illusions and reactionary patterns into the conscious mind, examining them critically, evaluating their consequences, even their validity, their consistency. Then, coming to the conclusion that this particular illusion and pattern limits me and I have had enough of this limitation, because it always keeps me trapped in this turbulent Sea of Samsara.

You have the concept that you have the Sea of Samsara, but on the other side of the sea, or at least on one side of the sea, is the other shore. You can get there by using a boat, a Prajna boat, which is made up of the teachings and the practice. Again, you cannot take the outer teaching, study it, practice the practices and think that you will automatically get to the other shore. You will do it only by self-examination, looking at yourself, looking at your beliefs, your patterns. Asking yourself why you are reacting this way, why you are thinking this way, why you see yourself as this kind of person. Gradually questioning all of this, dismissing one illusion at a time. This is the Prajna boat. This is what carries you once you are in it, once you have locked in to what the path is about. This is what carries you across the Sea of Samsara. It does not mean you will not be tossed by the waves, because you will. But at least you have something to hold on to that can carry you further.

This is the beginning of wisdom, the beginning of understanding. Your mind can become, or rather has become, a closed system. Why do I say this? How can I say this? Well, do you feel you are the Buddha right now? Do you feel you are enlightened, that you are in a state of Nirvana or Samsara? Do you feel that you are at peace? Then, that shows you that your mind is a closed system. It is closed because you have used the mind’s ability to suppress emotions, thoughts and a sense of identity, to suppress anything that disturbs you, but this also becomes a straitjacket that holds you, that traps you. Because whenever a new idea comes to you, it has to be fit into this system, this subconscious database that you have that evaluates all new ideas, saying: “Is this dangerous? Is this true? Is this something I should consider or not consider?”

How can a spiritual teacher help you?

Again, what did I say is the dilemma of a spiritual teacher? Well, a spiritual teacher is not trapped in Maya, is not in the Sea of Samsara, but you are.
How can the spiritual teacher help you escape Maya? What is Maya? You have a belief that in reality is an illusion, but you believe it is the truth. You are convinced that it is the truth. This is the way the world is. It is this belief that keeps you trapped in Maya. How can a teacher help you? Well, you must come to see that your belief is an illusion.

This means the teacher must challenge your belief. The process I described means that there is a part of your mind that wants to suppress any challenge to your beliefs. Many people have come across a spiritual teaching that was not the teaching they already had. They have looked at it, but their conscious minds have never actually grasped the significance of the teaching. Because their subconscious minds have rejected or colored or interpreted the teachings. Now, as I said, you can do nothing else. You have to start somewhere. When you find a spiritual teaching, you will interpret it through your present level of consciousness.

Again, this in itself is not so much of a problem. The problem is if you do not realize that you are limiting the teaching, that you are superimposing something upon the teaching that will prevent you from taking the next step on the path towards enlightenment. You see, there are many, many people – whether they are Buddhists or the more New Age, mystically minded people you see today – who have looked at the concept of enlightenment and they have superimposed an image upon it based on their present level of consciousness. Many people have a certain set of beliefs that they are very attached to. They hear about the concept of enlightenment and it sounds good to them. But without realizing it, they are projecting the image that when you are enlightened, you have the validation of your present beliefs, you see that your present beliefs were actually the ultimate truth.

Of course, when other people become enlightened, they will see that your beliefs were the ultimate truth and therefore, you were right all along. This is another aspect of this desire for superiority. Surely an enlightened being would agree with me, with my present beliefs, the present way I look at life. But you see, if you are not enlightened. How could an enlightened being agree with you? You are not enlightened because you have illusions. An enlightened being has no illusions, has transcended illusions. Thus, how could an enlightened being agree with you that your illusions are not illusions, but are the truth? This is not a realistic scenario. Those who believe in it will just keep themselves trapped in the Sea of Samsara, their minds taken over by Maya. They are behind the veil of Maya.

The beginning of the Eightfold Path is the willingness to question your own mind, to see that it becomes a self-validating, self-reinforcing closed circle. And the willingness then to take the teaching and instead of trying to get the teaching to validate your present beliefs, you use the teaching to question your present beliefs, your present illusions. This is what the Eightfold Path is about. Until you have this understanding, you cannot really start the true Eightfold Path. You will instead start a false path based on using your present beliefs to define what is right understanding, what is right intent, what is right speech, what is right action, what is right livelihood, what is right effort, what is right mindfulness, what is right concentration. It is all “right” because it validates your present beliefs.

Your present beliefs are illusions. How could a true teaching validate them? You have only two options here. Either the Buddha gave a false teaching or your present beliefs are illusions. You cannot have it both ways. The choice is always to question your own mind, your own perception, your own way of looking at life. This is when you start the path, the path that leads to enlightenment. You can also take the Buddha’s teachings and create a false path that leads you further and further into illusion. This may give you some sense that you have reached some superior state compared to other people, because you have this advanced teaching, you have practiced it so many times and all of these things. It may change your experience of life, but it does not raise your consciousness on that ladder that leads to enlightenment. You are still in the diving suit.

This was my second installment for what I wanted to give you for this conference. I will, of course, have more to say about the other steps on the Eightfold Path. With this I seal you in the clear, undivided understanding of the Buddha.

 

Copyright © 2023 Kim Michaels

 

Back to Being a spiritual person in a chaotic world

Walking the path requires a willingness to be disturbed


Listen to a recording of this dictation (subscribers only)

Ascended Master Gautama Buddha through Kim Michaels, January 7, 2023. This dictation was given during the 2023 New Year’s webinar – Being a spiritual person in a chaotic world.

I AM the Ascended Master Gautama Buddha. Padmasambhava and I have taken up counsel to see what we might give you, who are our direct students, to help you in this specific time. We have also looked at what we might give that could help other spiritually open-minded people and what could help the planet in general. Naturally, by so many of you connecting via the internet, giving your decrees and invocations in unison, you are also tremendously helping the planet. 

Now, what can be said about life on earth that has any meaning for the greatest number of people? Well, what could be said is that life is difficult, life is a challenge, or as I said 2500 years ago, life is suffering, the First Noble Truth. This is probably something that most people on earth would agree upon. If you step back and ask another question: “What is life on earth, what could it be compared to?,” then here is one possible way to look at it. 

How it feels to come into embodiment

You will know that in the old days they had these big diving suits, a heavy waterproof suit that you put on, a big metal helmet that had only very small openings that you could see out of. I know that most of you of course have never worn such a suit, but still, you can probably imagine that putting on such a suit feels quite restraining. It is heavy, it is bulky, it is stiff, it is difficult to move in it. Then, of course, you are tied to the surface with a rope and with a hose through which is pumped air into the helmet. Imagine what happens when you go under the water in such a suit. You already feel restricted by the suit, but once you are under the water there is pressure on your body from the water pressing against the suit. The deeper you go the more pressure. At the same time on the surface, you can at least see quite far through the small openings in the helmet, but once you are in the water, depending on the clarity of the water, you cannot see very far. Now consider that in order to go under the water you have to wear weights. It can be boots that are weighted down, you can have weights in your belts, in order to even go to the bottom of the water. Well, this is what it is like for a spiritual being, a non-material being, call it the soul or whatever you want to call it, to come into physical embodiment.

Not only are you wearing one diving suit, you are wearing four. When as a being you descend into embodiment, you first descend into what we have called the identity body where your identity is centered. Now, this identity that you have in your present lifetime may be very much affected by the environment into which you were born, the culture, the way the people there look at themselves, even what we have called the collective consciousness. You were brought up to identify yourself a certain way.

Then, the next body, the next diving suit, you put on is the mental body, where you have the way you look at life, the way you look at the ‘how’ of life, whereas the identity body might be more the ‘what.’ The mental body is what can you do, what you cannot do, how do you need to do things and many subtle ways that you look at life and define what kind of a person you are, what your options are, what your choices are. 

This is the mental body where you can argue for particular viewpoints, you can argue against particular viewpoints. You can see that the mental bodies of different people can come up with very different conclusions. They might even look at the same ideas, the same evidence. One concludes that there is no God, there is nothing beyond the material universe. Another concludes that there must be something beyond the material universe and of course, a myriad of other questions that people can disagree on. This is very much something that takes place in the mental body, but of course it starts in the identity body because some people are brought up and have accepted the identity as religious people, others as non-religious people or a variety of other identities that people take on.

Then, of course the third body you take on is the emotional body where your feelings are centered. Again, depending on where you grew up, you have been brought up to take on certain patterns that determine how people in your culture react to certain situations. Some people are very passive, they have a tendency to submit to authority, are not wanting to make decisions, not feeling they have any right to demand anything. Others are more aggressive, feel they have a right to demand or even impose their will upon others. Others feel they have a right to become angry, some even feel they have an obligation to subdue their feelings and not become angry or show any other feelings. Again, a myriad of responses. 

Then, of course, finally there is the physical body which is the most restraining of the four because it is the densest. What you can say is that for a non-material being to come into these four bodies is enormously restraining. This is just the four bodies you took on in this lifetime in order to be in embodiment. Of course, Buddhism and many spiritual philosophies from around the world recognize reincarnation. It is not just what you have taken on in this lifetime from the culture in which you grew up. You carry something with you from previous lifetimes where you also have taken on a certain identity, certain mental patterns, certain emotional patterns and here you could say that at least the physical body is new every time but still there can be patterns from the past that determine how your physical body is, how it functions, even what diseases it is prone to. 

You see here that when you step back and look at life you can see that once you are inside these four bodies, these four diving suits and once you have gone under the water that is the collective consciousness, the energy field of earth, you cannot help but feel restrained. It is simply impossible. It is impossible to be in embodiment on earth without feeling this enormous pressure. 

What really causes suffering

This is a deeper meaning of the First Noble Truth that life is suffering. Life on a planet like earth with the density of matter, the density of the collective consciousness, the many conflicts that are happening constantly between people is suffering. You cannot escape it because this is the environment you are in. What can you then do? Well, you can of course do many things and we have given many  teachings but let us here focus on the Second Noble Truth. Suffering springs from what has often been translated as wrong desire. However, the deeper meaning, the higher understanding, is that it is not ‘wrong’ in opposition to ‘right.’

It is a specific type of desire that causes suffering and there are of course, various levels of understanding that can be given. What I am saying here is not an attempt to invalidate the way most Buddhists have for the past 2500 years interpreted the Buddha’s teachings. It is not an attempt to say that they are wrong in their interpretation. But what you do see, not only in Buddhism but in most religions and even in some non-religious philosophies on the planet is that people have this tendency to define something that is right in opposition to something that is wrong.

This is of course, the essence of the dualistic consciousness. There are two opposite polarities but they are not just opposites as for example, black and white. There is a value judgment associated with them and this means that people see one polarity being right and the other polarity being wrong. This means that many Buddhists throughout the ages have looked at desires this way and they have attempted to come up with a definition that says these desires are the wrong desires that the Buddha talked about and these other desires are the right desires that the Buddha talked about. But this is a superficial level of understanding at best. 

One could also say it is not what the Buddha meant at all. It is not what I was talking about 2500 years ago because I gave the teachings in the Dhammapada about the ‘pairs.’ When you talk about right and wrong, you have created a pair and this traps you in this dualistic state of consciousness. In fact, it is this dualistic state of consciousness that is the cause of suffering. Now, I said that you cannot descend into embodiment on a planet like earth without feeling this pressure but this is because the collective consciousness on earth is so very strongly affected by duality, by the pairs, by the dualistic polarities, by the value judgment: good and evil, right and wrong and so forth. 

Now, many people of course in the world will not be able to grasp this. They will not be able to grasp duality. This is where as spiritual teachers we are always facing a certain limitation. We might say, to go back to the analogy of the person wearing a diving suit, that people on earth are wearing this heavy diving suit, they are weighted down by all kinds of things so they are at the bottom of the water. What is weighing them down? Well, their physical bodies, their emotional patterns, their mental beliefs, their mental holy cows and even their sense of identity. These contents of the emotional, mental and identity bodies are the weights on your diving suit that are holding you down to the bottom of the ocean.

The challenge for spiritual teachers

Here we have people on earth, they are in this very constraining suit of these four bodies weighted down at the bottom of the ocean. Depending on the clarity of the water where they live, they can only see so far. Yet here we are as spiritual teachers we, have freed ourselves from the weights, we have freed ourselves from the diving suit, we have risen above the surface of the water, we are up in the clear sunshine where we can see very, very far and here we are trying to communicate with people who are down at the bottom of the ocean, wearing this heavy suit and not being able to see more than three meters beyond their own nose. 

When you step back, and you can mentally step back from the diving suit, you can see the problem. We as spiritual teachers are experiencing a completely different reality than what most people are experiencing being at the bottom of the ocean. We are trying to tell people that there is an alternative to what they are going through. There is a different perspective, a different way to look at life and we are trying to tell them, first of all, that it is desirable to gain this greater perspective. We are even trying to tell them that although they cannot gain the complete perspective that we have when we are not in embodiment, they can at least attain somewhat of a wider perspective while they are in embodiment. 

But how many people can even lock in to this? How many people can even grasp that there is a different way to look at life than the one they have been brought up to look at life in this embodiment and what they have taken on in many past lifetimes? How many people can grasp this? 

What has happened, for example, with the philosophy of Buddhism and many other spiritual and religious teachings is of course, that here is a philosophy that is given from a higher perspective, a wider perspective than what most people have on earth. But people have not been able to step up and attain that perspective, which of course is not what you expect as a spiritual teacher. As a spiritual teacher you expect that people can follow a gradual path from their current level of awareness, their current perspective so they can gradually step-by-step expand their awareness, broaden their perspective and come at least closer to what you have as a spiritual teacher. Yet what inevitably happens, and it happens to all religions and spiritual philosophies, is that there are some people who are attracted to the philosophy and so they must (and they can do nothing else) approach it with their current level of consciousness. This means that they will inevitably project certain things upon the spiritual teaching. We can also say that as they take in the spiritual teaching from the outside, in order to reach their conscious minds, the spiritual teaching must be filtered through their emotional, mental and identity bodies, even their physical bodies and brains.

You could say that you are wearing these four diving suits and in the very center of these suits is you, the essence of who you are as a self-aware being. But you cannot see the world directly as it is, you can only see it through the four diving suits, the four bodies that form a filter. So, here is an impulse coming to you from the outside as a spiritual teaching, and in order to reach you as a conscious being who can think, make decisions, it must be filtered through these four bodies, these four levels of the mind. 

How can a spiritual teaching work?

Depending on what is in your four bodies before the teaching even reaches you, it has been filtered and colored. The question is: “How can a spiritual teaching work?” Well, it can work only if the you, that you are, understands the central dynamic of a spiritual teaching. What is the purpose of giving a spiritual teaching? The purpose is to show you that there is a way beyond your own mind, that you can go beyond your current perspective, your current level of consciousness, and that the teaching is meant as a tool for you to achieve this journey, this process of going beyond your present perception of the world, your present perception filter, your current way of looking at life.

If a person does not grasp this, what will happen? Well, the person will take the spiritual teaching and will now superimpose upon the teaching what it has in its three higher bodies. It will superimpose certain emotional patterns, certain mental patterns and a certain sense of identity. One typical outcome of this is that there are many people in the world who have a desire to feel superior to others. They will often then take a spiritual teaching and they will use whatever the teaching gives to construct this overlay upon the spiritual teaching that makes it seem like those who are followers of that teaching, those who are living up to this outer set of demands, following these rules, practicing these practices, that they are superior to those who are not in that teaching. 

You see virtually every religion on earth where the people feel that they are superior to those who are not in their religion. Many, many Buddhists feel this way. Of course, many Christians, Hindus, Muslims, what have you, feel the same way. And this is just one example among many of how people, when they do not grasp the central dynamic of a spiritual teaching, will superimpose the contents of their own emotional, mental and identity minds at the subconscious level upon the spiritual teaching. They are in essence pulling the teaching into their diving suit. 

I said that when you are in one of these diving suits you do have a hose that pumps air into the helmet but you also have a rope that ties you to the surface. What is a spiritual teaching? Well, it is the rope. The question is what are you going to do with that rope? You can see that many, many people around the world are not even aware that there is a rope. They are simply wandering around at the bottom of the ocean with their very limited perspective and they are looking for something. But many people who have found a spiritual teaching have realized: “Oh, here is a rope I can hold on to.” But now the question is: Do they understand the purpose of the rope? Do they say: “Oh, there must be something at the other end of the rope and if I pull myself up alongside the rope, I will get to that something at the other end?”

 And this of course is the purpose of the rope. You can pull yourself up, but those who do not understand the central dynamic of a spiritual teaching, they will do something else. They will pull the rope towards them until they have pulled all of the rope down to their level and wrapped it around themselves so that they often now, after entering a religious or spiritual teaching, they are even more restricted than in their original diving suit because now they have wound this rope that was meant to free them more tightly around themselves so they can barely move because now they have all these ideas of how a Buddhist or a Muslim or a Christian is supposed to behave or not behave, feel or not feel, think or not think, identify themselves or not identify themselves. 

The desire to escape the pressure

This is the situation on earth and this now brings us back to right desire. Wrong desire causes suffering therefore, people who have pulled the rope down to themselves reason that if they just identify what the right desires are and cultivate them, they must escape suffering. But this is not going to work. Many, many people, not only Buddhists, but from other spiritual and religious teachings, have proven that it will not work, but explaining why it will not work is impossible for people who have not understood that the purpose of a spiritual teaching is to help them see something that they cannot see right now, to help them see something that is beyond their present state of mind. 

What is the difference between an unenlightened person and an enlightened person? It is only one thing, the state of mind. In order to move towards enlightenment, (and the Eightfold Path is defined as a process of moving towards enlightenment) you have to start at your present level. You cannot jump from here to there in one giant leap, at least most people cannot. The Eightfold Path was given as a systematic gradual step-by-step process whereby people can approach enlightenment. There are many things to be said about this, which I will return to. But the basics of the Eightfold Path is there is a process that leads you from here to somewhere else.

What is that somewhere else? Well, it is, as I have said, where you have freed yourself from the limiting perspective you have right now and attained a broader perspective, a different state of mind. In other words, you can from one perspective say that the difference between an unenlightened person and an enlightened person is their level of awareness. And you can define then a gradual path that leads from your present level awareness towards higher and higher levels of awareness until you reach some state where you are free from the most common human limitations. 

We could in one sense define that the desires are what causes your suffering, but what kind of desires? And this requires us to take a deeper look. Most people, because they are wearing this diving suit, feel restricted. They feel they are up against a set of limitations for what they can do or what they cannot do. They often feel forced to do many things because of circumstances. 

At the most basic level you have to feed your physical body. And unless you were Prince Siddhartha who grew up in a palace where everything was given to him that he needed, you most often have to work in order to feed your physical body, so right there many people feel forced by this. But there are many other things that make people feel forced. Many pressures on the emotional body. Many patterns in the mental mind where people feel forced to deal with certain ideas. And of course, the sense of identity where you are under pressure to identify yourself as part of this group or that group. And maybe even that you are part of this group which means you are against this other group and you have to fight them and struggle against them. We can say that many people feel they are under pressure. And what do they desire to do? What are the desires they have? Well, they desire to remove the pressure or at least to find a relief from the pressure. You have many, many desires that are related to the pressure that people feel in their present situation, whatever it may be, depending on where you have grown up.

You have a set of desires, you want to escape certain limitations, you want to have a relief from certain pressures. The question is: “Can such desires be fulfilled?” And the answer is of course: yes and no. There are many people who have achieved some lowering of the pressure of existence. Many people for example, in certain parts of the world, have an education, they have a job that gives them a stable and steady income where they do not have to worry about the necessities of life. That is all taken care of. But does that mean they are free from pressure? They are free from some pressure but certainly many people have other pressures that are weighing upon them. 

You see in general that you can achieve some freedom from certain pressures of life but it is very, very difficult to achieve freedom from all pressures of life. And why is that? Well, it is because you are seeking freedom from the pressures but where are the pressures located? Where are the pressures experienced? Now you may say: “I am in this diving suit under the water and the weight of the water is putting pressure on me, so, by the mere fact that I am in embodiment on a dense planet like earth with the density of the collective consciousness there is an external pressure upon me.” And this is true, there is. 

The central understanding of a spiritual teaching

The central understanding of a spiritual teaching is that there is a difference between the external pressure and your internal experience of it. Again, many people throughout the ages have failed to grasp this. They have studied a spiritual teaching that contained these ideas in whatever form they were given, given the particular time and culture in which they were given. But they have failed to grasp that there is a difference between the external pressure and your internal experience of it. What does this mean? 

Well, you are feeling the pressure from the world. Now, you find a spiritual teaching and here is again one of these dilemmas for us as spiritual teachers. We are above the pressure. We do not feel the pressure. We experience how much more free and joyful we are because we are not feeling this pressure. We realize what pressure you are under. But we also see that many people are so burdened by the pressure that they cannot think very far ahead. We have to give them some kind of motivation that motivates them to even study this spiritual teaching we are giving, and to engage in this process of following the teaching, applying the teaching. 

What motivates people that are under this enormous pressure? Well, they want to be free of the pressure. The spiritual teaching must make some implicit promise that you can be free of the pressure. Of course, this promise is true—and at the same time, it is untrue. Because, if you look at the spiritual teaching and as I said, pull the rope down to your level and tie it around yourself, then the promise is not true because the spiritual teaching will not free you from the pressure. Why? Because the pressure that you experience is not the external pressure. 

What did I say earlier? Any impulse that comes to you goes through your emotional, mental and identity body before it reaches the you, the conscious being inside the four suits. So does the pressure. There is a pressure from the outside world, from the collective consciousness. There is no denying it. I am in no way trying to say that there is no pressure on you. But your experience of the pressure takes place inside your mind, and it is a matter of what emotional patterns do you have, what thoughts do you have, what beliefs and what is your sense of identity. This is what creates your experience of the pressure. The pressure is there. But it is how you experience the pressure that affects you. 

How to use a spiritual teaching

Again, here you are. You are in embodiment on a very difficult planet. You find a spiritual teaching. How can you make use of the teaching? Let us say your goal is, you want relief from some of the pressure you are feeling. And now you are saying: “Here is the teaching that makes this promise that I can find peace of mind or enlightenment or nirvana.” But how can this happen? Is it likely that by you finding a particular spiritual teaching and deciding to study and follow that teaching, that you can remove the external pressure upon you? Well, of course it is not. Because, that external pressure is partly created by the density of matter but also by the density of the collective consciousness, which involves all other human beings on the planet. 

How is you finding and following a spiritual teaching going to change this external condition? How will you, sitting somewhere in a Buddhist monastery with your legs crossed and giving chants or studying sutras, going to change the density of matter and the collective consciousness? This has never been a promise made by a spiritual teaching that came from beings who have freed themselves from the pressure, from the diving suits. Those who have attained freedom would never make such a promise. What is the only remaining option? It is, that following a spiritual teaching will not remove the pressure, it will change the way you experience the pressure. There is nothing else that a spiritual teaching can do. It can only change your inner experience. It cannot change the external situation.

This is, of course, a statement with some qualifications because everything is an expression of these interdependent originations, which I will talk more about later. Therefore, by you changing your consciousness, you will also change your external situation. But for now, we need to realize that no matter how much you change your consciousness, you will not change the basic fundamentals of the density of matter and the density of the collective consciousness. This overall pressure you cannot expect to change. But what you can expect is that by following a spiritual teaching, you can change the way this affects you, how you experience life on earth. And this is the core of any spiritual teaching. This is the reality of any spiritual teaching. The primary goal of any spiritual teaching is to help you identify the weights that are weighing down your diving suits at your emotional, mental and identity level, help you look at these, bring them into conscious awareness and say: “Do I want to keep dragging this around with me?”  And if you say no, you let it go.

The impossible desire

 What is constructive desire and non-constructive desire? Well, the desire that is based on your present level of awareness and your desire to escape the pressure that you are feeling, is a non-constructive desire because it keeps you tied to your present level of awareness. It works against your growth towards higher levels of awareness. How can it be otherwise? As long as that weight is in your diving suit, in the belt of your diving suit, it will weigh you down, because gravity will pull on it. The gravitational force of the collective consciousness will pull on it. It can be no other way, it is simply basic physics, basic natural law. Only, it is a physics that is beyond the material level but incorporates all of the levels of the material world, the emotional, mental and identity. 

Like attracts like, there is a gravitational pull, and it will pull on anything that you have in your emotional, mental and identity minds. It can be no other way. What is it that most people, when they first find a spiritual teaching, desire to do? They desire to escape the pressure by using their present contents of the emotional, mental and identity bodies. In other words, what have I said? Your experience of the pressure is determined by the contents of your three bodies, the three levels of your mind. It is because of those contents that you are experiencing the pressure the way you currently experience it. 

Now, you find a spiritual teaching that makes a promise that you can escape the pressure. And you are thinking that by just studying the outer teaching and performing the outer practices, I can escape the pressure, without doing anything about the contents of my emotional, mental and identity bodies. In other words, you can escape the experience without doing anything about the very conditions that are producing your experience. 

It cannot be done. It never could be done. There is no shortcut that you can ever come up with that will make this possible. It is an impossible desire. Therefore, from a certain perspective, we could say it is a wrong desire. It is certainly what I meant with the teaching I gave 2,500 years ago. You have to refine your desires, so that you do not desire some kind of shortcut to escape suffering, to escape the pressure, without looking at yourself and your own mind. Seeing the conditions that are creating your experience of the pressure—this is the only realistic way to look at a spiritual teaching. 

The need for continuity

Now, what prevents people from grasping this or what is meant in the Second Noble Truth about desires? Well, it is what is in the Third Noble Truth, their attachments. People have a need that is not generally recognized by society, even by the modern psychological profession. We can call it a need for security, a need for safety, but it would be more constructive to call it a need for continuity. 

This need springs from your reaction to the pressure, the external pressure. If you look at this from a certain perspective, you could say that all human beings have the potential for what is often called a mental breakdown. More and more people, even in the modern world where they do not have the physical challenges of maintaining an existence, are experiencing these mental breakdowns. Things become too much, too overwhelming and they cannot deal with life. They cannot function as it is considered normal in their society. What is behind this? Well, what is behind it is the very simple fact that you live on a planet where the pressure that you are exposed to in your physical body, your emotional body, your mental body, your identity body, is so big that nobody can deal with it. 

You cannot mentally, psychologically, survive the pressure you are under on this planet if you have not found a way to protect yourself from the pressure. In other words, the pressure itself is too great for people to bear. Now, why do many people then manage to live some kind of normal existence? Because, you also have the ability to shut out some of the pressure. This is what I mean when I talk about you have certain things in your emotional, mental and identity bodies that act as a filter between you and the world around you. You have these filters so you can shut down, you can suppress certain feelings, you can suppress certain thoughts, you can suppress a certain pressure on your identity and therefore, you are not overwhelmed, you can function. 

What we can say is that the vast majority of people have built this sense of equilibrium that allows them to function normally. But they are constantly under pressure and therefore, there is always the risk that something can happen that breaks the equilibrium, people become overwhelmed, and it is just too much for them. This mechanism of the need to maintain this equilibrium, is then what causes people to be attached. There are certain emotional patterns that you are attached to because even though you do not realize this consciously, you sense that they protect you against these overwhelming feelings. Same way with mental patterns. There are, for example, many religious people who are very attached to certain patterns that prevent them from having doubts about their religion. This is what causes attachment. 

Now this was a teaching that could not be given 2500 years ago because the collective consciousness was much lower. And very few people, hardly any people, would have been able to grasp it. Because of the advances in the modern world in many fields, not just psychology but also psychology, it is now possible to give a deeper teaching. Basically, we can say that most people have, in order to survive psychologically on this planet, built certain defenses that protect them against being overwhelmed. But these defenses also prevent you from going beyond your present level of awareness. We can say that the diving suit keeps you dry and the weights keep you upright. But it also keeps you inside the diving suit and at the bottom of the ocean, so here is another of these dichotomies, dilemmas, enigmas, about the spiritual path. In order to change your present experience of life, you have to look at some of these very things that are both protecting you and restricting you and this is precisely what the Eightfold Path is designed to help people do. Of course, the Eightfold Path is not the only way to do this. There are many other ways that are valid ways for describing the process, but my attempt here has been to break down this process as much as at all possible, make it as universal as possible. 

Understanding what the Eightfold Path is designed to do

Let us give a summary. Suffering is caused by the pressure you are exposed to. The pressure leads to desires to escape the pressure, to have a relief from the pressure. They are desires that cannot free you from the pressure because if you have a desire to escape the pressure without looking at what causes the pressure, which is your internal conditions, then those desires cannot free you. Engaging in the true process of the spiritual path, whether you call it the Eightfold Path or something else, requires you to look at some of these mechanisms that from a certain perspective protects you against being overwhelmed by the pressure, but from another perspective keeps you in the pressure indefinitely. You are protected in the diving suit, but you will never escape the diving suit unless you look at what it is that keeps you weighted down.

This is what the Eightfold Path is truly designed to do. It is not an external measure that changes the external conditions so that you now do not have the conditions that cause you to feel the pressure or the suffering. The Eightfold Path is not designed to be some magical process that changes your external conditions. It is designed to be a gradual, systematic process for changing your internal conditions so that you change your experience of the external conditions. 

This is the essence, not only of Buddhism, but of every other constructive spiritual philosophy. Those who grasp this will make progress on the Eightfold Path, or whatever you name the path. Those who do not grasp this will actually use the spiritual teaching to tie themselves more firmly to their present level of awareness. They will reinforce their perception filter and they might go around feeling they are very special compared to those who are not in their teaching, feeling they are very advanced because they have attained this high degree of understanding, intellectual understanding, of the teaching. They have also done all of these practices for so many years that they come to feel they must have attained some progress. 

Now, we need to ask a question. Is it possible to find a valid spiritual teaching, to study it and to diligently practice whatever it prescribes without making progress? The answer is, of course, yes. And let us first look at the three bodies. In your emotional body you have certain patterns of emotions that cause you to react certain ways in certain situations. This is the weight you have in your emotional body. You have various weights that are various reactionary patterns. What is the way to be free and to rise on the path towards higher levels of awareness? It is to look at these weights, examine them, examine why you react this way, what is behind this reaction, what is the belief behind it, and then consciously dismiss it. That way you take one weight out of your belt and let it drop to the bottom of the ocean. You are lighter, it is therefore easier for you and you actually come up a step on the gradual path.

We can say also that you are under the water in your diving suits but you come upon a ladder. You grasp on to the ladder, and when you throw out one weight, you can take one step up the ladder. But until you have thrown out that weight, you can hold on to the ladder all you want but you cannot take that next step. This is the true way to make progress—to look at yourself, look at your emotional patterns and dismiss some of them. But what have I said earlier? People are under so much pressure that they cannot psychologically function. They have learned to set up a mechanism that suppresses certain emotions. Many, many people, not only in Buddhism but in other spiritual and religious traditions, have used the spiritual teaching to reinforce this mechanism of suppressing certain emotions. 

You will see, in almost every spiritual movement, there are certain people who have been in that movement for a long time, who have diligently practiced whatever practice it has and who walk around with a certain aura of calmness. They walk slowly, they have certain movements, they talk a certain way. It seems like their emotions are always under control, are always calm. But in many cases, they have simply used the teaching to reinforce or build new mechanisms for suppressing their emotions and this does not lead to progress. You can say: “But these people are experiencing life differently than from before they found the teaching, so have they not made progress in changing their inner experience? You just said that the central aspect of life on earth is your inner experience, your life experience. And these people have clearly changed it.”

Well, yes, but what I am saying here is that there are two ways to change your life experience. You can suppress or you can dissolve. You can suppress your feelings and you can attain some sense of inner peace and calmness but it will be fragile, it can easily be disturbed. This is one reason why you see that in many religious and spiritual traditions, certain people insulate and isolate themselves from the world, for example by living in monasteries or living in certain communities or whatever you have. They can maintain their fragile sense of inner peace because in their outer environment they are rarely disturbed, it is rarely challenged. This is not what leads you to take the next steps up the ladder and it is something that can easily be disturbed when external conditions change. 

Many, many people, not only spiritual people but many people, have experienced, and in the last several years starting with the pandemic, now the war in Ukraine, then the economy, their sense of equilibrium has been disturbed. It is understandable. I am simply pointing out that if your sense of equilibrium can be disturbed by external conditions, it is because there is something you have not resolved and this comes from the mechanism I described. You have something that suppresses, which you have not resolved because you are attached to keeping that sense of equilibrium. 

You must be willing to be disturbed

What does this mean? It means very simply, in order to really grasp what the spiritual path is about, in order to really lock in to that path, you have to be willing to be disturbed. Now, I am not saying that you have to be willing to experience a mental breakdown or be overwhelmed, because the Eightfold Path and any other spiritual path, is designed to be gradual. It takes you gradually up the ladder without you being overwhelmed. But you have to be willing to be disturbed a little bit and this is where many, many people have not grasped the importance of this. 

Many people, if you look at your lives and look at your path, you can see that when you first found the spiritual teaching, you had a desire to have this inner peace. It is not an illegitimate desire, but it has caused many people to use the spiritual teaching to create certain parameters around their minds, where they think that they can achieve inner peace by suppressing their feelings instead of looking at them and dissolving them, dissolving their pattern. 

Why do you react with anger in certain situations? Anger is a feeling. It is a kind of energy but as I have explained, your emotional body is the lowest level of your mind. Above it is the mental, above it is the identity. Energy flows into your mind from your higher self. It enters first in the identity, then the mental, then the emotional. Your emotions do not just appear out of nowhere in the emotional body. They are the result of certain thought patterns you have in your mental body and even a sense of identity you have in the identity body. This is what gives you your current sense of equilibrium. 

Again, I am not finding fault with this. You can do nothing else on a planet like earth. You have to have a certain sense of identity. You have to have certain mental and emotional patterns in order to deal with your outer situation. But in order to make progress on the path towards enlightenment, or whatever you call a higher state of consciousness, you have to be willing to examine these patterns and you have to say: “Why do I respond with anger?” Well, it is because you had a certain expectation of what should or should not happen in your outer situation. That expectation was not met. But it is not really the fact that the expectation was not met that causes the anger. It is because, when the expectation was not met, your equilibrium was disturbed. Your equilibrium covered over a deeper sense of feeling powerless and when your sense of being powerless is stirred up, you feel anger. Anger is the default reaction against feeling powerless. Some people, in their anger, now take actions they normally would not have taken and in some cases, it helps them change the outer situation. In some cases, it only makes it worse. But in all cases, it reinforces the pattern. 

The real way out of this is to trace the feeling of being powerless and the expectations of what should and should not happen up through your emotional body, your mental body and to your identity body. What are the patterns you have that make you feel powerless, that make you feel that certain things should and should not happen? This is the path. The Eightfold Path is that you gradually, systematically, examine the patterns in your mind, bring them into conscious awareness. You take a look at them and say: “I see that this pattern protected me from being overwhelmed but why am I at risk of being overwhelmed? It is because there is a deeper pattern of how I relate to the world that I live in. I have a choice to make. I can continue to suppress and hope that this continues to work, but then I will not climb up the ladder. I will not actually walk the Eightfold Path, no matter how much I study the teachings or practice the practices.The alternative is, that I can actually realize what the Eightfold Path is about, and systematically examine my patterns, my reactions to the world.” 

I talked about those who have been in a spiritual teaching for a long time and I said that some have learned to suppress their feelings, so they always appear calm and collected and at peace, or in control. But there are also many people who have used the mental mind, the intellect, to study the teaching. And they have, now at the mental level, reinforced the patterns that allow them to maintain a sense of equilibrium at the mental level. This is something you do not see only in spiritual or religious teachings. You do in fact see many, many examples of people who have used the mental mind to create this sense of equilibrium. And what is it based on? It is based on the sense that they understand intellectually, analytically, rationally, how the world works and they think they have grasped certain patterns, certain natural laws, certain God-defined principles. And because they understand this, they think they can control the world, or at least their external situation. 

The outcome of this is that you have so many people who have created a mental idea of how the world is supposed to work and they are seeking to project this with the mental mind upon the universe. And they think they can reduce the functionings of the universe to these few simple rules and therefore, they feel they have the world in control. What they have done is, they have used the spiritual teaching, or it could be a political ideology such as communism, or even scientific materialism, to create this mental image of how the world works. But what did I say was the purpose of a spiritual teaching? It was to free you from your present state of awareness. That means freeing yourself from the patterns you have in your mental body. And again, those patterns protect you from, for example, being overwhelmed by doubts.

Many religious people have created these patterns that say: “Oh, this I do not have to think about. I do not have to think about anything that questions my spiritual and religious teaching. It is unnecessary because they are wrong, they cannot be right, so therefore, I can dismiss them without thinking about them.” This is what allows them to maintain that sense of equilibrium. But the problem is of course that the world is rather chaotic. People have many different beliefs and belief systems and religions and ideologies. There will always be something in the world that threatens your beliefs. 

How to transcend your current level of consciousness

Many people have also built this sense that as long as I study this spiritual teaching and perform the practices prescribed, I am guaranteed to reach the goal in the end. Many Buddhists to this day, and throughout the ages, have believed that: “If I study only the Buddha’s teachings, focus only on the Buddha’s teachings and I diligently practice the practices described by my version of Buddhism, I am guaranteed to reach enlightenment or nirvana. Because the Buddha was a true spiritual teacher and he made the promise that if I walk the Eightfold Path, I will reach enlightenment. And since the Buddha is a true spiritual teacher, that promise must be a true promise.” 

What did I explain earlier? We have to make a promise that appeals to people at their current level of consciousness. But you cannot take that promise, interpret it through your current level of consciousness, come up with a certain idea of how you are supposed to walk the Eightfold Path and then when you walk it, based on your current level of consciousness, this will guarantee that you transcend your current level of consciousness. It cannot be done. 

You cannot transcend your current level of consciousness by remaining at your current level of consciousness. How would this be possible? No matter how elaborate mental constructions you come up with, they will not help you transcend the perception filter you have in your mental body. You must be willing to be disturbed, to have doubt about at least one aspect of the current way you look at life. You must be willing to ask some difficult questions and to consider what is behind your current mental pattern. 

If you will not do this, you can again suppress all doubt and make yourself feel convinced that you are right but you are not climbing up to the next step on the ladder. You just stand where you are. You clutch your beliefs. And you become, perhaps during a lifetime, more and more convinced that you are right because there are other people around you who have the same mental patterns and you reinforce each other that you are the ones who have grasped the Buddha’s teaching. But you see what I have explained here. You are currently at a limited level of awareness. The Buddha is beyond limitations, has a level of awareness that is beyond any of the limitations that people have on earth. You will not reach the Buddha’s level unless you systematically, gradually, transcend your current limitations. It cannot be done. There is no way to do it. 

Where does this lead us? You are a spiritual person. You have studied a spiritual teaching for a long time. You have practiced the practices prescribed diligently for a long time. Have you not made progress? Well, most people have because they have been willing to look at something, examine it, let go of it. Some people have not because, as I said, they have used the spiritual teaching to reinforce their patterns. Many have reinforced their sense of identity that they are special compared to those who are not in that spiritual teaching, who cannot understand it the way they understand it, or who have not been as diligent in the practice. They reinforce the identity that they are special but this of course keeps them trapped in the diving suit. They may have changed their life experience in the sense that they feel more and more special, but they are not climbing up the ladder. 

What a spiritual movement cannot do for you

Most of you have made progress. But you can make more progress by becoming more conscious of what I have explained here—the real process of transcending your level of consciousness and that there is always this need to be disturbed. As I said earlier, many of you will recognize that when you first found a spiritual teaching, you thought: “Ah, now I have found what I was longing for. Now I have come home. This is where I really belong, in this teaching, in this community with like-minded people and when I stay here everything will be good. I will have that sense of inner peace that means I can cope with being on this planet.” 

Now many of you have experienced that you had great enthusiasm when you found your first spiritual teaching and movement. But then something happened that disturbed you, disappointed you. You suddenly saw that this was not what you thought it was. Some people have given up on the spiritual path because of it, others have found a way to go on. But have you fully grasped that there is no spiritual teaching or movement that will automatically give you what you desire? 

Many people have found one spiritual movement, been disappointed, but then they have found another one and they have reasoned: “This is it.” Or rather they have reasoned: “This must be it because I cannot bear to be disappointed again, therefore I will suppress anything that questions my second spiritual movement or my third, whatever it may be.” But the only way to make true progress is to use an outer teaching and an outer movement to question your sense of equilibrium. Now you may say: “But when I found my first spiritual teaching, I had a desire to find inner peace from the pressure of this world. Is this a wrong desire?” Well, yes and no. In a sense you could say that it is a valid desire, because ultimately when you attain enlightenment or nirvana, you will be free from the pressures of this world. But how is that freedom going to be achieved? Some will say: “Well, it will only be achieved after this world. When I am no longer in embodiment, then I can find true peace.” 

But you see, all teachings that talk about karma and reincarnation, whether they are Buddhist or Hindu or the more modern teachings that talk about the ascension process, they are all implying that if you have not reached a certain level, you cannot free yourself from the wheel of rebirth, you will come back into another embodiment. Ultimately, you could say it is not a matter of when your current physical body dies that you will attain peace. You will only attain this peace from the pressures of this world when you can graduate from the wheel of rebirth, or reach your ascension and you no longer have to come back into embodiment. 

This is, of course, what we teach today. But this was not a realistic teaching to give for the broad population 2500 years ago. Therefore, the focus back then was on giving people the Eightfold Path that would help them change their experience while they were in embodiment. And this is, of course, the perspective that is relevant today as well. What we seek to teach you is how to change your life experience so you can attain inner peace while you are still in a physical body and therefore exposed to the external pressure. This is partly because if you can attain this, you will hold a tremendous balance for the entire planet. You will help pull up on the collective consciousness when you attain a higher level of awareness while you are still in a physical body. For many of you this is what is in your Life plan—to attain this higher sense of peace while you are in a physical body. 

Suppression or resolution

Now, you can see throughout history that many, many people have isolated themselves from the world, living in these monastic communities, where their outer environment is very controlled. They are protected against some of the violent actions that are happening in the world and so they are in a very controlled environment where their sense of equilibrium is not disturbed. Many people have spent an entire lifetime in such an environment without actually making progress. They have not stepped up the ladder. They have only used the outer environment and the teaching to reinforce their sense of equilibrium that is based on suppression. This of course, is not what we are calling you to do today. 

We are calling you to find a way to walk the path so that you attain true peace, a peace that is not based on suppression, but on resolution. You do this while you are still in a physical body so that you can pull up on the collective consciousness and also become an open door whereby you can receive ideas and impulses from a level of higher awareness that you then can express in this world. If you can make this fundamental shift, your entire approach to life can change very quickly. You gain now an entirely different view of what life is about. 

Do you see the fundamental difference I have described here? There is one approach. You are seeking relief from the pressures of being in this world. You are seeking some kind of inner peace however you define it. But the way you seek to attain it is to use a spiritual teaching and practice to suppress your emotions, to suppress certain thoughts, to suppress a certain sense of identity so that you build up this false sense of having control of your emotions, being intellectually superior, and therefore, being fundamentally superior to those who are not in your teaching.

The other approach is to seek resolution. What is the difference in how you look at the world? Well, when you are seeking to suppress something, you are looking at the world as a potential threat. Anything that happens that disturbs your equilibrium is a threat to your sense of equilibrium and therefore it needs to be suppressed. You need to find a way to dismiss it as quickly as possible so you can get back to your sense of equilibrium. You have built patterns in your emotional, mental and identity bodies for doing just that— suppressing anything that disturbs your equilibrium. 

When you take the other approach, you are willing to be disturbed. And you can actually shift into saying: “My true goal is to resolve all of these patterns in my emotional, mental and identity bodies that are keeping me tied to the earth, that are keeping me in the diving suit, that prevent me from climbing up the rope, walking up the ladder, being more and more free. I want to walk the true path of the Buddha, the true Eightfold Path, not the outer path but the inner Eightfold Path.” 

What does this mean for you? It means that when something happens outside of yourself that disturbs your sense of equilibrium, this is not a threat. It is an opportunity. It is an opportunity to say: “Why do I feel disturbed by this? What is the emotion I am feeling? What is behind the emotion? Let me, instead of denying the emotion and trying to suppress it, let me go into it. What is it I am really feeling here? What is it that is behind this? What is the thought process that I can identify? What are my beliefs about this? What kind of a worldview have I built that allows me to feel I am in equilibrium but it also holds me at a certain level? I cannot actually grasp the spiritual teachings that I am studying because of my mental patterns. They always have to fit into these mental patterns instead of disturbing them. And then when I go beyond this, what is my sense of identity relating to earth?” 

For example, you might encounter a negative reaction from other people to something you are doing. You might at first feel anger about this. When you go into the feeling, you see that first of all you feel powerless to change other people’s reaction to you, the way they look at you. But you also feel that you should be able to change their reactions because you want to be at peace with everybody. You do not want people to be angry with you and you cannot see any other way, at least your emotional body cannot see any other way, than to change their reaction so that you do not have the feeling that you have disturbed other people. Then you may go up into the mental realm and see: But why do you have these beliefs? Do you have perhaps a sense that you understand free will, you respect the free will of others, and you feel that you should be able to live on this planet without ever disturbing anybody, without having them become angry at you, without having them accuse you of doing something wrong. You are always looking for a way to make peace with people, to come up with some argument that makes them see why they should not be angry with you, why you are really a good person and so forth. 

Then you can go up to the identity level and realize that perhaps you have a sense that you are not really allowed to be here on earth, you are not really allowed to express yourself, at least not if this disturbs or provokes other people. You feel that you should be able to live here without disturbing anybody. You are always looking for a way to withdraw yourself from situations where you do disturb other people, so that you can still feel that you can be here without constantly being confronted by people who say you have no right to be here. There can be many other patterns but this is just an example that applies to many spiritual people. 

What you can then do is start looking at these patterns and gradually, over time (and it may take a long time) work on them, come to see them, gradually resolve them, until you realize that you do have a right to be on earth. You do have a right to strive for a higher level of consciousness, a higher level of awareness. You do have a right to express this, even if it disturbs other people. You can even come to realize that it will inevitably disturb other people because this is what happens to anybody who raises their awareness beyond what is considered normal in any society. You will disturb their sense of normality, their sense of equilibrium. 

Most people have created this sense of equilibrium that they have a right to be the way they are and when something from the outside disturbs that sense of equilibrium, they become angry and aggressive. They have defined a sense of normal that this is all you can be as a human being. This is the way you need to be. When this is disturbed, they become angry and what are you doing when you are walking the spiritual path? You are gradually raising your awareness beyond what is normal in your society. Will it disturb people? Well, how could it not? 

Being willing to disturb people

Now, it is not recorded in the Buddhist teachings or myths of just how much resistance, opposition, anger that I encountered as the Buddha when I started teaching. It is more recorded in the Christian scriptures of how much opposition Jesus encountered when he started teaching. But all spiritual teachers have encountered this to some degree. Some have managed to withdraw, as I eventually did in the Sangha. Because that is one valid way to teach, that you withdraw from the world, you let people come to you who are open to your teaching. 

The other valid way, as exemplified by Jesus, is to go out there in the world and disturb people. What did Jesus do? If you look at Jesus’ entire three-year mission, what did he do? He disturbed people’s sense of what was normal. He said: “There is more to being a human being than what you are experiencing right now.” And what was the reaction? Total rejection. The people would rather have a murderer set free than to have the person who disturbed them set free. Because the murderer they could deal with. That was normal. Some people kill others. But coming to say that you can be more than a human being, that is outrageous. We will not be disturbed so we will kill the one who disturbs us. 

You see most spiritual people are reluctant to disturb others. But what is it that will bring the golden age of Saint Germain, the age of higher awareness into manifestation? It is that some people must demonstrate that there is more to life than what the population considers normal and you must do this by being out there in whatever capacity. It does not mean that you have to do what Jesus or the Buddha did. It does not mean that you have to be killed or persecuted, but you will disturb people and you need to find a way to be at peace with this in order to fulfill your Divine plan. Now this is not necessarily where you start out on the path. You can have a long period of time where you resolve these patterns so that you are not disturbed when other people react to you. 

I know very well that this has been a long discourse. But I wanted to set a foundation so that I can give you some deeper teachings about the Eightfold Path and how you can then move towards this real sense of inner peace that is not based on suppression and denial but based on resolution and a more enlightened view. 

With this, I thank you for your attention so that I could project this through your minds and chakras into the collective consciousness, where it might reach many people who will never hear of this messenger, this teaching, who will never hear of the Ascended Master Gautama Buddha or never accept it, but it will still have an effect on their consciousness. They will suddenly come to see something they had not seen before and therefore they will be able to use whatever spiritual teaching they have at a higher level. 

You see again, our goal is to raise people’s awareness. It is not our goal to bring everybody into one particular spiritual teaching. But it is our goal that all people who are open to a valid spiritual teaching will reach higher and higher levels of grasping that teaching. You are, in a sense, the catalysts for reinforcing that movement, which of course has been going on for a very long time, even before I gave the teachings as the Buddha 2500 years ago. It is an ongoing process that has been there from the creation of this unascended sphere, even previous spheres. It is the out-breath and the in-breath of God. Being part of this in-breath, being conscious that you are part of the in-breath, can be very helpful in attaining that sense of peace that even though you are living in a world that has many disturbing manifestations, you are here to be part of that ongoing timeless process of raising everything gradually towards higher and higher levels. What could possibly disturb you, other than an unresolved pattern, a separate self that you have not let die, an attachment to that separate self or to that pattern?

 By coming to see this, by working on it until you have separated yourself from it and you suddenly see it from the outside, you see how it limits you and you can let it go—that is how you attain gradually greater and greater peace. There is no magical formula. You cannot suddenly snap your fingers and attain inner peace. But you can go through this transformation and how quickly you go through it is only a matter of your willingness to look at what disturbs your peace. With this, I hope I have both disturbed your peace, your sense of equilibrium, but given you a deeper sense of peace. I shall certainly return to give you deeper teachings, and to disturb you even more, as you are willing. 

Be sealed now in the joy of the Buddha that I Am.

 

Copyright © 2023 Kim Michaels

 

Back to Being a spiritual person in a chaotic world

 

Connect with Gautama Buddha and experience that emptiness is an empty concept


Listen to a recording of this dictation (subscribers only)

Ascended Master Master Gautama Buddha through Kim Michaels, June 6, 2023. This dictation was given at a conference in Seoul, Korea: Connecting to Your Higher Self and Spiritual Teachers. 

I AM the Ascended Master Gautama Buddha. And as has been the tradition now for some time, it has been my privilege and my joy to give the sealing dictation for this event, which truly has been a great victory seen from our perspective as ascended masters because it has created an impulse sent into the collective consciousness that will create very profound changes and enable many people to connect more to the ascended masters and their higher selves. We, of course, also see the changes from many of you who have been willing to participate, to look at yourselves, to take in the teachings and come up higher. We hope that you feel it has been worth your time and effort and that you feel as fulfilled as we do.

I wish to take this opportunity to give some teachings about a concept that may seem unrelated to connecting to your higher self and spiritual teachers, but we shall see if it is not connected after all. There is a concept known back from the Buddha’s time of Śūnyatā or emptiness. What does this actually mean? Again, the intellectuals of the Buddhist religion or tradition have looked at this, have come up with various interpretations, cannot really agree on what is the right interpretation and I am not attempting here to give you the ‘right’ interpretation because there is no one right interpretation as there will always be different levels of consciousness and thus different ways to understand any spiritual teaching. 

Experiencing reality behind the worded teaching

But I will say that there is a fundamental difference between interpreting a spiritual teaching and experiencing the deeper reality behind the worded teaching. And what you see in every spiritual tradition known to the world is that there arises, as the tradition grows and gains more and more members, a class of people who set themselves up as the interpreters of the teaching. Then there is a smaller group of people who seek to experience the deeper reality behind the words. And then there is the larger group of the general population who follow the teaching and follow the interpretation given by the priest class because they hope it will give them some better life either in this world or the next. You can see this pattern everywhere. You can see it throughout history, you can see it today even with modern spiritual teachings, even the tendency in ascended master teachings. If you truly want to make use of a spiritual teaching, you of course, need to go beyond the interpretation of the words and seek to not only understand, not simply grasp, but to experience the deeper reality behind the words. 

We might compare this to a movie theater. Most of the people are sitting there looking at the movie screen. They are just experiencing the movie. Then there are those who attempt to understand where the movie comes from and they might go to the projection room and look at the film strip. But is it really the deeper reality behind the movie, what is on the film strip? Or is the deeper reality the white light in the projector? Or is the even deeper reality the intention of the movie director or the script writer? Or the actors? 

Using the teaching to transcend your current level of consciousness

A valid spiritual teaching comes from the spiritual realm or the ascended realm. It comes from the mind of a spiritual being and if you want to make full use of the teaching, you need to use the outer teaching only as a tool for making contact with a spiritual being in whose mind the teaching originated. This is the ultimate way to make use of a spiritual teaching. When you grasp this, you realize that just reading the words and trying to understand them or interpreting them with the intellectual mind is not the highest use of the teaching. One might even say it is not making use of the teaching because what is the purpose of a spiritual teaching? It is to help to transcend your current level of consciousness. And when you go into seeking to understand and interpret the teaching with your current level of consciousness you keep yourself trapped at that level. 

You might use the spiritual teaching to make yourself believe that because you have this advanced, sophisticated intellectual interpretation of the teaching you have reached a higher level of consciousness. But you do not reach a higher level of consciousness through intellectual interpretation and understanding. You reach it only by shifting your consciousness. This is what the linear mind cannot grasp. For the linear mind can only set up some kind of linear progression that leads from this point to the next. It cannot imagine, it cannot fathom that there could be an entirely different level of reality that cannot be put on such a linear scale. 

The Middle Way

That is why many people have not understood the concept of the Middle Way. They have not grasped the significance of the Middle Way and the pairs, which is what we today call the duality consciousness that always has two extremes. There is one polarity, there is the opposite polarity and there are people who think that the Middle Way is somewhere in between. 

There are many people who have intellectualized the teachings given 2,500 years ago through me and they have thought that walking the path, the Middle Way means finding balance and they have attempted to find some kind of balance between these dualistic extremes that they have defined, whatever that definition has been. But the Middle Way is not about finding balance on a scale that is linear between two extremes. The Middle Way is about transcending the dualistic scale, the dualistic extremes which means what? It means transcending the linear mind.

The concept of emptiness

Back to the concept of emptiness. The linear mind will immediately ask, emptiness of what? Emptiness compared to what? There must be something that it can be compared to. There is some validity to this in the sense that a spiritual teaching is always given in context. When I appeared in physical embodiment 2,500 years ago, I appeared in a specific society, a specific culture, namely the Hindu Brahminic culture. 

The Hindu Brahmins had come up with many different interpretations, many different sects, many different ideas and so they had various concepts. The teachings that I gave 2,500 years ago were adapted to this culture and they did in some way use some of the concepts but they also challenged other concepts that had become common in the Hindu tradition. You cannot really understand the concept of emptiness without looking at the context in which it was given. And the concept that was very dominant in the Hindu religion was the concept of the Atman or the Self, the ultimate Self and there was an entire culture built around this concept that few people actually understand today. 

To give a brief summary of how they looked at the Self, we can say that there was the idea that in the higher realm there was only this one Self, the Atman and this was an eternal unchanging Self. It could not ever change. This means that for any concept you could come up with, not necessarily from the human level but anything that could come from the spiritual realm, there was in this Atman, in this Self, defined what we might call an image or a matrix. It could be even compared to Plato’s concepts of these ideal forms in the higher realm. 

In other words, the concept was that in the higher realm exists a predefined perfect matrix for everything that can manifest in this world and everything that can happen in this world, which is what gave rise to this idea that out of this one Atman is defined other Selves and these Selves define a specific manifestation. So the earth—there is a Self in the higher realm that defines the perfect unchanging matrix for the earth. For each human being there is a Self in a higher world that defines what that soul is like and things could happen on earth so that the earth or people could deviate from this eternal Self. But in the end, everything would return to that Self and this is the concept that I denied. 

When I talked about emptiness I said it is empty in the sense that it does not have a self, meaning it was not predefined by some Self in a higher realm that it was destined to return to. Now Lanto has already given you a very profound teaching on this, but I want to comment on it because many people in Buddhism today have used the modern mindset which has become much more linear, to interpret the concept of emptiness or the concept of Non-Self, to mean that it is not only empty of a self, it is empty of everything. There is nothing there. This is again what the linear mind loves to do. 

Permanent self vs. ever-changing self-transcending self

The linear mind looks at this world where everything has form and then it hears the concept of emptiness and then it hears that it was the Buddha who gave that concept and he is some high, enlightened being so his concepts must be respected. And now the linear mind says: “But then I want to understand this concept in the ultimate way. This world has form, emptiness must mean there is no form, there is nothing there.” And some have interpreted this to mean that there is only Brahman, there is only infinite awareness as some call it today and this is emptiness. So there is either form as there is in this world or there is emptiness and they think that form came out of emptiness, in other words something came from nothing. But this, of course, is not the case. 

I did not say that there is emptiness meaning there is nothing there. I said there is no permanent Self there. I said that the world did not come from emptiness and is not meant to return to emptiness after an endless cycle of reincarnations. What I said was and what I meant was, there is no permanent self but there is an ever changing self-transcending self and that self that is ever changing is not meant to return to nothingness after an almost endless cycle of reincarnations and suffering. It is meant to ascend to a higher level where it can continue to rise to even higher levels. 

What can we understand about the spiritual realm? 

This is not what I said 2,500 years ago because I had decided to give a teaching focused on the practical aspects not the cosmological aspects and so my intent was to raise people’s consciousness beyond that linear mindset because I saw clearly from the Brahmins that the linear mindset can never give you that ultimate understanding of these cosmological concepts. How do you ultimately understand how the spiritual realm works? Well, by ascending to the spiritual realm, of course, then you experience the spiritual realm and then you can pursue a course of study of studying all aspects and realms of this spiritual world, going here or there, going to higher and higher levels exploring everything there is to explore. 

We might also say: “Well what is the point of trying to understand it while you are in embodiment?” And this is how I reasoned 2,500 years ago because the collective consciousness was at a lower level but today there is actually some point to this because many people can benefit from grasping some of the aspects of the spiritual realm and how it functions. You can certainly benefit from grasping that there are spiritual beings, ascended masters in that realm who are your spiritual teachers. But you can also benefit from grasping that there are natural planets and that many spiritual people have come from those natural planets to this unnatural planet of earth. 

And so there is today more value, more validity to seeking some understanding of the spiritual realm and that is why we give these teachings today. You will, of course, see today the exact same tendency that was there 2,500 years ago, that you have many, many people who are seeking a higher understanding but who are using some kind of teaching brought forth through words to get that understanding and then they project and then they interpret. There are, of course, many teachings today that are so-called ‘channeled’ teachings and they are channeled often from the mental realm and so they often give teachings that appeal to the linear mind, the analytical mind, the intellectual mind. 

There are teachings that claim to be very sophisticated even more sophisticated than the ascended master teachings and there are people who believe that this book or that book is the ultimate spiritual teaching and this is, of course, perfectly in order. People need certain experiences before they are able to raise their discernment and see the difference in vibration between a teaching that comes from the mental realm and a teaching that comes from the ascended realm. This is not something that the linear mind can fathom. It can only look at the words and interpret the words and therefore come up with some interpretation that this teaching is more advanced than the other. 

The emptiness of pure awareness

Going back to ‘emptiness’ what is the real value of this concept? Well, first of all the alpha aspect is that there is no permanent unchanging self. You are a self. In today’s teaching we have called it the Conscious You saying it is pure awareness. But another word for pure awareness could be emptiness. Emptiness of the sense of identity, the thoughts and the feelings that reside in or are produced by the identity, mental and identity bodies or minds. You might say that for most human beings their attention is focused on their feelings, their thoughts or their sense of identity. They are so to speak focused on the content of consciousness and therefore there can be some value in contemplating that the flip side of the coin, the alpha aspect of consciousness is that instead of being focused on the contents you can be focused on consciousness itself. And consciousness is empty or can be empty of contents and when the Conscious You experiences itself as pure awareness, this is a state of emptiness—just awareness without any content in the container of consciousness. 

Different levels of understanding emptiness

You can, of course, take it to another level and see that as you walk the spiritual path and rise above the 48th level and approach the 96th level, you are overcoming these subconscious selves, many of which are based on the duality consciousness. You can say that at the lower levels of consciousness possible on earth, people are enveloped in, blinded by, identified with the egoic mind, the separate mind. As you rise towards the 96th level and beyond your four lower bodies, your container of the lower self becomes empty of the egoic mind. So that is another form of emptiness, another level of emptiness but it does not mean, of course, that there is nothing in your mind. 

You still have a sense of identity, thoughts, feelings. You take actions, you respond to the world, you interact with the world, you interact with your I AM Presence with the ascended masters. You are not empty of anything but you are empty of certain things that spring from a certain level of consciousness. You see that emptiness can be understood at different levels. There is not just one way to understand it and to grasp it. But you can, of course, take this concept further because you might say that when you ascend, from the perspective of the Conscious You it seems that you go into the ultimate form of emptiness. For now, the Conscious You is fully united with the I AM Presence, becomes the I AM Presence, there are really no words that can fully describe the process. But nevertheless you can say that the Conscious You now becomes empty of this sense of self that it has had since it was sent by the I AM Presence into embodiment. But this, of course, does not mean there is nothing. Now there is the full awareness of the I AM Presence. As other masters have explained, you can approach that point of Christhood where you become more and more one with, united with the I AM Presence. But the Conscious You cannot be fully united with the I AM Presence until you ascend. 

The concept of void and no-self

To fully grasp emptiness, you also need to grasp how it can be perverted and misused. And this is what has happened both in some of the older forms of Buddhism but also in modern spiritual teachings even from other traditions such as the Advaita Vedanta and some other modern teachers who have taken this concept of emptiness and my statement that it is empty of a Self, and they have then interpreted this to mean that the ultimate state of spiritual growth is this state of ‘no self’ which is the ultimate emptiness. But this is of course a misinterpretation. 

It is, as Lanto explained, indeed possible for a being in embodiment on earth to experience a state that seems to be empty of any form, empty of any expression, empty of any sense of self. But this is not because there is some ultimate state of emptiness defined by some higher being or God. We have given teachings that, in the beginning was the Creator and the Creator decided to create. First it drew a boundary around itself in the Allness. It withdrew everything inside that boundary and created the void. 

The void can be, of course, conceived as the ultimate state of emptiness. But as a co-creator you cannot experience the void. You might say that even the Creator itself does not experience the void. Why? An experience is what? An experience is something that has form. If there is no form, how can there be experience? In the void there is no form. So how can you experience the void? What is it that people have experienced that they claim to be the highest reality, pure awareness, the ultimate state of awareness? What have they experienced? They have not experienced a void. They have experienced a state that has been created by beings in the duality consciousness. 

As Lanto explained, the fallen beings have taken one approach of seeking to elevate the separate self to an ultimate status and the other approach of denying the existence of any self. Thereby they have created this beast, this matrix, this self in the collective consciousness that seems to be empty. But as Lanto said, if you say: “I have no self”, or “I have experienced no self”, or “I have experienced emptiness”, well there is an “I”, so there is not a state of no-self. So what is ‘no self’? It is a projection of an image. Likewise, there has been a projection of an image of nothingness, of emptiness and some people have claimed to experience emptiness, but they have experienced the image of emptiness. But this is not emptiness, for it is filled with the image and the image has a form that a being on earth can experience. Therefore, it is not emptiness. 

When people have a certain experience, and I am not denying that they have an experience, I am only denying that it is an ultimate experience of emptiness. But when people have an experience and they come back to their normal level of awareness and they start communicating about that experience with words, well, they are just building on to that mental image, reinforcing that mental image, perhaps interpreting it, and now they are using it to project that they had some ultimate experience. And what does that mean? Well, if someone sets himself up as a spiritual teacher and talks about some ultimate experience of emptiness or ‘no-self’, what will the followers of such a guru do? They will project that he must have reached the ultimate consciousness since he had this ultimate experience of emptiness. But how could emptiness be an ultimate state of consciousness? How could emptiness be an ultimate reality? 

Emptiness is an empty concept

Why do you exist? Why does the world exist? Why is there a world that can give you experiences? Why is there, as many modern scientists are asking, something rather than nothing? Well, because there has always been something. There has never been nothing. If there had ever been nothing, there would not be something, and then you would not be here to ask the question. The very fact that you exist shows that there is not nothing. There is a creation of self-aware beings, and there always has been some creation and there is a purpose, there is a direction in that creation and that is to grow towards higher and higher levels of consciousness. And you do not grow to higher and higher levels of consciousness through nothing. Nothing cannot become higher and higher. Nothing cannot be ultimate. In fact, there can be nothing ultimate because there is always higher levels of consciousness possible. 

Again, the linear mind panics when it hears these concepts. But intuitively you can grasp this, that the purpose of existence is the growth in consciousness. And you here on earth can grow to become an ascended master, which is very much higher than what most people have on earth. But an ascended master can grow to reach the Creator consciousness, and the Creator can grow to even levels beyond that. Now, when you talk about levels beyond the Creator consciousness, then words are meaningless. Concepts are meaningless. You cannot fathom this when you are unascended. You cannot really fathom it when you are ascended either, but you can have glimpses of it. 

The rest of this dictation, along with an invocation based on the dictation, is found in the book: Connecting with Your Spiritual Teachers.

 

Copyright © 2023 Kim Michaels

 

Back to Connecting to Your Higher Self and Spiritual Teachers

Transcending worded communication with your higher self


Listen to a recording of this dictation (subscribers only)

Ascended Master Master Padmasambhava through Kim Michaels, June 6, 2023. This dictation was given at a conference in Seoul, Korea: Connecting to Your Higher Self and Spiritual Teachers. 

I AM the Ascended Master Padmasambhava.

My contribution is not intended to be long, but I want to talk somewhat about words. Because if you look back throughout history on spiritual teachings that have been brought forth on this planet, you might ask yourself: What is the greatest hindrance, what is the greatest stumbling block to the spiritual progress of the many sincere people throughout the ages who have found the spiritual path? And that greatest hindrance is indeed words. Now, you might also ask yourself: What is then the greatest asset for the spiritual teachers of humankind? What is the greatest opportunity for spiritual people to make progress? And the answer is words. And the simple reason for this is, of course, that on a planet like earth, with the density of matter and a density of the collective consciousness, telepathic communication is not practical on a large scale. And therefore, spiritual teachings must be given with words.

Words: opportunity and hindrance to spiritual growth

On the one hand, giving spiritual teachings with words is indeed an opportunity, for it is a communication from the spiritual realm in the form of words. But on the other hand, words are also the greatest hindrance to spiritual progress. But why is that so? Well, it is because people have this tendency to become attached to a particular worded expression, wanting the words to convey or define some ultimate truth. The other reason is that the linear mind, the intellectual, analytical, rational reasoning mind, can do tricks with words. You might have seen these magicians that can do magic tricks, but the intellect can do magic tricks with words. It can interpret words. It can, as the saying goes, split hairs about splitting words, interpreting words endlessly. And this is, of course, what you saw the Hindu Brahmins do, and the Buddha attempted to counteract it. But not long after the Buddha was no longer in embodiment, the intellectual people of the Buddhist religion started doing the exact same thing. The scribes and the Pharisees did the same when Jesus walked the earth, but as soon as the Catholic Church was formed, and even before, theologians started doing the same thing with Jesus’ teachings.

And in the modern age, of course, scientists, materialists are doing the same thing with scientific teachings or discoveries. And many spiritual people who have found a spiritual teaching, whether it be an old one or a new one, well, they are doing the same. Endlessly debating about the meaning of words, endlessly trying to interpret words to come to some ultimate interpretation of words.

Looking for the highest possible teaching in the past

One thing you can see, one tendency you can see in the spiritual field is that there are many spiritual people who are looking backwards. They are looking at a worded teaching given some time ago. It may be in the most ancient worded teachings known currently, the Vedas, it may be the Buddha’s teachings, it may be the Old Testament, Jesus’ teachings, later interpretations or scriptures from Buddhism, or the Koran. It may be newer teachings, even ascended master teachings given in previous dispensations. But you see this tendency, people look back in time, they seem to think that back then when the Vedic Rishis were in embodiment, somehow this was a purer time, so the revelation received by the Rishis was the highest revelation that could be brought forth. Or Mohammed’s time was a special time, so that was why the Koran is the ultimate revelation that could be brought forth.

Do these people never open a newspaper, watch television, read books or go on the internet? Have they not recognized that there has been some progress in the living standard compared to ten thousand years ago? Have they not asked themselves why this progress has come about? Can they not reason that the progress has come about because the collective consciousness is higher today than it was at the time of the Vedic seers or Mohammed or Jesus or the Buddha? What sense does it make then that a higher revelation could be brought forth ten thousand years ago than today? How could you bring forth the highest possible revelation when the collective consciousness was lower than it is today? Does   this make   sense?

Less and less room for interpretation

Well, to some it does or they simply refuse to think about it. But why is it that people will not recognize any later revelation? Why is it that they cling to the old? Because the revelation that was given in a previous age was given for a lower level of consciousness and that means what? It means that the revelation that could be given at that time was not as precise as what can be given today. What does it mean that a teaching is not as precise, that the worded expression of the teaching is not as precise? It means there is more room for interpretation and the more room for interpretation the more the linear mind can do its tricks and the more people trapped in the linear mind such as the Brahmins or the Scribes and Pharisees can use their superior intellects to set themselves up as having a special status. And once they have achieved that status they do not want to give up on it and that is why they cling to that old teaching that can be interpreted endlessly.

Even the teachings of the ascended masters given over the past century show a clear progression. Go back to previous dispensations, read the teachings, you will see they were not as precise, not as direct as the teachings given today. Some have said: “Well the old teachings had a much more elevated language.” Whereas the teachings today are very simple, very limited vocabulary and I agree this is the case but it also left more room for interpretation.

What we are about doing as progressive revelation, as part of progressive revelation, as the Omega aspect of progressive revelation is to make the teaching plain so more and more people can grasp it but also so that even people at a higher level of consciousness are not in doubt about what is being said, there is not as much room for interpretation, not as much need to interpret.

Interpretation based on the present level of consciousness

Of course, a teaching given in words will always be interpreted because people will interpret it based on their present level of consciousness. You can give a teaching from a certain level of consciousness but there will still be those levels from the 48th to the 96th level and for that matter even the levels below that can interpret the teaching based on that level, the world view, the perception filter that people have at that level. This is unavoidable but at least we can do what we can do from the ascended realm to make the teaching as unequivocal, as precise as possible. This is not to say, of course, that the teaching we are giving now is some ultimate teaching and could not become even more precise in the future when the collective consciousness is raised further. But nevertheless you understand my point, I trust that looking back to the old is not really productive especially not when you are in the transition period between two ages, two spiritual cycles moving from Pisces to Aquarius for the teachings given in Pisces were given for that level of consciousness for that cycle and now we are giving teachings for the Aquarian age.

The rest of this dictation, along with an invocation based on the dictation, is found in the book: Connecting with Your Spiritual Teachers.

 

Copyright © 2023 Kim Michaels

 

Back to Connecting to Your Higher Self and Spiritual Teachers

To be or not to be the Presence 


Listen to a recording of this dictation (subscribers only)

Ascended Master Master Lord Maitreya through Kim Michaels, June 6, 2023. This dictation was given at a conference in Seoul, Korea: Connecting to Your Higher Self and Spiritual Teachers. 

I AM the Ascended Master Lord Maitreya. You might say: “You have told us a lot about how to connect to our spiritual teachers, but not so much about how to connect to our higher self or the I AM Presence.” Yet, we have actually told you many things that are relevant to connecting to your I AM Presence, as well. Because everything that helps you connect to your spiritual teachers, of course, also helps you connect to your I AM Presence. Yet, what I wish to give you is some further thoughts on this.

The image of the I AM Presence at the different stages of the path

Now, as the Chohans have carefully explained, there are stages of the spiritual path. It does not do any good for us to go to a person at the 48th level and give the teaching I am going to give in this dictation. Because when you are at the 48th level, you cannot grasp this teaching. You can, of course, hear about your I AM Presence and you can hear many teachings about the I AM Presence—as they are still valid and relevant teachings about the I AM Presence given all the way back to the I AM Movement in The I AM Discourses.

But at the 48th level, and between the 48th and the 96th level, you will tend to feel that you are separated from your I AM Presence, that there is the distance or a gulf between yourself and your I AM Presence. This is, of course, not an actual distance. I know that we have said that your I AM Presence resides in the lower levels of the spiritual realm. You can say there is a distance in vibration between the Conscious You being focused here in the denser realms of the physical octave, and the spiritual realm. Of course, there is. And that is why you will, at these earlier stages of the path, experience that sense of distance.

But as we have also attempted to explain, you are not actually separated from the spiritual realm in the sense that the spiritual realm interpenetrates the physical realm. Your I AM Presence is around you, within you, with you, wherever you are. But ,of course, you cannot experience that at these lower levels, which is why we have given these teachings in previous dispensations, why we have given this chart of the I AM Presence that depicts that you are the lower figure and some distance above you is the I AM Presence with the colored rings around it, representing your causal body.

And it is valid to use this image for a time. It is also valid at this point to make calls to your I AM Presence, to give prayers to your I AM Presence, to ask your I AM Presence for help, for guidance, for direction. But of course, there comes a point where this is no longer what you need to do, because now you need to make a shift and realize that you will not truly connect to your I AM Presence by projecting this image that is carried over from so many religions that your I AM Presence is like the wish-fulfilling god.

Your I AM Presence, first of all, is not a god, because your I AM Presence—despite what has been thought by students in previous dispensations—your I AM Presence is not ascended. Your I AM Presence is not an ascended being. It becomes an ascended being when you, the Conscious You, ascend back to the Presence. You need to recognize here that there is a fundamental difference between your I AM Presence and an ascended master. The ascended master has ascended. And even though your I AM Presence resides in the lower levels of the spiritual realm, it still is not an ascended master.

Letting go of your old image of the I AM Presence 

Now, at the higher levels of the path, certainly at the 96th level, but even before you can begin to contemplate this. You need to do away with the chart that sees the I AM Presence above you. You can contemplate an image of the I AM Presence around you, visualize this in your mind, but really it is a matter of a more subtle shift. It is a matter of starting to shift the mind, where you begin to challenge this image of a distance between yourself and the Presence. You begin to challenge whatever images you formed in your mind as you were walking the path, whatever images you formed based on the teachings given by us about the I AM Presence. Because what have we attempted to explain to you so carefully? It is that whenever you find the spiritual path, let us just as an example say you are at the 48th level, you are looking at the spiritual path through the consciousness you have at the 48th level.

What has happened to many ascended master students is that they have found an ascended master teaching—in many cases, they were above the 48th level—but nevertheless, whatever level of consciousness you are at, when you find the teaching, you approach the teaching through that level of consciousness, that world view, that perception filter you have. It is inevitable that you project a mental image that is a mixture of the teaching and your perception filter when you find that teaching. You formulate this mental image in your mind, and it may very well allow you to raise your world view, to raise your mental image, but you are still projecting a certain image upon the teaching. This is natural. It is inevitable. We are not in any way blaming you for this.

I am simply saying that when you come to the higher levels of the path, you need to become aware of this. And you need to be willing to look back at your path and say: “Is it possible that when I found the ascended master teachings those many years ago that I formulated a mental image of my I AM Presence that was based on the level of consciousness I had, and which is therefore inaccurate, inadequate, and cannot actually help me connect to the Presence?” And if you look at this neutrally, you will see that the answer is always yes. Because as I said: “What else can you do?”

The teaching appears, when the student needs the teaching

What you unfortunately find is, especially in previous dispensations, that people have made the assumption encouraged by the culture of those dispensations, which were in the Piscean Age, as we have explained. People have made the assumption that because they were able to find this high spiritual teaching from the ascended masters, they must be in a very high level of consciousness. And you may be in a higher level of consciousness than the average person, but nevertheless, you are still at a certain level of consciousness. Many people have found the ascended master teachings at the 48th level. Some have been above it. Some have been some ways above it.

But most, the vast majority of the people who find ascended master teachings are below, even some ways below the 96th level. Why is this? Because the teachings are, of course, designed to help people climb from the 48th to the 96th level—including the teachings of previous dispensations. What would be the point in finding a teaching at a higher level if you needed it at the lower levels? It is constructive to have some humility and realize that when the student is ready, the teacher appears. Which means that the teacher appears, or the teaching appears, when the student needs the teaching. What would be the point in a teacher waiting to appear to the student until the student no longer needs the teaching? You see, a realistic assessment shows you that when you found the teachings, it was because you needed the teaching, meaning you were not at the highest level of consciousness.

But unfortunately, in previous dispensations, many people have assumed differently. They have thought: “I must be at a high level of consciousness in order to be able to find this high teaching.” They have created a certain culture in the organization, a certain mindset in many individuals, that: “The way I looked at the teaching when I first found it, was the highest possible way.” Which means many people have assumed that: “The way I looked at the ascended masters when I first found the teaching, that is the highest way to look at ascended masters,” as the Chohans have explained. But also: “The way I looked at my I AM Presence when I first found the teaching, that is the highest way to look at my I AM Presence.”

The attachment to the old image of the teachings

This means that people found the teaching at a certain lower state of consciousness. They used the teaching to formulate a mental image of their I AM Presence. What the I AM Presence is. What it means to be connected to your I AM Presence. What the I AM Presence can do for you. And they assume that this image is accurate, is the highest possible, so they keep projecting that image. Many students have become very protective of their image. Because what unfortunately happens—when you make this assumption of assuming you were at a very high level when you found the teachings—is that if you had to admit that the mental image of your I AM Presence is inadequate, you would start doubting that you were really at a high level of consciousness when you found the teaching. And this would be a blow to the ego, so the ego does not want to admit this. This is unfortunately a mechanism that we have seen in many students.

This is one of the reasons why you have many of the students from the I AM Movement that could not move on to the Summit Lighthouse. Why there are many students from the Summit Lighthouse who could not move on and accept this messenger. It is not the only reason. Many students were not meant to move on. But the point is that many students have taken a specific teaching, formulated a mental image, become attached to maintaining the illusion that their mental image is correct. And therefore, they are not willing to question it.

There comes that point when they approach the 96th level where the image formulated at lower levels of your I AM Presence is not adequate, because now you need to step up to a higher level of relationship with your Presence. This is an unfortunate reaction from people, when they refuse to reconsider this. And it can truly block their path. There are people who have been on the path for decades, but for a long time they have not really made progress. Or have not made the progress they could have made, if they had been willing to change their mental image of both the masters and their I AM Presences.

Studying I AM Presence from a distance 

This is, of course, a mistake we do not desire to see you make in this dispensation, where you have these much higher teachings. And they are higher because they have the concept of the Conscious You and the separate selves. And this is a revolutionary concept compared to previous teachings for the simple reason that when you grasp it, when you experience it, when you experience that your Conscious You can step outside of a subconscious self, then you have a tool, you have a process that can take you all the way to the 144th level. But it can also help you develop a different relationship to your I AM Presence which is not based on a mental image.

What is it, as the Chohans so carefully explained, that you do when you formulate this mental image with the linear mind and project it? Well, you are seeing from a distance. You are seeing that: “Here I am. I am a subject. My I AM Presence is up there. It is the object that I am studying, that I am approaching, that I am praying to.” But as long as you see yourself as a subject and the I AM Presence as an object, what are you doing? You are affirming that there is a distance between yourself and the I AM Presence. But how can you get beyond that distance? How can you connect? How can you become one with the I AM Presence, if you are projecting that there is a distance?

Experiencing Oneness with the I AM Presence

Some students have gone into this almost obsessive-compulsive state of mind where they think that: “If only I give enough violet flame to transmute my karma, then I will become one with my I AM Presence. Now, I have given three hours of violet flame decrees a day for ten years, but I am not one with my I AM Presence. Maybe if I give four hours of violet flame a day, I will become one with I AM Presence. And if that does not work, well, how much more can I give in a day?” You think that in order to get to the goal, you have to push. And if you do not get to the goal, you just have to push harder or you have to continue to push the same way for a longer time. But how are you ever going to get to the goal if you are pushing it in front of you, if you are pushing it away from you? There comes that point where you have to step back and stop pushing.

And you need to realize the simple dynamic we have explained with our teachings about the subconscious selves. What keeps you from Oneness with your I AM Presence is the subconscious selves that you have. As you overcome these selves, it becomes easier and easier for the Conscious You to withdraw itself from the outer mind—the identity, mental and emotional minds. It becomes easier for the Conscious You to step outside of the remaining selves you have left. That means that as you approach that 96th level, it will be natural for you to actually experience your I AM Presence, not from a distance, but as being around you. It is, you might say, that you experience that you are part of the Presence, you are inside the Presence.

Instead of seeing the Presence up there, you begin to experience that the Presence is around you and, as the Chohans have given the image of the wave that rises from the ocean, you are just a wave rising on the ocean of your I AM Presence. And when you are focused, your attention is focused at the top of the wave, it is difficult to see this. But if you allow yourself to sink into the wave deeper and deeper, then you become able to sense the ocean itself. And you become able to flow with that movement of the ocean. And that is when you begin to experience more of that, not so much a connection to your I AM Presence, but oneness with the I AM Presence.

I am Presence”

Why are we talking about connecting to an ascended master, but oneness with the Presence? Well, because you are not the ascended master, but you are the I AM Presence. You are out of the I AM Presence. Yes, you can technically say that your I AM Presence is created out of the Presence of ascended masters, but nevertheless, from your perspective, it is not so that you will ever come to a complete oneness with an ascended master. You can have a sense of oneness, but you still realize that Master MORE or Saint Germain are distinct ascended beings. But your I AM Presence is not a distinct being, even though it seems that way at the lower levels of the path. But that is the illusion you need to start challenging as you rise higher.

You need to challenge the illusion that your I AM Presence is a separate being from you. You are, as I said, out of the I AM Presence. You are a wave on the ocean of the Presence. That is why it is more fruitful to say that you connect to an ascended master, you become one with the I AM Presence. Or rather, you overcome the illusion that you are separated from the I AM Presence, that you are something different from the I AM Presence. Until you realize: “I am the Presence.” And everything that the other masters have given you about connecting to your spiritual teachers, of course, applies to the I AM Presence, as well. The more you shift your consciousness, the more you overcome the linear mind, the more you overcome the separate selves, the easier it is for you to feel that oneness with the I AM Presence.

But I want to give you also a seemingly very simple tool, some might call it simplistic, but it actually has the potential to have a profound effect. You know how you can say that an actor on a stage can have a great stage presence? Or you can say about a person that they have a certain presence? Well, your I AM Presence is a presence. Yes, it has individuality, but it is a presence. What you have been used to is looking at the I AM Presence as a presence up there apart from you. You might even say: “I am the I AM Presence.”

But the tool I want to give you is to switch this a little bit and simply take some time, go into a quiet room, close your eyes. And then, you meditate on this mantra: “I am Presence.” Not: “I AM Presence,” but “I am Presence.” You see, it may seem like a play on words, but it is much more than that. Instead of thinking about your Presence as the I AM Presence, your mantra is: “I am Presence. I am Presence. I am Presence.” And when you meditate on this mantra, this can be a very effective way to come to actually experience the Presence.

Your I AM Presence is an unascended being

And really, you will not begin to connect to or feel oneness with your I AM Presence until the Conscious You has had that experience of stepping outside the outer personality and experiencing the Presence, experiencing yourself as the Presence. But this, of course, is only the first challenge of Christ as it relates to the I AM Presence. The second challenge of Christ is that now when the Conscious You comes back into your normal state of mind, you have to be very careful that you do not fail the second challenge of Christ and start projecting your mental images on the experience with the Presence. Start again projecting your mental images upon the Presence.

And you have to especially be careful once you start having that experience of oneness with the Presence that you do not project the image upon the Presence that you might have of the wish-fulfilling god or ascended masters. As I said, your I AM Presence is not yet an ascended being. You cannot expect that your I AM Presence knows everything. This is an assumption you find in previous dispensations, where they thought the I AM Presence is like a god, is like an ascended master, knows everything, has superhuman supernatural abilities and can grant me favors and protect me from karma and do this for me. But that is not the case.

Your I AM Presence is an unascended being. Now, it is not in duality, of course, it is not even in the lower realms of the physical octave. It has a broader perspective than you have. But you need to recognize that your I AM Presence still has certain desires for what it wants to experience on earth. The desires that caused it to send you, the Conscious You, as an extension of the Presence. And the I AM Presence does not have a full understanding of everything that an ascended master understands. Even though it is in the lower realms of the spiritual realm, it is still not an ascended being. It does not have the perspective of an ascended being. The I AM Presence is still focused on itself as it sees itself. That is why you cannot look at your I AM Presence as a being who can answer any question you have.

There are people who have thought that they can ask their I AM Presence about any cosmological issue. But that is not the case. You really do not want to look at your I AM Presence as some being who is going to do something for you. Because if you are maintaining this image that your I AM Presence will protect you or will do something for you or will answer your questions or tell you what to do, you are still reinforcing the sense of distance. And other masters have talked about that there is a dilemma, there is an enigma, there is an almost schizophrenic stage of the spiritual path where you are balancing seemingly incompatible things.

Stepping up to the greater union with the Presence

And truly when you begin to experience the Presence, it is a slightly schizophrenic phase you go into. Because you have your ordinary everyday life, you have your responsibilities in this world, and yet you are beginning to experience the Presence, which has a different perspective on life in the world than you do. It can be difficult to balance the two. It can especially be difficult to resist the temptation to have your I AM Presence help you out of some difficult situation or have your I AM Presence tell you what to do in specific situations. Many people have asked for advice from their I AM Presences.

But see, when you begin to go into this phase, the I AM Presence is also in a delicate situation. Because the I AM Presence wants the Conscious You to grow towards union with the Presence. And this means that if you are asking the I AM Presence for advice or directions—if the I AM Presence were to answer it, it would validate your image that you are separated from the Presence. That the Presence is up there. That the Presence is like the genie in a bottle who can grant you any wish you want. You see, if you allow yourself to maintain this mental image of separation, there comes a period where your I AM Presence must withdraw from you, so to speak, and not answer your questions, not give you a frame of reference. And there are people who have felt this, that they felt like they were cut off from a connection they had had earlier. It can be a connection with an ascended master. But in many cases, it is the connection with the Presence. And that is because you have not stepped up.

You have not let go of this mental image based on the sense of distance. And therefore, the I AM Presence must withdraw until you work it out in your mind, overcome that sense of distance, begin to challenge it. And then, your Presence can again interact with you. But what you need to come to, and what I am seeking to help you come to, is to come to the point where you are not asking your I AM Presence for answers to specific questions, for directions on what to do or not to do in situations. You are moving towards a point where you can, as I said in the mantra, recognize I am Presence here in the world. Not that I am the I AM Presence, but I am Presence because the Presence is here with you. The Presence can be expressed through your lower being. And this is actually what it means to be at these stages of personal Christhood. I know we have explained that it is the Christ mind that expresses itself through you and that is correct.

You do need the Christ mind, but your I AM Presence is not separated from the Christ mind. But what we have said previously, what Saint Germain explained also, is that when you come to these levels of Christhood, you do not become a marionette. You do not become a puppet on a string. Because you have to decide how you want to express your Christhood. However, the Conscious You does not have to decide this alone or as a separate being. When you come to this greater union with the Presence, then who is it that is deciding? Is it the Conscious You or is it the Presence? As Jesus said, my Father worketh hitherto and I work.

The I Will Be Who I Will Be aspect of the Presence

There can come a point where you start feeling: “Where is the difference between the Presence and the Conscious You? Where is the difference between the Presence and myself?” And even asking that question implies a distance. But there can come a point where you go beyond that question, where you just experience: “It is not meaningful to even ask the question, because there is no longer any difference.” You begin to realize that the Conscious You is the Presence. You are the Presence in the physical octave, in the emotional realm, in the mental, in the identity.

You are the Presence. But you are, as we have said before (some time ago), the ‘I Will Be Who I Will Be’ aspect of the Presence. As opposed to the ‘I AM That I AM’ aspect of the Presence. The ‘I Will Be Who I Will Be’ is the omega, the feminine or the expressive aspect of the Presence. There is the ‘I AM That I AM’ which is and will remain in the spiritual realm, so it cannot be destroyed by anything that could happen in the unascended sphere. But the ‘I Will Be Who I Will Be’ aspect is what decides to express itself in the unascended sphere. You can say that the Christ mind gives you an energy and momentum that is moving. But it is the ‘I Will Be’ aspect of the Presence that directs that movement to go into specific situations and manifest specific manifestations or have specific experiences.

There comes a point where the distinctions fade away. What is the distinction between the Christ mind, the I AM Presence and the Conscious You? At lower levels, yes, it gives meaning to have that distinction, because it can help the Conscious You shift its awareness. But there comes a point where, for the Conscious You, the distinctions fade away. You are not concerned about it. There comes a point where you are not concerned where you are at on the 144 levels of consciousness. Are you at the 97th or the 108th or the 128th? You are not concerned about it anymore, because you know you are continuing to look for whatever illusions you need to see. That most of the time you are focused on expressing yourself in this world, what you want to express in this world. It does not matter what level you are at. It does not matter the distinction between the different levels or the distinction between the Christ mind, the universal Christ mind, the I AM Presence and the Conscious You. They all blend together.

The rest of this dictation, along with an invocation based on the dictation, is found in the book: Connecting with Your Spiritual Teachers.

 

Copyright © 2023 Kim Michaels

 

Back to Connecting to Your Higher Self and Spiritual Teachers

Freedom to decide how you want to express your Christhood


Listen to a recording of this dictation (subscribers only)

Ascended Master Master Saint Germain through Kim Michaels, June 6, 2023. This dictation was given at a conference in Seoul, Korea: Connecting to Your Higher Self and Spiritual Teachers. 

I AM the Ascended Master Saint Germain and I am very happy, if you can apply the word happy to an ascended master who is always in a neutral state of mind, to be here with you. I want to make some remarks about the situation in Korea whereby I do not mean the physical situation but the situation that has been brought about by the fact that so many of you have embraced these teachings and have done all the work you have done with translating, giving invocations, giving vigils, creating groups, studying the teachings.

Magnificent work of the Ascended Master students in Korea

You may look at the physical and say: “What has been the results of our labor, what difference has it made in the physical?” But I am not so concerned about the physical because the physical will always be a reflection of what happens in the three higher levels. It is just a matter of time before it breaks through to the physical what has been changed in the three higher levels. And by all of the work you have done here in Korea, you have indeed created what we might call a seismic shift in the collective consciousness in the emotional, mental and identity bodies.

You have especially created a change in the identity and mental levels because the emotional body will always be more turbulent because so many people have various fears, various doubts, various animosities and angers that are more difficult to calm. But nevertheless, the real change always begins at the identity and mental level and what you have called forth is a descent of ideas from me into the identity and mental bodies, not only of the collective consciousness, but of many people in Korea and I include North Korea in that, because that is Korea also, that are receptive to these ideas. These people do not know anything about the ascended masters, do not need to know anything about ascended masters for they are in a position to implement some of these ideas and therefore you will see in the coming years changes even in the physical.

When that will happen, exactly how it will happen, is always impossible to predict because of what we have said about the interdependent originations where there are so many complex factors of all of the people in both North and South Korea and in a sense, it is a matter of when do a critical mass of people come into alignment with a certain idea, then that idea can break through to the physical and when that happens is, of course, a matter of free will. What we can say is that you who are the ascended master students in Korea have done your part. You have done more than your part. You have done a magnificent work and I hope sincerely that you will all feel fulfilled in the work you have done and approach the coming work that you want to do, that you are willing to do, with a sense of joyfulness, a sense of fulfillment, a sense of peace and a sense of accomplishment.

The necessary linear approach to the path

The Seventh Ray, the Ray of Freedom. What does it take to tune in to the Seventh Ray? Well, obviously you need freedom but freedom from what? Well, as the other Chohans have described, freedom from the linear mind. What is it the linear mind projects when it comes to freedom? It looks at current conditions, it says: “I cannot be free because I am oppressed by this dictator. I cannot be free because I do not have enough money. I cannot be free because I do not have this and I do not have that.” The linear mind then attempts to create a linear course, a linear progression that says: “I do not have freedom because I lack this or I have too much of that. So, I have to project a step-by-step course that leads me to a point where now I have what I need to be free.” You start moving in that direction, you start pushing in that direction, you use the linear mind to discipline yourself and your actions and your feelings and your thoughts and you push and push and push.

Now again, we have said on the spiritual path you move from the 48th to the 96th level by pulling yourself above the mass consciousness. So, you need to take that linear approach: “What do I need to do? How many decrees do I need to give? What invocations? What do I need to study? What do I need to do? What kind of therapy might I need?” All of these things and you can plot this. You can basically plan your path from the 48th to the 96th level as this step-by-step path. This is perfectly in order. It is as Nada said, a matter of using the linear mind to deal with the practical realities of the physical octave which includes the collective consciousness. You can plot a course as many ascended master students have done when they found an ascended master teaching whether this one or previous dispensation and say: “I need to study, I need to participate in these activities, I need to give so many decrees every day.” And they have done it faithfully for some time, some people for a long time.

But here is the trouble with a linear mind. What many students have done is they have created this plan for what they are going to do and then they have said: “I need to keep doing this until I am free”, or they have said: “I need to keep doing this for the rest of my life.” And there is the trouble with the linear mind when it comes to freedom. What are you doing when you are plotting a course with the linear mind? You are, if you want to put it directly, putting yourself in jail. You are saying: “Here is what I have to do and here is what I have to continue to do until I am free.” But you see you are enclosing yourself in a structure—“This is what I have to do.“ Is it not a form of prison you are creating for your mind?

The necessary shift at the 96th level

You can say when you are overpowered by the mass consciousness you are in one form of jail because you have little ability to make individual choices. Now you find a teaching, a spiritual teaching and many spiritual people who have not found ascended master teachings but other teachings have done the same thing and you plot a course and say: “This is what I have to do” to attain whatever goal is defined in your spiritual teaching, be it enlightenment, awakening, ascension, whatever it may be and as we have said, between the 48th and the 96th level it is right for you to plot a course of using spiritual tools and teachings to raise yourself above that mass consciousness, to dissolve those selves, to follow the course of self-mastery. This is what you need to do to raise yourself out of the prison of the mass consciousness. In order to do this, you have to be focused, but the effect is that you are putting your mind into a structure and that is a prison for the mind.

This is not a problem as long as you are rising above that mass consciousness, but what Nada so eloquently explained is that it becomes a problem when you use the linear mind to project beyond the practical realities of this Ma-ter world, including all four levels. What many, many spiritual people including ascended master students have done is, they have embarked on the spiritual path and they have used the teaching to project this course they have to follow and now they project based on the understanding they have when they start the path—“This is what I have to continue to do, this will then take me into these higher levels of enlightenment or the Christ consciousness whatever you call it.”

But as we have explained at the 96th level you face a certain initiation, a critical initiation and it can be described in many ways as we have done, but one way to describe it is to say that you have to recognize that what has taken you to the 96th level cannot take you beyond. Because you see what you have done, you have used the linear mind to project what it is like to be the Christ, what it is like to go into the levels of consciousness above the 96th level which are the levels of personal Christhood.

What have we attempted to explain so many times? Look at our teachings. Go back and study what has been said, going all the way back to 2002 about Christhood. The Christ does not fit in any structure. What is the second challenge of Christ? It is that after you have recognized Christ you do not attempt to pull Christ into the structure created by the linear mind. You cannot move into Christhood through the linear mind. The linear mind cannot take you there, so whatever images you have projected on yourself and the path based on the linear mind below the 96th level, cannot take you into the levels of Christhood—they do not apply. I am not thereby saying you should stop giving decrees or studying the teachings. It is a much more subtle shift of consciousness.

The state of listening grace

What can be helpful for many of you is to make a decision and say: “I am not going to stop giving my decrees and invocations, I am not going to stop studying the teachings, but I am going to set aside some time where I am just going to sit down in a quiet room, close my eyes and attempt to the best of my ability, to go into a neutral state of mind—what Jesus meant when he said: “Unless you become as little children you shall in all wise enter the kingdom”—what the Buddhists talk about when they talk about “beginner’s mind”. Once in a while just attempt to go into a state of listening—listening grace.

If you feel a particular affinity to a particular master, ask that master to anchor his or her Presence over you and help you just listen. Just be neutral. Do not ask for answers, do not ask for directions, do not ask for a solution to particular problems or situations you are facing. That you can do at other times. Just ask the master to help you be neutral and listen because as you move beyond the 96th level and for that matter as you are moving close to it, you need to sense what is the next direction you need to go in, what is the next phase on your path. And it is different for each one of you, so there is no standard answer to this.

Striving to live up to the image of the good student

That is why again it is so problematic with the linear mind because what we saw in previous ascended master dispensations is that people took our teachings and they created a certain mental image of what it meant to be a good chela. And this created an organizational culture where there was a mental image created—this is a good chela—and then this image that was created was very difficult to live up to. It was actually like what we have talked about the fallen beings who project this image of perfection but nobody can really define what it is, so it is impossible to live up to it. So it was with this image of the good chela. You could define certain outer requirements but it was not really clearly defined, so it was very difficult to live up to and it required an enormous amount of time and dedication because the outer requirements were very, very elaborate. You have to do all of these decrees. You have to live a certain way, eat a certain way, walk a certain way, talk a certain way, think a certain way, feel a certain way and it just became exhausting and very difficult to live up to.

So, the people who attempted to live up to it, they had to strain so hard to live up to this image that they became literally stressed by it. They put themselves in a constant state of stress, tension, almost to the breaking point. It was almost like a rubber band that is stretched as far as can be stretched and it is very close to breaking. And so, when people go into this state of mind, they become very judgmental of other people. They are, for that matter, judgmental of themselves because they are always judging: “Do I live up to the image of a good chela or am I failing at some point?” But they also became very judgmental of others and that is why there was created this very judgmental state of consciousness where people were always judging each other.

And I can assure you that there were people who came in contact with one of these ascended master organizations and they sensed this judgmental culture and they just said: “Not for me”. And many of these people had a higher level of consciousness than the people inside the organization, which is something that the people inside the organization would not have believed because they thought they were in the highest state of consciousness because they were striving to live up to this image of the good chela. So, when they saw people come and leave, they would say: “They were not chela material”. But they actually were. They were actually at a higher level. They were at a higher level of where they were beyond creating this judgmental culture.

Very subtle dualistic selves above the 96th level

All I am pointing out about this is that we do not want to see you repeat this pattern. We want our students in this dispensation to transcend these patterns so you can come to this point where you are free. What does it mean to be free? Well, from the 48th to the 96th level it means to be free from the mass consciousness, free from the dualistic selves. I trust you realize that you need a deeper understanding of these selves. We have explained that when you go below the 48th level of consciousness you go into separation and you use the duality consciousness to create these selves so these are dualistic selves. Then as you rise above the 48th level of consciousness you are walking towards the 96th level. But because of the density of the planet, you will still carry some of these dualistic selves with you that you have not yet overcome. In other words, it is not so that once you reach the 48th level you have overcome all of the selves that were created in duality.

This might take a little bit of contemplation because perhaps we have been a little too linear in our previous explanations. But look at it this way, there are 144 possible levels of consciousness on earth. If you start at the top and go to the1444th level from where you started at your I AM Presence, in order to go down to the 144th level you take on a particular illusion. This is not a dualistic illusion. It is just an illusion that relates to the physical octave on a planet like earth with the density of matter. What does it take for you to feel that you can even take embodiment, that you can even integrate with a physical body? You take on an illusion at the 144th level, you take on the next illusion, you go down to the 143rd level and you keep going till the 96th level.

These are illusions that basically at this level, help you integrate with an identity body, a mental body and an emotional body so that you can start creating the selves in these bodies that can give you experiences in the physical octave. Then at the 96th level you create more selves that relate to integrating partly with the emotional body still but also with the physical body. So that when you first descend into embodiment at the 48th level, your being, your conscious self is integrated with the physical body. You have structures in your identity mind, mental mind, emotional mind and even the mind connected to the body that allows you to function and actually do something on earth.

These selves are not dualistic selves. Then when you go below the 48th level, go down to the 47th level, you take on another illusion, create another self and you can keep going to the lowest level. What I am saying is, for each of the 144 levels there is a particular self that allows you to be at that level of consciousness. However, there are many more than the 144 types of selves that people have created on earth. Because when you are at a particular level of consciousness, there is a particular illusion that takes you down to that level but a particular self that keeps you at that level. But you can still horizontally create selves at that level. Where this becomes relevant is that as you go below the 48th level of consciousness, go into duality, there is a very large number of dualistic selves that people have created throughout history and some of these have become collective selves that are now in the collective emotional, mental and identity bodies.

There are many more than 144 selves that have been created on earth and it is inevitable that you take on some of these selves or rather you create your own personal version of them. What I am saying is that as you reach the 48th level and start the spiritual path, this does not mean you have overcome all of the dualistic selves. You still carry some with you and you can even carry some of the more subtle dualistic selves with you above the 96th level. These are, of course, not what you would call aggressive selves that are harming other people but still selves that relate to the dualistic illusions, the dualistic view of the world.

For what is it that Nada described that the Hindu Brahmins have done? Well, they had, many of them, used the duality consciousness to project onto the spiritual realm. Lanto explained very eloquently how there is this concept of No-Self that has been created. There is the concept of Brahman, the concept of nothingness, but they are dualistic concepts and these kinds of selves can be carried with you even above the 96th level because they can be very difficult for people to resolve. You, in fact, see spiritual teachers out there who have reached beyond the 96th level but they still carry with them some of these dualistic selves because they have not resolved the illusion. They have not seen through the illusion.

The second challenge of Christ at each level of the path

What I am saying is that there comes that point when you approach the 96th level and go beyond where you cannot use the linear mind to plot what course you should take from the 96th to the 144th level of consciousness. I know that from a certain perspective it seems like you are just continuing the growth that you went through from the 48th to the 96th level. After all, at the 96th level what is the challenge? To overcome the illusion that brings you to the 97th level. At that level the challenge is to overcome the illusion that brings you to the 98th level and so forth. But you see, this process cannot be done with a linear mind. You could even say it cannot really be done with the linear mind from the 48th to the 96th level because the linear mind cannot help you see through the illusions.

It is actually only the Christ mind that helps you see through an illusion. But especially above the 96th level it is necessary to step back and really consciously acknowledge the limitations of the linear mind and really acknowledge that even up till the 144th level you are still at each level facing that second challenge of Christ. Will you use the Christ consciousness to transcend your level, or will you attempt to pull the Christ consciousness into conforming to the illusion, the worldview you have at that level? And at the 96th level and above you need to be constantly aware of this challenge because you can theoretically stop at the 143rd level and not go above it because you think that Christ has validated the worldview you have at that level. But there is, as we have said so many times, no ultimate truth, no ultimate worldview on earth and you will only rise, you will only ascend by transcending it.

The danger of becoming trapped at any level

Again, some of the students from previous dispensations would vehemently object to this. They will say this is a completely false teaching, it goes against everything that was said in previous dispensations. But it does not actually go against what was said, it only goes beyond. And my beloved, if progressive revelation does not go beyond what was given previously exactly how is it progressive?
Let that thought take root in your mind because it is the key to navigating the very subtle initiations above the 96th level.

There is a certain dilemma, a certain dichotomy, that will always be there on a planet like earth because of the density of matter and the collective consciousness. In a sense, as you rise to the higher levels of the path, you reach the higher levels of consciousness, clearly you do. But—and it is an important but, this does not mean the initiations become easier. The tendency for many people when they reach higher levels of consciousness, and I am not just talking about ascended master students but spiritual people in general, is that they look at the path they have followed, they look how far they have come and they say: “I have made tremendous progress compared to where I started 30 or 40 or however many years ago”. There is also a tendency that people look at other people and say: “I am clearly at a higher level of consciousness than these people, I know much more about the spiritual path, I have overcome many illusions and attachments.” And I am not in any way saying this is wrong.

There are many people who have reached a high level of consciousness compared to the average person on earth. There are many people throughout history who have reached a certain level, set themselves up as gurus or spiritual teachers. There are many people today who have genuinely reached a high level of consciousness, higher than the 96th level, higher than the general population. They have set themselves up as spiritual teachers. And they look down from their level of consciousness and they clearly see: “I am at a higher level.” But what they do not always realize is that it now becomes very easy for you when you are looking down to see the initiations that other people are going through, it is very easy for you to see the illusions that they hold on to and so you think you have acquired the ability to see through all illusions.

It is always difficult to see the next illusion

You might even think you are enlightened or awakened or ego-free or have attained a state of non-self or whatever labels people put on it. But what many people have failed to realize is that you are not at the top level of consciousness that can be reached on earth because if you were, you would have ascended. And when you look up to the initiations you have not yet passed, to the illusions you have not yet seen, well, despite all of your accomplishments, it has not become any easier to see the next illusion.

For whatever level you are at, it is always difficult to see the next illusion. The illusion you have not seen at the 143rd level is just as difficult to see as the illusion at the 48th level. Why? Because this is the illusion that brought you down to that level and it is as difficult to see at the 143rd level as any lower level. You have gained momentum, you have expanded your awareness, you have seen through all of these lower illusions. But with your present level of consciousness, it is still difficult to see your present illusion. Which means what? It means that whatever level of consciousness you are at, you need the Christ mind. You cannot, with your present state of mind, see through the illusion by yourself. You cannot reason through the illusion. The Conscious You, when it is looking from inside the self at your current level, cannot analyze, rationalize, use logic or a spiritual teaching to see through the illusion. You always need to step outside the self, experience the Christ perspective, then you can see through the illusion.

You will not be home free until you ascend

But you cannot do this if you think you have reached some ultimate level. If you think the self you are currently seeing through is an enlightened self, then you cannot step outside of it. That is why you can become trapped at any level and many people throughout the ages have done so. There are many people who have set themselves up as gurus, who have been revered as gurus, who have been looked up to as ‘this guru was certainly enlightened’. And the guru might have attained a high level of consciousness, say the 140th level, which is very high compared to the average person and so it is understandable that people look at this guru and say: “Oh he is surely enlightened, he surely understands so much more”. And he does, and he might be able to help people, but is he really enlightened if he has stopped at 140th level and does not acknowledge that there is something he has not seen, some illusion he has not seen? Is there not the danger that the guru will, without maybe even realizing this consciously, pass on to his followers that this is the highest level you need to go to and then you will be home free. But you will not be home free at the 140th level. You cannot ascend from there, or from the 143rd for that matter.

If a guru stops at a certain level, what happens? Well, he becomes a false guru. Now everything he says might still have some truth to it. And he may still point out a genuine path leading upwards. But he is a false guru if he says there is nothing above that level. Or he is a false guru if he preaches that the goal of the path is to attain a state of no-self instead of the ever-self-transcending self.

The Christ mind is spherical not linear

These were some remarks that I wanted to make, to bring out there as part of our ongoing teaching. But in terms of the topic here, the topic at hand of tuning in, connecting to your spiritual teachers, how do you best connect to the Seventh Ray? Well, in a sense the teachings I have given can help you connect because it can help you realize that to truly connect you need to free yourself from the image created by the linear mind of how your path should progress.

There is, as I said, a phase where you need to follow that path, that linear path. But above the 96th level or at the 96th level you need to realize that the path in a way becomes more spherical. Instead of following this linear progression, you can actually above the 96th level—you can jump. You might go from the 97th level and suddenly you see through the illusion at the 108th level. Then you jump to the 120th, then you jump back to the 98th, then to the 104th. In other words, these illusions are not quite as linear. You do not have to see through the 97th and then the 98th and then the 99th. You can jump more from one to the other.

This of course, is another subtlety because you can think that: “Oh I have seen through the illusion at the 120th level so I am above the one at the 97th.” But if you skip the one at the 97th, well, you are not ready to ascend. But nevertheless, what you need to do with your conscious mind is consciously realize that the linear mind has taken you as far as it can take you and now you need to focus more on the intuitive spherical mind and that is the Christ mind. The Christ mind is not linear. I know this can be subtle to understand because we have said that there is an aspect of the Christ consciousness for each of the levels so that even at the lowest level you can see through the illusion at that level. But the Christ mind is not linear. Why? Because the Christ mind is the one mind, the undivided mind and if the Christ mind is undivided, how can you create a linear progression? You can only create linearity when there is a division into different steps, different levels.

Freedom from and freedom to

You could say that there is a certain danger in giving you this view of the 144th level of consciousness because the linear mind will project that it is an entirely linear process. But that is why we have given you the many teachings about the Christ consciousness and the Conscious You stepping outside of your current illusion. When you are willing to do this, when you lock into this process, then you will go beyond the linear mind. What we can say also is that between the 48th and the 96th level, you are striving to attain ‘freedom from’. Ultimately freedom from the mass consciousness, but also freedom from the illusions. But the shift you need to make at the 96th level is, instead of seeking ‘freedom from’, you are seeking ‘freedom to’.

‘Freedom to’ what? Freedom from is easy to understand. You have a limitation you want to escape. You can say: “Well, I am in jail, but now I have the key and now I walk out the door, now I am free from the jail.” But you will notice that many people who have been in jail for many years and are released, they stand there: “What do I do now?” They do not know what to do with their lives now that they are free from the jail and this is one of the difficult initiations when you go beyond the 96th level. You are free from the mass consciousness. You are free from a lot of illusions in your own mind: “What do I do now? What am I supposed to do with my current level of consciousness?”

“My Father worketh hitherto and I work”

And this is where you need to step up and realize that being the Christ is not what you have thought it was based on how you looked at it through the linear mind. Because many people have with the linear mind created this image that when you attain the Christ consciousness, well, your I AM Presence or the ascended masters are telling you what to do. Basically, they think that you give up your free will, you become a marionette and some have even looked at Jesus’ teachings who said: “I can of my own self do nothing, it is the Father within me who doeth the work”. And so they think: “When I reach that level, I can say whew, the work is done, now my I AM Presence can take over, I do not need to think, I do not need to make decisions, just let the Presence do it.” But that is not what being the Christ means because what did Jesus also say? “My Father worketh hitherto and I work”.

As the Christ, you recognize something you cannot recognize with the linear mind. In the linear mind you think: “I am a separate being, I have certain powers, I have certain abilities, I can do something.” And you can. Even in the duality consciousness you can do something. Everything has a price, everything creates karma, but you can do something. There are even those who have the sense that only when you go into duality you gain truly free will because now you can do whatever you want without feeling restricted by all this karma nonsense and consequences and being considerate of other people and turning the other cheek and all of this stuff.

There are people who think that once you reach the Christ consciousness, now God or the ascended masters or your I AM Presence will tell you what to do. But what have we said? You are created to be a co-creator and as a co-creator you do not think that you are a separate being who has separate abilities. You realize that everything you do is done with the energy coming from your I AM Presence so your father, the I AM Presence, works by giving you energy. It may also give you directions because the I AM Presence has desires for what it wants to experience on earth.

But within those parameters it is up to you, the Conscious You, to still make decisions. What do you want to do on earth? How do you want to express your Christhood? What experiences do you want to have on earth? And this can be a tricky challenge for many people, especially if they have been very dedicated to following this very disciplined path: “What do I do now?”

The rest of this dictation, along with an invocation based on the dictation, is found in the book: Connecting with Your Spiritual Teachers.

 

Copyright © 2023 Kim Michaels

 

Back to Connecting to Your Higher Self and Spiritual Teachers

Let go of your mental image of Nada and experience her Presence


Listen to a recording of this dictation (subscribers only)

Ascended Master Master Nada through Kim Michaels, June 6, 2023. This dictation was given at a conference in Seoul, Korea: Connecting to Your Higher Self and Spiritual Teachers. 

I AM the Ascended Master Nada. You may find a certain irony in the fact that we have talked about the linear mind and yet here we are, the Chohans, lining up in a linear fashion. Nevertheless, as we have said, there is, of course, a linear progression from the Creator through the levels of creation, the previous spheres, to this sphere. You cannot say that everything that has a progression is necessarily what we mean when we talk about the linear mind. For the linear mind is a specific phenomenon that exists in an unascended sphere. And as we have said, the linear mind is not really a problem when it is seen for what it is, namely a tool to deal with the practical aspects of life.

A linear progression in practical life

You know very well that in your life you have a certain schedule, you have certain obligations. Perhaps you go to school, perhaps you take your children to school, perhaps you go to work, so you are there, you have to be a certain place at a certain time and therefore you need to have a certain linear progression, a certain linear schedule in your daily life in order to make everything function.

This is a very practical thing. You know, for example, that if you want to build a house, you need to set up a linear progression. You buy the property, you get the plans, you line up the different contractors that can do the work and everything needs to happen according to a linear progression, a linear timeline. The same in society, when things have to be done, when a big construction work has to be completed, or just to get daily life to function in society, the buses have to be on time, the trains have to be on time and all of these things, so the linear mind is a very useful tool.

Using the linear mind to reason about the spiritual realm

The problem comes in when people start to use the linear mind to deal with other topics than practical life in the physical octave. This has been a problem throughout history. As we have explained, at the time of the Buddha, the Brahmins of the Hindu religion had used the linear mind to reason about matters that had nothing to do with practical daily life, but that dealt with cosmological issues, including what it is like in the spiritual realm.
The Buddha saw how this had created all kinds of confusion, because what the linear mind does is it looks at conditions in the material world. It tries to set up a certain linear progression, a linear cause-effect sequence that it can detect in the physical world, and then it wants to extend that cause and effect sequence into the spiritual realm. And therefore it uses the conditions in the material world to reason backwards into what it is like in the spiritual world. Can you grasp why this is such a dangerous, we might say, approach? The conditions in the material world are not a pure reflection of the spiritual world. We have explained to you that there is a certain linear progression from the Creator to the highest level of creation, the first sphere. The Creator set a certain matrix. The beings in the first sphere worked within that matrix. They created the second sphere, then the third, and so forth. Everything that was originally created in your sphere is an expression of all of the layers above.

Therefore, you can say that there is a certain progression. But first of all, this progression leads from the highest possible level through these levels of more and more expressed forms. And it is not even a linear cause-effect sequence. It is not the result of mechanical laws. It is the result of a creative process that is not entirely linear. Yet what I am saying is that there is no way that you, from a planet like Earth in an unascended sphere, can fathom what it is like in the higher spheres. You cannot grasp this while you are in embodiment. And therefore, trying to reason based on what you see on earth about what it is like in the spiritual realm is a fool’s errand, a futile quest.

Projecting impure conditions on earth onto the spiritual realm

But then comes the next level of difficulty. We have explained that originally the earth was created by the seven Elohim. They are, of course, ascended beings. They are, of course, one with the entire hierarchy leading up to the Creator. They create within the framework of the previous spheres. Yet what the Elohim created is not the conditions you see on earth today. You could say that if you could see the original conditions created by the Elohim, then you could see certain principles, certain of what science likes to call natural laws, although they are more spiritual than natural. And you could then say: “If we understand these laws, we can reason about why the beings who defined these laws did define them the way they did. And therefore, we can reason something about what these beings thought, what their consciousness is. And therefore, we can look at the original conditions on earth and we can use the linear mind to reason about what it is like at the level of the Elohim.” That can be done with a linear mind. But you cannot go beyond that level of the Elohim with a linear mind, because from the sixth sphere to the fifth sphere, it is not a linear progression. The linear mind cannot reason very far up into the spiritual realm. But now, of course, we have also told you that conditions that you see on earth now are not what the Elohim originally created. And the reason for this is, as we have explained many times, that humanity went into the consciousness of separation and started to use the duality consciousness, which has resulted in dramatic changes on earth. The densification of matter, the lack of natural resources, and the entire collective consciousness has been taken down to a level that is much lower than when the earth was first created.

You now have a condition on earth that is not natural, not a pure extension of what the Elohim created. What was it that the Brahmins of the Hindu religion did? They looked at current conditions on earth, they attempted to discover patterns, regularities, and then they used the linear mind to project the regularities, the patterns we see in the physical realm, can be extended upwards into the realm beyond the physical. And this can tell us something about the gods, and why the gods are the way they are, and why they created the world the way they created it. But can you see that this can never give you an accurate picture of the spiritual realm? You are taking conditions that are not purely spiritual and projecting them onto what is spiritual. It is, of course, not only the Hindu Brahmins who have done this. As we have explained also in the Judeo-Christian tradition, the angry god in the sky is an image projected by human beings based on the fallen psychology and the duality consciousness. You see throughout history, around the world, people have taken an observation of how conditions are right now on this unnatural planet and used the linear mind to project this onto the spiritual realm, the heaven world, or whatever they have called it.

Changing the effect at the level of effect

And basically, why have they done this? Because they are disturbed by current conditions on earth. They are suffering, as the Buddha said, because when you go into the duality consciousness, life is suffering. You are being driven hither and yon by the Sea of Samsara. People want a way out of suffering, and they sense intuitively there must be a reason why they are suffering. And this is a true intuition. There is a reason why you are suffering. And now they observe that it seems like there are certain things in the physical octave, certain effects in the physical octave that have a cause. And sometimes it is a hidden cause. If you hold a stone in your hand and let go, it falls to the ground. There must be a hidden cause that causes the stone to fall to the ground. This is a basic observation that human beings have made for a very long time. They intuitively sense there must be some unseen, non-physical causes for their suffering for current conditions on earth. They now try to use the linear mind to reason their way backwards from current conditions to the cause of these conditions, the cause of their suffering, because they intuitively sense that if they can discover the cause, and change the cause, then they can also change the effect.

This is again a true intuition. If you can change the cause, you can change the effect. In fact, the only efficient way to change the effect is to change the cause. But of course, people have also attempted to change the cause at the level of cause, at the level of effect. They have attempted to change the effect at the level of effect. And this is what you see that science has been doing now for several hundred years, where science has been looking at the physical octave and attempting to understand physical conditions based on physical causes.

You see there are two approaches that people take with the linear mind. Or we could say that they are two sides of the same coin. You are looking at current conditions, you see them as an effect, and you attempt to use the linear mind to reason backwards until you find the cause of the effect, and then you attempt to change the effect. What science has been doing is attempting to find a cause in the physical, in the material world, and use that knowledge to change physical conditions. What religious people have been doing for thousands of years is to go further than just physical causes, but look for non-physical causes. Therefore, find some kind of god who is responsible for the area where they suffer, then find some way to appeal to that god so that the god will change the conditions that cause your suffering.

The blind alley of the intellectual reasoning

In a sense, these are two sides of the same coin. But the real problem, from a spiritual perspective, comes in in the religious tradition, where you not only seek to find a cause for your current suffering, but you seek to create these elaborate images of what the spiritual realm is like. And this is what caused the Hindu Brahmins to go into these multiple blind alleys where they used intellectual, linear, analytical reasoning to project God is like this, conditions are like that. This is the real spiritual cause behind this effect, and so forth. And what happened at the time was that they split into so many different branches and sects, they had so many different ideas, each of them claiming, of course, that theirs was the ultimate understanding.

What you saw was this incredibly complex phenomenon with all of these people claiming they had the ultimate truth, but none of them had the ultimate truth because they were reasoning with a linear mind based on their observation of current conditions. You can extend this to today and say, well, some of the people who were incarnated as the Hindu Brahmins thousands of years ago are now incarnated as the materialistic scientists who are essentially doing the same thing, only they have now decided that: “We do not go beyond the material world, we look for deeper and deeper causes in the material world for material phenomena.” But they are still split into different sects, different groupings, they have so many different theories about this or that complexity, even multiple universes, black holes, dark energy, dark matter, all of these complicated topics.

And what does all of this prevent people from doing? Attaining peace of mind. What do you see today? What did you see at the time of the Buddha? All of these conflicts between people based on what? Some subtle intellectual reasoning. One group of Brahmins interpreted the Vedic scriptures this way, another group of Brahmins interpreted same scriptures in a different way. Each was sure they were right, each felt it imperative to convince the others or to convince people that the others were wrong, and so there was this constant ongoing struggle.

A new philosophy focused on raising consciousness

This is what the Buddha saw. He saw that what they were doing was futile because they were using the linear mind. You might remember that around the time of the Buddha, there was a Greek philosopher Plato who brought forth the allegory of the cave. People are chained inside a cave in such a way that they cannot see out of the cave, but there is light shining into the cave from outside, and there are people walking between the light and the cave, casting shadows on the wall of the cave. The people inside the cave are only seeing the shadows, and they are observing the shadows, and they are attempting to reason backwards about what is going on outside the cave, but they see only shadows, and this is what the Buddha realized that the Hindu Brahmins were seeing, shadows only, and how can the shadow of an object tell you everything about the object?

For example, how can the shadow of an object tell you what color the object is? The shadow is a two-dimensional projection, how can it tell you about the three-dimensional form of the object? You see the limitations. The Buddha saw the limitations, and that is why he said: “Let us create a new philosophy, a new movement, that does not seek to reason backwards about what conditions are like in the spiritual realm. Let us focus on the practical aspects of raising consciousness, helping people overcome suffering, and then when they have raised their consciousness sufficiently, then they might be able to grasp some truth from beyond the material world.”

Why am I giving you this very long discourse? Well, because I am the Chohan of the Sixth Ray of Peace, and it is precisely this reasoning with a linear mind, this taking the linear mind that is a practical tool for everyday life in the material world, and wanting to extend it beyond the material world, to tell you something about what is beyond the material world. And as long as you do this, you cannot attain peace, nor can you connect to the Sixth Ray of Peace. If you really want to understand the Buddha’s teachings, you need to realize one simple thing, which is not so simple for the linear mind. The purpose of the Buddha’s teachings was not, NOT, to bring forth some superior truth. It was to give people practical teachings and tools for raising their consciousness, transcending the level of suffering, the Sea of Samsara. This is something that the vast majority of those who call themselves Buddhists today would violently object to, or at least vehemently object to. They would say that since the Buddha was an enlightened being, what he gave was a superior truth, even an absolute truth. But it simply is not the truth.

The Buddha was not concerned about some final truth, because he saw that this was what the Brahmins wanted to do. And why do the Brahmins want to do this? Well, as we have explained, what does the linear mind want to do? It wants to put everything on a line, a progression, and then say, there must be some ultimate end to that line, there must be some highest level. If I can put truth on a line, there are levels of truth, levels of understanding, I can understand more and more about the world as science has done now for a long time. But if we extend that expansion of knowledge, there must come an ultimate truth. But as Hilarion said, it does not come until the Creator, and there is a very large gap between earth and the Creator in terms of the different levels.

The practical approach of ascended masters

The Buddha realized this and was only focused on what could raise you, what could raise people to the next level up. Now look at what has happened in the intervening time. Science has become more dominant in the modern world, and science is also based on the linear mind. We must be able to start with our observations of the macroscopic world, discover subtler layers, deeper layers, and keep going until we reach the ultimate level, the God particle, or whatever you call it. Why is this important for spiritual people? Because you have grown up in a modern world, you cannot avoid being affected by this mindset. Here you are, you have grown up with this mindset, now you find an ascended master teaching. And now you are saying: “Well here, finally, here is something that does not come from this world, that is not the linear mind reasoning backwards from the conditions in this world. Here we have a teaching that comes from the ascended realm, from the ascended masters who are beyond this world. That teaching must be an absolute truth. For surely the ascended masters see absolute truth, and why would they give us anything else?”

Well, we have explained many times from different perspectives that we cannot give you the absolute truth that we see because you cannot grasp it on an unnatural planet. What are we doing today? The exact same thing that the Buddha was doing 2,500 years ago, taking a practical look at where people are in consciousness and saying: “What can we give them that they can grasp with their present level of consciousness and that can help them rise to higher levels?” We are not seeking to give you an absolute truth. Again, many students from previous ascended master dispensations would vehemently object to this statement. But why do they object to it? Because they are trapped in the linear mind: There must be an ultimate truth and if you cannot find it in the religions of this world or in scientific materialism, surely you must be able to find it in a teaching given by the ascended masters. I am not saying our teachings are wrong or are illusions or are deceptions, but they are adapted to the level of consciousness, not only of ascended master students, but even the collective consciousness. It can be no other way on a planet like Earth.

What has happened in previous ascended master dispensations is that people have used a linear mindset to take the teachings, reason based on the teachings, create mental images based on the teachings and project them upon the ascended masters. This is what the linear mind does. It looks at current conditions on earth, it creates a mental image based on those conditions, such as, what is the cause of current conditions on earth. Then it extends that image, it projects that mental image upon the spiritual realm.

Projecting a mental image upon ascended masters

When students found an ascended master teaching, first of all they used the mental images they had grown up with or mental images from other spiritual teachings they had studied. Then they took the ascended master teachings, they used that to refine their mental images and then they projected those mental images upon the ascended masters. Why is this relevant to the topic for this retreat, connecting to your spiritual teachers? Well, my beloved, I am an ascended master. How do you connect to me? Do you think you can connect to me by projecting a mental image upon me, a mental image that was created in a material world in your mind? No matter how good that image is, no matter how accurate you think it is based on an ascended master teaching, it is still a mental image. I admit that in previous dispensations, it was difficult for students to grasp this because the teachings had not yet been given. The teachings that we have given in this dispensation about the separate selves, and how the separate selves form perception filters, and how the Conscious You is not those perception filters, has not become the selves and therefore the Conscious You can step outside the selves. But how can the Conscious You step outside the perception filter of a self? Only by acknowledging that what the self sees is just a perception filter. This means you must acknowledge that whatever mental image you can create in your mind of an ascended master, it is just that, a mental image.

And of course, you could say within the law of free will, there is nothing wrong with people creating a mental image of an ascended master because it gives them a particular experience. You can look at students in past dispensations and you can see that many of them had very elaborate mental images of what ascended masters are like and how their interaction with ascended masters should be. Many of these students have even felt that they did connect to ascended masters, they did have experiences with ascended masters. Now, I am not saying that those students from previous dispensations had genuine experiences with the masters, but there were students who thought they had a genuine experience but they were connecting to beings in the mental realm because they were so attached to their mental images. Those who had genuine experiences were those who were not so attached to their mental images. Because what are you doing when you are projecting a mental image? You are essentially saying: “Nada, I do not want to connect to you as you are. I only want to connect to you according to my mental image. So, if you want to connect to me Nada, you better live up to my mental image.” And as other masters have said, if I were to do that, what would I do? I would validate your mental image and that means you would think: “My mental image is not a mental image, this is how Nada really is.” But how would that advance your spiritual growth? How could I help you grow by validating the mental image that keeps you from growing?

The question is always, if you want to connect to an ascended master, do you want to connect to the master or to the mental image of the master? Are you willing to let go of the mental image to experience the Presence of the ascended master? That is the question. We are not seeking to hide from you, but many students are seeking to hide from us. And if you want to hide from us by projecting a mental image upon us, we must allow you to do this. We must allow you to have that experience, we must even allow you to connect to impostors in the mental realm that will live up to your image, because they will live up to any image you project on them if you give them your energy. I do not need your energy, I am not willing to live up to your mental images because I need nothing from you, and I do not want to have you think that the mental image has been validated by me.

Basically, if you want to be very direct, you can say, if you do not experience, if you have never experienced the presence of an ascended master, it is because you have a mental image that is pushing the real master away from you. There is again no blame, you have free will, we understand you live on a very difficult planet, we understand you have many past lives that have created all of these selves in the four levels of the mind. There is no blame here. We are only saying if you want to really connect to us, you must be willing to look beyond the mental images because they are the ones who are preventing you from connecting.

El Morya – a strict disciplinarian?

What does a mental image do when you form a mental image of an ascended master? What does that image do? It allows you to have a certain view, a certain experience, and the experience cannot be challenged by the real master, so you can hide from the master. To give you just one example, in one previous ascended master dispensation, they had created a very particular image of El Morya, now Master MORE, and that is one reason he decided to change his name, because they still have that image of him, this very fiery blue-ray master, this very tough disciplinarian who would challenge people and expose their egos mercilessly, and they had created this concept that those who were the real chelas of El Morya, they had these qualities and they had the right to go around and blue-ray people by challenging them, telling them what they were doing wrong, and there were many people in that organization who took pride in being able to blue-ray those that they considered below them.

What were these people doing? Well, you could say their egos wanted the experience of being superior to other people, being the disciplinarians who could tell other people what to do, and they used their mental image of El Morya as an excuse for justifying their behavior, their ego-based behavior, even though they would again vehemently object to this being ego-based behavior, but it was.

Again, these people had their free will right to take an ascended master teaching to create this mental image of El Morya, and to validate the experience they want to have until they hopefully one day will have had enough of it, as some people have done and they have moved on, but some have not. But what I am also saying is that even though some of these people thought they had genuine experiences of El Morya, they did not. For why would El Morya validate that image of himself when he clearly sees that it would only trap people and prevent them from actually connecting to him?

All I am saying is, in this dispensation you have a deeper teaching about the selves, the subconscious and separate selves, mental images, perception filters, and therefore you can go through a process of freeing yourself from your mental images, stop projecting, and thereby you can come to the point where you can really connect to us as ascended beings. And connecting to us not through teachings, not through the intellectual mind, not through understanding and grasping, but just connecting to our Presence is the most valuable experience you can have on the spiritual path because it gives you a direct frame of reference from beyond the material world. And that means there is really nothing in the material world that can fool you anymore, or pull you into a reaction. And if this is what you want, then you have the tools to accomplish it.

A practical tool from Nada

But I will give you a practical tool that can help you on the Sixth Ray. I started out talking about the linear mind wanting to project this image of an absolute truth and how this takes away your peace of mind. What you can do is use our teachings to realize that the real goal of the spiritual path is not to know the absolute truth but to raise your consciousness from your present level to the next level up. But there does come a point, as we have said, where you begin to move into these levels of personal Christhood. And personal Christhood can be said to be the very key to peace which is why Jesus was called the Prince of Peace because he represents the Christ Consciousness to humankind. But how is Christhood, the Christ mind, related to peace? Well, it is through the Christ mind that you connect and you experience that there is a reality beyond the material world. And only when you have experienced this directly can you do what the Buddha told people to do: overcome your attachments to this world. As you experience the Christ Consciousness, you overcome your attachments. Where are your attachments located? In the separate selves, yes, but they are also very much based on the linear mind and the mental images projected by the linear mind. You want the world to be a certain way. You want your life to be a certain way.

An image of what life on earth should be like

If you look at the basic understanding of suffering—what causes suffering? It is that you in your mind, the linear mind, formulate an image of what life on earth should be like. You project that image out, but then you experience that life does not conform to your image. And that experience of life not conforming to your image is the very basis for suffering. That is what causes all suffering. When you begin to experience the Christ mind, you realize there is something beyond your mental image. You experience there is something beyond. But now comes, of course, the second challenge of Christ. Will you use your experience of the Christ to let go of your mental images, to let go of those separate selves, to overcome those attachments? Or will you do what Peter did and attempt to pull the experience of Christ into your mental images so that it seems to you that Christ has validated your mental images? This is what many students did in previous ascended master organizations, as I gave the example of El Morya. You can do this, of course, even with this dispensation, if you do not apply the teachings. But you also have the tools to avoid this.

How do you then attain more peace of mind? By continually reaching for the Christ mind, using the Christ mind as your frame of reference to look at your own life, to look at the conditions you face in your life. We understand that some of you face very difficult conditions. We are not trying to sound like we do not understand this. But nevertheless, the eternal promise of the Christ mind is that you can use the Christ mind to gain a different perspective on your physical conditions, overcome the attachments, overcome the mental images. And when you see conditions without projecting upon them that they should be different, then you can face these conditions without suffering.

I know this is a difficult concept to grasp for people who have very difficult conditions. It is easier to grasp for people who are not facing such difficult conditions. I understand this, but it is still an eternal truth. What causes your suffering is not your conditions, the physical conditions, but the way you look at those physical conditions. And in many cases, the physical conditions cannot change until you change the way you look at them. This is the promise of Christ, that Christ can give you that different perspective, and that can give you a peace of mind.

 

The rest of this dictation, along with an invocation based on the dictation, is found in the book: Connecting with Your Spiritual Teachers.

 

Copyright © 2023 Kim Michaels

 

Back to Connecting to Your Higher Self and Spiritual Teachers

Reaching for the truth that will take you to the next step up


Listen to a recording of this dictation (subscribers only)

Ascended Master Master Hilarion through Kim Michaels, June 5, 2023. This dictation was given at a conference in Seoul, Korea: Connecting to Your Higher Self and Spiritual Teachers. 

I AM the Ascended Master Hilarion.

What is truth? Well, here is a question that the linear mind loves, for this, it thinks, it can define in a very clear way: Truth is the opposite of untruth. Truth is something that can be understood, that can be grasped, that can be put on a linear scale, with truth at one end and untruth at the other. Certainly the linear mind can do this with all of the God qualities, but truth, it really feels, it has under control. The fallen beings have for so long, since they fell, felt they had truth under control. They have believed that they can define truth. Of course, they do not broadcast this to the people, for example here on earth, that they have defined truth. They instead broadcast that this truth is given by some ultimate authority. Therefore it is the highest possible truth.

The simplest definition of truth

But what is truth really? Truth is that which takes you closer to oneness. What is untruth? Untruth is that which takes you away from oneness. That is the simplest possible definition of truth that can be given, at least on earth.

The linear mind will, of course, be very, very unhappy with this definition, for how do you then define what truth is? There must be some ultimate truth. It is not enough to say it takes you closer. There must be an ultimate truth, and then you are in oneness. But the reality is that only the Creator is ultimate truth, which means that at any level of creation, any level of the world of form, there is a specific truth that can be grasped and fathomed at that level. Of course, earth is very far below the level of the Creator, which is why we have so many times said there is no absolute truth that can be given on earth, but we can actually say there is no absolute truth anywhere except in the Creator. Whatever level you are at in the progression towards oneness, if you are not at oneness, it is because you still see some distance. There is then a truth that can help you rise to the next level up. Therefore, it is never the goal to fathom some ultimate truth, but to see the truth that will take you to the next step up.

Levels of self-realization

Now again the linear mind will be unhappy, for it will say: “Well, then that must mean there is something wrong at every level until you reach the Creator, that even these beings in the first sphere that ascended so long ago, that have had so long to grow and transcend themselves, even they are living in illusion.” This is again the linear mind that must think as the linear mind thinks. It operates with a dualistic scale, and on the dualistic scale there is one extreme and the other extreme, and they are both ultimate, either the ultimate truth or the ultimate lie. You might say that until you reach the ultimate truth, you are still affected by a lie, but that is not the case. Once you become one with the Christ consciousness, become the Living Christ, you know and experience that Christ mind, which is the mind of Oneness. You know that everything is one, but you also see and experience that there is a hierarchy, a linear progression of levels of consciousness leading from where you are to the Creator. This is not illusion.

Once you have ascended from earth, you are not in an illusion because you know the underlying reality is oneness. You are simply at a certain level of self-realization, and you know you are on the path to going to higher levels of self-realization until you reach the ultimate state of self-realization, which is what we have called the Creator consciousness. Ultimate in this world of form, that is. You are not in illusion because you experience oneness, and you do not think even in terms of higher or lower because you are part of a process, an ever self-transcending process, the cosmic dance of self-transcendence. Serapis Bey talked about an ongoing acceleration, and this is an important concept to consider. The linear mind will, of course, have trouble considering this never-ending, ongoing, accelerating self-transcendence. It will always look for the ultimate, but it will also ask why does it need to transcend itself if it has reached a higher level? Why do you need to transcend yourself? If you have reached the 96th level and you experience the Christ mind, why do you need to continue to transcend yourself?

The ever-self-transcending River of Life

Well, the truth is that the entire creation, the entire world of form, is what we have called the River of Life. What is a river? It is water that is constantly flowing. If the river stops flowing, you do not have a river. You have a lake. Sooner or later the quality, the purity, of the water in that lake will deteriorate. The water might evaporate, various sediments and impurities might come into the water, and gradually it will start to become toxic. Why does it not become toxic in the river? Because it is moving. The water molecules are moving, shaking off impurities. They are mixing with oxygen, which purifies the water as well. So you see that the entire creation is this upward movement, constant self-transcendence. This does not mean that you as an individual being cannot say: “I have reached a certain level. I want to enjoy it here for some time.” You have a right to do this. But if you stay too long at a certain level, then your mind will start to become stale. Therefore you will fall behind that upward movement of the River of Life. You will be behind where you could have been if you had been willing to transcend.

The wise ones, those that are in touch with the River of Life, you can stand still and enjoy life for a time at a certain level, but you will sense intuitively when it is time to move on. Many of you who are spiritual people have sensed that it was time to enter a new cycle. It was time to move on and do something different. Truth is constant movement. There is a truth at the 48th level which can help you overcome the separate self, the illusion at the 48th level, and rise to the 49th level. There is another truth at the 49th level, and another at the 50th and so forth. There is not one truth. Of course, this is what the linear mind wants: “Give me the truth, the highest truth, the absolute truth.” Well, here it is then: The absolute truth is that there is no absolute truth. Or we can say that there is a multitude of absolute truths. The truth you can grasp at your particular level is the absolute truth for that level.
Truth, of course, is that which takes you closer to oneness. That which takes you closer to oneness cannot be put on a dualistic scale, where there is truth at one end and untruth on the other.

The dualistic concept of ultimate truth

The Living Truth is not the opposite of some lie. Only that which is defined from the duality consciousness can have an opposite. The duality consciousness defines something as a lie and the opposite as the truth, but they are both out of duality, so they are both relative. They are relative to each other, relative to that dualistic scale, relative to the dualistic consciousness. You may say: “But is not the truth that takes you to the next level up relative to that level of consciousness?” Well, yes, but it is not on a dualistic scale. When you are on a dualistic scale, you might say: “Here is an untruth.” And you might begin to move towards the other extreme of the scale. You might think you have gone through quite a journey to move from that relative truth, relative untruth, to that relative truth but it has not brought you closer to oneness. You are still in duality, and that is why thinking you are a good person who has the truth will not bring you closer to oneness. It will just keep you trapped in duality.

I can assure you that those who believe they have the ultimate truth are the most difficult people to reach for me. Why do they need the Chohan of the Fifth Ray when they already have the absolute truth? What could I possibly offer those who have the absolute truth defined here on earth? You may say: “But I (Hilarion) am an ascended master! I am at a higher level of consciousness, so obviously I can offer anyone who is unascended something”. But they will not see it that way. Just look at the fact that the Ask Real Jesus website was put online over 20 years ago. Do you really think the cardinals of the Catholic church have not heard about it or come across it? Have they changed anything based on what was stated there? Have they been open at all to the possibility that the Ascended Master Jesus could give directions today? Of course not. Why would they need the Ascended Master Jesus when they have the absolute truth in their doctrines?

You see many other people, be it the communists, the materialists, the environmentalists, the philosophers of this and that persuasion, the leaders of this and that religion, they do not need ascended masters. They do not want ascended masters. They do not want divine qualities, for they want to experience the sense of superiority that they get from believing they have the absolute truth. If you believe you have the absolute truth, what higher truth could there be? What could anyone, even an ascended being, offer you? You, of course, as ascended master students have transcended that level of consciousness, but you need to recognize that your separate selves, the separate selves you have left, have not transcended that level of consciousness. The Conscious You has freed itself from complete identification with these selves, but you still have selves that color you and that can make you believe that you have reached some ultimate level of understanding or some ultimate level of consciousness.

Being open to a progressively higher truth

This is what has happened to many spiritual students throughout the ages, but it has also happened to ascended master students, especially in previous dispensations where they thought they had the highest teaching or the final revelation that would be given by the ascended masters, and thus why would they need something else? Why would they need progressive revelation? You always need to be a little bit on the lookout for this tendency in a separate self or even the formation of a separate self that makes you think: “I have been on the path for so long. I have done all of this work. I have done all of these decrees. Surely I have reached some level.” And you have. You have made progress, you have reached some level, but not an ultimate level. If you had reached the ultimate level that could be reached on earth, you would have ascended. When you have reached some ultimate level on earth, you will no longer be on earth. If you are on earth, well, there is a higher level to rise to, and how will you rise to that higher level? By reaching for the truth that is the highest truth you can grasp at your current level, which will take you the next step up.

In this dispensation it is difficult to be trapped in this state of consciousness if you study the teachings and strive to internalize them. We have been clearer about the need for ongoing progression than in any previous teaching. Still the ego is what the ego always is, and it does what it will always do, attempt to stop your progress at any level. You need to be open to a progressively higher truth. This is partly why we give progressively higher teachings, but you individually in your mind need to be open to receiving that next insight that helps you see through your current illusion, so you rise to the next level.

Hilarion’s offer and visualization

And where will you get it from? Well, you will get it from your I AM Presence. You will get it from your ascended teachers, but only if you ask, only if you are open to it. We will, as we have said so many times, not violate your free will. Certainly you can ask me, Hilarion, to show you the next truth. You can give my “Decree to Ascended Master Hilarion.” You can use the book The Mystical Initiations of Vision to tune in to me. You can look at my decree, find two sentences that truly appeal to you, learn them by heart, meditate on them, and you will see that you will get directions from me if you are close to the Fifth Ray. There are many tools you can use, but I will give you a simple tool like the other Chohans have done.

The simple tool is this: You go into a quiet room, sit down comfortably, close your eyes, and then you visualize that you have your two eyes. You know, if you think about this, that you have two eyes because this gives you the perception of depth. You can evaluate the distance between you and another object better because you have that dual vision. Having two eyes is not the same as duality. We have never said that when you escape duality your two eyes will start moving together until they form one eye in the center of your forehead. You do, of course, have the third eye, the third eye chakra, but the visualization is that you have the two eyes, and you now visualize that they move further and further apart until they are at some distance from your body. Then you look with these eyes forward, and you see that in front of each eye is a line. You look along this line into the distance. If you know anything about geometry, you will know that the perspective will make it seem like these two lines come closer and closer together the further you move away.

 

The rest of this dictation, along with an invocation based on the dictation, is found in the book: Connecting with Your Spiritual Teachers.

 

Copyright © 2023 Kim Michaels

 

Back to Connecting to Your Higher Self and Spiritual Teachers

Accelerating yourself beyond the dualistic standard of purity


Listen to a recording of this dictation (subscribers only)

Ascended Master Master Serapis Bey through Kim Michaels, June 5, 2023. This dictation was given at a conference in Seoul, Korea: Connecting to Your Higher Self and Spiritual Teachers. 

I AM the Ascended Master Serapis Bey, Chohan of the Fourth Ray. What can the Fourth Ray offer people in terms of helping you tune in? Well, there will not be so many people who can tune in to the Fourth Ray, but there will, of course, always be some who will understand, who will grasp, who will tune in, who will resonate with the Fourth Ray.

The Fourth Ray is sort of in the nexus between the first three rays and the second three, and therefore it requires a certain step up. I have called it before the Ray of Acceleration, even though traditionally it has been seen as the Ray of Purity. But they are really one and the same because how do you attain purity? Only by accelerating the vibration of that which has a lower vibration, and of course a lower vibration is the definition of impurity. There is really nothing that is completely impure in a dualistic sense, but there are higher and lower vibrations, and that which vibrates below a certain limit is what we can consider an impurity. But since it is all energy anyway, there is always the potential that the lower energy can be accelerated in vibration and therefore become pure, become the higher energy that flows upwards. Lower energy flows downwards, higher energy flows upwards.

There will be some people who have an affinity with the Fourth Ray. Perhaps they like that which is pure, that which is often simple, uncomplicated, not so disturbed by many different facets or interpretations. For truly, when you look to vibration, when you can read vibration, where is the room for intellectual interpretation? This is in a sense what science has brought into the world, that you can make these precise, so-called objective measurements, and there is not much discussion. The temperature is either 20 degrees or 40 degrees, but you have a precise measurement, and the same, of course, you have with vibration.

Tool for tuning into the Fourth Ray

How can you tune into the Fourth Ray? Well, you can do it in various ways, of course. The decrees and invocations in The Mystical Initiations of Intention, my book in The Path to Self-Mastery series, can help you tune in, but as others have explained, we have decided to give you some seemingly more simple tools.

The first tool I want to give you is as follows: Sit quietly, close your eyes and pull your attention within. There is a center in your being. Wherever you see that center, it does not have to be the base chakra or the heart chakra or any particular chakra. But you pull your attention into the center until it goes into what science calls a singularity—a single point where there is no extension, there is no room, there is just a point. You are not visualizing that this is happening, you are simply allowing it to happen. There will be like an explosion, a radiation of white light out from that point, and it penetrates your aura, it penetrates your forcefield and it radiates out from your being. This is a very simple visualization or meditation. Withdraw your attention into the singularity in the center and then allow the light to explode outwards.

I am not recommending that you do this for three hours at a time. Perhaps only do it three times to begin with so that it does not become too much for you. But it is a powerful exercise to feel that radiation of the Fourth Ray of Purity, that white light that is so white that it is whiter than anything you see in the physical octave. If you have any particular ailment in your body, you can do the exercise and focus your attention on the particular point in the body, and then allow the light to radiate out. It is not that you are forcing the light or you are pushing the light, you simply withdraw your attention into that single point, and then you allow me, as the Chohan of the Fourth Ray, to radiate the white light.

The linear mind wants to complicate everything

Again, a very simple exercise, but simplicity is often the key to change. Change, self-transcendence, is not complicated. Self-transcendence cannot be accomplished with a mind that wants to complicate everything because then it feels superior or sophisticated and feels that it can somehow figure out a way to force its way into heaven. That is what the mind wants to do, not just the ego, but just that linear mind. And although we have talked about the linear mind, it is not that we are denouncing the linear mind. The linear mind has a place, it has a function. It can help you do many, many things in the material world.

Science, as you have seen it so far, has largely been based on this linear mind. But this is, of course, also why science now has created problems that can be quite a threat to the future of this planet, whether it be nuclear war, or pollution, or any other things. The linear mind has a function. It has a place. But if the linear mind is allowed to rule, then it must create problems. It will create problems. Therefore, it is not the linear mind that will take you into heaven. But once you find the spiritual path and start studying a spiritual teaching, then the linear mind can begin to believe that it can take you to heaven, for the linear mind looks at everything in a certain way.

You might have heard the American expression that if the only tool you have is a hammer, you think every problem is a nail. Well, for the linear mind, the only tool it has is analysis, rationalization. Therefore, it thinks that every problem can be solved by rationalizing, analyzing, coming to understand the problem. And once you understand the problem, the linear mind thinks it can solve it because if you have a linear understanding, then you will see the linear solution.

But of course, there is no linear solution to the “problem of spiritual growth.” It is only the linear mind that will see it as a problem. It will say: “I am here. I should not be here. I should be in some higher spiritual state. There must be a linear progression to that state. And if I can just figure out the mechanism that brings that progression about, then I can get into heaven.” And of course, we have given you the concept of a spiritual path and the 144 levels of consciousness which the linear mind loves. But we have also told you many, many times that you are not going to make progress on this path by thinking. It is a matter of shifting your consciousness. And this is not a matter of intellectual understanding.

What has happened to most people is that they have gone below the 48th level of consciousness. They have gone into separation. They have been overpowered and blinded by this dualistic state of consciousness where there is a linear scale with two extremes. And when you think in these dualistic terms, you think that one extreme is the problem, the condition to be overcome, and the other extreme is the solution, the condition to be attained. The linear mind goes into thinking: “How can we eradicate the problem? How can we bring forth the solution?”

The linear mind cannot transcend itself

But as the Buddha attempted to teach people the concept of the Middle Way, the solution is not one of the dualistic extremes. The solution is to transcend the scale, the level of consciousness that sees the extremes. But the linear mind cannot do this, for it is the linear mind that defines the extremes, that defines the scale. And the linear mind cannot transcend itself. It can reason about certain things, but it cannot transcend itself. The Conscious You can transcend itself because it is self-aware, whereas the linear mind is more like a computer, but a sophisticated one that has artificial intelligence and can therefore adapt.

The linear mind can learn more and more. It can adapt to certain conditions. And you could almost see the linear mind as one of these robots that they have created now that seems like it can think like a human being. And in a sense you could say that it can think like most human beings think because they think with a linear mind. But still, a computer cannot overcome its own programming, it cannot transcend its own programming, and neither can a linear mind. But the Conscious You can transcend itself, for it has no programming when it realizes it is pure awareness.

What can help you experience pure awareness? Well, as we have said, it is a matter of cleaning out the things in your four lower bodies that are pulling the attention of the Conscious You into a separate self, into that perception filter, into that sense of identity. But when you have done that to a sufficient degree, it becomes easier for the Conscious You to pull itself out.

Exercise for confusing the linear mind

I will give you another exercise that might help you with this. Again, sit down in a quiet room, and now imagine, visualize that you are standing on a completely flat area, a completely flat plane, absolutely flat, and it extends in all directions as far as you can see. And now pull your attention within to the center of your being. But now it is not a matter of radiating light, it is a matter of letting your attention go through the center of your being and then outwards on the flat plane. You pull in, but instead of going directly out, you are going through the center and out in all directions. This might be easiest to visualize if you focus on your two eyes. Your eyes are pulled into the center and then your gaze goes through the center and in both directions, back and forth, inwards-outwards, inwards-outwards, inwards-outwards.

You can take time to do this. It is not a matter of doing it quickly. In the beginning it will seem very confusing, disorienting, perhaps even very difficult to achieve, but as you practice it a little bit, you will find that the inwards-outwards movement confuses the linear mind and there can come a point where now you feel a certain calmness, a certain silence in the mind. And then you stop focusing on going inwards and outwards, or just focus on that calmness, extending your attention outwards on this flat featureless plane, just letting your attention go out and continue to go out, stretching it as far as you can stretch it and then gradually, slowly pulling it back in. You can do this several times or if you feel that this is more natural, just let your attention rest when you have extended it as far as you can go.

Again, this is a very simple exercise or at least it seems simple. The mind will not be able to grasp the purpose of it. It will say: “What is the point? What is it going to lead to? What is it going to do for me?” But you see the point is that there is no point, there is no purpose and there is no goal you have to reach. You just go through the process and let it unfold. When I say there is no point, I of course mean there is no point that the linear mind can grasp.

You will see that out in the world there are various meditation techniques and there is always the promise of some reward if you practice the technique. But I am not going to promise you a reward, I am going to say that if this appeals to you, practice it. If it does not appeal to you, ignore it. But if you decide to practice it, give it some time and see what happens. Instead of starting out with a goal that you are moving towards, let the goal be to just experiment and participate in the process and see what unfolds. Again, the linear mind will object: “Define for me the goal I am going towards. How do I know how to get there if I do not know where I am going?”

But you see the linear mind is not going anywhere. That is precisely the point, and in a sense you are not going anywhere either, but perhaps you will, in the peace that emerges when the linear mind is neutralized, experience who you are as that pure awareness that has no features and no definite extension in space. It is not centered in a point, it does not have a boundary, it is just pure awareness.

The essence of spiritual path on higher levels

There are many students, especially in previous dispensations, who have thought that the Fourth Ray is very strict, that I am a very strict disciplinarian. But really why do they think this way? Well, they thought this way because they did not have the teaching about the separate selves, so they did not truly understand the mechanism that we have given you—that the essence of spiritual growth is to come to see these selves and let them go. Therefore, they thought that they had to discipline themselves, to try to control their mind, to force their mind, to follow a strictly defined path. They looked at the spiritual path differently than you do. Again we are not criticizing, we are not finding fault, we are simply pointing out that as progressive revelation progresses, we can give a higher and higher understanding of the path.

And as we have said, between the 48th and the 96th levels, there is a certain necessity to be disciplined, to be focused and to raise yourself above the mass consciousness. But when you have gained sufficient freedom from the downward pull of the mass consciousness, you can benefit from reconsidering how you look at the path. You understand here that I am not negating what was said in previous dispensations. It is clear that you cannot progress above the mass consciousness by being lazy or unfocused or lacking dedication. You cannot be casual about spiritual growth because the mass consciousness will pull you down constantly. You have to be focused and determined enough to build that momentum that pulls you above that gravitational pull.

But once you have done that to a certain degree, you can then embrace the teachings we have given about the Conscious You and the separate selves. You realize that it is no longer a matter of the Conscious You beating the subconscious selves into submission, disciplining the subconscious selves or suppressing the subconscious selves. It can be valid enough to suppress and discipline your subconscious mind for a time because otherwise it pulls you in too many different directions. But when you get above that pull of the mass consciousness, you can benefit greatly from shifting your approach and realizing that spiritual growth is not about forcing anything, it is about letting go.

You come to see a separate self. You see what it is doing to you by keeping you trapped in endlessly repeating this pattern of reactions. And you see that illusion that makes you think that you have to continue to do this, that this is the only way to react, that this is perhaps even the only way to be as a spiritual student. You see that it is an illusion. You see that it is an illusion that there is a problem you have to solve. And then you just let go, you let the self die. And when you let a self die, at say the 96th level, you spontaneously rise to the 97th. You do not have to force your way up to the 97th level. For when that self is dead, when that energy is transmuted, you spontaneously rise. And thus there comes a point, and it can come sooner than the 96th level, where you can shift your approach to the spiritual path, where you realize it is not a matter of forcing anything.

The Conscious You is out the Christ consciousness

It is a matter of letting go and beginning to contemplate, as we have said, that the Conscious You actually is the Christ consciousness because it is out of the Christ consciousness. And the Christ consciousness is the consciousness of oneness. The Christ consciousness spontaneously seeks its way closer to oneness. And at the 64th level, you are closer to oneness than at the 63rd level. So when you resolve a self at the 63rd level, the Conscious You spontaneously rises to the next level up. You do not have to force it. You do not have to discipline the mind. You spontaneously rise.

Take care to consider what I am saying. There is a time when you need to use the mind’s ability to discipline itself. And yes, it is to some degree force you are using. You are using force to suppress these separate selves that pull you down, pull you into old habits, old reactionary patterns. You are saying: “I do not want to continue this worldly life. I want a more spiritual life.” And you are then suppressing the things that pull you into a worldly life. And this can be beneficial for a time. But what you are doing is that you are using the mind to suppress the mind, to discipline the mind, to force the mind. And you can achieve some growth by this, but you cannot go beyond a certain level. You certainly cannot go beyond the 96th level by forcing your way.

“You cannot force your way into heaven,” as Jesus said. But he also said: “The violent attempt to take the kingdom of heaven by force, by forcing their way into the Christ consciousness.” And this is what cannot be done. If you come to the 96th level and you are still seeking to force, then you will not pass that initiation, and therefore you will start going down, forcing yourself down. You may think you are achieving progress because you sense that you get better and better at forcing yourself, but you are not rising to a higher level of consciousness. You are just building on to that spiritual self that you created between the 48th and the 96th level. And this can even lead you to go into the fallen consciousness where you think that the end goal is to build the most sophisticated spiritual self that anyone has ever built and then surely God will let you into heaven.

Accelerate into Purity

So it is important to contemplate this—that there comes a point where you need to transcend force, where you are not using the linear mind to suppress the linear mind or even suppress the subconscious selves that are not necessarily always linear, for in some cases they are just chaotic and unfocused, shifting from one to the other. And this is an important shift when you shift out of that force-based approach. That is when you can truly accelerate, accelerate into purity. Consider this very simple reasoning: Purity is a divine quality. How do you get out of purity? You force yourself out of purity. Does it make any sense that you have to force yourself back into purity? Nay, because a divine quality is the natural condition. And as I said the Christ consciousness naturally seeks back to oneness. Any divine quality seeks back to oneness spontaneously.

The rest of this dictation, along with an invocation based on the dictation, is found in the book: Connecting with Your Spiritual Teachers.

 

Copyright © 2023 Kim Michaels

 

Back to Connecting to Your Higher Self and Spiritual Teachers

Open yourself up to the direct experience of Divine Love


Listen to a recording of this dictation (subscribers only)

Ascended Master Master Paul the Venetian through Kim Michaels, June 5, 2023. This dictation was given at a conference in Seoul, Korea: Connecting to Your Higher Self and Spiritual Teachers. 

I AM the Ascended Master Paul the Venetian. You may think that connecting to your spiritual teachers is a difficult task, and for many people indeed it is a difficult task. Which is why we of the Chohans have decided that for many people it will be easier to connect to the spiritual teacher through one of the seven rays and the God qualities of the rays.

Naturally Jesus is well aware that his discourse was aimed at people at a certain level of consciousness, for most people cannot make that switch and accept the Christ within themselves. So it will be easier for many people to focus on one of the seven rays and the qualities of that ray. And therefore, by pondering, tuning into the quality, giving the decrees and invocations for that ray, perhaps working with that book in the course of Self-Mastery they will be more able to tune in first to the qualities and then realize that those qualities are embodied and represented by a specific teacher, a specific master, one of the Chohans.

To this end we have therefore decided to give some discourses that, of course, are not meant to replace the discourses in the course of Self-Mastery or other teachings we have given on specific rays. But they are designed specifically to help you tune in and tune into the quality of a certain ray. And of course, I am the master who represents the quality of the third ray, which is often called or seen as the quality of love.

Divine Love vs. human love

Now, as Jesus said, in a sense, he is the easiest master to tune into, but in another sense he is the most difficult master to tune into because of the images projected by the Christian religion. And in the same way you could say that love is the easiest God quality to tune into because is there any human being on earth who do not at least have the concept of love? But, of course, you can also say that love is the most difficult quality to tune into because most people may have a concept of love, but not Divine Love. They have a concept of human love that has been projected upon Divine Love.

And, of course, if you are enveloped in an image of love that is based on the human love, how will you tune into and connect to Divine Love? It cannot be done. Once again, if you really desire to tune into love, you must first consider what images of human love, or we might even say anti-love, you have been affected by as you grew up in this lifetime, possibly even in past lifetimes.

So many people have an image of love that actually should be called ownership or possession instead of love. They think that loving somebody is an obligation that if you say that you love somebody, other people are obligated towards you. And if you are in a love relationship with someone, be it a spouse, be it a parent or child you are obligated towards that person.

So you see that so many so-called love relationships really are trapped in a kind of power game where both partners in the relationship are seeking to make the other partner feel obligated. They themselves feel obligated, so they are seeking to make each other feel obligated to give something or to do something that fulfills the demands from the other person. And this, of course, is not Divine Love, for Divine Love does not seek to own, it does not seek to possess.

Why do you need to own something unless you feel lack? All desire for ownership springs from the illusion of lack, and of course Divine Love is not trapped in the illusion of lack, and therefore Divine Love could never have lack. It is the ever-flowing stream that flows from the Creator towards the creation and into the creation. Representing Divine Love as I do, how could I ever feel lack? I feel this constant flow of love through me expressed to all people, and I experience that it is inexhaustible. It could never run out.

No matter how much I give of love to people on earth, I could never run out. For the more I give, the more I receive. That is love. But, of course, when I give love, I give it freely. I give it from that neutral state of mind that we have talked about, where I have no intent about what result should be achieved from my giving love. How people should respond, what they should do or not do with that love. I have no such intent. So I have freely received love from above, I freely give to all below, not creating in my mind the structure that seeks to own, to possess, to control what people do with the gift. That is not really a gift that I am giving, I am just letting it flow through me.

Are you open to receiving love?

And this you can contemplate. You can contemplate whether you want human love or Divine Love. And if you want Divine Love, then the first task is to realize that Divine Love is given freely to all who would receive it. For you individually, it is not a matter of, is Divine Love given to you? The only question is, are you receiving it or are you not receiving it? It is given. That is a given. But the receiving of it is by no means a given for most people, even most spiritual people, reject it for various reasons.

So the first task is as always to look at the subconscious selves that cause you to reject love or to ignore it. One of the most common ones is a self that says you are not worthy of love, you are not worthy to receive Divine Love. For there are other selves who project that—“Oh Divine Love is so special”, and because it is so special, you have to be special to receive it. But Divine Love is not special, it is beyond labels. It is neither special nor not special. It cannot be labeled.

Love beyond conditions

One word that we have applied to it is unconditional. But this is just another word that the mind can twist and turn and analyze and say what does that mean? And the fallen beings will always object: “There is no such thing as unconditional love, even God’s love is conditional, for have we not spent so much effort on this planet and in previous spheres to create this false God, the conditional angry God in the sky? Have we not spent so much effort projecting that this is the only God there is, the only true God?” This is what they will always claim and therefore they will claim that this angry conditional God, his love can only be conditional and only those who live up to certain conditions incidentally defined by the fallen beings are worthy to receive God’s love.

But love is beyond conditions, especially conditions that could be defined on an unnatural planet like earth or could be defined by the fallen beings in the dualistic mindset. For anything, any condition that can be defined from the dualistic mindset is a relative condition and a divine quality is not relative. For if it was relative it would not be divine. This is the enigma, the challenge for you to contemplate the difference between human love which is conditional and Divine Love which is beyond conditions.

You are so used to from human beings that in order to receive love from other people you need to live up to certain conditions. Most of you have received this image from your parents, not necessarily that they consciously projected this image upon you. They just had this image of conditional love projected by their parents and what could they do but give it unto you? They did not know there was an alternative.

The conditional God of organized religion

Where in the world do you find an alternative to conditional love?
Certainly not in the Abrahamic religions or most other religions. But what is a religion? Any large organized, formalized, institutionalized religion is a tool for the fallen beings to control the population. How could such a religion teach about unconditional love or give it to the people?

You can only have a large institution that has power over the people if the people think that the leaders of the institution are special at a higher level than themselves. And therefore the people in order to be accepted by the leaders must live up to conditions. This image is projected all the way up to the angry God in the sky so that many people today believe that God’s love is conditional. But this, of course, is the arrogance, the spiritual pride of the fallen beings who believe that they can define a God and project that image and then in their arrogance they can even believe that God lives up to the image, the graven image, the conditional image.

So few people have been willing to think about this image of the conditional God and contemplate whether it is actually logical.
If God is beyond the world, if God has created the world, why would God live up to any image that could be created in the world?

God beyond human images

An image has form. You live in the world of form. Human beings look at the forms found on earth, they look at the forms of their own psychology, the dualistic psychology, the separate mind and they use this to formulate images and then project these images out. And they project images upon God. But if God is beyond form, how could God live up to or be confined to any image created in the world of form?

If God is the source of form, does it not stand to reason that God is beyond form? We may not say accurately that God is formless because the Creator has individuality, but it is certainly an individuality that is beyond any of the forms found in the world of form. So how is it logical that human beings on this planet that clearly is so primitive can create an image of God and God will live up to it?

Naturally the fallen beings will say that it is not an image of God because this is how God is. But again, look at most of the gods portrayed by the religions of the world and see that it is a God who has form, it is a God that is conditional, whose love is conditional.

You know from science that everything is created from energy. Energy that has taken on the form of these things that you see in the matter world, that you see with your senses, even with your minds. And they all have a distinct form that sets them apart from others. But where does the energy come from out of which these forms are fashioned? Well, it comes from beyond the material universe. So is it logical that the energy out of which form is created has the same forms?

Is it not more logical that the energy is beyond form? It is more than any form that you could see in this world. Therefore, one of the energies that are used to create the world of form is love, Divine Love. But that love is beyond the forms in this world. The white light in the movie projector is beyond the colors on the movie screen. It takes on colors when it is passing through the film strip, but the white light is beyond the images on the film strip.

You cannot receive love through reactionary self

If you want to connect to Divine Love you must begin by contemplating that it does not live up to the conditions defined by human beings. And you must be willing to realize that you have inevitably both in this and past lifetimes created selves in a reaction to these images of conditional love, of human love, of controlling love. And these selves cannot connect to Divine Love, cannot even fathom Divine Love.

For a self the concept of unconditional love is unfathomable. It cannot deal with it. You cannot experience Divine Love through such a self, which is why you must expose it, see the illusion, let it go. This, of course, is what our teachings are about, especially the book given by me as part of the self-mastery course. But you can make progress towards this by doing a meditation that might seem simple, might even seem simplistic, for there is no sophisticated intellectual reasoning.

The meditation on Love

The meditation that I propose to you is simply this, you sit in a comfortable position in a quiet room, you close your eyes and then you gently in your mind repeat this mantra: Love is, Love is. 

And you will notice that you might have a reaction to this. There is a mind, there is a self that wants to say: “Love is what? Love must be something. It cannot just be, it must be something. It must have a form. Give me something I can grasp and hold on to. Give me something I can possess, that I can describe, that I can analyse. I am the mind, my task is to explain and understand everything. But if something does not have qualities, what is there to explain and understand? Give me something I can work with. You have created me to understand everything for you, to explain everything. You cannot just sit there and say Love is, it must be something.”

And if you will study this reaction, it might help you expose some of these subconscious selves. Because you can then say, well, what does your mind say that love should be? Allow the mind to finish the sentence, Love is, and then allow your mind to put qualities on love. And now you have put your mind in a dilemma, because if the mind says love is so and so, you have exposed one of these subconscious selves that holds a man-made image of God, of love.

And you can now work on that self until you see it and can let it go. If the mind does what it is programmed to do, finish the sentence, it exposes the self. The wisest thing the mind could do was to remain quiet, but can the mind remain quiet? It is not very likely. You see a very, very simple practice, a very, very simple meditation, but it can be tremendously effective. And you can use this, if you are willing, to go through a phase where you work on these selves that are holding these images of conditional love, some kind of condition. And you can come to that point where you can sit there and you can repeat that mantra, Love is and you are at peace with just Love is.

You do not have to finish the sentence. You do not have to put qualities on love. You can allow love to be whatever it will be, the I Will Be Who I Will Be. And that is when you then can connect to and experience Divine Love that is beyond conditions. It is an energy. It is a Presence. It is a state of consciousness. You cannot understand it. You cannot grasp it with the mind. And when you begin to experience it, you realize that precisely because the mind cannot grasp it, the mind cannot really shut it out either.

It can distract your attention from focusing on Divine Love, but it cannot shut it out for only that which has qualities that the mind can grasp can be shut out by the separate selves, the subconscious selves. Your perception filter, as we have called it, can only filter out something that has a quality, can only block something that has a quality. But that which has no quality that the dualistic mind can grasp will pass through the barriers of the perception filter. You can then again, use this simple meditation to neutralize that linear mind that wants to put love on some kind of linear progression, linear scale with dualistic polarities, such as true love.

Only Divine Love can satisfy you

Consider this concept of how it is permeating the collective consciousness. True love as opposed to false love. How could love be true or false? Well, conditional love can be true or false, but Divine Love, how could it ever be true or false? How can you apply these concepts, true and false, to a divine quality? But this is what the mind wants to do, because then the mind feels it has control. And then the mind feels that now that I have control over love, I can use love to control others and get what I want and overcome that sense of lack that is built into the separate mind.

But once you go into separation, you will feel lack, for you cannot receive the divine qualities which is the only thing that can truly satisfy you and fill you. For the separate self cannot understand and grasp this, but the Conscious You, of course, can. You can come to that point where you are aware, you become aware, you fully accept that the only way to be satisfied is to receive a divine quality.

So if you want love, no amount of human love will truly fill your need for love. Only Divine Love can fill the need for love. Of course, the Divine Love cannot fill the need for love of a separate self. Nothing can fill the need for love of a separate self. But the Conscious You can step outside of that self and realize that the self is on a futile quest that can never be filled.

No matter how much human love you might receive, it could never fill you. It can distract you for a short period of time when you are in love with someone, but sooner or later the honeymoon is over. So the Conscious You can come to this realization that: “I can never be satisfied through this. I can only be satisfied, filled, fulfilled when I experience Divine Love.”

The meditation on accepting Love

Once you have gone through this meditation of the Love is, I will propose the next step. And that is again, you go into a quiet room, close your eyes and in your mind you repeat the mantra:  I accept love.

Again you might find a reaction. The mind might still have various reactions. Well, why you cannot just accept love. Again there might be conditions that you supposedly need to fulfill and then you can go after these selves as well. And you can come to a point where you can repeat this mantra, I accept love and continue to repeat it until you experience it. Now, the mind will still attempt to interfere with this. For the mind will say: “Well this master is talking a good game, he is talking about love, he is talking about unconditional love, but what is unconditional love like? What will it feel like to experience unconditional love? Tell me this, for how will you know that you have received unconditional love if you cannot describe it and he is saying it is beyond characteristics, beyond form. How will you ever know if you have experienced it?”

Divine Love cannot be experienced through the mind

This is what the mind will do. The tricks that the mind will play on you. But you see the solution to this seeming enigma is very simple. You do not have to have an image in your mind of what it will feel like to experience Divine Love. For I can assure you that when you experience it, you will know that this is Divine Love. There will be no doubt in your mind that you have experienced Divine Love.

 

The rest of this dictation, along with an invocation based on the dictation, is found in the book: Connecting with Your Spiritual Teachers.

 

Copyright © 2023 Kim Michaels

 

Back to Connecting to Your Higher Self and Spiritual Teachers

You are already the Christ consciousness

Listen to a recording of this dictation (subscribers only)

Ascended Master Master Jesus Christ through Kim Michaels, June 5, 2023. This dictation was given at a conference in Seoul, Korea: Connecting to Your Higher Self and Spiritual Teachers. 

I AM the Ascended Master Jesus Christ. Consider the topic of connecting to your spiritual teachers. Which spiritual teacher is the easiest teacher to connect to for all people on earth? It is in fact, I, the Ascended Master Jesus.

The Christ consciousness is in everyone

This will be a statement that would startle many if they heard it. Of course, those who are not Christians would say, “What do we have to  do with Jesus”? And many Christians would also feel that it is very difficult to connect to me. But why do I say that I am the easiest master to connect to? Because I am the master who represents the Christ consciousness to all people on earth, and what is the Christ consciousness? What does it say in the scriptures? Without him was not anything made that was made. Thus, the Christ consciousness is that universal consciousness, that universal, one, unified, united consciousness out of which everything is created.

And what does that mean? It means that the Christ consciousness is in everything and in everyone. Therefore, wherever you are in the physical realm on earth, no matter how dense the planet is or how dense your local area is, no matter how low your consciousness is, even if you are at the lowest level of consciousness possible on earth, then you are still immersed in the Christ consciousness.
You cannot escape the Christ consciousness. You cannot get away from the Christ consciousness and given that I am the master who represents that universal Christ consciousness in a personified form, I am the easiest master to connect to because I am not only with you always, I am with you everywhere and anywhere.

Of course, the fallen beings have done everything they can to prevent people from connecting to me, the ascended Jesus Christ. And what is the primary tool that the fallen beings have used for this purpose? It is, of course, the Christian religion. It is a deplorable fact that the Christian religion has done more than any other endeavor on earth to prevent people from connecting to their spiritual teachers and to the universal Christ consciousness.

A personification of the universal Christ consciousness

Now, of course, most people are not able to connect to the universal Christ consciousness. That is why they need a personification of that Christ consciousness, which is why I took embodiment at the beginning of the Age of Pisces in order to demonstrate to all people the state of consciousness where you can say: “I and my Father are one.“ The Father being the universal Christ consciousness and, of course, the Creator and, of course, ascended beings.

But first of all, that universal Christ consciousness that you as the Son, the S-U-N of God can become one with and therefore express and represent here on earth. And this is precisely the purpose for my embodiment, to demonstrate to all people that wherever you are in the physical, wherever you are in consciousness, you can connect to and in fact become one with that universal Christ consciousness so that you too become a personification of the Christ consciousness as you saw me personify the Christ consciousness.

The underlying reality of the Christ mind

The Christian religion has been used as a tool, especially from the very inception of the Catholic church, to project the image that you cannot follow my example, you cannot put on the Christ consciousness, you cannot unite with the Christ consciousness, you cannot express it, for only I could do it, for I was so special. But in the Christ consciousness, no one is ‘special’.

Why do I say that no one is special? Because no one being is more special than any other being because all beings are out of the one mind of the Christ consciousness and the mind of the Creator. If all come out of the Creator’s being, how can any one being be special? This is what you see with the logic of the Christ mind. But, of course, the duality consciousness has been used by the fallen beings in innumerable ways to obscure this underlying reality. And as you have given the calls and this invocation that you gave, you see that their primary means is to make some people feel special. They are above the law of man, but many even think they are above the law of God, that they can set aside that law, do whatever they want, get away with it. There are the consequences that apply to most people, do not apply to them.

You see so many examples of this and when you go into that state of consciousness where you seek to be special, then you cannot connect to Jesus Christ. For I am not here to make some people special by putting others down. I am here and the Christ consciousness is here to raise up all people into the kingdom of God, which truly is, of course, the state of consciousness where you have connected to the Christ within yourself and you come to the point where you accept that you are the Christ in embodiment on earth.
This is the kingdom of God on an individual basis and when a sufficient number, a critical mass of people manifest that consciousness, you will have the Kingdom of God manifest on earth.

And, of course, the fallen beings have done everything they could to delay this, but they cannot delay it forever. They cannot stop it for too many people are open to a higher reality, to a higher vision that goes beyond the official Christian churches and all of the other philosophies, be it scientific materialism or communism or Marxism or this-ism or that-ism that are created specifically to hide the underlying Oneness of all life, divide people up into groups and set some groups up as being special by putting all the others down.

This is the pattern that you see in so many disguises and it always comes out of the duality consciousness but ultimately the fallen consciousness and the fallen beings behind it, what we might call the forces of anti-christ, even the mind of anti-christ.

The false image of Christ

Why am I bringing this up when the topic is how to connect to your spiritual teachers?  Well, because if you have had any kind of Christian background in this life you need to consider what images have been projected by your particular version of Christianity upon me as a spiritual being because whatever those images are they will prevent you from connecting to me.

And, of course, you may also very well look at and say: “Well I have not had a Christian background in this lifetime.” But then what about previous lifetimes? Do you really think you could have embodied on this planet for these past 2,000 years without in some embodiment being affected by the Christian religion and its false image of Christ? It is not very likely I can assure you and thus you can all benefit from considering what images of Christ the Christian religion has put upon me and therefore shattering those images, discovering the separate selves that are holding on to these images because what is the effect of these images?

Well, it is that when you are presented with this image that Jesus was so special because he was the only Son of God then this will create a reaction in you because whether you realize this consciously or not the Conscious You senses that this cannot be true, that this is not right because the Conscious You has some sense that it is also a son or daughter of God, that it is also out of the One mind. So when it is presented with this very strong claim, this false image, you must react to it somehow and you react to it by creating these subconscious selves that can resolve this conflict within you and suppress it so that you can live with it and not be consumed by this conflict where you do not understand why God should create one Son to be so special and create all of these human beings in a lower state.

You can benefit from looking at these selves that you have, uncovering them and you can use many of the teachings and tools we have given, you can use some of my books that I have given to uncover your reaction to Christ and the image of Christ that you were presented with. And then when you can come to see these selves you can separate yourself from them, let them go and you can come to accept that you, the Conscious You that you are, are an extension of the Creator’s being. The outer self, the outer selves, the ego is not an extension of the Creator’s being but once you begin to experience that you are an extension of the Creator’s being then you can more quickly overcome these separate selves so you can accept that you are worthy to connect to me Jesus, that you are capable of connecting to me Jesus. And then you can of course decide, are you willing to connect to me Jesus or do you prefer to connect to an other ascended master?

I, of course, have absolutely no reaction to this, I am not in any way demanding loyalty from you. If there is an other ascended master that is closer to your heart then you focus on that master. But you can still make it easier for yourself to connect to that master by overcoming the idolatrous images of Christ. For people tend to transfer those idolatrous images to any ascended master, seeing them, seeing us as being up there beyond your reach and it is quite difficult to connect to a being that you see as beyond your reach, is it not?

“I am already the Christ consciousness”

What can help you close the gap? Well, once you have considered and overcome the separate selves that are a reaction to the Christian religion you can go a step further. What did I start out by saying? Without him, without the Christ consciousness was not anything made that was made. Well, without the Christ consciousness was not any individual being made that was made, or rather begotten, that was begotten. For you may remember that the Nicene Creed says that I was not made but begotten, the only begotten Son of the Father but this was not I, Jesus Christ, it was the Christ consciousness, of course.

The reality is here that you are all begotten of God, you are all out of that Christ consciousness, but what does that mean? Well, it means something very profound that it might take some contemplation from you to grasp.

What are you, the Conscious You? What are you made of? What are you made of? You are made of the Christ consciousness, otherwise how could you have self-awareness? For only the universal Christ mind has self-awareness so you are already out of the Christ mind, you are the Christ mind, you are connected with the Christ mind. You are one with the Christ mind. However you want to see it and you might start by seeing yourself connected to something and gradually work towards greater sense of oneness but the switch that you can make when you have overcome a sufficient number of selves is that you realize: “But I am the Christ consciousness for there is nothing else. Regardless of the forms that you see in the world of form, behind every form, within every form is the Christ consciousness. And when I realize that my Conscious You is not the outer selves, is not the ego, is not the outer personality then I can experience myself as pure awareness. And what is that pure awareness? Well, what could it be except the Christ consciousness? There is no other awareness but the Christ consciousness.” You may say: “What about the separate identity, the fallen beings, the duality consciousness?” But you see the fallen consciousness is not awareness, it is unawareness. You are unaware of the Oneness of all life. But still, the Christ consciousness is within you, for you cannot escape the Christ consciousness. You can create an illusion in the mind, but the illusion exists only in the mind.

The higher stages of personal Christhood

Those of you who will reach that level in this lifetime or have already reached it, you can benefit from contemplating this and realizing that you are already the Christ consciousness. The Conscious You is the Christ consciousness. Now mind you, I am not saying you are the Christ, I am saying you are the Christ consciousness and it is important to start contemplating this until you fully realize that you are the Christ consciousness. And then you can accept: “I am the Christ, I am the Living Christ in embodiment and I am here to be the open door for my I AM Presence, for the ascended masters, to be the open door for that flow of the Holy Spirit flowing through me.”

But this, of course, does not mean that you lose your sense of self, your individuality, for you are directing that flow and you can become more and more neutral in directing that flow and it will give you greater and greater joy as you become neutral and do not have this attachment to a specific outcome of what the flow through you should produce. Instead, you are just enjoying experiencing how that flow flows through you, goes into the world and produces whatever effect it produces. And this, my beloved, is that higher stage that we can call personal Christhood, being the Christ in action, where you are open to the flow.

It is almost as if you are just witnessing the flow for you realize: “I can of my own self, the outer self, do nothing” you even realize “I can of my Conscious You do nothing because the flow comes from above and it only flows through me. But it flows through me because I am that Christ consciousness and so I am the focal point in this world through which the Christ consciousness can flow.”

The rest of this dictation, along with an invocation based on the dictation, is found in the book: Connecting with Your Spiritual Teachers.

 

Copyright © 2023 Kim Michaels

 

Back to Connecting to Your Higher Self and Spiritual Teachers

Experiencing Divine Wisdom beyond the linear mind


Listen to a recording of this dictation (subscribers only)

Ascended Master Master Lanto through Kim Michaels, June 4, 2023. This dictation was given at a conference in Seoul, Korea: Connecting to Your Higher Self and Spiritual Teachers. 

I AM the Ascended Master Lanto, Chohan of the Second Ray, often associated with wisdom. But what is wisdom really? So many people in the world have looked at wisdom as some kind of finite knowledge, something that can be expressed either in words or in the language of science, such as mathematics. But can wisdom be captured by words or numbers or formulas or equations? Can it be captured by mental images, by concepts and ideas? Can wisdom be confined to any form? Well, yes and no.

A futile quest for ultimate wisdom

We might say that there is no ultimate wisdom except oneness, which is the Creator’s consciousness. But, of course, as long as you are in embodiment on a planet like earth, it is difficult to experience that consciousness. We might say that wisdom, as one of the qualities used to create your unascended sphere, does have a form. For if it did not have a form, how could it be used to create a world that has form? But wisdom certainly cannot be confined to the words and other expressions you use on earth.

The first step in connecting to the ascended masters and the quality of Divine Wisdom is to realize that spiritual and religious and political and scientific people throughout the ages have been on this quest to find or bring forth or define some ultimate knowledge, ultimate understanding, ultimate wisdom. And, of course, we understand that when you first find the spiritual path you have been affected by this age old quest. You transfer this to the spiritual path and you think that the goal of a spiritual teaching is to give you some ultimate form of wisdom. And that is why so many spiritual people become trapped into this mindset of thinking that their guru, their spiritual organization, their spiritual teaching has the highest wisdom, the highest understanding, the highest expression of how the world really works and how the spiritual realm really works. But while this is understandable at a certain level of the spiritual path, there also comes a point on the path where it is no longer constructive for it will not lead to growth.

A practical path for raising people’s consciousness

There was a time when the Buddha was in embodiment and the Buddha taught directly. And there are many people today that want to project that the Buddha was not only an enlightened being, but was the ultimate enlightened being because there were so many special circumstances around his birth and his life and his teaching. They want to project the image that the Buddha not only gave the highest teaching possible but that the Buddha’s teachings or certainly the Buddha himself could answer all questions. But these people have not studied the history of the religion of Buddhism, for it is a fact that there were questions that the Buddha refused to answer.

One example of such a question is whether there is a self or whether there is not a self. This was a question that the Buddha refused to answer. But why? Well, because the goal of the Buddha was not to give people some ultimate knowledge that would answer all of their questions. The goal of the Buddha was to give people a simple step by step path whereby they could raise their consciousness. This, when you look at it historically, was in sharp contrast to the tradition of the Vedic teachers, the Brahmins of the Hindu religion. They were in a phase at the time of the Buddha when there were different directions, different groupings within the Hindu religion, within the Brahmins. They had slightly different teachings although all within the same overall framework and they spent considerable time debating amongst themselves what was the ultimate understanding, what was the ultimate teaching such as, what is the ultimate teaching about the self and what is the self like?

But the Buddha saw, after his enlightenment, that all of this sprang from the level of the human mind, the intellectual and analytical linear mind and the Buddha saw that all of this, regardless of the elaborate arguments and descriptions that people had come up with, it was actually keeping people trapped at a certain level of consciousness. The Buddha saw that if he entered the fray, if he jumped into the ring of this circus and started to debate the Brahmins then he would accomplish nothing. He also realized that there are questions that cannot be answered by the linear intellectual mind, because as we have explained, this mind can argue for or against any point and some people can use the mind to convince themselves that there is a self and other people can use the intellectual mind to convince themselves that there is no self. And where is the meeting of the minds when two groups are absolutely convinced that their argument, which are all relative arguments, but still both sides are convinced that their argument is the ultimate argument?

And the Buddha saw, which is why he formulated the concept of the pairs, that in this dualistic mindset all arguments are relative so there is no finite argument that could be brought forth for people in this mindset. What did the Buddha do? He reasoned, and of course, he was working with certain ascended masters for his mission, and so he instead attempted to say: “Let’s not reason at the level of that human intellectual linear mind. Let’s give people a simple path for raising their consciousness. And once people have raised their consciousness beyond a certain level, then they can actually begin to acquire true wisdom, they can begin to acquire answers to these questions that cannot be decided by the linear mind.” You can also say that the Buddha realized that the goal for his work was to raise people’s consciousness not to bring forth some superior wisdom or scripture that would stand for all time.

The endless intellectual debates

Now there are modern Buddhists who would object to this as they would say that since the Buddha was a fully enlightened being his teaching had to be the ultimate truth. But then why is it so that Buddhism itself has split into several directions? That although agreeing on a certain overall framework, have elaborate arguments and teachings and diverging ideas and practices and cannot agree on many things? You see when you look at this neutrally that after the Buddha was no longer in embodiment the same thing happened to Buddhism that had happened to Hinduism.

There was diversification, there were divisions into different directions and groups, and people from these different groups came up with intellectual arguments and now started intellectualizing about what the Buddha had said, what the Buddha had meant. And if the Buddha’s teaching was the absolute highest teaching how could there be disagreements and interpretations? If you have an ultimate wisdom would it not be so that anyone who read it should reach the ultimate level of consciousness? And there should be no disagreement if it was the superior ultimate wisdom. Since there is disagreement, is it not possible then to reason that even the Buddha’s teaching was not the ultimate wisdom, not for any flaw in the Buddha but for a flaw in the people receiving the teaching?

The pragmatic approach of (to) spiritual teachings

After all, is it not clearly stated in Buddhism that the goal is to raise people to a higher state than the state of suffering, the Sea of Samsara? Clearly it is stated in Buddhism that the people for whom the Buddhic teaching is given are not in an ultimate state of consciousness. Is it not possible to reason then that the Buddha could not possibly have given any ultimate wisdom, for how could people in a lower state of consciousness have even grasped and made use of such a superior wisdom? And is it therefore not possible to step up and realize that whether it is the teachings of the Buddha or the teachings of Jesus or the teachings of the Vedas or any other spiritual teaching, nothing on earth is ultimate? For the intellectual linear analytical mind can take any spiritual teaching and come up with different interpretations and arguments for why this interpretation is better than that interpretation and the linear mind can project that there must be a superior interpretation, some ultimate interpretation.

And is it not possible then to realize that people who fall into this pattern are at a certain level of consciousness? And that the goal of a true spiritual teaching is not to validate people’s interpretations at this level of consciousness but to raise them above and beyond that level of consciousness? Is that really such a hard realization to come to?

We can say that there has never been an attempt to bring forth the ultimate or the final spiritual teaching on planet earth. For those who are the originators of spiritual teachings, namely the ascended masters, are fully aware of conditions on earth. We clearly see the limitations of the collective consciousness and different groups of people. We are not attempting to do the impossible but to do what is practically possible, give a teaching for a certain group of people that can raise them to a higher level where they can grasp a higher teaching and then gradually bring forth this progressive revelation. And ,of course, the linear mind is going to say: “Well when will the ultimate teaching be brought forth? For there must be some ultimate teaching.”

The ultimate teaching of everything

This is, of course, reinforced by science who now for decades, if not centuries, has been on the quest to come up with the ultimate spiritual theory or realization of how the world works, the theory of everything. Where is the wisdom of everything, the teaching of everything? When will that be brought forth? Well, again there will never be an ultimate teaching that will be brought forth on earth, partly, of course, because the earth is currently at that level that we call an unnatural planet where there are some severe limitations. But another reason is that even on a natural planet no ultimate teaching could be brought forth. For what is the ultimate teaching, the ultimate teaching of everything? Well, what must be encompassed in the ultimate teaching of everything? Well, naturally this teaching must encompass everything. Where is the ultimate teaching about this world or form to be found? In the mind of the Creator.

How could that teaching about everything be communicated to any level of creation that is less than the Creator? Well, it could not. You can only reach that level of ultimate wisdom by becoming one with the Creator’s mind. Then you know the ultimate wisdom. But, of course, we can also take another approach and say: “When will the ultimate teaching be brought forth on earth? Well, what is the ultimate teaching for a planet like earth? It is a teaching on how to transcend the levels of consciousness found on earth so you can start wherever you are at, rise up towards the levels of consciousness possible on earth until you reach the highest level and then you can transcend that level and go into a higher state. Whether you call it Nirvana or enlightenment or the ascended state or something else you can graduate from schoolroom earth.

In a sense the teaching that allows you to graduate from schoolroom earth is the ultimate teaching that can be brought forth given the specific state, the specific situation on earth, primarily the level of consciousness, the collective consciousness but also the density of matter. From that perspective we could say that ultimate teachings have already been brought forth in various forms because the Buddha’s teachings can allow people to transcend the levels of consciousness possible on earth, so could the teachings of Christ, so could many other teachings that are religious or mystical in nature. It is not a matter of thinking there is some ultimate teaching that will automatically produce the result. This is the flaw of the mindset I am addressing for the linear mind will say: “Well if I had the ultimate teaching then by studying that teaching and understanding what the teaching says then I should reach that ultimate level of consciousness and be enlightened or awakened or ascended.”

Understanding a teaching vs. raising consciousness

But it would not be possible to give a teaching that would automatically and mechanically produce enlightenment in anyone who understood the teaching. And why is this not possible? Because the purpose of the spiritual path is to raise your consciousness beyond the levels of consciousness possible on earth so you can make that leap to the ascended consciousness. The purpose is to shift your consciousness upwards, not to shift your understanding upwards and this is, of course, something that would shock many spiritual people from many different traditions and even going back through the ages many people would be shocked by this statement. For in their minds they think that understanding is the same as the level of awareness. For surely in order to fully understand the given teaching you must reach the highest level of awareness otherwise how would you understand the teaching?

But you see there is a difference between understanding an outer teaching, and internalizing the teaching whereby you raise your consciousness. Understanding a teaching is not the same as raising consciousness because what does it mean to understand something? It means to observe it from a distance. When you take an outer teaching, be it the Buddhist scriptures or the Christian scriptures or any other scripture, you are taking a teaching that you see as coming from outside your mind, you are evaluating it with the intellect, the analytical mind, the linear mind. You are seeking to grasp and understand it but you are still seeing this as something outside yourself. You may be trying to understand the spiritual realm. You may be trying to understand what an ascended master is like, thinking that if you understand Lord Lanto you will have connected to me, but this cannot be done.

Experiencing vs. knowing from a distance

Understanding implies distance between the knower and the known. But how do you raise your consciousness as long as you see a distance? How do you connect to Lord Lanto and the Wisdom of the Second Ray? Not if you think this is something you can grasp with the intellect, something you see as outside yourself, some understanding you must come to. You ultimately connect by coming to see that there is no distance and experience that there is no distance. You are not trying to understand me, because no matter how well you understand me with the intellect, you will not connect to me. I have many times, figuratively speaking, been standing right next to a student who is trying to grasp Divine wisdom. I am figuratively speaking, tapping on the shoulder of the student and saying: “Here I am”. But the student is looking at his scripture with his intellect trying to understand: “He must be out there. He must be far away.”

And some people think: “The farther he is away the more effort it requires to understand him, therefore the more superior the more special I am if I can understand this far away master.” But I am still right here, just turn your head and look. But no, he is looking at the book and the scripture weighing with his intellect: “Is it this interpretation that is the superior one or is it that one? If only I find the superior one, there must be Lanto.” (messenger taps three times) I am still right here. Why do not you look up from the book and you might see me by accident? But nay: “I am focused on the book for Lord Lanto must be hiding between the letters on the page. Where else could he be?” You see this is a game that people can play indefinitely as long as they are seeking that superiority of the intellect instead of seeking the simplicity of the experience. What is wisdom? Is it something that can be formulated in words? Nay. Wisdom is an experience. It is a Presence. You can only experience the Presence. You cannot understand Presence. That is why you cannot understand your I AM Presence, you can only experience the Presence.

Reaching back to the question that the Buddha refused to answer: Is there a self or is there not a self? The Brahmins debated this endlessly. Some are still debating it. Some people today have taken these ancient teachings and created their modern versions of them. They are still debating: “Is there a self or is there a state of no self? Should we strive to attain this ultimate self that is the Atman, the eternal unchanging self? But wait a minute. The Buddha said there is no such self. Then we must go to the opposite and say that means there is no self at all. Neither an eternal self nor any other kind of self. We should strive to attain no self and deny that we have any self. Then we will be reunited with ultimate infinite awareness of Brahman.”

The teachings of the Vedas say that there is an Atman which is the ultimate self, the One Self, the undivided self that is eternal, unchanging. Were the Rishis completely wrong for saying this? Yes and no. Can we perhaps shed some different light on this with the teachings given by the ascended masters? Yes and no. We can explain it, we can attempt to explain it in words. But can people grasp it? Or will they go into endless argumentation and take any teaching we give and use this to come up with new arguments, new interpretations, new fanciful intellectual interpretations?

Two aspects of the Christ consciousness

So let me attempt to give you something. Were the Vedic seers wrong about the Atman? Well, in the concepts and words that we have used in these teachings we could say not really, because what have we said? We have said that the Creator has created everything out of its own being, out of its own consciousness, out of its own self. And the first thing that the Creator created, the firstborn Son, was the Christ consciousness which is meant to give unity between the Creator and its creation so that the creation, meaning the self-aware extensions of the Creator, cannot forever remain lost in form. You can say that there is an aspect of the Christ consciousness, the universal Christ consciousness that is as the scriptures say, the same yesterday, today and forever. It can be said to be featureless, timeless, undifferentiated, having no form. And therefore it cannot really change for it is beyond what you could conceive of from the world of form.

On the other hand, where is this universal Christ consciousness created out of? Well, the Creator’s being, the Creator’s consciousness. And is not the Creator constantly transcending itself? Is that not why the Creator is creating so that it can experience creation, experience its own creation from the inside through you who are the self-aware extensions of the Creator? So is the Christ consciousness really unchanging or does it just have two aspects? One that is the constant oneness with the Creator and the other aspect of the Christ consciousness, one that is constantly changing, adapting to the illusions that people create, offering them a way back from that illusion to oneness.

Did the Vedic seers fully grasp this? Nay, for they were trapped in the intellect of reasoning that there must be the two sides of the coin, the opposites. And when there is a world where everything is constantly changing and moving there must be an opposite that is not changing at all, so they reasoned. So were the teachings that were received by these Rishis given from that level of consciousness that was already divided and in a sense dualistic? You see here, this is the feature of the intellect, the linear mind. It takes a certain state and usually it takes what you can observe in the world and then it reasons based on this, upwards, backwards into the spiritual realm and the origin of creation.

It always reasons that whatever you can observe, there must be an opposite. If you observe that everything in this world is change and movement, there must be an opposite that is not changing and then it projects that this must be some superior wisdom. The Rishis said there is an unchanging and eternal self, the Atman, and all people are out of that Atman. And when they awaken from the illusion that they are separated from the Atman they disappear into the Atman, become one with the Atman. The Buddha on the other hand said that in all of his introspection he had never discovered an unchanging eternal self inside himself. Was the Buddha wrong or were the Rishis wrong?

Ever-self-transcending self

Well, the Buddha was actually closer to expressing a truth that cannot be expressed fully in words. Because when you trace your origin back, you can trace it to first the Conscious You which is beyond the outer self, but then to your I AM Presence which is an extension of ascended masters that are an extension of other ascended masters, reaching up through the ascended spheres back to the Creator. But you are part of the Creator’s creation and in creation there is always change and movement. Creation is constantly changing from one state to another. So is there really an unchanging self, a personal unchanging self?

We have explained that you are created to be co-creators. What is a co-creator? It is a being who starts out with a point-like sense of self, gradually expands its sense of self until it reaches the self-awareness of a Creator. But this does not mean that you disappear back into the Creator out of which you came, it means you become a Creator in your own right. You were created to be a moving, self-transcending being and this can continue indefinitely. So where is that self that is never changing, the Atman? It is not there.

The state of no outer self

Well, there is an aspect of the Christ consciousness, the universal Christ mind that you can experience even as a human being in embodiment on earth. And when you being on a planet that is constantly moving, experience the Christ consciousness, it seems like the rock that is not moving relative to your constant movement and that is why it was interpreted that way that this is an unmoving self. But this was an interpretation seen from the world of form on a planet like earth. But then you can go on and say: “Did the Buddha not talk about a state of no self? What then did the Buddha mean?” There are modern Buddhists who think the goal of following the Eightfold Path is to reach a state of no self where you give up all self. There are other people who are in the Western world who have taken the Western logical linear mindset and think that the goal of the spiritual path is to eradicate the self. Who is right? Who is wrong?

Well, it all depends on what self you are talking about. If you are talking about the separate self, the egoic self that is born out of the duality consciousness, well yes then the Buddha was talking about reaching a state where you have no ego self, no outer self. But this is not the same as saying you have no self. For when you are no longer trapped in identification with this egoic self, you discover that you are an extension of your higher self, your I AM Presence and your I AM Presence has an individuality that was defined by your spiritual parents, the ascended masters. And you are meant to expand upon that, to transcend and become more as that individuality grows.

If you reason that the goal of the spiritual path is to go into a state of no self where you basically have no existence, then you are again using the linear mind to reason that there must be two polarities in everything and this shows you again the flaw of that reasoning mind. As the Conscious You separates itself from the outer self and the outer personality you discover the higher self, the I AM Presence and its individuality and you begin to express that individuality. So what does this mean that there are people who have experienced or claim to have experienced a state of no self? How is this possible?

The state of no self

Because over a very long period of time, going back to the fallen beings who fell in the Fourth sphere, they have created this, what we have called a collective entity, a collective self, a collective beast that is like a state of nothingness, a state of no self. So what you have in earth is you have the fallen beings doing two things about self. On the one hand, they are seeking to raise their own selves to some ultimate status where they think God will have to let them into heaven or put them in charge of the universe because they are so sophisticated. On the other extreme, they have created this state of no self and what are they trying to do? They are trying to pull, especially the spiritual people, into going in one of these two directions. Either seeking to make the self so sophisticated that they will gain entry into heaven, or to deny that there is a self and go into this limbo, this no man’s land, no-self-land, of thinking that you have no self.

And there are people who believe that they have overcome the self, the self has died. They project that there are certain masters who have attained the state of no self, non-duality. But how do people know that they have gone into this state of no self? When you say: “I have attained no self, I have attained non-duality.” What is the “I” that says this? Is it not a self? When you have a self that says: “I am no self” have you really escaped the self? Or have you just gone into some illusion where you are fooling yourself into thinking you have reached some ultimate state on the spiritual path?

The rest of this dictation, along with an invocation based on the dictation, is found in the book: Connecting with Your Spiritual Teachers.

 

Copyright © 2023 Kim Michaels

 

Back to Connecting to Your Higher Self and Spiritual Teachers

Surrendering into the greater will of the One mind


Listen to a recording of this dictation (subscribers only)

Ascended Master Master MORE through Kim Michaels, June 4, 2023. This dictation was given at a conference in Seoul, Korea: Connecting to Your Higher Self and Spiritual Teachers.

I AM the Ascended Master MORE. How do you connect to me? By wanting to be more, of course. What other way could there possibly be? You cannot connect to me by wanting to be less. For I AM always MORE. More than what you might say, but that is the wrong question to ask. For the MORE that I AM cannot be compared to anything that is less, nor can it be compared to anything that is more. For there cannot be anything more than Master MORE. That I trust you can see if you neutralize the linear mind that always wants to think there can be more. If you are always striving for more than you have now, how can you connect to Master MORE? For I am neither more nor less. The trick is to neutralize that linear mind. And what can help you do this?

Many facets of Will

I am the Chohan of the First Ray, often seen as the Ray of Will. And in previous dispensations they thought that I am this strict disciplinarian and you have to have a strong willpower and be disciplined in order to dare to approach me. But will has many facets. Will is not always the strong determined will. For what have we attempted to explain so far? Connecting to the ascended masters is not a matter of pushing and pushing harder and giving more and more of an effort. There is clearly a will on earth that is a human will, an external will. There is a will of the ego of the separate selves. And there is a will that is approaching the spiritual path because the ego thinks that it can gain what it wants to gain, namely security, some ultimate status where it can feel secure. The ego believes that if you walk the path there will be some ultimate stage. And if you focus on willpower and determination the ego will think that you have to have the ultimate willpower, the ultimate determination. And in previous dispensations some students have gone into this state of mind of thinking that in order to be worthy to connect to me, El Moya as they saw me at that time and, of course, still see me, they had to manifest this strong will. They had to be blue flame, blue ray and they had to be so determined and so focused.

Many of them overlooked the story that we sometimes told, that Kuthumi and I were charged to ascend a mountain to get a message and that I charged straight up the mountain being completely focused and Kuthumi took his time communed with the birds and the flowers. But when we came back down, Kuthumi had retained the message, I had not. And this shows you that when you have a will that is too strong, that is unbalanced, then it is not only that you do not retain the message, you do not get the message in the first place.

Then, of course, there is another form of the outer will which is what we might call non-will and this is what you see in many people on earth who are overpowered by the collective consciousness. They do not show any strong individuality, they do not want to stick out from the crowd, they want to blend into the crowd, disappear into the crowd, do what they are told, follow convention, follow tradition in their society.

The middle way of Will

You have both the non-will and the unbalanced will and you actually see both on the spiritual path where some students as I said become so determined and others just enter a spiritual movement and decide they are going to do whatever they are told, never question, never think for themselves, but just flow with whatever the culture is, whatever the demands are in that organization. Neither of these types of will is balanced. What is a balanced will? Well, is it the midpoint between the two extremes I have just described, or is it the middle way, which is not the midpoint between these two extremes, but transcending the consciousness of the dualistic extremes?

Many students have taken this approach that you need to be disciplined and determined. And I am in no way saying it is an invalid approach. As you are climbing from the 48th to the 96th level of consciousness, naturally your will, your determination needs to be stronger than the downward pull of the collective consciousness. How else will you rise above the collective consciousness?

Yet when you reach the higher levels and start going beyond the 96th level, you are into a different phase. It might help you to consider that there is a different way to promote, to approach any of the qualities of the seven rays. You can take the quality of willpower, you can look how it is being outplayed on earth and you can set up the two extremes. You can think that willpower is either strong or it is weak, it is either outgoing or it is passive, it is either aggressive or passive. But the alternative is to rise to a recognition that willpower is a divine quality that you do not need to acquire as a being in embodiment. This is what many students in previous organizations thought. They thought that here is this Divine willpower of the First Ray and I need to acquire this willpower so I have this willpower here in embodiment. But how will this willpower then be expressed if you think this way?

Pushing to the breaking point

You will build a self that is focused on willpower and how you see willpower through some other self. And that is why you actually build a willpower that is the will of the ego, based on the illusion of separation. And you again think that there must be some barrier you have to push through for surely the physical world is separated from the Divine quality of Willpower of the First Ray. You have to push to acquire it, you have to push to attain anything on earth and so you get into this state of doing, doing, doing and doing more and pushing harder and harder. And some people have realized that by attempting to do more they achieve less. And this is what we have explained before that when you create this outer self that projects out you are creating your own opposition and so the harder you push the more opposition you create and there comes a point where you cannot push harder, you cannot stand to be always pushing so hard and this is what has caused some students to eventually break down, not be able to do it anymore. And we have seen this in our students in previous dispensations, this crash and burn syndrome where they pushed so hard until they could not do it anymore and then they had to completely withdraw from the path, perhaps even drop out of the path completely, even though they thought for some time that they were doing so well and they were the best students.

Feeling the movement of the ocean of Divine will

The alternative is what Kuan Yin mentioned where nothing is done but nothing is left undone because you realize that you are not separated from Divine will. You are a wave on the ocean of Divine will and instead of thinking that you have to swim on the surface and swim harder and harder to catch up to Divine will you can stop swimming, you can relax and you can feel the movement of the ocean of Divine will. It rises, it goes down, it rises, it relaxes and it flows in a direction. It may not be the direction that your outer mind, your ego, your separate selves want to see you going but it goes in the direction that gives you the greatest growth, the greatest transcendence, the greatest movement towards the 144th level of consciousness and the fulfillment of your Divine plan, whatever you specified in that plan which your outer mind may have forgotten, you are not aware of in your outer mind.

You have in your outer mind created a certain goal based on your upbringing and your culture and you think you have to push towards that goal but it is going in a different direction in your Divine plan. Again if you are pushing against your Divine plan you are creating opposition to yourself and it is becoming harder and harder to push and that is why some people can have this experience that something breaks, something dies, they go through a breakthrough, an awakening or perhaps a breakdown but they feel that there is some shift and they cannot continue to go in that direction. But this does not have to be such a dramatic shift where you feel empty or feel like nothing in your life is working. You can actually learn to work on these separate selves, identify the separate selves that want you to push and push and push, come to see them, separate yourself from them, let them die and then make an effort, a conscious effort to get in tune with this forward rolling movement of your Divine plan driven by the Divine will.

The Will of God vs. the Will of your I AM Presence

There are many misconceptions about Divine will, the Will of God as some call it. This messenger many years ago was in a previous dispensation where there was a lot of talk about Divine will, the Will of God and there was a contrast between the will of the ego and the Will of God and he had turned this around in his head where it seemed to him at the time that there were only two options here, either you were following the will of the ego or you were following the Will of God but either way he felt there was no room for you. Whether you followed the ego or you followed the Will of God it seemed to him to be some external will. Where was the room for his will? Not that he really knew what it was at the time but that was how he felt. He finally surrendered one day and said: “Okay God, show me what your will is and I’ll do it” and then he received the impulse from within, actually from yours truly: “What if God just wants you to make your own decisions?” And it shocked him but it caused this chain reaction in him where he realized that there is no Divine will that forces anything upon you.

It is not that there is this angry God in heaven or even the angry Master MORE in heaven who looks down upon you and wants to force you to do something. I do not even want to force you to follow your Divine plan. I did not force your Divine plan upon you neither did any other ascended master. You chose, you chose. Is it really a matter of acquiring this outer will where you are seeking to force the universe to conform with your goals and desires or is it a matter of going beyond any outer will whether it be the will of the ego or the will of the world or the will of your family or the will of your society or the Will of God or some ascended master? Is it not possible to tune in to what many people will not even see as willpower? It is more like the rising and sinking of the ocean, the gentle forward movement of the waves through the ocean that eventually reaches the farther shore. This is a different will. It is a will that cannot be opposed by an anti-will. It is a will that is not forced upon you.

It is not a will that you desire to accept or reject. It is a will that you immerse yourself in as you immerse yourself in the ocean. Just imagine that you are swimming on the ocean and there are these big gentle waves and for a while you are swimming struggling to keep your head above water but then you realize that you do not need to breathe because you are in your finer bodies. You can relax, you can immerse yourself in the ocean and then when you are no longer struggling on the surface you are just gently moving with the rising and sinking of the ocean and so you are moving with that greater will. You are not struggling, you are not using force and that is why as the Taoist will say you are not doing but this does not mean you are passive. It does not mean that you need to sit in some cave in the Himalayas and meditate on God all day. You can live an active life, you can do things, you can make decisions but you are not forcing your decisions. You are not making them with the outer mind.

You are just immersed in that greater will that is the Will of your I AM Presence and the will that you yourself built into your Divine plan. There is no force, there is no struggle, there is just that gentle movement that moves you up, moves you to this side, moves you to that side and suddenly you see that although it seems like nothing has been done, nothing has been left undone for what you decided to accomplish in your Divine plan has been accomplished. But what does this mean?

Struggling with the outer will and goals

Can you look at your life and see how you were brought up to accept certain outer goals for what your life should be like? Perhaps you were pushed by your parents to get an education, to get a certain job, to start a career that would lead you gradually to higher positions until you reached the end goal of your career where every career must end, retirement.

You work for 40 years or more to achieve this position, only to retire shortly after you receive it, and then you have spent your whole life on this quest, and when you retire and you are not in the quest, you do not know what to do with yourself, and so many people die within a year or two after they have retired from their work. For they see no point in life anymore, and so you might see that many people have followed this track in their lives, and when they finally retire from it, they look at their lives and they feel: “What was the point of it all? What did I accomplish? Were these outer accomplishments I had, was that really all that life was about?”

The ups and downs on the path

When you are a spiritual student, you can say: “No, the outer accomplishments is not what life is about. What life is about is the raising of consciousness.” You see that the real will that is built into your Divine plan is the raising of consciousness, and sometimes the raising of consciousness is not a smooth, upward process. A wave rises up, you may have a high spiritual experience, feel really connected, but then there comes a time to process, to look into your psychology, you may feel like you are going down, but still the wave moves forward through the ocean, and it rises again, and this time it goes higher. You realize that even though there are ups and downs on the path, there is still a general upward movement, so that at the end of your life you can see that regardless of the physical results that you might have achieved, you have raised your consciousness. What do the physical accomplishments really matter, when you have raised your consciousness?

For when you leave the body behind, which physical accomplishment can you take with you? What can you take with you? Your level of consciousness. If you have raised yourself to the 100 levels of consciousness in one embodiment, you can start there in your next embodiment, or at least you can quickly regain that level of consciousness, and so that means you might realistically be able to ascend in that next embodiment. Or you might be able to ascend in this embodiment, but not by pushing harder, but by connecting to that flow of the Will, the Divine will, that is not about specifics, but about raising all life. The Divine will is not about manifesting any particular condition in matter, it is about raising all life to higher levels of consciousness, higher levels of vibration.

The cosmic dance of the One mind

What is the difference between consciousness and vibration, you might say? Well, consciousness is that which can vibrate, and which can make energy vibrate. Consciousness is the underlying reality, ultimately the consciousness of the Creator, or the consciousness of the Allness, beyond the Creator, the One mind, the indivisible undivided mind.

But within that mind, consciousness can make itself vibrate as energy, and then consciousness can express itself as an individual self-aware being, which can then make energy vibrate so that it takes on form, that the being that manifests the form can now perceive and experience the form. And this is how co-creation progresses, but co-creation seeks to not only raise the individual beings to higher levels of self-awareness and co-creative ability, but also to raise up what you call energy or matter. To raise the vibration until it again becomes clear that any form is consciousness, is out of that One mind.

This is the cosmic dance. The cosmic dance whereby the One mind takes on form starts out with a limited sense of self, expands that sense of self until the self realizes it is an extension of the oneself, it is a co-creator with the Creator, and then the individual self shifts into not pursuing goals as a separate self, but becoming part of this greater co-creative process of raising all life, thereby raising all life, raising the One mind, for this is what the linear mind cannot fathom.

When we say there is only One mind, you think as many people have thought, this means the One mind is perfect, it could never change, it is the ultimate reality. But why do you exist as an expressed form? Because there has always been expressed forms out of the One mind, and when the mind expresses itself as form and then comes to remember itself as the One mind, the One mind grows, expands. How long has this been going on, says the linear mind? Forever is the only answer that can be given. “Well”—says the linear mind—“if the One mind has been expanding itself forever, it must have reached some ultimate state of expansion. How can it continue to expand indefinitely? When did it all start? What was before the One mind existed or the one mind decided to express itself?”

But there has always been the One mind expressing itself and becoming more by expressing, and it will go on indefinitely, and there is no limit, there is no end to how much the One mind can expand itself. And this is what the linear mind cannot grasp, for how can you take hold of Infinity?

The rest of this dictation, along with an invocation based on the dictation, is found in the book: Connecting with Your Spiritual Teachers.

 

Copyright © 2023 Kim Michaels

 

Back to Connecting to Your Higher Self and Spiritual Teachers

Overcoming the sense of distance between you and your higher self

Listen to a recording of this dictation (subscribers only)

Ascended Master Divine Director through Kim Michaels, June 4, 2023. This dictation was given at a conference in Seoul, Korea: Connecting to Your Higher Self and Spiritual Teachers. 

I AM the Ascended Master the Divine Director, and it is my joy to speak about the identity body. What is it in the identity body that blocks your attunement with the ascended masters and with your higher self? Well, we might ask a different question. What is it in your identity body that does not block your attunement with the ascended masters? For truly, what does it mean to be connected with the spiritual realm? It means to be one with the spiritual realm. And how can you be one with the spiritual realm if you identify yourself as a material being? And this is, of course, what is the case on earth today, that the lower nine levels of the identity realm are so filled with these man-made images of what it means to be a human being. And when I say man-made, I of course, mean also influenced by the fallen beings, some of which reside in those lower levels of the identity realm, including the Dark Master that we have talked about previously.

The Alpha and the Omega of your identity

The situation on earth is truly very difficult and we fully understand how difficult it is. We are not expecting you as ascended master students to instantly switch your sense of identity. We simply want to make you aware that when it comes to you personally, stepping back, looking at yourself, looking at what blocks your connection to the ascended masters, certainly you need to consider how you identify yourself. This has two aspects, of course, the Alpha and the Omega. The Omega is your particular culture, the culture in which you grew up. Most likely your nationality, but also religion, ethnicity, other factors that are local to the area and the culture in which you grew up. This is one thing to consider.

The other thing to consider is the Alpha aspect of the general identification that is found in the collective consciousness of humankind as a whole. Of course, this general identity is what sets the pattern for the more localized identities that you find. And even though you may find some differences in these localized identities, they still fit within the overall parameters of this general sense of identity that has been put upon humankind and that has been co-created by humankind for a very, very long time.

The self-reinforcing effect of the densification of matter

Let us begin by looking at this general sense of identity. What most people, even most spiritual people on earth, do not grasp is just how much the earth has changed from the original state in which it was created by the Elohim. It is very, very difficult for people, even spiritual people, to grasp the immensity of the changes that have happened. We have given you some glimpses through our teachings and one of the things we have explained is that matter itself has become more dense. And what we mean with a greater density of matter is that it has become impossible for your physical senses to see that matter is truly energy. In its original state, matter on earth vibrated at a higher level, which, if you use vision as an example, means that the eyes, the physical eyes of human beings at the time, could actually see matter as slightly transparent.

You may go out in the forest, especially at springtime when the leaves are new and fresh. You may stand under a tree and look up towards the sun so that the sun is shining through the leaves and the leaves may appear almost transparent. They are lighter because the light from the sun can somewhat shine through the leaves. Well, imagine that all matter was like that and that not even the physical sun, but that a higher energy could be seen shining through all matter, could be seen with the physical eyes. At that time, then, it was very difficult for people to see themselves as being separated from a higher realm because they could physically detect with their senses that there was something beyond matter. There was a light that was shining through all matter.

But with the greater densification of the collective consciousness came the greater densification of matter itself, where all matter on the planet was lowered in vibration. This meant it became more difficult for the physical eyes, for example, to see the light shining through matter. There is still light shining through matter, but it is more difficult to see it with the physical senses. Once this happened, there was a self-reinforcing effect that started because now people became susceptible to the idea that the physical realm is separated from the spiritual realm by a distance, by a barrier.

And this meant that they began projecting with their minds that matter is a separate substance from spirit and this created this effect that now their physical senses became more dull, became more attuned to matter, instead of being attuned to the light shining through matter. As the senses became more dull, people became believing even more firmly in the separation of spirit and matter, and that caused the senses to become even more dull. There was a self-reinforcing effect that went on for a very long time and has really only started being reversed with the embodiment of the Buddha 2,500 years ago and Jesus 2,000 years ago, where more and more people have begun to tune in to the spiritual realm. And therefore, there has been a movement in the collective consciousness where people are able to question this most basic illusion on earth, we might say, of the separation of matter and spirit.

The basic illusion on earth: the separation of matter and spirit

Truly, this illusion is the foundation for the sense of identity that most people have, that you are human beings, that you are either in a physical body or that you are a product of the physical body, you live on a physical planet, and that you and the planet are separated from spirit. You, of course, see some people who deny that there is a spiritual world, and who somehow have managed to build a sense of identity that they are only evolved animals, that they are only physical beings, and that their minds are separated from anything beyond their brains—their minds are a product of their brains. Now, how they can reason that an unconscious brain produces consciousness is, of course, not based on true logic. It is based on the mind’s ability, as we have also explained, to validate and invalidate any viewpoint. There is plausible deniability, plausible plausibility. Anything you want to believe, you can exclude contrary evidence so it seems like your belief is justified. And this is, of course, what these materialists have done, but they overlook the one simple logic that only because they are conscious can they deny that they are conscious, and that consciousness cannot be produced by unconscious matter.

Nevertheless, many people on earth, of course, believe that there is some kind of spiritual realm, some kind of heaven world, some kind of beings in that realm that are at a higher level than human beings. But they still identify themselves as human beings, perhaps as sinners, perhaps as in other ways imperfect, perhaps they identify themselves as beings who are confined to a physical body that is the enemy of their spiritual growth.

You see so many of these identities out there, but when you go behind them, when you step back, you see that the basic identity is: “We are not spiritual beings, we are human beings, perhaps even evolved animals.” But there is that sense of identity, and then you have some that say: “Yes, we are spiritual beings, but we are confined to the physical realm and these physical bodies, and therefore we are separated from spirit.” And this then leads to this belief that there is a huge distance, even in many cases a physical distance, between earth and heaven.

Beings in the emotional, mental, and identity realms

You see, not so long ago, many people in the Western nations believed that the earth was a flat disc with a dome above it, and outside of that dome covering the earth was heaven, but there was a physical distance between the flat earth and the heaven world. And you see many variations of this belief that there is this distance. And of course, this is again one of these enigmas because there is a distance in vibration between the physical realm and the spiritual realm, and in between is the emotional, mental, and identity realms. As we have explained, there are beings in those three realms, some of which present themselves to human beings as spiritual beings, spiritual teachers, even as gods and goddesses, even pretending to be ascended masters using our names. There are people who think that you need to reach out with the mind, reach outside the mind in order to contact some being in a higher realm, and some have made contact with such beings and believe that these are genuine spiritual beings. Now, there are beings, especially in the mental realm and lower identity realm, who are not what you would call evil beings. They do not have necessarily an evil intent of destroying humankind or enslaving humankind, but they do want energy from people. They are not at the level of the ascended masters who do not want or need anything from people.

The Conscious You vs. the separate selves

What you see is that this entire idea, this entire sense of identity that “We human beings here on earth are separated from spirit by a distance”—this is what blocks you from connecting to the ascended masters and your higher self. In a sense, we can say that the idea that you have to connect, can also block you if by connecting you mean connecting over a great distance. If you see a separation, if you see a deep chasm, a deep gorge between yourself and the spiritual realm, then that can also block you. Even the concept that you are on one shore of the Sea of Samsara and you have to cross to the other shore can block you. What I am saying here is that any image that we can give you from the ascended realm can be used by the mind to block your connection. And thus, it might be better, more constructive at least for those of you who are our direct students, to consider that it is not so much about connecting but about realizing that there is no distance, there is no separation.

You live today in the modern world in what many people call a connected world. The internet has connected people everywhere. But when you are connecting over the internet with a person in a different country, you know there is a physical separation. You often transfer this to us and think: “Well the ascended masters are up there in the spiritual realm in a higher vibration, I need to raise my consciousness, I need to create a connection to those far off masters that are up there beyond my normal reach.” But what have we given you? Consider the teachings we have given you. Consider the teaching that your outer personality, your emotions, your thoughts, even your sense of identity, is made up of all of these individual subconscious, many of them, separate selves. And these separate selves are created in reaction to, in response to the conditions in the physical realm. These selves are outgoing selves. They are relating to the world that you clearly experience as being outside your physical body, even outside your mind. These selves are created to look out. They are created based on a sense that you are a separate being living in the physical world. Your body is a separate unit living in a physical world. I am not here saying that these selves are evil or bad or negative. Certainly not when you have raised yourself above the 48th level of consciousness. The selves are not evil or negative. It is just that the selves are not self-aware. They can only do what they are designed to do, which is look out.

So, here you are, you realize there must be something more than the material world. You find the spiritual teaching that talks about ascended masters in a higher realm. What can you do other than approach the spiritual path based on all of these selves that you have? But do you see the inevitable result of this? You are approaching the spiritual path through the selves that were created in reaction to the material world. You inevitably project the images from these selves upon the spiritual path, upon the spiritual realm, and upon your spiritual teachers. Again, we are in no way blaming you. What else can you do in the beginning when you find the path? We have seen millions upon millions of people over these last four or five or six decades where there has been a growth in spiritual interest around the world. We have seen millions and millions of people find the spiritual path in some form, and they have projected upon it the images from the selves that they have in their four lower bodies. It is perfectly unavoidable.

But what we have attempted to give you, our direct students, especially through this dispensation, is a higher awareness. A higher awareness that allows you to realize that you are not your physical body, you are not your emotional mind, you are not your mental mind, you are not even your identity mind. You are more than all of these minds. You are more than all of these selves because when you go to the core of your being, there is what we have called the Conscious You, which we have described with the word ‘pure awareness’. This is to signify that the self, the conscious self, the Conscious You is not the outer selves. It is more than the outer selves. It is the core of the identity that took embodiment. The Conscious You has created the outer selves, but you have not become the outer selves. You see that you cannot connect to the ascended masters through the outer selves, even the selves you have in your identity body, even if you build a new self where you see yourself as a spiritual being, you cannot connect to the ascended masters through that self. This is what has been the observation we can make from past dispensations of ascended master teachings.

The spiritual self between 48th and 96th level

In this dispensation, we have given the higher teaching that between the 48th level of consciousness where you really lock into the spiritual path and the 96th level of consciousness, you are raising yourself above the collective consciousness by building a new self in the identity body. Also of course, selves in your mental and emotional bodies, but you are building a new sense of self, a new sense of identity in the identity body as a spiritual being. This is again perfectly unavoidable. You can do nothing else on a dense planet like earth. You need to pull yourself above the collective consciousness and you do this by building a self that says: “I am not this, I am not identified with this, I will not participate in this activity, I will not participate in that activity because it is not spiritual. I will focus on this and this and this because this is spiritual.” So you are building a vehicle, you are building that rocket that lifts you off the ground and takes you up through the atmosphere until you can go to a higher orbit at the 96th level. But this self that you are building, is still a self that is in some reaction to the world you live in. You may base this self on a spiritual teaching, but it is still in reaction to the collective consciousness: “I am not part of the collective consciousness because I am spiritual. Therefore, I am different from the collective consciousness in this way and in that way, and I do not do this and I do not do that and I do not believe what other people believe, I believe this instead.” But it is still in reaction to conditions on earth that you are building this spiritual self. Again, this is perfectly natural, what else can you do? Yet this self is also an outgoing self. This may be tricky to understand because many people would say: “But I have been meditating for 30 years focusing my attention within.” But if you have built a self as a person who is meditating, that is still a self that is in reaction to conditions on earth. Many people, for example, who have withdrawn into a monastery and meditated for hours and hours a day, they have built this subtle sense of identity: “I am a spiritual person, more spiritual than those people out there in the world because I live up to these conditions that my spiritual teaching defines.”

The Conscious You: a constantly changing self

You see you are still projecting an image out to the world, projecting an image upon yourself of what it means to be a spiritual person. And as we have said this serves you well while you are on that journey from the 48th to the 96th level. But above the 96th level you need to start contemplating that this no longer serves you. That is when you really need to start pondering these teachings about the Conscious You because they are deliberately given by us to help you avoid the trap that most spiritual people have gotten themselves in throughout the millennia. Namely building this spiritual sense of identity, refusing to give it up, continuing to seek to refine it and make it more sophisticated thinking that: “When I finally create this spiritual self that is sophisticated enough according to my teachings, then that self will get me into heaven.” But what did the Buddha teach 2500 years ago? He went against the Brahmins of the Hindu tradition who for millennia had claimed that every human being has an immortal self, the Atman, an immortal unchanging self. The Buddha said that based on all his introspection he had never discovered an unchanging self inside himself, so he denied the concept of an unchanging self. Instead, he talked about a constantly changing self, a constantly changing self.

Then you can go forward to Jesus, who said, only the person, or rather, the self that descended from heaven can ascend back to heaven. How do you then reconcile the two? Well, the self that descended from heaven, so to speak, is the Conscious You. But the Conscious You is not an unchanging self, because the Conscious You is constantly shifting based on where it places its attention. How does the Conscious You see itself? Well, for most people the Conscious You sees itself through all of the selves, in the identity body, the mental body, the emotional body, even the physical.

So, the Conscious You is experiencing itself and experiencing the world through all of these selves, and it is constantly shifting from one to another. A certain situation arises, how do people respond to it? Well, the Conscious You shifts into certain of these subconscious selves, and now it responds to the situation through that. The situation changes again, the Conscious You shifts into some other selves, now reacts based on those shelves, and so forth. So, as you engage in the spiritual paths from the 48th to the 96th level, you are not just, as most people, responding by shifting horizontally into different selves, but you are beginning a vertical ascent, rising up the spiral staircase, by building selves at higher and higher levels, so you can shift upwards. But you are still shifting.

You may say the Conscious You is always pure awareness. But how often is the Conscious You aware of itself as pure awareness? And the Conscious You is not created to be an eternal self, an unchanging self. The Conscious You is created to be a constantly changing self.

And so, as you go above the 96th level of consciousness, the Conscious You starts realizing: “I am NOT these outer selves, I am more than these outer selves.” This is what the Christ consciousness shows you. And that is when you begin to grasp that it is not a matter of perfecting this spiritual self that I have built, it is a matter of dismantling it, disidentifying myself from it, letting these individual selves die one by one, until I can again stand there as the pure awareness that descended from the I AM Presence.

There is no separation between you and your I AM Presence

So, what does all this long discourse lead to, what does it have to do with connecting? Well, it actually has to do with the fact that the Conscious You cannot connect to the ascended masters or the I AM Presence. Because the Conscious You is not separated from the ascended masters and the I AM Presence. This may be difficult to grasp at first. So, as an interim stage, let us say that the Conscious You, when it is focused in the physical realm, or at least in the unascended sphere, you can say that you are still at a certain level of vibration, and the ascended masters are at a higher vibration, so you will see a need to connect to us. But when it comes to your I AM Presence, you need to recognize here that yes, your I AM Presence is in the spiritual realm, you are focused in the unascended sphere. But still, you are an extension of your I AM Presence, as a wave is an extension of the ocean. You cannot really be separated—you can never be separated from your I AM Presence.

And so, this is where the Conscious You needs to begin to shift, so instead of seeing a distance, and seeing a need to connect over that distance, you overcome the illusion of a distance. And you might say: “But what about the difference in vibration?” But does a difference in vibration imply distance? Yes, to the separate selves it does. For they cannot experience oneness, they were not created based on oneness. But the Conscious You is just an extension of the I AM Presence, and it is just a matter of realizing: “I am not separated from the ocean, I am part of the ocean.” Now imagine that you have a wave. You have this vast ocean, many waves, many tall waves. And here is a wave that is aware of itself. And it looks out from the top of itself. And it sees all of these other waves, the tops of all these other waves, and it is only focused on the wave tops. And it is constantly seeking to hold its focus up there on the top of the wave, so that it always sees the top of itself and the top of the other waves, therefore seeing: “I am different from all these other waves.”

The shift above 96th level

But what is it that the Conscious You goes through as you rise above the 96th level? It is that you actually start recognizing: “I am a wave, but I am a wave on the ocean and the ocean is moving. And as a wave, instead of being focused only at that surface level of the tops of the waves, I can feel that deeper movement, I can be part of that deeper movement.” And then, suddenly, the wave becomes aware of the ocean, and the movement of the ocean. And instead of trying to resist the movement of the ocean, it starts flowing with it. And this is what your Conscious You can come to, where it does not resist the movement of the spirit, it realizes that the I AM Presence is the ocean: “I am a wave on that ocean, but I can move with the ocean, move with the I AM Presence.” And then beyond that, you can even realize that the ascended masters are also the ocean, and you can move with us as you move with the I AM Presence. And that is ultimately how you connect.

You do not actually connect, you overcome the sense of distance. And of course, in the beginning, you might overcome it only for a brief moment. But you can all have that experience, as we have described, where the Conscious You steps outside of the separate selves and experiences itself as pure awareness, experiences itself as a part of the ocean, moving with the ocean of the I AM Presence, moving with the ocean of the ascended masters. Moving, moving with the ocean instead of resisting, instead of trying to, we might say: “surf the wave”— another image, imagine a person on a surfboard, surfing a wave. But now, imagine that that person says: “I have had enough of surfing the wave. I allow myself to sink into the wave and to feel the movement of the ocean, and to flow with that movement of the ocean.”

The schizophrenic phase of the spiritual path

Of course, your ego is going to cry out: “But who will you be then, if you move with the ocean? You will not be me, you will not be a separate me. What will I do if you become one with the ocean, where does that leave me?” And that is admittedly the most difficult phase of the spiritual path. Where you still are so used to being in the separate selves, seeing yourself as a separate being in this world. But now you are beginning to feel some movement of the ocean of self. And how do you bridge that gap between being in a physical body, perhaps having a family, having a job, having a career, having responsibilities in the world? And yet beneath it all, you are beginning to feel that movement of the ocean.

We are fully aware, as ascended masters, how difficult it is, on a dense planet like earth, to go through this phase. It is almost schizophrenic, because your identity is pulled in different directions. But that, my beloved—pay attention now—that is why we talk about a path, a gradual path, where you gradually shed the separate selves, so that you do not go through the shock, that you can see some people have gone through, where they are suddenly feeling what they call “ego death”, or a state of “no self”, where they suddenly feel like they have no sense of identity anymore, and they do not know who they are, and they go through an identity crisis. This is not what we teach as ascended masters, we teach a gradual path. There are those who would project that when you reach the 96th level, you are awakened. You have gone through a spiritual awakening, you are spiritually enlightened, now you have reached some ultimate level. But that is what often projects them into this identity crisis, because how do you then bridge the gap? And of course, they still have separate selves left, so they might stop at that 96th level. Which means they will start going down again, after some time.

The rest of this dictation, along with an invocation based on the dictation, is found in the book: Connecting with Your Spiritual Teachers.

 

Copyright © 2023 Kim Michaels

 

Back to Connecting to Your Higher Self and Spiritual Teachers

Switching out of the linear mind


Listen to a recording of this dictation (subscribers only)

Ascended Master Shiva through Kim Michaels, June 3, 2023. This dictation was given at a conference in Seoul, Korea: Connecting to Your Higher Self and Spiritual Teachers. 

I AM the Ascended Master Shiva. Certainly, you can appeal to me as well for helping you overcome your fears and you can give the chant to me, the Om Shiva, or just Shiva, to also help you go in and consume those fears in your emotional body. You might even combine Archangel Michael and myself, for we are, of course, not divided by any divisions between Eastern and Western traditions. We are one, yet we have different shadings, different colorings of the light that we bring. The combination of the two is very efficient for consuming fears.

The paradox of the linear mind

Yet my primary purpose for this discourse is, of course, not to deal with fears, it is to take the next step up to the other thing that really takes people away from connecting and that is, of course, the mental mind. Certainly, both Kuan Yin and Mother Mary have addressed this, but we wish to give you some more thoughts on this, because in the modern world the mental mind is the greatest obstacle for spiritual people. This is especially because the Western democracies have spread many ideas throughout the world, especially through science and scientific materialism that are so, we might say, attached to the linear mind, the rational mind, the logical mind, the analytical mind.

What do we really mean when we talk about the linear mind? Well, it is the mind that wants to put everything on a timeline, or on some kind of line that can be divided into smaller increments. It also wants to put everything on a line where there is cause that leads to an effect. The effect may become another cause that leads to another effect, but there is a certain regularity, a certain natural law that determines that a particular cause will always lead to a particular effect in a linear fashion with no exceptions.

As just some examples of this, start counting. One, two, three, four, five and you can go on. How long can you go on? Well, supposedly indefinitely. The question is, who has got the time for that? Who has got eternity? And if you had eternity, would you want to spend it counting and seeing how far you could count? Is that your highest vision of what you could do with eternity? You see that when you actually start contemplating infinity or an infinite number, the linear mind cannot quite cope.

But is it not the very linear mind that defines that you should be able to always add another number and therefore supposedly count indefinitely? So, you see, the linear mind sets up the linear progression, but then when you start thinking about the extreme outcome of the linear progression, then the linear mind almost short-circuits because it cannot quite fathom this. Another example is the Greek philosopher, Zeno, who came up with a paradox that if you are to walk from one city to another, you will never arrive because first you have to walk to the midway point. Then you have to walk to the midway point of the remaining distance and you can continue to divide the remaining distance in half indefinitely. You can always divide any number in half, any distance in half, so you never arrive. And again, when you start thinking about this, you realize that this is what the linear mind does. It sets up a linear progression based on a certain regularity, a certain law of some kind and it supposedly can be extended indefinitely, but when you really start thinking about the extreme outcome of this linear progression, then the linear mind can no longer cope.

For really, how do you get the idea that you can continue counting indefinitely? Well, it is this linear idea you can always add another number. But if you keep going high enough, there comes a point where do you not reach some kind of infinitely large number? And how can the linear mind deal with this? Certainly, it cannot deal with the concept of infinity. But is not that what the linear mind says, that you can continue counting for all eternity? You can continue counting infinitely, so why cannot the linear mind cope with infinity?

You might also look at, as we have said, your world of form was created by an individual Creator. But where did the Creator come from? What was before your world of form existed? And then the linear mind wants to say, but if this world had a beginning, what was before the beginning? What was there when this world was not there, was not created? And when did the creation of worlds start? What was before? And we may say there was always a world of form, but can the linear mind deal with this?

Every form is defined by limits

The linear mind almost short-circuits when you contemplate this. Because the linear mind, even though it cannot deal with infinity, it wants there to be a beginning point. Maybe there is no end point, but there has to be a starting point. You have to start counting somewhere. One, two, three, minus ten, minus nine, minus eight. But you have to start somewhere. But if there is no end, how can there be a beginning? Contemplate this. If you say you can keep counting indefinitely, why would you have to start at one? Where do you actually start and when does it become that you going higher and higher ends up forming a closed circle? As Albert Einstein indeed said, that if you traveled out into space and kept going in the same direction in a straight line, you would one day come back to your starting point from the opposite direction, because the space-time continuum forms a closed loop. Does it not stand to reason that there is nothing infinite in the world of form? You cannot continue counting infinitely in a linear progression, for the world of form has a limit.

The world of form has form and what is form but a limit? A square is defined by four lines. A circle is defined by one line. Yes, you can go around and around on the circle indefinitely, but you cannot go outside the circle. There is a limit. Every form is defined by a limit. If you kept counting long enough and you started at zero, sooner or later you would end up at zero. Contemplate this and see how the linear mind reacts. I am not here talking about some absolute truth. I am only trying to show you the limitations of the linear mind.

Non-linearity of free will

What will the linear mind do when you contemplate the idea of connecting to an ascended master? It will say: “There is a distance between where I am and where the master is and I need to overcome that distance.” But it will then try to set up a progression: “What must I do to overcome the distance? I must do decrees. I must do invocations. I must do so many hours of decrees a day and if I keep doing this year after year, sooner or later, perhaps later, perhaps a long time from now, but someday magically the master will appear to me.” For the linear mind wants to believe that there is cause, there is effect, and there are laws that guide the progression from cause to effect. If you sit here and decide: “I want to connect to an ascended master, I am setting up a logical, rational, step-by-step program for giving decrees and invocations”, and then you decide that if you keep doing this, sometime the master must appear. For surely you think that the ascended masters must follow some kind of law, some kind of progression.

And yes, my beloved, we do follow some kind of law. It is called the law of free will, but the law of free will is not linear. How could it be? How could you have free will if you have to walk on a certain line? How can you have free will if there is only a linear progression so that if you take one step in one direction, you have to keep taking step after step in the same direction and cannot deviate from the course you have set? How could that be free will? You imagine yourself standing in this huge flat square, such as the Olympic Square not far from here. You are standing there in the middle. It is open and flat all around you in all directions. You are contemplating taking a step. But you have 360 degrees circumference around you. You can go in any direction. But now imagine that once you have taken a step in that direction, in one direction, you would have to keep walking in a straight line in that direction.

You may say the first choice is free, but then the others are not. Would that really be free will? Nay, this is what the fallen beings want you to believe. This is why they have come up with the images of the angry and judgmental God that you are a sinner from the beginning or even the strict Eastern interpretation of the law of karma where everything that happens in this lifetime is predetermined by your karma from past lifetimes. But the law of karma is not linear as we have explained, for if you transcend the consciousness that caused you to make a certain decision in a past life, then by the time the karmic impulse comes back it will not descend into the physical, for there is nothing in your higher bodies to reinforce it.

The law of free will means you can take any number of steps in one direction, but you can always change direction. How can there be linearity? How can there be a mechanical progression? How can you in your mind set up a program that says if I follow this program faithfully, one day the master must appear and connect to me? Yes, this is what science has made you believe, that the world is like a grand machine. And if you take these particular steps, such as plugging your radio into the switch, pushing the on button, tuning into the right station, then you get the music you want.

You cannot connect through linear mind

Or if you put some food into the oven, set the temperature and the time, then there will be a ding and the food will be cooked. Science and technology has made so many people in the modern world believe that, if you follow a certain procedure, then poof, like a jack-in-the-box, an ascended master must appear. After all, you have rubbed Aladdin’s lamp by giving so many invocations and decrees for so many years. Surely the master must appear as the genie out of the lamp, saying: “What is your command, my lord? I will give you anything you want. Well, only three wishes, but still better than none.”

This is the mindset that many people are in when they find an ascended master teaching and they start giving decrees and invocations. Again, we are not blaming anyone. We are simply pointing out, this is what the linear mind does, but we of the ascended masters are not in physical embodiment. We are not under this linear law. For that matter, you are not under the linear law either. There is, of course, a certain cause and effect and if you walk in the same direction for a long time and keep being angry with other people, it will have certain effects.

But what is it we have said many times? If you made a choice and it had no consequence, how would you know you had made a choice? The consequences of your choices are not there to force your future choices. They are just there to show you, this mindset led to this consequence. If I do not like the consequence, I change my mindset. I change what I project into the cosmic mirror and then I get something else.

You see, or perhaps you do not see, but you can come to see that nothing is truly linear. Even science has proven this almost a century ago. Quantum physicists discovered that at the most basic level of matter, the mind of the scientist not only influences the observation, but creates the observation, leading to the popular saying, if a tree falls in the forest and there is no one there, does it make a sound? Or is the moon there when no one is looking? And the reality is that if no one was looking, the moon would not be there. But as we have said, we of the ascended masters are always looking, the elemental beings are always looking. And why is this? Because the entire purpose of the world of form is to help you grow in awareness. We maintain certain forms over time until people have learned the lessons. What is the lesson you learn for being in physical embodiment? It is that what you project upon the Ma-ter light is what the Ma-ter light will manifest. This is what scientists discovered a century ago.

But not many scientists have been willing to really think about what this means. But what it means is that what science has discovered at the quantum level is what we have called the Ma-ter light, which can take on any form, but can only take on form when a mental image is projected upon it through the mind of a self-aware being. What does it mean to be self-aware? It means: “I want to manifest something that I do not have now. I am a co-creator. I am willing to co-create.”

But how do you manifest? Not in a linear mechanical way. You manifest in a creative way by coming to realize that you are holding images in your identity, mental and identity minds that you are projecting onto the Ma-ter light, which then takes on the physical form. This may seem mechanical but it is not, for you can change those images any time and there is not a grand machine where the outcome is predetermined or predictable. On the contrary, nothing is predictable. There are only probabilities, but as the uncertainty principle in quantum mechanics proved a century ago, there is no certain outcome.

The trap of the linear mind

Why have scientists not accepted this? Because this is one of the last things that the fallen beings want people to accept. They want you desperately to believe that once you have made a certain choice, you have limited your ability to make future choices and this is the lie that we have exposed many times. But the linear mind finds this difficult to accept because the linear mind wants there to be regularity, predictability, cause and effect, an inescapable cause and effect. This is what the linear mind wants because then the linear mind thinks it is in control because now it can predict the outcome.

What does this have to do with the topic of this retreat? Well, if you think that connecting to an ascended master can be approached as a mechanical process, then you are creating an image in your mind and you are projecting that image upon an ascended master. What would happen if we lived up to your image? Well, we would seemingly validate that your image was correct. You can really rub the lamp and a genie will appear. But what would that do? It would trap you in the linear mind. And in the linear mind you feel you are in control, but on a larger scale the fallen beings feel they are in control because as long as you are trapped in the linear mind they can control you because they can look at what is the regularity, the progression that you have created in your mind. And then they can easily predict where you are going to go next.

You become so predictable when you are in the linear mind. People at large become so predictable when they are in the linear mind and that, of course, is what the fallen beings want. To stop creativity, to stop the uncertainty by stopping freedom of choice, where you think you have no choice other than you had the choice to start the sequence, but once the sequence is started the outcome is predetermined. Every teaching we have given you through this dispensation has been aimed at shattering that illusion so that you recognize the fact that you are not bound by anything and that any choice you have made can be overcome by making a different choice.

Projecting an image upon the Masters

This is the realization we desire to help you come to. For then you can make the choice and say:”So far I have not felt the connection to the ascended masters that I would like to feel. Could it be because I have projected an image upon the Masters, upon myself and upon our connection that traps me in the linear mind and therefore the Masters cannot appear to me because it would trap me even more?”

There are people, quite a number of people, who have found a valid ascended master teaching that was sponsored by us. They have projected and as we have said, even based on some of the older teachings that were given in the Piscean Age, a certain image upon how they could connect to the Masters. And they have had certain experiences with what they thought were ascended masters, but they were beings in the mental realm in most cases, in a few cases the lower identity realm, in some cases even the astral plane. But the vast majority of people who have found ascended master teachings in this modern rational linear age have connected with beings in the mental realm.

Many of the channelings you find out there are from beings in the mental realm and you can learn to spot their vibration instantly, or even read the words and see how they appeal to the linear mental mind. And there are people who have believed that they have had and still have a genuine connection to ascended masters, but it is to these impostors in the mental realm that sometimes use our names or sometimes call themselves other things that are not associated with ascended master names. The latter part at least being honest, even though they sometimes claim to be spiritual beings of some status or authority.

This is what can happen if people have this strong desire for a connection, but they are projecting a mental image upon the connection. We of the ascended masters will not live up to that image, but the beings in the mental realm are not in any way reluctant to live up to people’s images if they can get people to give them energy. These beings in the mental realm need energy from you, human beings in embodiment, because they are cut off from receiving the energy from the source.

We are the ascended masters. What energy could I possibly need from a human being in embodiment? You may say, as some have said, but you are giving this dictation and you are getting people to sit here and listen to you and when they put their attention on you, they give you their energy. Really? You are thinking that I, an ascended master, need the kind of energy that can flow over people’s attention? I have access to the infinite energy of the Creator. Why would I need anything from earth? If you are facing the sun, why do you need the moon?

Shiva – the destroyer of illusions

I am Shiva. I have reached a certain status in the cosmic hierarchy. I need nothing from earth. I need no obedience from anyone. I am only here to offer my service to those who want to be free from any form of bondage, be it in their own minds, be it an attachment to other human beings, or to beings in the mental or emotional or identity realms, or to fallen beings. I am here to cut free anyone who will ask. Who will ask me to come and cut them free from their illusions? This is what I am about.

Yes, I use the name known from the Hindu tradition of Brahma, Vishnu and Shiva, where Shiva is seen as the destroyer. But I am the destroyer of what? How can I destroy something that is real? The only thing that can be destroyed is an illusion, so I AM the destroyer of illusions. But those who do not want to let go of the illusions had better not apply to me. Of course, you can apply to me all you want, because if you really do not want to let go of your illusion, I will not violate your free will. In a sense it is risk-free to apply to me, even if you will not let go of your illusions and that is the point for you as ascended master students.

Shiva’s offer

I come especially to offer my assistance in helping you let go of the illusions in the mental mind. The illusions that separate you from me or from another ascended master who is close to your heart. If you are an ascended master student, you have at least one ascended master who is very close to your heart. But why can you not make a connection to that ascended master? Because your mind is blocking it. The mental mind is blocking it. Why? Because you are thinking. You are thinking about what it should be like: “What are the mechanics of connecting to an ascended master? I must be able to do what the linear mind does so well. Take a situation, reduce it to smaller and smaller components until you reach the smallest possible component and then you can then understand how the world works.”

Reductionist approach

This is the process that, at least in known history, started with Aristotle but, of course, started much earlier with the fallen beings coming to earth. Reductionism. Everything can be reduced to a smaller and smaller component. Yet, reach back to what I said about the linear mind. It can only be the linear mind that comes up with the idea that everything is made out of smaller components and if we can only understand the laws—the mechanical laws that guide the smaller components—we can also understand how that which is made out of the components works. If all matter is made out of atoms and we can control atoms, then we can control matter.

But the idea of an atom was posited by the Greek philosophers who thought it was the smallest possible level of matter that could not be divided. The atom was indivisible. When scientists in later centuries discovered something that they thought was the atom, they used that name. They thought for a time that it was indivisible, and then they discovered that it was not indivisible. It was made up of a core of two particles and an electron zooming around it. Then they discovered, nay, these elementary particles were not elementary. There were other elementary particles that were smaller. And when does it end?

Well, it never ends. It is like Zeno’s paradox. If only we had a more powerful accelerator that could accelerate particles to the speed of light, then we would discover the God particle, then we would know how matter works. But you will never know how matter takes on form by looking for smaller and smaller particles. For matter takes on form because a mental image from a higher realm is projected upon it. The causes of why forms are the way they are, are not found in the physical realm, the matter realm. They are found in the emotional, mental and identity realms and the spiritual. No matter how you analyze the components of a movie screen, how can understanding everything about the components of the screen predict which movie is going to be played at seven o’clock this evening? It is not determined at the level of the screen.

 

The rest of this dictation, along with an invocation based on the dictation, is found in the book: Connecting with Your Spiritual Teachers.

 

Copyright © 2023 Kim Michaels

 

Back to Connecting to Your Higher Self and Spiritual Teachers

Do you want to let go of your fear? 


Listen to a recording of this dictation (subscribers only)

Ascended Master Archangel Michael through Kim Michaels, June 3, 2023. This dictation was given at a conference in Seoul, Korea: Connecting to Your Higher Self and Spiritual Teachers. 

I AM the Ascended Master Archangel Michael. It is my joy to offer some assistance for one of the aspects that can take your attention away from focusing within. And it is, of course, the next step up from the physical body, namely the emotional body.

Fear and magical thinking

What is the primary emotion that takes most people away from being able to focus within? It is, of course, fear. Fear can have many forms, but fear is always the sense that something could happen from which there is no protection, no escape, no defence. Again, this is a very understandable reaction, given that you are in physical embodiment where many things can happen that you are not in control of. Yet what you see in the world is that many people have attempted to deal with fear by going into a frame of mind of seeking to control everything. The most extreme demonstration of this is the fallen beings who are so consumed by their fear that they seek to control everything and everybody around them. Yet many people are in this state of fear and many people who are not power people, who are not aggressive people, are seeking to deal with their fear through some form of religion that gives them the impression that ultimately some heavenly being will protect them from any condition on earth.

In that respect throughout history, many people have appealed to me or other ascended masters for protection. Of course, they have often, in fact they have always when they are trapped in fear, come from magical thinking and this is something that you who are ascended master students need to become aware of. Magical thinking is the belief that, even though things are the way they are in the physical realm, there is some heavenly force that is able to and allowed to step in and suspend what you might call the laws of nature, and therefore make you an exception to those laws so that they will not affect you the way they affect everybody else. Many people even today, be they Christians or belonging to other religions, will believe that there are some kind of god or spiritual being who has magical powers to step in and protect them even though they clearly see that other people are not protected. As I said, they think there is some magical power that can suspend the laws of nature or the law of karma and protect them against some effect that they fear.

The remote God on demand

Yet as we have explained many times through this dispensation, the law of free will is the absolute law on earth. I am Archangel Michael. I do have all power on earth. I can change anything. I can protect people from anything but my ability is not enough because I do not have the authority according to the law of free will. The stark reality on earth is that the fallen beings are very clever at making use of this magical thinking to create some kind of religious belief, religious doctrine, religious culture that makes people believe that bad things should not happen to them because they are somehow the chosen people. And then the fallen beings use fallen beings in embodiment or people with weak minds to go and hurt the religious people so that they stand there seeing that they were not protected as they thought they were, causing many people to then go into an even deeper sense of fear or sense of injustice or anger against God feeling the promises were broken.

This is one reason that you see so many people today who have turned away from traditional religion, even turned away from all religion and become atheists. They have experienced that what they thought was the power of God could not protect them, and they were so angry because of this that now they deny any power of God. They deny the existence of God and thereby they are also, some of them, able to deny what the fallen beings have also cleverly inserted in many religions, the belief in the devil who is out to hurt them. Now, some of these people have experienced that they can still be hurt even though they deny both God and the devil, but many people in the modern democracies have lived their whole lives in relatively peaceful circumstances and therefore they have been able to go into this state of, we might call it a form of spiritual pride ,where they feel they know better. They know that there is no God and there is no devil and they have not truly been disappointed because they have not been hurt by anyone or anything in this lifetime.

What I aim to take you to is the realization that as ascended masters students, you need to let go of this magical thinking because the magical thinking itself pushes away your inner connection to your higher self and the ascended masters. Why is this so? Because what is the idea of magical thinking? You are here on earth. There is this being up there in heaven, this remote being up there in heaven who normally is not there but you believe will step in when you need it. This is what we might call a God on demand to use a modern expression, but it also means that it is a remote God on demand, a God that is not there when there is no demand, meaning you can then hide from that God, and so when you project that there is a distance between yourself and I, how can you then connect to me as an ascended being? And if you cannot connect to me, how can I help you transcend your fear, the fear that pulls on your emotional body.

The fear of death

You see again as Kuan Yin and Mother Mary have talked about, we always face this seeming dilemma on earth. I have just said that there are certain things that the law of free will will not allow me to do for you. That means that you are in physical embodiment and there are certain things from which you cannot be protected depending on how other people use their free will.

At the same time, I am talking about helping you transcend your fear. Where is the logic you might ask? Well, the logic is simply this, you are in physical embodiment. You know that one day your body will die but you have found a way to live with this knowledge so that you can function. Even people who are not spiritual or religious can live with this knowledge that one day their body will die. Most people push it far out into the future, in the indeterminate future, but you do know that it could happen at any moment. You have still found a way to live with this fear.

What I am pointing out is there is a difference between the condition you fear and the fear itself. And this is why you can transcend your fear. Because the fear is a condition in your mind. Now you may say that there are so many conditions on earth that you could fear and it is true you can line up all kinds of conditions on earth that you can fear and you can go into a state of mind where you are paralyzed and cannot function because of your fears.

Yet as I said, what is the ultimate fear on earth? It is in a way death. Even though some might disagree and say that the way you could die could be a more severe fear than death itself. Yet if you can find a way to live with fear, and if you live in a situation where there is no immediate threat to your life, does it not stand to reason that you can deal with other fears as well.

How to transcend your fear

One tool I will give you is to realize a simple psychological mechanism. You may know that if an ostrich is faced with a predator it will sometimes use its long neck to bury its head in the sand instead of using its long legs to run away. This is the mechanism that if a fear seems overwhelming or if there seems to be no escape from the condition, you will deny or ignore the fear. And truly this is how many people have dealt with the fear of death by sticking their heads in the sand and not paying attention, refusing to look at it. The problem with this approach is, of course, that even though you may ignore the fear at a surface level, this does not remove the fear from your emotional body.

And if you have a certain fear in your emotional body, it ties you in to the emotional body of the planet, of the collective consciousness. You can at any moment be overwhelmed by the collective fears, especially if something happens in the world that causes people to go into a state of panic. Naturally as we have also taught you before, the more constructive way is to deal with the fear. And certainly any fear comes from a separate self and thus the ultimate way to overcome the fear is to separate the Conscious You from the self so you can see it. And we have, of course, given valid tools for unmasking these selves and coming to see them. But the tool I wish to give you is in a sense more simple, and it is to make you aware that the fear exists in your mind, but in most cases the condition you fear is not in your mind. The condition is outside your mind.

Fear as a vortex of energy

What is the fear that is in your mind? It is not a physical condition, at least not the way you normally see something physical. It is an energetic condition and a condition in the mind. What is energy? As we have said many times, a feeling and emotion is energy in motion, so it is a swirling vibrating something and it can create a vortex, a maelstrom of energy. And this is what fear becomes in your emotional body. It goes in, it starts swirling, it attracts more energy, it swirls faster and faster until it becomes something that resembles a tornado. Now you will know what a tornado is. It is just air swirling at high speed and so is an emotional vortex. There is nothing in there but swirling energy. There is no condition inside the energy and that is why you can come to this realization that fear is like a tornado, a vortex, a maelstrom or perhaps it is more constructive to use the image of a hurricane where you know that inside the hurricane is an eye where there is calm. The air is swirling around the eye but inside the eye there is calm, and so it is in your emotional body when you have fear.

Archangel Michael’s offer

Now most people who are not spiritual are afraid to even look at their fear. This is what happens when you have allowed the formation of this vortex, this hurricane in your emotional body. When you put your attention on it and touch it, the winds are so strong and unpleasant that it seems overwhelming to deal with and you withdraw and try to ignore the fear. But one of the ways to approach this in a different manner is to walk into the fear until you walk through the swirling energy into the calmness in the center. Of course, this can seem scary in itself and that is why I offer you my assistance. I will when you ask me, put my Presence over you for this I am allowed to do within the law of free will when asked, and you will then be enveloped in my Presence and we together will walk into that hurricane of swirling fear-based energy until we reach the center. Now, what could you do to stop a hurricane or a tornado? You could actually, if you were precise enough, drop a bomb into the center of a hurricane and if the explosion was powerful enough, it could snuff out the hurricane.

The fear as an excuse

Well, I do have enough power to snuff out any hurricane of fear-based energy in your emotional body, and I will do this when you allow me to do it. But in order for this to work, you have to let go of the fear. Now, this may seem like an easy thing to do. Who would not want to get rid of their fear? Well, you would be surprised at how many people do not want to get rid of their fear. For their fears specify something that they cannot or should not do, something they should avoid, and once they have accepted the fear, the fear gives them an excuse for not doing this. Many religious people are afraid to think for themselves, to think beyond the doctrines and the dogmas of their religion, and they have come to accept the fear that something calamitous would happen if they thought for themselves. They might end up in hell, open themselves up to the devil or any other fears that they have.

Would they want to get rid of their fear? Nay, for then they lose their excuse for not thinking, and then they will have to start thinking about the inconsistencies, the contradictions in their religion, about the questions they have that their religion cannot answer, and so they actually would prefer to keep their fear. And thus, if you as an ascended master student find it difficult to connect with us, then one thing to consider is whether you have fear in your emotional body.  What do you think would happen if you connected to an ascended master? Would you have to change something, perhaps in your life, in your state of mind? Well, then you might have a fear. Let us say you have some kind of habit that you know is not spiritual, but you have built in your mind an excuse for why you can continue this habit and still continue to study spiritual teachings. You might fear that if you really connected to an ascended master, you could no longer deny the need to give up the habit. Then, do you really want to get rid of that fear?

The rest of this dictation, along with an invocation based on the dictation, is found in the book: Connecting with Your Spiritual Teachers.

 

Copyright © 2023 Kim Michaels

 

Back to Connecting to Your Higher Self and Spiritual Teachers

Embrace your body and demonstrate that you can be spiritual in the body


Listen to a recording of this dictation (subscribers only)

Ascended Master Mother Mary through Kim Michaels, June 3, 2023. This dictation was given at a conference in Seoul, Korea: Connecting to Your Higher Self and Spiritual Teachers. 

I AM the Ascended Master Mother Mary. I represent to all people on earth the Divine Mother. I hold the office of the Divine Mother for earth and regardless of the name Mother Mary associated with the Christian tradition, I am the Divine Mother for all people on earth. My Presence, my Being, is universal. It transcends Christianity. It transcends any other label. It transcends any other form.

The nurturing aspect of God

What is the office of the Divine Mother meant to do on earth, for the people on earth? Well, it is meant to do many things, but first of all represent the Mother aspect of God, which is the nurturing aspect. Nurturance. Nurturance. A concept alien to many people who do not feel nurtured, who live in poverty, who lack this, who lack that, who lack the next thing, and therefore do not feel that the mother realm, the matter realm, is nurturing. This lack is, as we have explained, partly manufactured by certain people who form a power elite and want the population to live in lack so they can have more, but it is also to a large degree produced by the people themselves who have come to accept a self-image as not being worthy of nurturance, not daring to expect that they will be nurtured.

What is it that I truly seek to give to all people? The acceptance that they are worthy to receive nurturance from the Mother. This means especially nurturance of the physical body. For what is the physical body made out of? Is it flesh and blood? Nay, it is made out of the Body of the Divine Mother, which is the Light of the Divine Mother, which is what we have called the Ma-ter light. Why am I talking about the physical body at a retreat meant to help you connect to your higher self and spiritual teachers? Well, is it not because one of the primary things that can pull you away from feeling a connection within is precisely the physical body, its aches, its pains, its needs, its demands, constantly pulling on your attention: “Give me this, give me that. I do not have enough of this. I do not have enough of that.” Giving you pain here, a weird sensation there, always pulling on your attention.

The hatred of the Mother

For many spiritual people throughout the ages, the body, the physical body, has been a major challenge, pulling them out of their meditation. Many spiritual people have for a very long time looked upon the body as an enemy of their spiritual growth, as something to be conquered, to be ignored, to be controlled, to be shut down. Many look at the entire physical octave, the matter realm, the mother realm, as an enemy of their spiritual growth. And again, as my beloved sister Kuan Yin explained, these are the dilemmas we face on earth. As ascended masters, we full well realize the intense, the immense suffering that people are experiencing in the Mother realm.

I hold the office of the Divine Mother for Earth. What does that mean? It means I hear everything of people’s experiences, of their complaints, of their animosities, of their sense of injustice, of their hatred of the Mother. It all comes through my office. I am very well familiar with everything that is happening on earth, all of the suffering, and I fully understand why it is difficult to trust the Mother realm. For how can you know what will happen and suddenly your entire life is changed or destroyed, or you lose your life, or you have a disease that causes you pain? I fully understand it. I experience it in my heart every day, 24 hours a day, seven days a week, 365 days a year, now for many, many years that I have been holding this office.

Yet, the approach that spiritual people have taken for thousands of years to the physical body is not the most constructive approach. Is your body really an enemy of your spiritual growth? Only if you think it is. Only if you seek to escape the body while being in the body, to subdue the body, to control the body, to put down the body, to shut down the body, only then will it be an enemy.

Being in embodiment as an opportunity

Many years ago, this messenger had an out of body experience where he was taken out of his body into a light, and then he was sent back with great force, and he understood the message: “I am not in embodiment to have spiritual experiences. I am in embodiment to do something in the physical realm, to experience the physical realm, to change the physical realm.” Is your body, your physical body, an enemy of your connection to your higher selves and ascended masters? Only if you think it is, for what is a physical body? It is an incredible opportunity. An incredible opportunity to experience the physical realm from the inside and to be part of this co-creative process.

Yes, I hear all of the complaints, all of the objections to this statement from the collective consciousness. I have heard them for hundreds of years. I know them all backwards and forwards, yet who am I? Am I the one who is just passively listening to complaints, or am I the representative of the Divine Mother who is here to sometimes be the strict mother who says: “Enough of your complaining. Look at the opportunity, look at the body as an opportunity, look at being in embodiment as an opportunity.”

Again, I hear the suffering. I empathize with the suffering. But the suffering on earth has become a self-reinforcing spiral in the collective consciousness. And someone must break that spiral, and many of you have it as part of your Divine plan to help break that spiral, where you either complain about the body or you attempt to control it as the spiritual people have done. I understand that all of you who are spiritual people have a somewhat conflicted relationship with your physical body. I had it myself when I was in a physical body. Jesus had it. I certainly had it when I was standing there looking at him, hanging on the cross.

Nevertheless, many of you have vowed in this embodiment to help pull up on the collective to a higher approach to the physical body. A higher approach of looking at the body as an opportunity. As an opportunity. While you are in the body, why reject the body? Why attempt to get away from the body? The higher approach is to look at this realistically and say: “Why am I in physical embodiment?” And you recognize that you chose to be in physical embodiment. You may not feel like you chose. You may look at your life and say: “I would not have chosen this. No one would have chosen my life, as difficult as it has been.” But you did choose or you would not be here. You did choose. You may have had limited options because of patterns created in past lives, but those patterns were created by you choosing.

And those of you who are spiritual people, who are ascended master students, you certainly chose to be in embodiment at this time to help Saint Germain bring in the Golden Age and facilitate that shift. Do you think that in Saint Germain’s Golden Age, people will have the same relationship with their physical bodies as most people have today, and have had during Pisces and previous ages? Do you not think there will be a shift towards a different approach to the physical body? Then is it not logical that you are here to help bring about this shift? But how can you help shift the collective unless you shift in your own mind first? I am not seeking to be insensitive to those of you who have suffered greatly in the physical body and have diseases of various kinds. But I am seeking to awaken you to the choices you made before you came into embodiment, specifically as they relate to the physical body.

Accepting that “I am this body”

You know, as a spiritual person, you are more than the body. Some people will say: “I am not the body.” You have a very old tradition going back thousands of years in India: “I am not this. I am that.” Pointing to something in the spirit world. Many people reject their body. Many people seek to ignore it or get away from it. But the higher approach that I wish to bring to your attention is to embrace the body. Embrace being in embodiment. Even coming to this point where you can say: “I am this body.”

Consider your reaction to this statement. Can you center in your heart and feel at peace saying “I am this body”? Or do you have a reaction? Well, then that reaction comes from a conglomerate of subconscious selves that you have most likely created in past lifetimes, for many of you who are avatars going back to the birth trauma, where you were for the first time in the physical body on earth, being attacked by the fallen beings who attempted to use your physical body to destroy you psychologically and spiritually. But we have given you the tools to work on this, to come to see these selves and let them die. And for some of you, it will be very beneficial to take some time to focus on the selves that you have created in past lives that relate to the physical body, to you being in the physical body, and to you accepting not only that you are in the body, but accepting the body. Instead of accepting or seeing yourself as being in the body, you accept that you are the body.

Why is it important to make this distinction? Because only when you fully accept that you are the body will the blueprint of your body, held by your I AM Presence, held in your identity, mental and emotional minds, become fully physical. There are many, many spiritual people who, because they have not accepted “I am the body,” they cannot bring that blueprint into the physical. It stops before it reaches the physical, and therefore they cannot have the healing that they need in order to focus on their spiritual growth. And of course, as the Divine Mother, I desire to see all of you healed inasmuch as is possible within the parameters of your Divine plan. But I certainly desire all of you to have the least amount of suffering from your physical body. And as Kuan Yin has said, if you are always trapped in the mind projecting out, you will not connect.

So it is time to try something different. So many spiritual people throughout the ages have rejected the body, tried to avoid it, push it away. Is it not time to try something different? And that is to embrace the body, to accept the body, to identify yourself as the body, manifesting the highest possible matrix for the body.

A practical tool for accepting the body

As part of our effort to help you connect, I offer you some practical tools for getting to a state of mind where your body, your physical body, is not preventing you from connecting to the ascended masters and your higher self, because the body is not pulling your attention outwards. You can have moments of peace in the body and go within. This is my desire, so I ask you to join me in some practical exercises aimed at helping you either change your approach to the body, or actually have the healing of the body.

We have said before that your physical body is made out of the Ma-ter light. We have said that the Ma-ter light is the basis for form, but it cannot take on form by itself. A matrix, a thought matrix, must be projected upon the Ma-ter light for it to take on form. That matrix is projected through your identity, mental and emotional minds that project it onto the Ma-ter light that then forms the physical body. This means that your physical body, as dense as it may seem, it is not dense at all. It is liquid. It is like plastic that can be molded, like clay that can be molded, but it is molded by thought, by identity, by emotion. And therefore, it can potentially shift in an instant. In an instant.

Now, you know that your physical body is made up of cells. If you have ever studied this, you will know that the cells are incredibly complex. There was a time when scientists had discovered cells, but thought they were kind of like the old days when they looked at the atom as something indivisible. They thought the cells are just the basic building blocks of the body and there is not much going on inside the cell. But when they developed tools to study the cell, they realized how wrong they had been and how complex the cell is. The cell, as some doctors have discovered, is very much attuned to your state of mind. The cells are, in a sense, radios that receive signals. They receive signals from your environment, from the collective consciousness. But they also receive signals from your emotional, mental and identity minds.

The rest of this dictation, along with an invocation based on the dictation, is found in the book: Connecting with Your Spiritual Teachers.

 

Copyright © 2023 Kim Michaels

 

Back to Connecting to Your Higher Self and Spiritual Teachers

Experiencing yourself as a being beyond form


Listen to a recording of this dictation (subscribers only)

Ascended Master Kuan Yin through Kim Michaels, June 3, 2023. This dictation was given at a conference in Seoul, Korea: Connecting to Your Higher Self and Spiritual Teachers. 

I AM the Ascended Master Kuan Yin. Why do I speak so slowly? Notice your reaction. Do you sense agitation, irritability, impatience? Then consider where this comes from. Does it not come from the mind that is so addicted to stimulation? Consider how many people in this modern age are used to this constant stimulation of the mind. From so many sources, your mind is pulled into a constant reaction to something from outside itself. Yet am I, an ascended master, an outside source? Is this event for you just another outside stimulation or is it more? Well, it can be more, but that is up to you how much more it will be.

The still voice within you

You may say, am I not hearing a human voice from outside myself speaking a message from an ascended master? Is it not coming from an outside source like all the other things that are pulling on my mind? Yet am I, an ascended master, truly an outside source? For I tell you, as an ascended master, I am not bound by time and space. I am everywhere in the consciousness of God. Meaning, I am everywhere in the physical octave, meaning I am inside of you, as well as outside of you, as well as everywhere around you. As well as in no specific location in time or space.

Whether you hear me as an outside source speaking with a human voice or whether you hear me as the still small voice within, that is up to you. You can hear both at the same time. Or you can do what the mind has become addicted to doing, listen only for the outside voice and shut out the inside. Do you not, as ascended master students, grasp that the prince of this world, the demons of Mara, are doing everything they can to constantly pull your attention outside yourself, towards anything outside yourself? They do not care what your attention is focused upon, as long as it is focused outside yourself. For they know that no matter what outer object your attention is focused upon, it pulls you away from what is inside. And what is inside is your higher self, your spiritual teachers, the ascended masters. And that experience of yourself as not being the outer mind, but being what we, for want of better words, have called pure awareness. The Conscious You experiencing itself as pure awareness.

Spiritual teachers for humankind

You have chosen the topic for this gathering: Connecting to your higher self and spiritual teachers. We will begin by helping you connect to us, the ascended masters, who are the spiritual teachers for this planet and humankind. Whether they know us or not, whether they know the name or not, we are the spiritual teachers for all people. For we are the beings in the ascended realm, the spiritual realm, assigned by the cosmic hierarchy to work with earth. We are united. We are one.

There are, of course, those who are imposters, who set themselves up as spiritual teachers, perhaps using our names. And they are often in the mental realm, some in the lower identity realm, some even in the emotional realm. And of course, there are those in physical embodiment, who set themselves up as Gurus of various kinds, claiming various forms of authority or some superior state of consciousness. But we, who are the ascended masters, are the spiritual teachers assigned to earth. You may, of course, go and find whatever teacher appeals to you at your present level of consciousness. And there are many people who need whatever experience they are having by following whatever teacher they are following.

Going beyond the spiritual glitter

But you who know about ascended masters, you, of course, will make the most progress by seeking to connect to us. But how will that connection occur? Will you connect to us through the busy mind that is always pulled outwards, that is always pulled hither and yon, never being able to settle on anything for more than a few seconds? Will you connect to us through that mind? Nay, you will not. You may connect to beings in the mental realm, who will stimulate you with all kinds of glitter. As you see, so many people being attracted to that which speaks about various esoteric topics, often speaking in ways that are difficult to understand. But do they have the connection to the cosmic hierarchy?

You who know about ascended masters, what do you need all of this spiritual glitter for? Why would it be necessary for you? For the spiritual path is not so complicated. It is not so glorious according to the standard by which many people in the world judge. They want something exciting. They want something that pulls on their attention, constantly pulling on their attention. For that is what the outer mind has become addicted to, constantly pulling on your attention.

Just look at movies, television shows, how the pace has increased, how there is hardly any storyline, how it is all action and special effects, constantly something pulling. Never time to be still. There are people who see themselves as spiritual, but their minds are constantly pulled outside themselves, never looking within. But what is the spiritual path all about? Is it about constant stimulation of the mind that never gets enough? Or is it about going within, finding something within that you cannot find in the world? For surely if it could be found in the world, it would already have been broadcast by those who are always looking for an opportunity to make money.

Directing your attention within

The spiritual path that we teach reaches back throughout the millennia. And although we may use words that are adapted to the modern world, it is essentially the same path. You will not find what you are looking for by looking outside yourself. You will find what you are looking for only when you start directing your attention within. This is, of course, not an easy thing to do. We fully understand this. We fully understand how difficult it is to direct your attention within, partly because of the planet you are on with the density of the collective consciousness always pulling on you. But also, because you have had many lifetimes on this difficult planet, and therefore have inevitably been exposed to traumas of various kinds and intensity. When you start looking within, you may encounter emotional energies, deep traumas and beliefs that can be painful and difficult.

Many people in the world, when they start meditating or practicing mindfulness or whatever is popular out there, they encounter their traumas from past lives. And some get scared and decide this is too much or even that this is dangerous. They tend to gravitate towards gurus or religions who promise them the external salvation, where someone will do something for you so you do not have to look inside yourself. Just follow that outer path, doing this spiritual practice, following this guru, whatever temptations you have out there, whatever promises are made, whatever claims to authority or superiority are broadcast to tempt people away from the only path that has ever worked—looking within.

We, many of us who are the ascended masters assigned to earth, have been in embodiment on earth. We know how dense the planet is. We have experienced it on our own four lower bodies, but we also experienced that we could overcome. And therefore, we know that the path works and you too can overcome. Now, we, of course, experienced that we could not overcome by our own power. We needed help from the ascended masters who were working with earth at the time when we ascended. And this is, of course, why we now offer our help to anyone willing to receive it. We have come together, a group of us, and considered how we might help you fulfill the goal that you have chosen for this event—connecting.

Expanding your connection to ascended masters

Now, many of you already have some connection to us and to your higher selves. Some of you feel you have not yet established the connection that you would like to have. But many of you who have followed these teachings for some time, and especially those of you who have made use of the teachings given for the avatars about the cosmic birth trauma, the Primal Self and how to overcome the many separate selves, the subconscious selves, many of you have made more progress than you are aware of. But still we have decided to give you opportunities for expanding your connection.

Why do I say expanding, instead of establishing? Because all who can recognize the ascended masters have some connection to us. For only when the student is ready can the teacher appear. Not because the teacher is hiding from the student. We are always here. We are always here for all people. But until the student is ready, the student cannot sense our Presence.

Why you are here at this event?

My purpose for this opening dictation is to make you aware or at least make you focus on, for most of you are, of course, aware, that you will not connect to the ascended masters through the outer mind that is always so busy.

Why are you here at this event? What motivated you to come here? What do you hope to get out of being here? I know why I am here. Do you know why you are here? Many of you will point to various reasons. But have you taken some time to consider why you are really here? Have you considered that part of your motivation can be certain subconscious selves that hope to get something out of it? Have you considered what motives you might have? What expectations you might have?

Many people come to a spiritual event hoping for some dramatic experience. Some even come hoping for some physical manifestation or proof. Some hope that they will feel special or be made to feel special. Many different expectations. But consider the name you have chosen for this event. The topic for this event: Connecting. What do you think or what do your subconscious selves think will happen when you connect to an ascended master? Is there some expectation of some kind of glorious or dramatic event?

Expectation of some dramatic event

I am not here in any way trying to find fault or criticize. I am only seeking to make you more aware of what expectations you might have. For many people come with expectations that block them from actually achieving a connection to the ascended masters. Many people come expecting some dramatic event, some glorious event. And we can surely say that this has to some degree been increased by previous ascended master teachings, where there have been stories of people walking in the mountains, encountering Saint Germain in some physical visible manifestation, being taken into the Cave of Symbols, having dramatic experiences with Saint Germain or other ascended masters.

Many ascended master students have come with expectations based on these quite old teachings. But we have in this day and age given you new teachings that shed a different light on who we are today, how we work with students today. Some of these earlier teachings were given a very long time ago in the Piscean dispensation, when the collective consciousness was much more dense than it is today. People at the time needed more drama, the promise of some dramatic event. But do you see how this is an example of what we have talked about before, where we have to adapt our teachings and the way they are expressed to the consciousness of the people we are seeking to reach? And do you see that whatever we do, it has a certain effect, a certain side effect? If you go back to these earlier teachings, you will see that many people were attracted to the teachings because of these dramatic stories, the hope of some dramatic encounter with an ascended master that made them feel special.

But do you also see that most people, the vast majority of the people who were attracted to ascended master teachings, did not have such dramatic encounters? What was the effect? They were disappointed. They were wondering: “Is there something wrong with me that Saint Germain does not appear to me? And take me into the Cave of Symbols, and tells me how special my mission is. And how I will single-handedly save the planet and bring the golden age.” You see there is always that delicate balance between attracting people, catching their attention and then risking disappointment when their inflated expectations are not met.

Pushing the connection away from yourself

You who are our students in this age and who have been willing to take in the teachings we have given through this messenger, you can look at yourselves and you can see if you still have some expectation of some dramatic encounter. And if you do, then that expectation will block your connection to us. Why? Well, for many reasons. First of all because we are real spiritual teachers. What does that mean? It means we want you to be free of your egos, your subconscious selves. If you have an expectation based on the ego’s desire to feel special about how you would meet an ascended master, what would happen if we actually fulfilled that expectation? What would happen if we appeared to you exactly as you expect and made you feel very special? You would be trapped by that element of your ego, perhaps for the rest of this lifetime.

Therefore, as true spiritual teachers, when you have an expectation, we must step back. For we cannot risk pushing you in the opposite direction of growth. But of course, there is also an inner reason which is that when you have an expectation of some dramatic encounter, it is again the mind projecting out. But as I have said, you will not find us, you will not connect to us out there. But if your mind is projecting an image of how the connection should be, are you not projecting that you want to connect to us out there? Are you then not pushing the connection away from yourself by that expectation? This is the dilemma that we face—for us it is not a dilemma, but it is for you.

We understand fully how it is to be in embodiment. Why would you want a connection to your spiritual teachers unless that connection gave you something that you do not have in your normal daily life? Yes, we understand you must have a motivation for studying teachings, for practicing decrees and invocations. We understand. But we also understand that in most cases where you do not feel you have the connection, it is your expectation that blocks it. It is not us.

Establishing a direct inner connection with the masters

One thing I would like you to pay attention to, to listen to, is this. We of the ascended masters do not limit the connection you can have with us. Again, I am not trying to criticize in any way. I am only pointing out that we are willing to connect with anyone on earth at their present level of consciousness. For that is what the Christ consciousness truly is. The Christ mind is the mind that can meet people at whatever level of consciousness they are at and offer them some frame of reference that can help them take the step up to the next level of consciousness. There is no one on earth that we are not willing to connect to, based on the Christ mind. And I say this so that you who are our direct students can recognize that we are willing to connect to you. Our desire for all of you is that you establish a direct connection with us so that you can receive personal insights, shifts in consciousness and help from us that does not come from any outer source or through any outer source.

You are studying and practicing teachings that have been given through this particular messenger. But neither we of the ascended masters, who are sponsoring this messenger, nor the messenger himself has any desire for you to only connect to us through the messenger or the teachings given through the messenger. We want you to establish a direct inner connection with us so that you come to a point where you do not need the messenger. You may not need the outer teaching. You may not need the outer practices. But there is no desire to limit you and to keep you in a certain state of co-dependence on the messenger or the teaching or the practice. This does not mean you have to leave the teaching or the practice. But we desire all of you to have that direct connection.

Retreating from the world

The question for you really is: “What is there in your mind that might block your direct connection?” And this is, of course, what we will help you come to see and come to overcome in this event. Many of you will look at this as a conference, but you might also look at it as a retreat. Why do I use the word retreat? Because when you attend a retreat, what do you do? You retreat from the world. We are asking you for these next days to retreat as much as possible from your normal lives, what you are normally focusing your attention upon. It is not so much a matter of letting go of whatever responsibilities you have. But retreat in your minds so that you withdraw your attention from all of these things that are pulling on you.

There may be world events happening for these next days. But if something should happen that you need to pay attention to, we will let you know. Which means you can now, if you are willing, decide to turn off that phone, that internet connection. Surely my beloved, if you do not pay attention to the world for the next four days, the world will still be there. For I can assure you that the world is still there when no one is looking, when no human is looking, for we of the ascended masters are always looking.

 

The rest of this dictation, along with an invocation based on the dictation, is found in the book: Connecting with Your Spiritual Teachers.

 

Copyright © 2023 Kim Michaels

 

Back to Connecting to Your Higher Self and Spiritual Teachers

No self can take you to the ascended state


Listen to a recording of this dictation (subscribers only)

Ascended Master Gautama Buddha through Kim Michaels, April 10, 2023. This dictation was given during the 2023 Easter webinar – Taking Christianity and yourself down from the cross.

I AM the Ascended Master Gautama Buddha. What does the Buddha have to do with the cross and taking someone down from the cross? Well, you do not really believe, do you, that people were not crucified in their minds before Jesus appeared on earth? The symbols that we have explained during this conference about the deeper meaning of the cross, of course, applied before Jesus. It has applied for as long as people on earth have gone into duality.

Gautama descending from the cross

When I was preparing my mission as the Buddha, my mission to teach, I had to take myself down from the cross many times. I grew up in a very protected environment in a palace. I had very specific outer conditions, never saw all the sick people, had all the material goods and pleasures I could possibly want. I was crucified by that very worldly, pleasurable, comfortable lifestyle. I had to take myself down from the cross several times before I was actually ready to leave that palace and go out into the forest and live like an ascetic, meditating, almost starving myself to death. And as I was sitting there meditating I was, of course, examining my own mind and I overcame certain illusions and meaning again that I took myself down from another cross because as we have explained, you can, in a certain way, say that for each of the 144 levels of consciousness, there is an illusion that keeps you tied to the cross.

I came to the point where I could take myself down from a big cross, a big illusion and realize that the ascetic lifestyle was too extreme and therefore was not the ultimate way. That is when I discovered the Middle Way, but even then, I still had to go through a process that is not really recorded in the Buddhist scriptures where I qualified myself to begin my teaching mission and that was again taking myself down from a series of crosses. But then I started my teaching mission and the Buddhists, most Buddhists, would like me to think that by then I certainly was a perfected being. Many Buddhists want to think that I was perfected from the beginning, so I did not have to go through a process but this cannot be supported by a basic examination of my life story.

Even after I started teaching, I still had illusions to overcome, for the simple reason that if I had overcome all illusions, I could not have held on to a physical body. I still had to see things in myself, overcome separate selves, take myself down from these crosses. What I am simply saying here is that I have gone through the process of descending from the cross and therefore I am qualified to speak about the topic.

Co-creating from a state of oneness

What can we say as another way to look at the cross? Well, as others have said there are four levels of matter, four arms or ends of the cross, four points of the cross and so you are crucified in matter. But what is matter? Matter can be said to be form. You live in a world of form. You live in a world of form that you have not personally created.

We have explained that when you first descend into embodiment in an unascended sphere, you are a co-creator. You see yourself as a connected being and you see that you are in an environment that has been created by beings with a higher level of consciousness than you. You are using your connection to co-create, and you know you are not creating by your own power. Therefore, in that situation where you have not gone into duality, you are not crucified by matter because you know that you are more than form. You are even more than the self that you have taken on in this unascended sphere.

Even when you first take embodiment, you do have four lower bodies. You have an identity, mental, emotional, and physical body and in order to start co-creating, you are creating structures in those emotional, mental, and identity bodies. This happens as you, from the level of your I AM Presence, descend through the 144th, the 143th and down to the 48th level in your particular sphere. In a sense, you are taking on these illusions, but since you still see yourself as a connected being, you are not crucified in your own mind and therefore when you create some physical circumstance, you are not identified with your own creation. Therefore, you are not identified by the matter creation you have brought forth and you just do not see yourself identified with the physical body.

The illusion that matter matters

It is only when you go below that 48th level, go into the realm of separation, that you become crucified. But did not I just say that for each of the levels, even above the 48th level there is an illusion you have to overcome and therefore you are in a sense crucified by that illusion. Am I not now saying the opposite? No, because I am not talking about the same situation. When you first descended, it was not on a planet that had duality. Even the original inhabitants of the earth first took embodiment when nobody on earth had gone into duality. But when you take embodiment on a planet like earth where the consciousness has been so infused by duality, that is when you can then say that you are crucified by each of these illusions because it really is only when you are at the 144th level that you fully overcome this sense that “matter matters”.

It is not just that you are physically or emotionally or mentally trapped or crucified or fixated, but you still have a sense that conditions in matter matter. It is not necessarily that you are identified with them, as you begin to go above the 96th level you stop identifying yourself with matter but you still think that there is something that matters on earth, something that you would like to see changed and on a planet as dense as earth, you maintain that until the very end. You saw Jesus hanging on the cross and he still had some desire to do something on earth, to carry on his mission and therefore he wanted God to save him from the cross so that he could continue his mission and that was still that sense that matter mattered, something in matter mattered.

You can, even though this is not recorded in the scriptures, look at my teaching mission. I was not identified with a body, I was not identified with matter, but I still had the sense that something in matter mattered, that is why I stayed on earth and was teaching. I felt that this could make a difference. I am not saying this was wrong. I am just explaining to you that on a planet as dense as earth, it is only really when you ascend that you overcome that last illusion that makes it seem like conditions in the matter world really matter.

The (un)willingness to give up the form you built

Now, when you look at the bigger picture, look beyond earth, you can say here we have the Creator of your world of form who creates the very first sphere out of its own being, creates self-aware beings out of its own being, sends them into the sphere to act as co-creators and the purpose is that they come to grow in consciousness. The first sphere ascends, the second sphere is created, it ascends. The third and then the fourth and each sphere is a little bit denser than the next and so there comes a point in the fourth sphere where some beings refuse to ascend with the sphere so they fall into the fifth sphere and so forth. What we can say about the first three spheres was that the co-creators who raised those spheres to the ascension point, they never became identified with form, which means what? It means that no matter how sophisticated of a civilization for example, they created on a planet, they never became identified with the form they have created.

We are not here talking about just identifying yourself with the physical body, we are talking about beings who were in that given sphere for a very, very long time and acting like co-creators starting out with a very limited sense of self and limited co-creative abilities, but gradually over a very long period of time expanded their co-creative abilities to where they were able to create very, very sophisticated forms, planets, civilizations on planets, but despite the fact that they created these very sophisticated, very elaborate forms, they never became identified with them. They never got lost in the form they had created.

But now you come to the fourth sphere, there are also some beings who have spent a very long time expanding their co-creative abilities, but when it is time for the sphere to ascend, they are not willing to give up their creation. Those who ascended in the previous spheres, they came to the point where they were willing to give up all of this sophisticated form that they had brought forth. But those in the fourth sphere, some in the fourth sphere, were not willing to give this up. They were so admiring their own creation, so in love with their own creation and with their own minds who had brought forth this sophisticated creation that they were not willing to give it up. In other words, they had become identified with the form they had created.

Of course, the very teachings that we have given you about the Conscious You is that the Conscious You can never become the form it creates. It can create, when it expands its co-creative abilities, very elaborate forms, but it can never become the form. Why is this? Because how do you co-create? You co-create by creating a self in the identity, mental, emotional, and physical realm and it is through this self that you co-create. We are not talking about here a separate self. You can see yourself as a connected being, but you are still creating a self, and the wisdom of this is that the Conscious You is not changed by this entire process it is going through. It is not changed! It is the self that gradually becomes more sophisticated.

When your sphere is ready to ascend, you have to give up that self. You have to give up the ghost. And that is what the fallen beings were not willing to do because they were so in love with it, they were so identified with the self they had created and with the outer form that they were not willing to lose their life for my sake as the universal Christ expressed it. They were not willing to lose their life in order to follow Christ and go to a higher state of life, eternal life. They were allowed to go through this experience, but, of course, they could not maintain their creation in the fourth sphere, so they, along with the separate self they had created, fell into the fifth sphere, where they could then use this sophisticated self to start creating something in the fifth sphere, which, of course, was more advanced than what the new co-creators in that sphere could create.

How fallen consciousness affects spiritual teachings

What is the relevance of this for you who are now in embodiment in the seventh sphere on an unnatural very dense planet called Earth? Well, it is this, that the entire purpose of the world of form is that the world that has form is simply an environment in which self-aware co-creators can expand their co-creative abilities, can expand their consciousness. But in an unascended sphere this expansion of consciousness does not happen in the four lower bodies, it does not happen at the level of the Conscious You, it happens at the level of the I AM Presence and the causal body. And the purpose for this is that even if you choose to fall, to be lost in your own creation, the I AM Presence can never be lost and therefore your experiences as a co-creator can never be lost.

And this means what? It means that as a student on the spiritual path, walking the path of Christhood, the path of Buddhahood, the path to the ascension, you need to recognize here that every aspect of life on earth has been influenced by the fallen consciousness, even every aspect of religion and spirituality. Regardless of the claims made by any religion or any spiritual philosophy or any spiritual group, every spiritual teaching has been influenced by the fallen consciousness in the sense that if it did not in some ways adapt to the fallen consciousness, people would not be able to grasp it because the fallen consciousness is so pervasive and so persuasive on earth.

Even the teachings of the ascended masters are adapted to the fallen consciousness or nobody would be able to grasp it. That is why we have talked about used car salesmen bait and switch and that you need to use the teaching to come to a higher level where you can receive a teaching that is not affected by the fallen consciousness. One way that religions, for example, are affected by the fallen consciousness is in the concept that you have a soul that was created by God and that can therefore enter the kingdom of heaven. But as we have explained, the soul is the separate selves or the selves in your four lower bodies, ultimately also the ego and they can never enter heaven. The soul cannot qualify for the ascension. Only “He who descended from heaven can ascend back to heaven” and that is the Conscious You. This is a teaching that would be disturbing to the vast majority of people on the earth if they actually could grasp it. It is the teaching that has been disturbing and has been rejected by some ascended master students from previous dispensations. But where does this teaching, this idea come from? Where does the idea that there is something that is clearly in this realm, in a physical body but it is more than the physical body, and this something can somehow be perfected or become so sophisticated that it can enter heaven or the spiritual realm? Where does this idea come from?

Perfecting the self vs. letting the self go

Well, it comes from the fallen beings because their dream, at least for some of them since they fell, is that they can continue to build on this self that they had created in the sphere where they fell and they can continue to make it more and more sophisticated until one day God will simply have to let it into heaven or rather the ascended masters will have to let it into heaven. This is the basic dream of at least some fallen beings.

Others are trapped in the dream of wanting to prove God wrong, among other ways by proving that it was wrong to give people free will. But many fallen beings are trapped in this dream that they can create a self so sophisticated that it can receive eternal life. In other words, they can maintain it instead of falling into denser spheres until they eventually must face the second death, they can avoid the second death by making themselves so sophisticated that it can qualify. And this is what is behind the vast majority of religious and spiritual teachings on the planet and this was something that was very difficult to explain to people as long as we were still in the Piscean Age.

The ascended master dispensations that were started in the Piscean Age, it was very difficult to explain this to people. It was hinted at but very few people grasped it. Some did, some will understand. But in the Aquarian Age it is possible that many more people will come to recognize this. They will come to recognize that in order to ascend you need to let the last ghost die. You need to give up the last ghost, this last element of this separate self because it will never qualify. It will never qualify for salvation, entry into heaven, nirvana or the ascension. Whatever you want to call it that is beyond the four levels of the material realm, the self that was created in the world of form cannot qualify. It cannot enter. This is the essential realization before you qualify for your ascension.

This does not mean that there have not been people who ascended before today’s age. There are, of course, Jesus, myself, Mother Mary and others but there are people from various religious traditions or spiritual traditions, mystical traditions who have qualified for their ascension. But they have all done it by coming to this realization that it was not a matter of perfecting their self but a matter of letting it go, transcending it, letting it die, however they saw it, however they put words on it. They have all come to that realization and it has been taught in various religions and mystical teachings. You can find remnants of it. You can even find it in the Buddhic religion or teachings when you look for it. You can find some teachings about the Sea of Samsara being the same as nirvana, that you come to a point where you see that there is no difference between the two and other teachings as well that very few have grasped but some have understood.

What we are doing now in this dispensation is that we are explaining this in a more clear way than it has been done before in order to make it easier for people to grasp this and start to apply it. This is, of course, the, one might say, ultimate challenge to the fallen beings, the ultimate nightmare of the fallen beings, because it is directly challenging their dream of immortality for the separate self, of permanence for form, the dream that something created in the world of form can attain permanence without going through the ascension process.

The purpose of the unascended sphere

And you might say, as some have indeed thought throughout the ages that, why is it that way? Why is it so that you can have this unascended sphere? You have all of these billions and billions and billions of co-creators, they are creating something alone or they are, as they rise in consciousness, creating something together where they create these elaborate civilizations on these very beautiful planets. And then after such a long time of creating all of this, they just have to give it all up and let it all go so that they can ascend and so that their entire sphere can ascend. But in the process of the ascension, all of this that they had created is dissolved, it is lost, it is erased, whatever you want to describe it as. It is an annihilation process.

Why is it that way? Why could not it just be that on some planets they could create something so sophisticated that it could ascend when the sphere ascends? Well, we have given you the explanation, which is that free will is the way that people grow, that beings grow and free will must be allowed to outplay itself and therefore there is always the possibility that people can refuse to transcend something, want to hold on to it and in order to avoid this becoming permanent, then the sphere has to ascend. But you can still say: “Well, but yes, we can understand that the planets, where there are beings who will not let go and who therefore end up falling, that these could be dissolved. But why do they all have to be dissolved?”

Well, because in order to really ascend you have to demonstrate non-attachment to form, non-attachment to the forms that you have created, non-attachment to the self through which you have created those forms. And you can only do that by giving it up and trusting that the experiences gained through your journey in the unascended sphere are preserved in your I AM Presence and causal body, therefore they are not lost.

What does this mean? It means that after a sphere ascends, all of the experiences collected in the causal bodies of the beings who ascend, they are still there. And after the sphere ascends, the energies are purified, which means they are not as dense as they were in the unascended sphere, which means that now it is much easier to create something in the ascended sphere, which means that all of those I AM Presences who have now become ascended masters, they have a choice now. What will they create in the ascended sphere? What will they co-create in the ascended sphere? But now they have complete freedom to decide what they will create and how they will create it.

But you see, before the ascension point, you had this self through which you had created something that you thought was good and sophisticated. But you still had that self. And that means what? It means that even though you were making your creation more and more sophisticated, you were still doing it through that self, through the parameters of that self. Your present co-creation was affected and determined by your previous co-creation. But now that you have ascended and given up that self, you have complete freedom as to what you will co-create in the ascended sphere. You can very quickly recreate something similar to what you had created in the unascended sphere, if that is what you decide to do. But actually, the vast majority of ascended beings, when a sphere ascends, they want to create something different from what they had co-created in the unascended sphere because now they have a greater vision than they had before.

The process of expanding your sense of self

You see, it is really part of this entire process whereby an individual co-creator starts with a very limited sense of self and gradually expands its sense of self until it can eventually reach the full Creator consciousness. But how do you expand your sense of self? Well, you have a gradual process of expanding the self and then you have these revolutionary shifts of your sense of self and one of these is when the sphere in which you started your co-creative efforts ascends.

You have other shifts. Let us say you ascend in your present sphere. Well, first of all, you can expand your sense of self in the ascended realm of this seventh sphere, even if the sphere has not actually ascended. But then when you have done that—expanded yourself as much as you can, you can ascend to the sixth sphere—expand your sense of self there and then keep going up until you reach the Creator consciousness. But for each of these, rising to the next sphere, it is a revolutionary shift and you will have to give up the sense of self you had in the previous sphere, even after you have entered the ascended spheres.

Buddhism as a pragmatic philosophy

You see, it is a very complex process. And why is it so complex? Well, because the Creator consciousness is almost infinitely beyond what you can grasp on earth. Why am I talking about it at all? Well, you will see that 2,500 years ago, I took a very different approach than what we, as ascended masters, are taking today. There were, of course, many religions at the time, including the Hindu religion, who talked about the realms of the gods and the heaven worlds and this and that. And this goes back to the ancient Vedas, which, of course, were given 10,000 years ago, when the consciousness was lower than it is today even though there are still Hindus that think that this was the highest teaching that can ever be given on earth.

What was the case at the time when I took embodiment as the Buddha? It was that you had these Brahmins of the Hindu religion and they perfectly fit the description that Jesus gave earlier today of the scribes and Pharisees of the Jewish religion. They had taken what they considered the true parameters of the Vedas. They had interpreted them intellectually and continued to build these more and more sophisticated interpretations, mental images, and they thought this was the absolute truth.

And the people who believed in this, who were Hindus at the time, the ordinary people, the vast majority of the people, could not free themselves from the influence of these Brahmins. They could not see through and see that these were mental images, they were illusions. They did not have the awareness and the faculties and the knowledge of the world to see through this and therefore, I took a very pragmatic approach and said: “Buddhism is not a religion like the Hindu religion. Buddhism is not a religion that is meant to give you knowledge of the gods and the realms of the gods, because most people cannot grasp the realms of the gods, so they will be trapped in these outer doctrines and interpretations. Let us instead create a pragmatic philosophy aimed at taking people where they are and raising their consciousness, helping them overcome at least some of the illusions of Maya. And then as they raise their consciousness, they will be able to grasp more. They will expand their intuitive faculties and be able to know from within what is real, what is unreal.”

In other words, what I avoided doing in my incarnation of the Buddha was to create another religion that claimed to be superior to the religions of the Brahmins, because this would have locked me into this battle with the Brahmins and they would have attacked me and done what they also tried to do with Jesus. This was an evaluation based on the ascended masters that were guiding earth at the time, recognizing that this was what people were ready for, at least in that part of the world.

More progressive revelations

Now, what happened in the 500 years between the time of the Buddha and the time of Jesus was that there was a progression in the collective consciousness. And this progression was to a large part produced by the many people who embraced Buddhism and sincerely attempted to change their state of mind, to overcome these illusions of Maya by walking the Eightfold Path, which is, as I have explained earlier, geared towards helping people overcome these illusions. By the time of Jesus, it was determined by the ascended masters that we could take a different approach through Jesus and talk about a God and the spiritual realm and the ascension process, because now more people were ready to consciously acknowledge that it is possible to ascend.

We, of course, knew that there were limitations to this based on the collective consciousness. It was indeed a very real potential that the Christian religion could become what it became, a religion controlled by the fallen beings. But still it was a different approach where Jesus openly talked about the Father, but also, you will see, gave relatively little detail about the spiritual realm and how things are there. Jesus, in fact, talked less about it than the Old Testament does, and he talked much, much less about it than the Hindu Brahmins did. He was also, in a sense, taking a pragmatic approach.

Then what has happened since the time of Jesus is, of course, that first of all, as a result of both Jesus’ teachings and the Buddhic teachings, the collective consciousness has been raised more, but also then Saint Germain decides to release the scientific method and this raises the consciousness further. It expands people’s worldview. It gives them an understanding of certain general concepts that we have now made use of in the last century or so to release these progressive revelations through various organizations and messengers.

We are now at a point where we again feel more free to talk about conditions in the spiritual realm, but you will see that still our focus is very much on showing you how to transcend your consciousness. In a sense, we are doing the same that we did in the Buddhic religion or Buddhic philosophy, telling people how to raise their consciousness so that they can know from within what is real and unreal, so they do not need to rely on an external authority, even the external teaching given by the ascended masters, but can know from within. And this, of course, is the only way that you can be free from the illusions of Maya, the lies of the fallen beings.

Reading vibration as the ultimate way to escape the cross

Many among the Hindu Brahmins were fallen beings. They have an ability to confuse and almost hypnotize people who have not attained that inner contact with the Christ mind. But as you begin to attain that inner contact, you become able to see through the illusions of the fallen beings. You can do this partly through the outer mind, where you evaluate that they are not consistent, they do not make sense, they do not correspond with other teachings that you consider reliable. But ultimately, you begin to do it by simply reading the vibration. You can come to a point where you read the vibration, you read a certain teaching, and within reading a few sentences, you sense that the vibration is not coming from the Christ mind. And this is, of course, the point where we have been taking all of you towards by giving you these teachings and tools for overcoming the selves, because it is the selves that prevent you from having the connection to the Christ mind and using the Christ mind as your frame of reference to read the vibration of anything in the world of form.

This is, in a sense, the ultimate way to escape the cross, that you read vibration. You can call it extrasensory perception, clairvoyance, whatever you want, but it is not tied to the physical senses. In other words, many spiritual people dream of being able to see auras by having their third eye opened. But this is still simply an extension of the faculty of vision. But reading vibration is beyond the five senses. You can call it a sixth sense or a seventh sense or whatever you want to call it, but it is the ability to read vibration.

Why is it possible to read vibration? Well, what did I say 2,500 years ago? Everything is the Buddha nature. What is said about the Christ consciousness? It is the Word, the Logos, the Only Begotten Son, and without Him was not anything made that was made. Everything in the world of form springs from the Christ consciousness, the Buddha nature, whatever you call it, and everything has a certain vibration. But the Christ consciousness, the Buddha nature, never goes below a certain vibration in its pure form when it is connected. But because free will must be allowed to outplay itself, you can lower the vibration of energy in order to create the illusion of separation and the illusion that you are separated from your source. As we have said, the vibration even of matter on earth has been lowered below its original level, which is why it seems so plausible that you are living in a separate world and that even if there is a God, he is way up there in heaven.

The Buddha nature vs. illusions of Maya

There is a distinct difference in vibration between that which is the pure consciousness of Christ, the pure Buddha nature, and that which is still the Buddha nature but has been obscured by the illusions of Maya, where the Christ consciousness has been hidden by the illusions of antichrist. But it is, of course, only hidden when you are looking at the form through the separate selves that created the form. Then you cannot see that even though it has a lower vibration than the pure Christ consciousness, it is still the Christ consciousness. In fact, it is an illusion created out of lower vibrations. It can never be permanent, it can never become permanent, it can never receive eternal life and therefore, when you begin to sense vibration, you can instantly sense what is a lower vibration and what is the vibration of the Christ or the Buddha nature.

And this is the ultimate way to avoid being fooled by the fallen beings, the illusions of Maya, the demons of Mara and that is the ultimate way to escape the cross because as long as you cannot see that there are certain vibrations that are not of a pure nature, but only temporary illusions, then you think that those apparitions might be permanent and they might have power over you, and they might even define you. You might be identified with them, you might even be in love with what you or someone, a fallen being, has created as this seemingly sophisticated structure. And it might seem sophisticated from a certain viewpoint, but it can never become permanent for eternal life can be achieved only through Christ, only through reuniting with the Buddha nature, overcoming all illusions that you could ever be separated from the Buddha nature, all illusions that form, that any form could be separated from the Buddha nature, and could be other than the Buddha nature.

This is the basic illusion that we have talked about with the duality consciousness. The basic illusion is, there is the Buddha nature, there is Christ and there is something that is other. It is not the Buddha nature, it is other than the Buddha nature, separated from the Buddha nature. This is the basic illusion of duality, that the world can be divided into two, but the division into two cannot be real. The Buddha nature cannot be divided. Only in the illusions of Maya can you create the appearance that they are two. Therefore, the idea that there is a god and a devil is an illusion, and the god that you see from this state of consciousness is not the real God, not the formless God. We say formless because you cannot put words on God’s consciousness. God is completely beyond the forms that you can see from an unascended sphere.

Giving people motivation for walking the path

The world is not two, it is not divided, it is one. It was always one. But what can motivate a being who has been trapped in the illusions of Maya to strive to overcome the illusions of Maya? Why did I, as the Buddha talk about nirvana? Because you have to motivate people to walk this path of overcoming all of these selves they have based on illusions. Sure, these people are suffering and they want to escape suffering. But when you are trapped in the consciousness that creates suffering, you cannot see how to escape suffering. You think that perhaps you can destroy the conditions that create suffering. Perhaps you can create better conditions out of the consciousness of separation, but it cannot be done.

You can never escape suffering through the consciousness of separation, but neither can you really grasp what it means to be outside the consciousness of separation. Therefore, we, as spiritual teachers, we have to give people some motivation for starting the path of escaping separation that they can grasp and that appeals to them while they are still in separation. That is why I formulated the First Noble Truth. Life is suffering, but there is a way out of suffering and it is the Eightfold Path. But what would motivate people? Yes, it can motivate you to get away from suffering, but what are you getting into? People will ask, and people did ask: “When I walk the Eightfold Path, what is the end goal? What is the payoff out in the end?”

Well, that is why I formulated the concept of nirvana as an alternative to suffering, to the Sea of Samsara. Yet, not that I had this concept in my mind, but what did people do when they heard this concept? They projected a mental image upon nirvana based on the illusions of separation and now they were thinking that the purpose for walking the Eightfold Path was to reach this dualistic image of nirvana. That is why there is a teaching in the Buddhist scriptures that you come to a point where you realize that nirvana and Samsara are basically the same thing, or out of the same substance because they are both out of the illusion of separation. And therefore, they both need to be destroyed before you are free, before you are liberated. And this is the fallacy of many religions on earth, including the Christian religion, the Jewish religion, the Judeo-Christian tradition.

It is again, as we have said, when you go into duality, you start creating a god in the image and likeness of the separate self, even the fallen beings. You are using the conditions in form in an unascended sphere on an unnatural planet to project what it is like in the spiritual realm and you cannot thereby know what it is like in the spiritual realm. We are ascended masters, we are in the spiritual realm, we can never give you a teaching about certain conditions in the spiritual realm. But we are in no way trying to give you the full view of this, because we know it cannot be grasped, and there is no point in you even knowing what it is like in the spiritual realm. Because, as we have also explained, what do you do when you go into this linear separate mind? You are seeing yourself as a subject studying a remote object. And this is the same with the ascended realm. When you are in an unascended sphere, when you are unascended, you are studying the ascended realm as a separate object.

This can be necessary for you to gain a certain understanding of the mechanics of the ascension process, which is why we give this. But you have to recognize here that no matter how sophisticated of an understanding you think you have of the ascended realm, you are not in the ascended realm and it will not bring you there. You will get there only by letting go of this mental image, these separate selves. And then when you are there, you are experiencing the ascended realm, at least from the level of consciousness you have when you ascend. You are not experiencing the fullness, as I have said, there are many levels up to the Creator.

Once again, I have given you a big mouthful, many things to ponder, but I know that some of you will understand, some of you will be willing to ponder it and use these teachings we have given to take yourself down from the cross of your previous understanding of the spiritual path. No outer description of the path can take you to the ascended state. Only by transcending all outer descriptions can you ascend.

And thus, I seal this conference. You have our gratitude for being part of this, for being willing to receive these teachings and have them projected through your auras and chakras into the collective consciousness, being willing to make these calls and invocations that have had a profound effect at this specific time where so many Christians are focused on the crucified Christ rather than the resurrected Christ.

With this, with our profound gratitude, I seal you in the infinite, unconditional, indescribable peace of the Buddha.

 

Copyright © 2023 Kim Michaels

 

Back to Taking Christianity and yourself down from the cross

SOME will understand. May you be that some!


Listen to a recording of this dictation (subscribers only)

Ascended Master Jesus Christ through Kim Michaels, April 10, 2023. This dictation was given during the 2023 Easter webinar – Taking Christianity and yourself down from the cross.

I AM the Ascended Master Jesus Christ. There are various quotes in the Christian scriptures of my supposedly direct words. What is the most numerous quote repeated a number of times? It is this: “Scribes and Pharisees, hypocrites.” Who are the scribes and Pharisees? What are they a symbol for? Well, let us start by looking at it, not in terms of specific people or lifestreams, but in terms of a certain state of consciousness. What was it that the scribes and Pharisees did? They were looking at the Jewish scriptures, and they were thinking, but they were thinking within the boundaries, what today would be called the paradigms of the Jewish religion, never thinking outside.

What did they do? They came up with interpretations. They became more and more elaborate, more and more complex. And why? Well, partly because they could not stop themselves, but partly because it made them seem superior, because they could understand these elaborate interpretations that nobody else could understand. And this is a very old tendency on this planet, on many other planets, where people become more and more enveloped in, identified with, a certain paradigm, a certain ideology, a certain religion, a certain philosophy. They think within these boundaries, but as they are thinking, they become more and more complex, more and more artificial, and they set up this elaborate system.

Scribes and Pharisees, hypocrites!

But why did I say that they were hypocrites? Normally, when you think of hypocrites, you think of people who, for example, say one thing but they do not act on it, they do not follow it, they do not walk their talk. And this was partly what the scribes and Pharisees did, as you can find in another quote where I said that they put burdens on the people but they would not follow it themselves. But there is more to it than that.

What is a hypocrite, really, when you look at it from a different perspective? A hypocrite is one who believes that his way or her way of thinking about a specific issue is the only way, is the highest way.
And they also believe that this will get them to whatever goal is defined. In other words, the scribes and the Pharisees at my time believed that by thinking about religious matters, they could qualify to enter heaven, they could think their way into heaven. But what had they done? They were in the consciousness of separation below the 48th level. They had no conscious intuition. They had no idea of the value of intuition. And what did that mean? It means that they had used the dualistic consciousness, as we have explained so many times, to create their own worldview, their own ideology. And they thought it was complete, it was the highest truth. They thought that heaven conformed to the thought system they had created on earth. They thought they had changed God’s law, or rather, they thought that God’s law was what their system described, their system was an accurate description of God’s law. And they were not willing to even consider that it might not be the case.

What had they done? They had set themselves up as authorities. Why did they think they were authorities? Because they could understand the complex interpretations and doctrines of the Jewish religion. But who had created them? Well, they themselves, or at least people in the same mindset, over generations. They thought they had authority. Why did they have authority? They could understand the doctrines, but they would not see that the reason they could understand the doctrines was that they were in a certain state of mind and the doctrines came from that state of mind, but they still felt that because they could understand these complicated doctrines, they were superior to the general population who could not understand it. But it was not that they were understanding a higher truth, was it? They were understanding a mental image, a human fabrication that sprang from their own minds. That is why they could understand it and nobody else could understand it, at least nobody who was not in their frame of mind.

They claimed to have authority, but it was a self-validating authority. They had created the parameters that they claimed gave them authority. Of course, they did not see this. They claimed they had authority because they understood the law of God. But it was their own self-created law, so what authority did they have?

What happened when they encountered me? Well, I had a slightly, you might say, different approach to truth and knowledge than they did. I can of my own self do nothing. I actually said on occasions: “I can of my own self know nothing. Whatever I speak is given to me by the Father.” I recognized that my mind is not self-sufficient. This will, of course, surprise many Christians who have elevated me to being this superior being, the only Son of God. Surely, I would know everything that God knew. But I was not the only Son of God. I was a human being in embodiment. And why did I say: “I can, of my own self, do nothing?” Because I could only act by using God’s energy and power, and I could only know by using the mind of God or the universal mind of Christ.

Intricate theological discussions within a closed system

They were hypocrites because they claimed to have authority from God, but it was their own self-created earthly authority that was disconnected from the Christ mind. When they encountered me, they felt superior. And when I refused to submit to them as the people did, they started accusing me. What did they start doing? They tried to find fault. They tried to look at the Jewish scriptures and the rules derived from them and accused me in all ways. There are things that are not recorded in the scriptures at all where they tried to pull me into these very intricate theological discussions so that they could, first of all, create such a hugely complex problem that they could always interpret it in any way they wanted.

What is one of the effects of complicating things? Well, first of all, you can always interpret. The more complex, the more interpretations they are. You can always make it seem like you are right. It confuses people. The more complexity there is, the more confused people are. If they accept that you have authority, well, then you can always just say that they are not understanding the doctrines, and that is why they do not agree with you or why they see it differently.

They tried to play these tricks on me, and ,of course, it did not work. Why? Because I did not enter into these intricate theological discussions with them. I simply rebuked them with very simple statements such as: “Scribes and Pharisees, hypocrites.” How do you really drag that into a complex intellectual discussion?

This is one approach to knowledge that you see on earth. You confine your search for knowledge to a specific system defined on earth, and then you think and interpret within that framework, coming up with more and more complex interpretations and theories. This, of course, is what you see in today’s world with scientific materialism. You see a very peculiar situation in today’s world where science is nailed to the cross by materialism. Why? Well, science was designed by Saint Germain to be an open-ended process. You never confine scientific inquiry and theory to a specific framework. You never say: “Here we have this final outer framework, and we can never go beyond it.” This, of course, is what the Jewish religion had done with the Jewish scriptures. This is what the Catholic Church did with the Christian scriptures and their own doctrines. They have created a closed system.

The irony, science was designed by Saint Germain to free people, to free the people’s minds from these closed systems of the medieval Catholic Church and put them into an open-ended process. Of course, this is not what the fallen beings wanted. They want to create a mental box and keep people in it. They started working very hard to do the same thing with science, to turn science into a closed mental box. And with the growth in materialism, they managed to do it to a large extent. There is still some openness in the scientific community and the scientific process, but much progress has been delayed because materialists want to confine scientific inquiry and theory to the materialist framework. If I was walking today in the institutions of learning and research, I would again say: “Scribes and Pharisees, hypocrites.”

Open-ended co-creation vs. creating a closed mental box

The other approach to knowledge is, of course, that you say: “We will not confine our questions, our inquiry, to a particular framework. We will look beyond, at least our present framework, and seek knowledge from another source.” Science seeks it by observing the world, by coming up with theories that are then tested through experiment. A perfectly valid approach, of course, but not the only approach.

The other approach is that the mind can actually inquire into knowledge, and the mind can go beyond a certain framework. Now, this is a subtle topic to understand because what is it that creates these closed mental boxes? You may say, “Well, the Catholic clergy certainly created the medieval mental box because they would persecute or execute anyone who questioned their doctrines”, but what actually creates the mental box is, of course, the mind. It is the mind that sets the parameters and then decides it will not go beyond it and it does not want anyone else to go beyond it. This is typically done, again, by those who form an elite, whether they are fallen beings or not, but they want to be superior to others. They confine their minds to a certain mental box, and they want everybody else to do the same, which is why you saw that the Catholic clergy, not all of whom were fallen beings, had managed to get virtually all people in Europe to confine themselves to the mental box created by the church.

The mind has this ability to create a mental box and to confine its inquiry into knowledge to that framework. And why does the mind have this ability? Because, as we have said, the earth is a reality simulator where you must be able to create any experience for yourself that you want. And there are two ways to create the experience, as I have explained. You can be a co-creator, or you can be a separate being who is creating the illusion that you have defined your own reality. You have become as a God who is defining good and evil, and you create a complete fantasy picture disconnected from reality. And there is, because of the law of free will, no limit to how deep you can go into this separation and illusion, how intricate of a picture you can create. It is just a matter of your imagination. But, of course, the law of free will mandates that any mental image you can create, any mental box you can create for your mind, you must be able to get yourself out of. And how do you then do this? Well, obviously, by seeking knowledge outside of any of these mental boxes created on earth. And what is the way to do this? Well, you can do it through the intellect, by analyzing, by logical, rational thinking, but the most efficient way to do this is through what you normally call intuition.

The key of knowledge

Intuition, as we have said, is [when] the Conscious You steps outside of all the cells you have created, outside the mental box, experiences directly that there is something to know outside the mental box, and that this something seems more real than what is in the mental box. Because you do not need to argue for or against it. You do not need to intellectualize and analyze. You experience.

This, of course, is the path to Christhood. And you can say that when the mind becomes a closed system and goes into creating this mental image, the Conscious You is nailed to the cross, the cross created by the mind in the physical, in the emotional, mental and identity realm. And the way to get yourself down from the cross is, of course, to get outside of the mental box, dismantle the mental box and seek knowledge from a source outside your own mind. Based on this, you could say that people who are walking the path to Christhood are seeking knowledge from outside their own minds, from outside any of the mental boxes, thought systems, created on earth. But the question is, does that necessarily mean that they have the key of knowledge? In other words, you can find the spiritual path, you can find an ascended master teaching, and you might not yet have grasped what is the key to making the best use of the teaching. It is quite possible, and it has, of course, happened to people, that they find an ascended master teaching that has genuine progressive revelation directly from the ascended masters (we are not talking just about this dispensation but other spiritual movements and dispensations as well). There is genuine knowledge coming into the physical realm from the ascended masters through a messenger or in other ways. But the question is now, do people focus on the outer knowledge that is coming through, the words, the form, the contents of the teachings, or do they seek to use the teachings only as a stepping stone for activating their intuition, for overcoming the separate selves so that the Conscious You becomes more and more able to step outside of your outer mind and therefore directly experience the ascended masters? In other words, as we have said before, the highest way to use the spiritual teaching is to make contact with the consciousness from where the teaching comes. The highest way to use an ascended master teaching is that you use the teaching to get to a point where you personally can have an inner intuitive contact, a direct experience of an ascended master and his or her consciousness. Then you have made the highest use of the teaching.

Are you willing to question your mental image of the teaching?

But there are, of course, students who are not ready to do this. There are even some that are not willing to do this because they are still trapped in this desire to make themselves seem superior to others. They use a spiritual teaching and ascended master teaching in a different way. They do it just like the scribes and Pharisees. They are saying: “Here we have an ascended master teaching. We recognize it came from a higher source. But the teaching does not cover every possible topic.” So these people create their own interpretations. Sometimes they cannot even formulate it in words, they just have it in their mind at a higher level of words, a certain world view, a certain view of themselves that they feel now is validated by the outer teaching coming from the ascended masters.

Now, if they would do as I said, step outside the outer mind and contact the ascended master that gave the teaching, they would be able to see that their mental image is not in accordance with the master. It is out of alignment with the master, and so they could free themselves from it. But because they are not willing to question their interpretation, their mental image, they become stuck like the scribes and Pharisees. They, of course, do not see this and, in a sense, you could say they are not doing exactly the same as the scribes and Pharisees did because they had an outer scripture that was not being renewed. There was not progressive revelation. They had a closed box in which they interpreted it. If you have an ascended master teaching there is progressive revelation, but the question is: “Are these students I am talking about, are they really listening to the progressive revelation?”

We have seen it over and over again that some students are not actually listening to what we are saying. They are only hearing what validates their mental image, what conforms to their mental image. The mental image may be based on our teachings, but progressive revelation is ongoing, it is progressive, it is like a river that is flowing, but the mental image that you have in your mind is a still image or a series of still images, but still, you are not tuning into, you are not experiencing, the flow.

No final teaching

Some students actually think that an ascended master has a certain knowledge, a certain teaching that he is giving to earth and that teaching is fixed. In other words, without maybe even putting words on this, they are thinking that I, the ascended master Jesus, I have a certain teaching up here in my mind, and I have given parts of that through this dispensation and parts of that through that dispensation, but ultimately there will come a point where I have given the final teaching that I want to give, and then it will never change. This, of course, is not reality. I am constantly growing, evolving. I do not have a fixed teaching.

You see, even in the Jewish religion, even in the Christian religion, some people have been willing to acknowledge that human beings can receive knowledge from a higher source. The Christians claim the Bible is the word of God and was received through some form of direct revelation, however they imagine it. They agree that human beings can get knowledge from a higher source, but they think the purpose of this giving of knowledge from a higher source is that there is one fixed, limited, truth up here that is being given and it is possible that you can come to a point where revelation is now complete, like the Christians believe about the Bible was complete in the year 100 or so when the scriptures were written down, and now there will be no more revelation forthcoming.

You cannot fathom the mind of ascend master

It is even possible that students can believe that the ascended masters are giving ongoing revelation, but everything we say validates what these students believe they already know. And when we say something that does not validate their view, they either do not hear it, or they find a way to ignore it or explain it away. In other words, some students, when they hear a dictation, they are filtering it through their perception filter, only hearing what validates and conforms to their mental image of what the teaching should be like, and the rest they do not hear. They ignore it. They explain it away.

This is, of course, the consciousness of Satan that I rebuked with Peter, but they do not see it because, after all, they are ascended master students. They believe in the ascended masters. They believe we can give teachings, and they believe the teachings we give conform to their mental image.

“Scribes and Pharisees, hypocrites.” What are some of the same of the tendencies we see? And, again, we are not trying to find fault. We are not trying to blame anybody given the state of the world and given a tradition you see from, for example, Christianity and materialistic science. You have been brought up with these tendencies, so we are not blaming you. We are simply trying to help you see that this is part of what keeps you nailed to the cross, especially in your mental minds.

What are some of these tendencies? Well, one is to think that there is a final amount of knowledge in the mind of an ascended master that he is seeking to give forth and therefore it is possible for a human being in embodiment to come to a full understanding of the mind of an ascended master. Some think that they have been students of Saint Germain for so many years, they have read and studied all of these dictations that he gave- for example, through previous dispensations – and they know the full message that Saint Germain wants to give to earth. This is, of course, completely out of touch with the reality of Saint Germain who does not have a final amount of knowledge he wants to give to earth. He has a series of various steps and elements of knowledge that he gradually plans to release as the golden age progresses over the next 2000 years. Saint Germain’s knowledge, that he wants to impart to humankind and give to earth, will not come to an end until he is no longer the Hierarch of the Age of Aquarius, but is released by whomever this will be, which is not determined yet. You will not in your present embodiment ever know the fullness of the message of Saint Germain.

But there is another element of this: thinking that you could know the fullness of the message, that an ascended master wants to give to earth or the fullness of the knowledge that an ascendant master has, is spiritual pride, complete illusion. As long as you are in embodiment you cannot know the fullness, for that matter an ascended master does not know the fullness of all the knowledge that is there in all of these realms that go to higher and higher levels from this sphere to the next to the next to the next and all the way to the Creator. I do not fancy myself – even though I have been an ascended master for two thousand years – of knowing everything. These people think that their minds, while they are in embodiment, are capable of grasping the full knowledge of an ascended master. But as we have said before, the difference in the mind and the mind capacity of an ascended master and an embodied being is unfathomable for an unascended being. It is such a huge difference that you simply cannot fathom it from the unascended state, therefore you cannot fathom the knowledge of an ascended master. And thinking that you can is, of course, spiritual pride, it is arrogance, it is a complete illusion.

Limitations of the intellectual mind

Then, there is another tendency that people go into and again, this is partly because you were grown up in a modern world where science and logical thinking and rational thinking are so dominant. You go into thinking that first of all, you think that the human intellect can grasp the full knowledge of how the world works. Especially, you think that when you recognize there is a spiritual realm and there are beings in that spiritual realm who have knowledge, you think that the intellect can grasp this knowledge, can analyze it, can categorize it, can put it into these subconscious file folders and you think that the intellect can grasp how the world actually works. But this is again hubris. Scientists, materialists believe that one day science will – through the intellect, through the scientific method – know everything there is to know about the universe. For that matter, they believed this in the late 1800s, some of them, and today they are scientists who believe the same. They believe that knowledge is, we might say, horizontal. In other words, there is a huge plane – you might compare it to: there is a big library and there are all these shelves of books that contain all the knowledge about the universe. And it is just a matter of going down these rows of shelves and reading all the books and when you have read all the books, then you know everything, the intellect can fathom everything. But knowledge is not horizontal. Knowledge is not intellectual. There is more to know than is dreamt of in your philosophy, there is more between heaven and earth that is dreamt of in your philosophy. There is the intellect, is only one way to look at knowledge, to look for knowledge, to grasp knowledge, to use knowledge.

Now, it is a very valuable faculty that is especially good for practical applications on earth. In other words, on understanding how the material universe works. The intellect is good as grasping this. We are not in any way putting down the intellect and people’s ability to think. But there are ascended master students who recognize that they have spiritual teachers. We are in a higher level of consciousness, we have a spiritual teaching, but they still think they can grasp this with their intellects and this is a fallacy. And it is a potentially limiting fallacy because it can keep you trapped on the cross where you are continually throughout a lifetime trying to understand intellectually the ascended master teachings, trying to analyze them, to categorize them, to label them, to fit them into some filing system you have in your mind. But there are things about the function of the spiritual world that the intellect on earth will never be able to fathom. It will never fathom it. When you ascend, you are not primarily using the intellect to gather knowledge- you use the intuitive faculties and direct experience, many other actually avenues for seeking knowledge that you have in the ascended realm. And you know from experience there are so many things that the intellect cannot deal with. If you are trying to understand the ascended master teachings through the intellect there will be aspects of the teaching that you simply cannot see, you cannot fathom it, it does not compute as they say. Because your intellect cannot deal with it.

The linear mind’s need for consistency

Part of the entire scientific mindset is, of course, the linear mind as we have called it. And one aspect of the linear mind is that it always looks for consistency. There must not be any contradictions, there must not be anything unexplained, there must be a certain timeline that is logical and starts from one point and goes to another point, there cannot be any gaps or inconsistencies in a timeline. You see, the linear mind wants to make everything concrete, everything linear, not just on a linear timeline, but it wants to make everything concrete -so it can relate to something that the intellect can fathom.

But what have I said? When you go into duality, what do you do? You are creating a mental image, an illusion that you think is reality. But how are you creating that? Through the intellect, through the linear mind. How can, as Einstein even said, you overcome a problem with the same state of consciousness that created a problem? How can you free yourself from your illusions and delusions by using the very intellect that created those illusions? It cannot be done, which is why the scribes and the Pharisees could not recognize Christ. They wanted to pull me and everything I said into their system and I came to free them from the system. How would I have any chance of freeing people if I conform to their mental images as we have said many times before?

But there are still ascended masters’ students who cannot fathom this, they are trying to put our progressive revelation into their intellectual, linear, concrete system. When exactly did Sanat Kumara come to earth? What was the year? When exactly was Atlantis? When did this happen, when did that happen? Why is there a contradiction between what was said in the I AM Movement and what was said in the Summit Lighthouse and what we are saying today. Why is there a contradiction between what we are saying today and what was said in the Bible? Why is there a contradiction between what the ascended masters are saying today and what was said in the Vedas or Nordic mythology or this or that or the next thing. These are all the linear mind – trying to fit everything into its system so it can feel that it is secure, because it has everything under control. This is as Mother Mary talked about this dream of protecting yourself from bad things happening in the world by knowing everything, by being able to control everything in the outer world. There are students who are caught in this trying to use our teachings to give themselves so much knowledge that they think that when they know enough, they will be able to control everything. As Mother Mary so eloquently explained, this will not happen. It is not a matter of knowing enough.

There are scientists who believe that when you know enough about this or that, you will be able to control every aspect of life on earth. And we fully understand, I fully acknowledge why they believe this. After all there was a Greek philosopher over 2000 years ago who coined the phrase “atoms as an indivisible unit” and by scientists continuing to research, gaining more and more knowledge about atoms, they develop the ability to split the atom and create a nuclear reactor or nuclear bomb. They think that this- the linear mind thinks that this- can be extended indefinitely or at least until you reach the final knowledge. But first of all, there is no final knowledge. Second of all, there is knowledge that the linear mind, the intellect will never be able to fathom. We have said before that if the knowledge that you have on earth is the spoon, then the total knowledge is the ocean. And this does not mean that you have a certain amount of knowledge on earth that you can fathom with the intellect and the ocean is also an amount of knowledge that can be fathomed with the intellect. Most of this knowledge cannot be fathomed by the intellect, it does not conform to the linear mind.

What is the knowledge that you are receiving on earth even from the ascended realm? It is knowledge that is geared towards helping you free yourself from your self-created illusions. Therefore, somewhat adapted to those illusions, so you can grasp the knowledge, lock into it and start walking the path. Because if we give your knowledge that nobody can grasp, we are not helping anybody, are we? If you want to take everything literally, if you want to interpret everything linearly then you are not making use of the teaching and therefore you are still hanging on the cross in your mental mind that you put yourself on.

The primary feature of the fallen mindset

The primary feature of the fallen mindset that the fallen beings are in is that they have created a mental image that they feel is so complete that they do not need to look beyond it or question it. They believe their minds have the basic knowledge of how the world works, how the universe works, how creation works. But this belief is based on their self-created illusions because they feel they are so complete, they know so much, they are so complex of an understanding of life and grant you, some fallen beings have an extremely complex world view. You may look at the world view we have given you and say this is very complex about fallen beings and avatars and this and that. But it is actually nothing compared to what some fallen beings have in their minds, they have created it not only in this sphere, but in previous spheres, they have an extremely complicated world view. And why is this? What have I said? Free will must be outplayed, you must be able to create any world view, any image, any experience you want inside your own mind. When you’ve eaten a forbidden fruit going into the knowledge of good and evil, you are creating a mental image. And once you are convinced that your mental image is reality, then no outside force can pull you out of it- so you must be allowed to go as far as you can until you cannot stand it anymore. Christ is not allowed by the law of free will to go in and challenge some of these fallen beings. You can challenge the fallen beings in embodiment when Christ is in embodiment, that is why I could challenge the scribes and the Pharisees and the Sanhedrin, because I was in embodiment and they were in embodiment. But some of the fallen beings in the emotional realm, mental realm and the identity realm, we cannot challenge. At least not yet – there comes a certain cycle where we can, but they must be allowed to fulfill that cycle.

The Zeno paradox

What is it that they do in order to create this complex image? Well, we have talked about before the Greek philosopher Zeno that created the paradox. You have to go to a certain city, there is say 42 kilometers there. Can you ever get there? No, because first, you have to go to the halfway point, then you have to go to the halfway point of the remaining distance and so forth. And you can continue to divide the distance into a halfway point indefinitely. This is also known in mathematics where you can take the number zero and the number one and you can divide it with a certain factor and you can keep dividing indefinitely. There is no end, there is no end- or at least that is how the theory goes and the linear mind cannot fathom this. Just trying to think about this- you keep dividing the distance into smaller and smaller components and it never ends. The linear mind will say: “But there must be an end, there must be the smallest component.”  That is why the Greek philosopher came up with this concept: they are atoms that cannot be divided further. There must be the smallest component – says the linear mind, but there is not. There is no limit to how far the linear mind can go except that a being can run out of time.

The way out of the jungle

What is the only way out of it? Once you have gone into this cycle, what is the only way out of it? Well, take the paradox of walking to the city. You are a human being, you walk by taking one step at a time. You have to walk a distance of 42 miles. First you walk to -or to 42 kilometers you walk to- the 21-kilometer mark and you stop there, wipe the sweat off your brow and rest a little bit. And then you start walking again, till you come to the next halfway point, and you continue to the next halfway point and the next one. Now, theoretically you can keep going forever, but there comes a point where you are now one step away from the destination. In other words, you can cover the remaining distance in one step. What is the point in dividing it into the halfway point and taking a half of a step, a quarter of a step, an eighth of a step and smaller and smaller increments of steps? Why not simply take that one last step and you have arrived? And that is what can bring a being out of this self-created never-ending spiral, never-ending story- by you suddenly coming to realize: “I cannot stand the complexity, I cannot stand it anymore, there must be a way out.” And that is when you come to that recognition when a teacher must appear and offer you at least something that can bring you on the way out of your own self-created illusion.

Do you really think you know better?

This, of course, is what we hope to do by giving direct teachings. But if a person has not come to that point of having had enough of its own mind and the grandeur of the mental images that it has created, then we cannot help the student. The student might listen to our teachings, might read them, might study them, might know them by heart, might be able to quote them, might be able to interpret them in more and more complex interpretations, but the person has not started walking out of the jungle. The person is still trying to fit the teachings into its world view and therefore the person is still on the cross. Literally, in a mental mind you can keep going indefinitely- into more and more complexity, deeper and deeper details, more and more details trying to create more and more, and more and more, consistent story, linear story. Instead of realizing that even as an ascended master teaching is a means to an end, not an end in itself. It is not meant to give you intellectual knowledge, it is meant to help you transcend your mental box. And if you use it for that purpose you can quickly transcend your mental box, so you are free and you can jump down from the cross.

But if you are still in love with your own mind and the grandeur of your mind, you do not want to get off the cross- because after all, when you are hanging up there on the cross, you might be fixated on the cross, but you are above all those people standing below looking at you.  Where are they looking? They are looking up at you because you are on this cross and you feel superior to them, so you do not even want to get down. I bow to your free will. What else can I do? Because you actually think that I as an ascended master I’m one of those people standing down there on the ground and I’m below you- you know better. You either know better than the ascended master or you certainly know better than the messenger who probably is getting something wrong if he is not getting something that validates your view.

What can I say? Well, we try. Why did I engage the scribes and Pharisees 2000 years ago? Because that is the law, when we have an opportunity, we must seek to help as many people as possible. Even if they have previously been impossible to help. But that is who we are as ascended masters and that is why we are still with earth. Because we do not feel that we have done everything that could be done to help unascended beings. You may say here is the ascended realm- a HUGE, huge world to explore. We have ascended from earth, we have escaped from earth, we are not confined to earth, there is nothing forcing us to stay with earth. But we are choosing to do so because we feel there is still something that can be done, that can be said and as the Buddha said: “Some will understand.” I hope that all of those who listen to this or who read it, will be among the “some” who understand- not only understand, but grasp, internalize. And therefore, make contact with the consciousness of the being that I am who is much more than can ever be put into words. But even that can be used by the linear mind as an excuse for saying: “Oh, but the masters are saying there is so much more that cannot be expressed in words- therefore my world view is just so advanced that it cannot be expressed in words or it is so advanced that the messenger cannot fathom it. Therefore, cannot take a dictation about it, but it shows how superior it is.”  Again, SOME will understand. May you be that some!

 

Copyright © 2023 Kim Michaels

 

Back to Taking Christianity and yourself down from the cross

Let go of the fear of the physical consequences and dare to be the Christ!


Listen to a recording of this dictation (subscribers only)

Ascended Master Mother Mary through Kim Michaels, April 10, 2023. This dictation was given during the 2023 Easter webinar – Taking Christianity and yourself down from the cross.

I AM the Ascended Master Mother Mary and I hold a spiritual office as the Divine Mother for earth. You will know from the Christian scriptures that when Jesus was crucified, I was standing there at the foot of the cross looking up at him. Now, I hold the office of the Divine Mother for all people on earth and I am standing at the foot of each of the crosses upon which the sons and daughters of God are crucified, looking up at them. When I stood there in a physical body in front of Jesus, my desire was to see him come down from the cross and be alive. Now, as I stand before the crosses of every human being on earth, the desire is for all of them to come down from the cross and be alive. I am now an ascended being, which means that I am not focused in one particular body, in one particular mind, and thus I can, metaphorically speaking, in the mind, stand before every human being on earth.

Being in a physical body

What is it that crucifies people? Well, the other masters have talked about various aspects of this. We have said that what crucifies you is the selves that you have in your emotional, mental and identity body. But, of course, there are four levels of the material realm, so what about the physical? We have told you that the cross is a symbol of what is happening in the mind, yet many people on earth take the story, the Easter story, literally and they focus on the physical aspects. That is why you see so many Christian churches that have an image of the crucified Christ and not the resurrected Christ. This is, of course, very understandable. I am in no way blaming people. I am simply describing what is happening. It is very understandable that people are focused on the physical interpretation of everything because, after all, you who are not ascended are still in a physical body. You are in embodiment.

What is meant by being in a body? What does it mean? Well, one of the things it definitely means is that the physical body is made of matter. It exists with many other bodies made of matter and with many so-called non-alive things made out of matter. Matter on earth has a certain density. The body is made out of the same density as all other matter and that is why the body cannot, or so it seems, escape matter. If your body, which is a biological thing, and therefore, has a certain density as most biological things, comes in contact with a rock, then the rock is a harder substance and it will hurt your body. You can look at the material world, the matter realm, the mother realm, and see that there are so many things in this world that can hurt your physical body. And, of course, this can have an effect on the physical body. Your body can die, your body can be ill, your body can be handicapped in various ways that affect the functioning of the body.

The Conscious You

But, of course, what is a human being? A human being is more than the body. Even Christianity recognizes this, although it has taken out the deeper understanding of what it means. Christianity talks about a soul inhabiting the body, but it does not give a sophisticated understanding of what the soul is and how the soul can be saved. We have, of course, given this understanding with all of our teachings, especially the teachings about the separate self. But the most revolutionary aspect of our teachings is the concept of the Conscious You. In other words, you have this outer personality, what most people call the soul, but you are not that outer personality, because there is a core of your being that can step outside of that outer personality made up of all these separate selves. And this is, of course, the very foundation for you being taken down from the cross or stepping down from the cross with the help of Christ. Because you can realize that as you are not the outer personality, you are not the body. Most spiritual people realize they are more than the body. And yet, when the body gives them pain, the conscious self is often pulled into the body and you forget that you are more than the body. Again, this is understandable because the physical body is capable of delivering such a strong pain that it is very, very difficult to ignore it.

Characteristics of the physical realm

What is it that I would like to give you as part of this conference? Well, the question is, it may be fairly easy for people to see that after you leave the physical body, you can let these separate selves die, come down from the cross in your mind, and you can ascend. But it is more difficult for people to acknowledge that you can actually come down from the cross while you are still in a physical body. What does this require you to go through? What is the process you can go through for coming down from the cross while you are still in embodiment? Well, let us start with people who are not in direct physical pain, who are not suffering a handicap or severe illness.

Let us start with the average person who are living a normal life, not particularly ill, not particularly in pain. What is it that is characteristic about the physical realm, the mother realm? Well, you can say that in your emotional body, you can have some very, very strong emotions, but they do not leave a physical consequence. It is possible that your emotional body can return to a calm state. Therefore, in a sense, from a certain perspective at least, your emotional body can be compared to the ocean. When a storm blows the ocean into hot, tall waves, they can be very destructive. But when the storm subsides, the ocean will, by itself, return to a calm state. But the physical body is not like the ocean. If something happens to the body, say you are in a car accident and you lose a leg, nothing on earth can undo this.

In other words, in the three higher realms, you can have various consequences and it is easy enough to see that they can be undone. But in the physical, there can be consequences that cannot be undone. Now, most of you have probably experienced in this lifetime that you have been in these situations where you did something or something happened and you knew it created a physical consequence that could not be undone. Many women experience this when they realize they are pregnant, whether it is planned or not, but especially if it is not planned. Many experience it, for example, if you have a car accident that is not serious for bodily injury but it destroys your car and you realize that nothing is going to put the humpty-dumpty car together again.

The “nothing can fix this” self

There are many other situations, of course, but what I am bringing you towards is this recognition that this is not your first embodiment. You have, in many past embodiments, experienced these unchangeable consequences, physical consequences. And when you look at the violent history of earth, it is not difficult to see that in past lifetimes you have most likely experienced more severe consequences than you have experienced in this lifetime. What has this created in you? Well, it has created a number of these subconscious separate selves, but it has created one overall self that fears this experience that now you are again facing one of these unchangeable consequences, one of these situations where you realize something happened in the physical that cannot be undone.

And this self has not only a fear of this happening, it also has a very strong reaction to this happening. It can be a sense of being overwhelmed, a sense of dread, a sense of guilt. It can have various overarching feelings for different people, but there is always this sense of: “Oh, it happened again. Nothing can change this. Once again, I cannot escape this consequence.” And again, there is no blame here. We are not saying, we are not blaming you in any way for having developed this. I was in physical embodiment. I had such a self. And when I stood there looking at Jesus hanging on the cross, it was activated and I had this overwhelming sense of: “Nothing can undo this. Nothing can fix this.”

But the thing is, if you are to step down from the cross while you are still in embodiment, you have to come to see this self. And first of all, it is difficult for most people to see this self. Now, you who have followed our teachings, who have applied the teachings, who are coming to see other selves, even coming to see the self that is just as difficult, namely the primal self, you will have some understanding of the process, some momentum on the process. And in a sense, you could say that this sense that nothing can be undone started with your primal self. Because when you received your cosmic birth trauma as an avatar, you had that sense: “Nothing can undo this.” But, of course, many of the original inhabitants of the earth, have also gone through the birth trauma, are realizing: “Nothing can undo this.” There is both a very strong collective self, but most of us also develop this individual self that dreads this experience.

And this is a tricky self to undo while you are in physical embodiment. Many people who have ascended have not actually managed to undo this self while they were still in a physical body. They have carried this self with them, but they have still qualified for their ascension. And then when they ascended, it was easier to overcome this self because now they knew: “I am never going to have to go back into physical embodiment.” But it is possible to overcome this self while you are still in a physical body. I did not achieve this in my embodiment as Mother Mary, but Jesus had largely achieved it.

And that is why he was not in panic during his arrest and trial and crucifixion. He still had a ghost, but it was not this fear of the physical consequences. It was more an expectation of what might happen so that he could continue his mission on earth. But he had overcome this self and you can see this exemplified in some of his statements, such as: “Tear down this temple and in three days I will rebuild it.” In other words, he did not fear the death of the physical body or any pain that could be inflicted on that physical body. Of course, when he was whipped, when he had the crown of thorns put on his head, when he was nailed to the cross, there was a physical pain. But because he was so non-identified from the body, it was not nearly as severe of a physical pain as it otherwise would have been. And why was this? Because he did not experience the physical pain through that self that is so in panic about avoiding these unchangeable physical consequences.

Of course, we understand fully that for many people this is difficult, but some of you have worked with the tools and teachings we have given where you can begin to at least contemplate this self. And you can begin to go through a process in your mind where you look at it, examine it, examine even your view of the matter world, the physical octave and the consequences. And there are certain steps you can take which I will describe.

Now you might begin with this entire concept that we have given that what really affects you is not what someone else does to you, but your reaction to it. And with ‘someone else’, we can expand this to say the entire matter realm, including your own physical body. When you have started disidentifying yourself from the physical body and know you are more than the body, then in a way, the physical body is someone else doing something to you as a being, as a psychological-spiritual being. You are inhabiting the body. And you see the body as most people see their cars. They get into their car and they do not think they have become the car by getting into the car. And if the car will not start, they are thinking their car is doing something to them. But they do not think their bodies are doing something to them because they are so identified with their body.

When you start disidentifying from the body, you can also disidentify from the material world and say: “The material world is not really doing something that affects me. It might affect my body, but if I am not the body, then even what happens to the body is not directly affecting me. What is affecting me is what takes place in my mind. In other words, how I react to what happens to the body is what affects me.” And this, as we have explained before, now gives you this distance between you and the external event where you can see that there is a layer between the material world and you, which is the contents of your mind, your reactions, the selves that cause you to react. And you can, then, begin to look at: “What selves do I have that react to events in the physical world?” And you can begin to unravel these selves and let them go.

The purpose of the spiritual path

You can also take the approach that Gautama Buddha has described on a couple of occasions where he has talked about the interdependent originations. You have grown up in the Western world, many of you, or even in the modern world that is affected by the rational, logical thinking. And rational thinking, logical thinking is very much linear. You think that: “Here is a separate effect that affects me, something happened in my life that affects me, and that separate effect must have a separate cause. And if I want to escape the effect, I have to identify the cause, and then I have to do something about that cause.” This is the approach of modern science, modern medicine, and so on. You are always looking at the world as being made up of separate objects, separate phenomena, separate effects. And you want to think that for each effect, there is a line, a succession that goes back to the ultimate cause behind that effect. And if you can identify that separate cause and do something to that separate cause, you can overcome the effect. But as Gautama has explained, in reality, the world is not made of separate objects or separate beings. The world is made of an interconnected web of these interdependent originations.

There are many spiritual people and religious people who have taken this very approach, and they have used their religion or their spiritual teaching in an attempt to find a way to change their physical situation or to avoid certain physical events. It is not that this is completely invalid. You can certainly call for the protection of Archangel Michael, but as we have said, this does not override the Law of Free Will. The more constructive approach to this is to acknowledge that the purpose of the spiritual path, at least as we teach it from the ascended level, is not that you become able to create any physical circumstance you want. It is not that you attain some kind of supernatural power to manifest, for example, all the money you need to buy whatever you want, or to manifest perfect health, or to manifest the ideal situation where nothing bad ever happens to you.

This is not the purpose of the spiritual path. It might be the purpose of the left-handed path as taught by the false teachers, but it is not the purpose of the path taught by the ascended masters. Because if you actually did acquire the abilities to create the absolutely ideal situation you can imagine here in the physical realm, what would happen to you? You would become very attached to that situation, wanting to maintain it, and when you go out of embodiment, what would have to happen? Well, you would have to come back until you have had enough of that experience. Our path is, of course, the path that leads to the ascension, which means we want to free you from your attachments to earth. Our path is to help you overcome any attachments, any reactions to anything in the physical realm.

And you can overcome this by realizing that you live in a world that is very complex. You have this very complex web of these interdependent originations, so you can never actually be sure that something will not happen to you. You may give decrees and invocations to protect yourself, but you can never be completely sure. Something can happen. What can you do when you have the teachings? You can say: “It is not a matter of preventing things from happening. It is a matter of refining my reaction to whatever might happen, to the point where I can come to this inner resolution, this inner peace where I do not fear the future.” You can actually come into a state also demonstrated by Jesus when he was sitting in the Garden of Gethsemane where he said: “Father, if it be thy will, take this cup away from me.” But, then, he also said: “Nevertheless, Father, not my will, but thine be done.” This is a come-what-may attitude.

Quantum uncertainty

Of course, how can you develop this attitude? Well, you cannot develop it as long as you have this self that fears this unchangeable, epic consequence. You need to look for that self and let it go. What could we say is the goal of this process? It is actually to come to a point where nothing on earth can give you this sense that: “Oh, this is an epically bad consequence. This is the worst that could possibly happen.” Nothing on earth can give you that sense. And when you realize this consciously and start working on this, you can gradually come to expose this self and there will be other selves that are supporting it that you need to deal with first. But you can come to that point where you recognize that if you want to avoid this feeling: “Oh, now the worst thing has happened.”, or: “Now it happened again”, this sense of something unbearable has happened, then, you, the Conscious You, cannot feel this. It is not the Conscious You that feels this dread, this sense of shock, this sense of disaster. It can only be a separate self that feels this way, and it is a separate self that is attached to a specific outcome on earth.

What does the Buddha really mean when he talks about non-attachment and when he talks about the interdependent originations? Well, what he really means is that you cannot predict anything on earth with certainty. This is like quantum physics that says that before you conduct an experiment, you can only predict the probabilities of what would happen, but you cannot predict it with certainty because the outcome is not decided until you conduct the experiment. And it is the same with any situation in life. You can say that any situation in your life is a quantum experiment. There is a quantum waveform, as the scientists call it, that has certain probabilities, but you cannot know ahead of time exactly or with certainty what will happen. You cannot know until the experiment happens and the quantum waveform collapses, as the scientists say it.

Now, instead of a quantum waveform, we could talk about a karmic waveform, a karmic probability. And in a specific situation that involves several people, there is a quantum or a karmic wave that gives certain probabilities for the outcome of their interaction. But until the physical interaction actually happens, no one, not even God, can predict with certainty what will happen, what will be physically manifest. No one can know how the karmic waveform collapses or, as the Buddha has expressed it, how the cookie crumbles. You can actually come to a point where, as the Conscious You, you realize what kind of a world you are living in. You realize that nothing can be predicted with certainty, which means what? It means there are certain situations in your life, no matter how spiritual you are, no matter how many invocations and decrees you give, you cannot avoid that physical outcome. And why is this? It is because you are living in an interdependent environment where there are many other people that are part of the equation, and all of them have their free will. You are not an island.

A karmic probability for Jesus’ mission

You can come to a point, as Jesus also demonstrated by being crucified, where you have balanced your personal karma. It was not Jesus’ karma from past lives that mandated that he should be tortured and crucified. There was nothing in his personal background and past that made the Crucifixion necessary or inevitable. It was part of his larger plan. But that was because he had volunteered to play a certain part, whereby other people could outplay their free will choices. When he entered Jerusalem riding on a donkey, there was a karmic probability waveform for how the people of Jerusalem would receive him. There was no way to predict whether they would accept him, or whether they would be disappointed because he did not play the role that they expected from the King of Israel, and therefore, end up rejecting him. It could not be predicted in advance. Of course, if the people had accepted him, he would not have had to go through the Crucifixion, but could have actually continued his mission beyond the Crucifixion.

And it was not an absolute certain outcome, there were probabilities. But until he actually stood there, in front of the group of people, and Pontius Pilate gave them the choice of whether they would see the Living Christ released or whether they would see a convicted murderer released, the outcome could not be predicted with certainty.

Why are you here?

You, most of you, are avatars. You came to earth, knowing ahead of time, that you were entering such an environment where nothing could be predicted, because so many people were in duality consciousness. You came here to help change this situation, to help raise the collective consciousness. And therefore, in a sense, you could say that your mission for coming to earth as an avatar was the same as Jesus’ mission. That is why we have used him and said he is an example that you can follow to manifest and express your personal Christhood. But what is the essence of this Christhood? It is that you come to the point where you are not attached to anything on earth.

In other words, you are not attached to a specific outcome of what happens or does not happen to you, including your physical body. You are, as Jesus, willing to demonstrate that you can remain one with your higher being, no matter what happens to you. That you can remain centered on your mission and your higher being, even when you are crucified as Jesus was. Of course, in this day and age, you do not need to be crucified. But there could be other things that will happen to you that your outer mind would rather avoid.

What I am pointing out is that when you created this self that fears this terrible consequence, this self is covering over, it is eclipsing, your real mission on earth. It is preventing you from seeing why you are here. Because the self is very attached to avoiding this terrible feeling that something has happened that cannot be undone. And you are so identified with this self that you fear these consequences. Again, it is understandable. There are constant projections from the collective consciousness, but we are still saying you can overcome this.

And if you can overcome it, you will find that you will be in peace about your life, your present situation and what might or might not happen for the rest of this lifetime. And, of course, we desire to see you have this peace that passes understanding. Why does it pass understanding? Because it passes the understanding of this world that says: “But you are in the physical world. You never know what could happen. You could become ill, and then what? It would be a disaster.” You have all of these selves in the collective consciousness that are projecting at people, including you, all of these terrible things that could happen.

Now, these selves, these collective selves, where do they come from?Well, partly they come from people, but many of them were actually created by the fallen beings, as we have explained now, that the fallen beings create a problem, and then they set themselves up as having the only solution to the problem. Many of these selves are created to fear physical consequences. But who created these physical consequences, such as war? Well, the fallen beings, of course.

The hatred of the mother

Then, you have other selves, created by the fallen beings, that project that: “If you can just avoid these consequences, then you are okay.” All of the life of many people is trapped into avoiding these terrible consequences, which means they are never there to do anything, they are never there to take any chances, they just live. They submit themselves to whatever conditions there are in society, so they can avoid these consequences which you see in many nations around the world, including Russia right now, where people have submitted themselves and said: “Well, the government can do whatever it wants as long as we have our daily lives.” This, of course, cannot lead you to manifest Christhood. These are some of these considerations you can take to identify whatever your personal self is that fears these terrible consequences, these undoable consequences in the matter realm.

Of course, this very self, it hates the mother realm. We have before talked about the concept of hatred of the mother. And the very core of this, for most people, is this desire to avoid these terrible consequences, and a hatred of matter, because it can create these terrible consequences that nothing can undo. You can create a consequence in matter that nothing in matter can undo.

Freedom from your past choices

And, of course, we have told you that the law of free will states that you must be able to make any choice you can imagine, but you must also be able to free yourself from any choice you have made in the past. And many people look at this, even many people who understand karma, and they say: “Well, but I can make a choice in a physical consequence, or in a physical realm that causes me to be in an accident, and I end up sitting in a wheelchair, and I will sit there for the rest of my life. How can I undo that choice? You say I should be able to free myself from any choice I have made, but this choice cannot be undone in the matter realm.”

And this is, of course, true. The cause of it is that the matter realm is the school of hard knocks for most people on earth, because you are on an unnatural planet. And on an unnatural planet, matter is so dense that there are certain physical consequences that cannot be undone. But we have not said that the law of free will mandates that you must be allowed to make any choice you can make in the physical realm, and you should be able to undo any physical consequence of any choice you made. The nature of the physical realm is that you can make choices that cannot be undone in the physical realm. What have we said? We have said, you must be able to free yourself from any choice you made. And, of course, even in the physical realm, the unavoidable consequence is only felt by the body, at least the physical consequence. And when the body dies, you are free from that consequence, or at least somewhat free from it. Even in the physical realm, there is the possibility of escaping a consequence. But what we mean when we say that you must be able to free yourself from any choice you have made, is that any choice you made was made through a certain separate self, and you can always free yourself from that self.

The essence of Christhood

And we also mean that what actually really affects you, the Conscious You, is your reaction to the physical consequence. And that reaction comes from another separate self which you can also free yourself from. What is the essence of Christhood, of demonstrating Christhood? It is to demonstrate that it is possible for a human being to free yourself from any attachment, any reaction, any identification with physical conditions. Your peace of mind does not depend on physical conditions. You can attain peace of mind, a certain acceptance of physical conditions, regardless of how severe those physical consequences are. I am fully aware that the more severe they are, the more difficult it is. But consider this as a possibility. If you have experienced very severe physical consequences, could this be part of your divine plan? Could it be something you chose because you wanted, as we have said before, with illness, to demonstrate that you can still be a spiritual person even though you are facing this consequence?

This will not always be the case. Sometimes, even a severe physical consequence can be a result, as we said, as the outplaying of the interdependent originations and how the karmic cookie crumbled. But this you can also make peace with, and this is also part of Christhood to demonstrate that you are willing to be in this world and let people outplay their free will, whatever that means for you, but still remain centered in peace. Again, I know, for many of you this will seem harsh, this will seem insensitive, this will seem impossible to achieve, but it is not impossible. What one has done all can do, but in this case, we can say what many have done all can do. Because many people have achieved this throughout the ages, not even all of them in the Christian tradition.

Giving up unrealistic expectations and desires

Now, in order to actually overcome this self or this conglomerate of selves, I want to give you a different view of Christhood. And I would like to begin with what Jesus has actually said, on several occasions, that the ascended masters are like used car salesmen who are using the bait and switch technique. In other words, we have to approach a group of people based on their present level of consciousness. What are their expectations? What is their motivation? And then, we have to give them a teaching that caters to that, so they can connect to the teaching. And, then, the hope is that as they make use of the teaching, they would reach a higher level of consciousness where now we can give them a higher teaching, a higher motivation, a higher understanding of what the spiritual path is about.

What am I saying here? I am saying that it is natural, it is unavoidable that when many people first find the spiritual path, and even when they find an ascended master teaching, they, of course, have certain expectations, certain desires. To really walk the spiritual path, you have to make an effort, and something has to motivate you to make an effort. Human beings, again, in their linear mind, they think that: “ If I am to make an effort, I have to get something out of it. What is it I want to get out of it? What effort do I need to make, so I can get that result?”

In other words, they think there is again this linear cause-effect sequence. The cause is: “I make the effort”, the effect is that: “I get something that I want.” All people find the spiritual path and they have this expectation of what effect they will get out of making an effort. And again, this is unavoidable, this is perfectly fine. But most people, when they first find an ascended master teaching, they have an unrealistic expectation, they have unrealistic desires. Because they think that the teaching, the purpose of following the teaching and making the effort is to get certain physical conditions, or to avoid certain physical conditions. Their motivation is focused on the physical realm. But what is the purpose of the path to Christhood? It is to transcend dependence on, and identification with, the physical realm, and to demonstrate that you can be in the world, but not of the world. What does that mean? That means that you need to, at some point on the path, have one of these moments of truth where you realize your earlier motivation, your earlier expectations were just unrealistic.

If you want to go to a higher level of the path to Christhood, you need to let them die. You need to give up that life in order to receive the higher life of Christ. You need to let the dead bury their dead. You need to be willing to die. Let those selves, those expectations die for the sake of following Christ. Many ascended master students that we have seen throughout the ages have been in this mindset. Many religious people, spiritual people are dreaming about achieving some kind of result on earth where they either have special abilities that can manifest the outer situation they want, or they will be acknowledged and validated by many people. Even some of Jesus’ disciples, which you can read between the lines in the scriptures, had this dream of some glory they would achieve when Jesus was recognized as the Messiah and they were his early followers, Peter among them.

You can come to that point where you realize these kinds of expectations, these kinds of desires are actually part of what keeps you nailed to your personal cross and if you want to get down from that cross, you need to let them go. This is where we run into one of these dilemmas that we face as the ascended masters. We have given you these teachings that Jesus was an example to follow. He came to demonstrate the path to Christhood. And many of you look back at this and you see that: “Oh, but Jesus is known all over the world. He is known as a very special person. He is acknowledged and admired by all of these people.” And as a part of your ego, a separate self that desires something like that. However you envision it individually, but you desire some kind of recognition by the world. But did Jesus ever have that experience of being recognized by the world? Did he ever have the experience that you imagine that you would like to have as a result of following the spiritual path and expressing your Christhood?

The dream of being recognized by the world

Well, he did not. I was standing there, at the foot of the cross, watching him. In the end, he had these expectations of what might happen and some of them involved being recognized by the people so he could fulfill his mission. I saw him going through in his mind these expectations and come to the point where he saw that they were unrealistic, that this was not what was going to happen. He was going to die on the cross, and then, he gave up that ghost. He gave up that expectation. What I am saying is: Jesus gave up the expectation of some kind of worldly glory, so he never experienced it. While he was alive, he never experienced this. All of this idolatry around Christ that has been built up by the Christian religion, Jesus never experienced it while he was alive.

Why do you think you can experience it? You think you are more special than Jesus? The Christ rarely experiences recognition from the world. This may change somewhat as we move further into the golden age, but we are not at a point yet where you can be consciously walking the path to Christhood and realistically expect to be recognized and validated by the world.

I am not saying it cannot happen to some degree, but you should certainly not expect that it will ever happen to the degree that you imagine based on the idolatry built around Jesus over the past 2,000 years. You have to come to a point where you give up that dream, you let that die and you have a more realistic view of what it means to be the Christ in embodiment, to be the Living Christ, and to express your Christhood.

Being the Christ in the Aquarian age

Now, you will see that there was even a question of, if a certain number of ascended master students have reached the revolutionary phase of their divine plan, why have they not had a bigger impact on the world? Many of you expect that when you look at Jesus and the impact that Christianity has had on the world, you expect that you should be able to do something similar. Jesus said: “The works that I do shall ye do also on greater works.” You think that you should, when you express Christhood, be able to have this dramatic impact on the world. But again, Jesus did not have that experience while he was in embodiment. Quite frankly, what has had an impact on the world is not so much Jesus’ true teachings, but the false teachings created by the fallen beings when they created the religion of the Roman Catholic church.

You see that being the Christ does not necessarily mean that you have this dramatic impact on the world and this is again one of these dilemmas we face, because what would make someone decide that they will make the effort to walk the path of Christhood? Well, you have to have a motivation, right? What motivation did you have when you started the path? What motivation do you still have? What do you think is the dramatic impact you are supposed to have on the world when you attain your Christhood and begin to express it? What is it in your mind? What do you envision? What do you imagine? Be willing to look at this at least, if you want to get down from the cross because you have to come to that point where Jesus was at in the Garden of Gethsemane as I described. He had certain expectations of what it meant to be the Christ. But now he was facing one of these undesirable consequences of being arrested and possibly executed and he wanted God to take it away from him. But he also said: “Nevertheless, not my will, but thine be done.”

You have to come to that point where you surrender your expectations of what it means to be the Christ, and open yourself up to whatever your I AM Presence wants to do through you. Why do you have to do this? What does it mean to be the Christ? It means that you are the open door: “I can of my own self do nothing. The Father within me, he does the work.” You are the open door for your I AM Presence. The I AM Presence is doing this through you. You are not acting through your human expectations. It is in the surrender of the human expectations that you attain Christhood. Therefore, your human expectations cannot be fulfilled as a result of you attaining Christhood. They block your Christhood. You have to let them go. You have to let them die in order to manifest Christhood.

What does it mean to be the Christ? How will these 10,000 Christed beings, that Jesus says, are in embodiment, have an impact on the world? Well, first of all, he has not said that there are 10,000 people with full Christhood in embodiment. He has said there are 10,000 people with the potential to attain Christhood. They have not all attained it yet. And there is no guarantee that all 10,000 will attain it in this embodiment, because the fallen beings are doing everything they can to prevent it. But nevertheless, what does it mean to be either in full Christhood or partial Christhood? Well, it means that you are open to receiving something from your I AM Presence, from the ascended masters. But what is it you are receiving? Are all those 10,000 people going to have a mission as dramatic as Jesus’ and start a new religion? Does the world need 10,000 new religions in the golden age? You can see that it is a different impact that is meant here. And what is it then? Well, in the Aquarian age, in the golden age, we are looking for Christed beings to live a seemingly normal life in society.

You might have children and a family, you might have a job, you might fill a position. From an outer perspective, it may not seem that you are doing anything special but you might, during your lifetime, receive certain ideas that can help transform the field you are in, whether it is family life or a particular occupation. But more than that, you are demonstrating to the people around you that it is possible to live in the world but have a different approach, a different attitude. You are demonstrating another level of consciousness that is beyond what most people have. This may not be recognized by the world at large, by your country, even by your family. But the fact that it has been demonstrated means people have been given an opportunity they did not have before.

Now, again, be careful here. On the one hand, I am saying you need to get rid of your human expectations of what it means to be the Christ and certainly, that is the case. Because the Christ will not conform to human expectations, which is why Jesus said to Peter: “ Get thee behind me, Satan.” But on the other hand, you cannot then say: “Oh, that means that being the Christ means nothing out of the ordinary.” As a Christed being, you would not do anything out of the ordinary. But that is not what I have been saying either. I have been saying, you are the open door. Whatever your I AM Presence, whatever the ascended masters want to express through you, you are open to it, but you are not attached to it. You are not seeking to get somewhere in this world. You are not seeking to avoid something in this world. You are willing to be the open door: “Not my will, but thine be done.” That is what it means to be the Christ. It means something different for each person. We are not so much looking for the world to come to a point where they say: “Ah, there are the Christed beings. This is how they change the world.” The world will not recognize it. Most people who were in embodiment 2,000 years ago, the vast majority of them, did not recognize Jesus as anything special. If you look at the number of people when Jesus was crucified, who recognized something special in Jesus, it is a relatively low number. Most of you have more friends on Facebook than the number of people who recognized Jesus at the time.

All of this, all of these expectations that the world will one day recognize that here were the spiritual people, here were the forerunners, this all has to go. You have to come to the point where you are neutral. You are neutral about the conditions you are facing in your life. You are neutral about what might happen or what might not happen. You are willing to meet any circumstance by not acting through the outer selves, but by reaching up for your I AM Presence. And you, as the Conscious You, you come to this state where you are neutral. We have called it pure awareness, but it really means you are neutral. You do not have any of these dualistic, relative, self-centered desires to have something or to avoid something. Therefore, you are the open door. Nothing obstructs it.

It is when you reach this state of neutrality, for want of a better word, that you can get off the cross. You can decide to let go of that self that is so attached to outcomes. That means you suddenly look around and say: “Oh, I have no nails in my hands and feet. Why am I hanging on this cross? Nothing is holding me here. Let me just jump down and get on with life.” This is what you can achieve and many of you are closer than you think because you have been working on these separate selves.

There are just a few selves left that you need to see and identify, separate yourself from, and just let them die. What is that to me, the conscious self, I will follow thee, the Christ. But you come to a point where you are not even saying that anymore. You are not saying: “I am following Christ as an external”, because you become one with Christ. You become the Christ. You are not seeing yourself as separated from Christ or from your higher self. That is another switch in consciousness that is more subtle, but it is possible, when you overcome all of these selves, you can come to that point where the Conscious You can acknowledge that: “I am the open door, nothing less, nothing more.”

Women as a driving force in society

Now, I want to make one more remark here because, as the representative of the Divine Mother, I am, of course, very much involved with women and women’s situations around the globe. We have said that the 2020s is the decade of women. And, quite frankly, of the 10,000 people that are in embodiment who have the potential to manifest Christhood in this embodiment, two thirds of them are women. Two thirds of the 10,000 are women. This is a significant number because you have some teachings that say that this is a certain breakthrough of the Christ consciousness. For example, the King’s Chamber in the Pyramid, in the Great Pyramids, is two thirds from the top of the pyramid. There is a certain significance to this that I do not want to go into, because it really is not important for your growth.

But, two thirds of these 10,000 are women and that means that women are already beginning to be, and will become even more so, the driving force that drives change in society. You can see this already, as we have talked about before, women are more open to talking about issues and problems. Many of the blogs and chat rooms and this and that and Facebook groups, women are talking much more openly about their problems than men. What does that mean? Well, it means that if you are open to talking about your problems, you are open to looking at them, and therefore, you can make progress in overcoming them. What are these women doing? They are following Jesus’ call. First, pull out the beam from thine own eye, and then, you can see how to help your brother pull out the splinter from his eye. Women are, in general, making faster progress on the path to Christhood than men. It is inevitable that they will more and more begin to express this, and they will have more and more of an impact on society. You will see this in the remaining years of this decade.

You have already seen the situation in Iran, driven by women, started by the way women were treated and although this has been clamped down upon by the authorities, there are still major changes happening in the identity, mental, and emotional realms that will again break through to the physical. You can see these recent situations in Israel of how there have been public demonstrations in large part driven by women. You can see, in Russia, what is going to create a shift in Russia, the shift that needs to happen? Well, it can only be created by women because, first of all, they have their mothers, their sisters, their daughters and they see their husbands being unnecessarily killed in Ukraine and they are the ones who can cry out and say: “This must stop. We cannot continue to do this.” The men in the Russian power elite cannot do this in the government apparatus, because they are too trapped in their ideological mindset. Women are less trapped in ideology than men. Women are less likely to be overshadowed by these grandiose ideas, these epic ideas.

Women are the ones who can pull the world away from the epic mindset, above the epic mindset that men are so focused on achieving. You look at the Catholic church which is in the epic mindset. They will not see it that way. Most Christians will not see it that way, but they are trapped in the epic mindset. The Catholic church is the only path to salvation. It has to withstand the onslaughts of Satan and the devil and any attempt to reform the Catholic church is of the devil. But what is the Catholic church saying between the lines about women? They are still maintaining this illusion, going back to Genesis, that it was women that were tempted by the serpent. And therefore, women cannot be trusted. Women cannot be allowed to make decisions. What is the Catholic church doing? They are denying the Christ in women, the Christ potential of women. They are saying women cannot pull the world into the golden age. What have I just said? It will be women that will pull the world into the golden age because only women can pull the world away from the epic mindset, the epic causes that so many men are attracted.

They are not created by men, they are created by the fallen beings. But many men are trapped in this epic mindset, as are all of the leaders of the Catholic church and all other Christian churches. There are hardly any, there are a few, but very few Christian churches that honor women, that give equality to men and women. As we have said, the reality is, all people were tempted by the duality consciousness that had nothing to do with women as such. This whole upholding of this idea that women are dangerous, that women are an opening for the devil, and therefore, the Catholic church and the Christian churches must resist giving women influence. If you look into the mindset of the popes and cardinals and priests of the Catholic church and many Christian religions, they have this deep hatred of the mother which is expressed as hatred of women, a complete distrust of women. They actually believe that if women were allowed to make decisions in the Catholic church, the Catholic church would not survive. After 2,000 or 17 centuries, the Catholic church would be destroyed and would collapse, if women were allowed to make decisions.

And here is the irony of it all. They are actually right. They are completely right. If women were given decision-making power in the Catholic church, then the Catholic church, in its present form, would be destroyed. But women would create a new kind of church that was more in alignment with the true teachings of Christ. What is the Easter story all about? It is that the old must die for the new to be born. It is that you must die before you can be reborn. The Catholic church is so steeped in the consciousness of anti-christ that if it has any chance of surviving, it would have to be reborn. And only women could do this. Men cannot. Which is proven after 17 centuries. Now, I am not saying that we of the ascended masters particularly want the Catholic church to be reborn, but we certainly look to see some form of Christianity in the golden age. If the Catholic church will not allow women in to decision-making positions, then they will just go elsewhere.

But what will happen to the Catholic church, if the men continue to make all the decisions? Well, it will fade into insignificance. There might be some dramatic events that will cause exodus of many members, because certain things can be exposed that the men are trying to keep hidden. But over time, it will just fade into insignificance and other forms of Christianity will emerge that are much more in line with the true teachings of Christ.

This concludes the remarks I wanted to give you on these topics. There are many, many clues here, not only in my release, but in the release of the other masters, that you can study, read between the lines and use to get closer and closer to the point where you can step down from that cross that you are hanging on in your own mind. You are not actually hanging on a cross. As you are not hanging on a cross with your physical body, neither are you hanging on a cross with your emotional, mental and identity body because there is no external force that has put you on a cross. You are put on your cross by the separate selves but they are not you, and you are not them. Therefore, when you come to see this, you can let them die, one by one, until you are the one. You let the selves die, one by one, until you see yourself as the one.

 

Copyright © 2023 Kim Michaels

 

Back to Taking Christianity and yourself down from the cross

Freeing society from the prison of a closed mind 


Listen to a recording of this dictation (subscribers only)

Ascended Master Saint Germain through Kim Michaels, April 9, 2023. This dictation was given during the 2023 Easter webinar – Taking Christianity and yourself down from the cross.

I AM the Ascended Master Saint Germain. What I want to discourse about here, in this context of taking yourself and Christianity down from the cross, is to take a look into the Golden Age. What is it that needs to be taken down from the cross in order for the Golden Age to be manifest?

A people-focused society

Well, first of all there are, of course, individual people. The Golden Age, as I have said before, is not really primarily about manifesting some wonderful outer society, some affluent society, some technologically advanced society. It is first of all about manifesting a society that is focused on people, that is focused on helping the individual people grow in consciousness. This will, of course, require that society becomes much better at helping people heal their psychology, overcome the traumas they have received in this or previous lifetimes.

Consider what is going on right now in Ukraine and how many soldiers have gone to war, have been wounded, have been exposed to severe trauma. This, of course, is the case on both sides. Some will stay in embodiment but will be psychologically traumatized for the rest of their lives. Many will go out of embodiment but will be traumatized in their next lifetime. Look back at the past century. There are people today who are severely traumatized because they were soldiers or they were killed as civilians in the Second World War, some in the First World War. Some have been in several wars and have been killed, wounded, traumatized in various ways. Some have been civilians that were traumatized and have re-embodied, many in the more affluent nations because it gives them the best opportunity to heal their psychology.

A new approach to healing

If you embody in a totalitarian nation, then your opportunities for healing your psychology are much less than in a democratic nation. Naturally, I look for a society that is better at helping people heal their psychology, overcome traumas, and that employs new and innovative methods for helping people. I look especially for us to pass this hurdle where our approach to helping people with their psychology is not determined by ideology. Hereby I mean the Christian or any other religious ideology, but first of all the ideology of scientific materialism, which right now is a severe limitation for the psychological profession.

There are, of course, many psychologists and many other therapists who have begun to see this and who have started to experiment with various other methods for effecting greater healing. This is, of course, a tendency that I look at as a continuing trend, and I am already working, and I am willing to work with many more people who can bring this forward. There is, of course, a great potential for this to be accelerated, not by the psychological profession coming to accept ascended master teachings, but coming to accept these universal ideas that can help people heal their psychology, some of which are described on the new Higher Awareness Psychology website and also on the Age of Higher Awareness website in a more universal manner than in our direct teachings.

There is a great potential for this to create many shifts so that within the foreseeable future you will have a different approach to healing, where you say: “It is not a matter of staying within the boundaries of scientific materialism. It is a matter of looking at the practical aspects, What actually helps people.” You do not even have to say that the psychological profession recognizes reincarnation, for example, but you do have to be willing to say that if there are therapies that help people connect to something from their past, whether it is in a past life or not, but if those therapies are effective in helping people heal, then we are willing to look at them, research them, apply them, experiment with them. It should be a matter of what helps people, not how some people interpret that the psychological profession should function in order to be recognized as a real science. All of this ideological overlay I, of course, look at as something that will gradually disappear as we move further in.

Science must investigate consciousness

Many people in today’s age are able to recognize already now, and many more will shortly become able to recognize this, that the promise of science is precisely that through direct experimentation, through direct observation, we can test whether our theories, our ideologies, our doctrines are in accordance with the observable world, what you might call the real world. Whether it is real or not we can debate, but that is not the issue here. The issue is that science was released by me to precisely help people overcome the superstition and the closed mental box formed by Catholic doctrines in the Middle Ages. I clearly saw that there was no way to bring society forward, given the state of the Catholic church and even other later Christian churches at the time. There was simply no way to bring society forward. Science was meant to be an alternative, but what is the essence of science? The essence of the scientific process is that we recognize we do not currently know everything. We do not currently have the full picture in our belief systems, in our doctrines, in our ideologies, in our world view. Therefore we need to find some way to make contact with something outside our own minds, and this has for science been the scientific method, scientific inquiry.

But this is not the only way it can be done. In fact the unfortunate aspect of science and what has limited the application of science is that science decided, or rather scientist materialists decided, that science should ignore consciousness. It was decided that consciousness can only be subjective. If you take Jesus’ discourse of the forces that took over the Christian religion, you can see that those forces took over science and created a materialistic ideology that was superimposed upon science. Because the reality of the matter is that human consciousness does not have to be subjective.

When you step into separation, when you use the duality consciousness to create your own world view, you are playing God by creating a world view that you think is the absolute truth. Then human consciousness can only be subjective and will be entirely subjective. Yet it is possible to step outside of that state of mind, to rise above that state of mind, and therefore it is possible for a human being to raise his or her consciousness and gradually become more and more objective. This does not mean that we do not need science to investigate the outer world, but it does mean that science will never be complete without investigating consciousness and without raising consciousness, developing the intuitive faculties besides the intellectual, analytical, linear faculties of the mind.

The need to question the materialistic ideology

A whole human being can use both aspects of the mind, and a whole society needs to be based on both aspects of the mind. Of course, above and beyond the goal of helping people heal their psychological traumas, there is the goal of helping people develop that greater intuition so they can be in a neutral state of mind and therefore not be biased by all of these ideologies. Scientific materialism is an ideology. It is as limiting to human thought today as the Catholic doctrine was in the 1500s. It has not freed humanity from the fallacies of religion. It has brought a part of humanity into another fallacy, which in a way is as much of a closed box as the Catholic church.

What does science say? It says you are an evolved animal. It says that your entire inner life, your entire psychology, your thoughts, your feelings, are the products of the neurons in your brain, and the way that your particular neurons are creating your conscious experience is determined by your genes, and that was determined by a largely random, chance-based process. What is this ideology denying? It is denying that human beings have a higher potential, which is what Jesus called the potential to manifest the Christ consciousness.

Materialists are saying you are an evolved animal, which is the same as Catholics saying you are a sinner by nature. Both are inherently limited. Both cannot reach beyond a certain limit, which means they cannot challenge the fallen beings and their ideologies because they do not have the Christ discernment that comes from this neutral state of mind, the intuitive faculties. Scientific materialism is another attempt at shutting the Christ out from this world, and it can be driven, of course, only by the same forces that have used the Christian religion to shut out Christ from this world.

The failure of the materialistic theory of consciousness

I am not expecting the populace at large to see this within the near future, but I am certainly expecting some people to see it, including some scientists. There are already scientists who are beginning to question the materialist paradigm and to see that there is a need to go beyond it and formulate new theories and test them experientially, use mathematics to develop formulae so they can be tested in a way that is in accordance with the scientific process and method. This means that some scientists have been willing to consider that the world is made up of these vast social networks of conscious entities and that there are levels of these entities going from the least aware beings, such as amoebas and bacteria, towards gradually higher levels until you reach the level of human beings. Then beyond that are conscious agents in a higher realm, leading up to an ultimate conscious agent.

There are scientists seriously considering such models of the world and who are willing to test them experimentally and using math to do so as well. This is, of course, greatly encouraging to me because these scientists are able to tune in to the ideas that I am releasing, and they are willing to even stand in front of the scientific community and point out that when it comes to the hard problem of consciousness, when it comes to how the neurons of the brain produce a conscious experience, materialism does not even have a theory. Not only do they not have experimental proof, but they do not even have a theory for how unconscious neurons produce consciousness.

If you have no experiential proof and if you have no theory that can be tested and potentially falsified, then how can you say that this is science? To say that human beings, with all of their awareness, are only a bundle of neurons cannot be science. It can only be an ideology that they are attempting to superimpose upon science. Of course, how are they denying that human beings are really conscious? They can only deny this because they have consciousness.

If your entire inner life was produced by unconscious neurons, then why would the neurons be able to deny that you have consciousness? They would simply function as a computer and would not be able to deal with issues such as consciousness, where it comes from, free will, whether you have free will or not. All of these issues could not be dealt with by unconscious neurons because they would not have imagination. They would not have the ability to imagine something that they cannot perceive through the senses. A computer cannot be programmed in such a way that it can imagine something beyond the data, the information to which it has access.

This is another development I look to break through more in the near future: that people see, scientists begin to see, the limitations of artificial intelligence, the limitations of neurology, neuroscience, where they begin to acknowledge that after all of this time, after all of this experimentation, they have not been able to produce a credible materialistic theory of consciousness, and therefore they must look elsewhere. Otherwise science cannot make progress. Otherwise science will become as mired in doctrines and dogmas as the Catholic church was during the Middle Ages.

New forms of energy

Now, as I have said in an answer to a question but I wish to repeat it here, one of the big problems, so to speak, that will become more pressing in the near future is, of course, the whole concept of energy and where we get energy from. Not only is there the economic side of it, not only is there the lack of certain resources, but there is also the whole concept of pollution, global warming, CO2 and all of these things. I am not here talking about the reality of this debate. I am just simply saying that it is inevitable that more and more people are becoming aware of the need to stop pollution, to stop climate change, and there is, from a practical perspective, only one way this can be done.

You must find a form of energy that does not pollute, that can be created without polluting and that, when it is used to do work, does not pollute. You can see that the combustion engine cannot be created without polluting because you create pollution as you extract oil, and, of course, when the engine burns the oil, it creates pollution. It is clear that you need a clean or green form of energy, or rather several forms of energy, and it is also clear if you are a practical realist that nuclear technology, at least splitting the atom, is not the future. Fusing the atom has a greater potential, but there are many people that are becoming open to the possibility that there are other forms of energy that are not force-based. They are not based on forcing something as you do when you are forcing the atom apart or burning oil and creating an explosion in a combustion engine.

Generating vs. receiving energy

More and more people are becoming open to this possibility that instead of forcing the generation of energy we can find ways to receive energy that is already there, although not necessarily in what we call the physical material universe. Sunlight and solar power is receiving energy from an external source. You do not have to generate that energy. It is there for the taking. The same with wind, the same with the tides or the wave movements in the oceans. These are all ways, but the next breakthrough that needs to happen is that people begin to consider: What if there is energy from outside the material universe? This, of course, requires people to be willing to question materialism, at least in its present form.

You either have to abandon materialism completely, or you have to at least move the boundaries of the material universe further out so you can make use of this energy that is available freely and that can create a bigger revolution in technology than the steam engine or the combustion engine or electricity. The potential for technological growth in the near and medium long-term future is what most people would call staggering. It is so far beyond what you presently have that most people would refuse to believe it if they were told. But there will come a point where energy will not be a limitation to human progress because it will be, for practical purposes, unlimited. You cannot exhaust it, you cannot run out of these energy sources and, of course, they will not cost anything. It will cost something to produce a device that can receive the energy and turn it into work, but it will not cost something to generate the energy because it is there. It has no cost for human beings to generate solar energy or wind energy.

This is not the perpetuum mobile that people are talking about. We are not talking about a machine that can produce work without receiving energy from the outside. We are talking about devices that can receive energy from the realm that is beyond the material universe and translate them into work or electricity in the physical world. Once this begins to be known and be implemented, it will be impossible for the power elite to gain a monopoly on energy production, energy distribution, and this will shift the economy. It will, so to speak, democratize the economy and take economic power away from the huge corporations and give more independence to individuals and smaller businesses.

A new model of the universe

It is necessary for some people to recognize that there are indeed forces, a power elite, that resists such technology, that resists the shift and that wants to keep people and the entire world stuck in the current paradigm, where you believe that there is no free energy because energy must be produced, and it costs something to produce it. So you cannot create a machine that can run perpetually because it must receive a limited amount of energy. It will use it up, and therefore according to the laws of thermodynamics there is no such thing as free energy or unlimited energy, and all energy will eventually be used up, and the universe will go towards the lowest possible energy state, the maximum entropy. These laws are valid for very local situations. They are not valid for the entire universe.

If you look at the Big Bang, you will see that it violates both the first and the second law of thermodynamics, even in its present form. But, of course, the Big Bang is not an accurate portrayal of this. If you look logically at the Big Bang, you can see that what scientists have been forced to do, as they have confined their inquiries to scientific materialism, is to create something that is as artificial as when the Catholic church was bound by its doctrines that the earth was the center of the universe and that the heavenly bodies were created by a perfect God and therefore had to move in a perfect orbit, which was considered the circle. So they created the theory of epicycles that were circles within circles, in order to get the movement of the heavenly bodies to conform to the circle but also conform to observation. These cycles became more and more complicated, more and more complex, until you had a situation where the whole system was so cumbersome that it almost collapsed under its own weight.

This is what materialism is in today where, in order to confine the creation of the world to what you currently see as the material universe, they have had to create more and more artificial theories. So you have the concept that the linear process you see today with the expansion of the universe, the galaxies moving away from each other, must be reversible. You can look back in time and say that, as the galaxies are today at a distance, they were in the past closer together, and if you then take the linear mind and extend that back, there must come a point where there were no galaxies, there were no structures. This means that they have had to postulate that all of the energy and all of the matter that is currently making up the universe, this incredibly vast universe, was compressed into a single point, a singularity.

Can anyone really imagine this? Can anyone really make sense of it? May I ask a simple question here? How is the idea that all of the matter and all of the energy that makes up the current huge universe was compressed into a single point, how is that more logical than the idea that God created the heavens and the earth? How is it more scientific? How does it explain more than the idea that God created the heavens and the earth? I am not hereby saying that the Bible’s statement is entirely correct or is the full explanation. I am only saying: How is the idea that everything that you see in the current universe can be compressed into a singularity, how does that explain anything?

You know that the laws of physics break down when you get closer to the Big Bang. How is this a scientific theory, to say that there was nothing before the laws of physics suddenly appeared? Is it not more logical to say that the universe, the material universe, is part of a larger unit, and there is a flow of energy from a higher realm, a higher dimension, whatever you want to call it, into the physical universe? And it is this flow of energy that created the process of the formulation of matter, the formulation of planets and galaxies and suns, and it is this energy that drives the expansion?

The observation that the galaxies are moving further away from each other, that the universe is expanding and that this expansion happens at an accelerated rate is not compatible with the laws of thermodynamics. It is not compatible with materialism. Materialism has no credible explanation for this observable fact. It is exactly the same as when the Catholic church denied the observations of the early astronomers, who looked at the heavenly bodies and could not work out how they could possibly move in circles and therefore ended up concluding that they moved in elliptical orbits.

Likewise today, you can observe that the galaxies are moving away at an accelerated rate. It cannot be reconciled with a materialistic view, and therefore a far more simple explanation, according to Occam’s razor that materialists always refer to, is to say that there must be something beyond the material universe that is sending energy into the material universe to drive the expansion, and this energy did not have to enter through just one point as a singularity, but could have entered through many points simultaneously. That recognition, which is just a very small switch of the mind, could revolutionize science. You do not even have to theorize what is happening in this higher realm, whether there are conscious beings there or whether there is a god. You just have to let go of this insistence on there only being the material universe, and therefore all of the energy that has driven the evolution of the universe must already have been there at the beginning of the process.

If you can abandon this idea, you can open your minds to the possibility that you can find a way to harness this stream of energy and direct it into doing practical work on earth. That will revolutionize society in ways that most people cannot imagine because suddenly you have unlimited energy that does not cost money to produce. That means that you can now do much more work, perform many more activities at a much lower cost, which means suddenly it becomes feasible that all nine billion or more people on earth could have enough to eat every day. With the current amount of energy it is not possible to feed all people sufficiently but with more energy, free energy, this becomes entirely possible. It becomes possible they could all have a decent house to live in, that they could all have decent living conditions.

Exposing elitism and power elite

Who would not want to see this? Oh yes, the power elite, who want to be superior to the people, richer than the people. They do not want to see this, but can you really say that democratic governments and citizens in democratic countries should not want to see this? So why should you allow yourselves to be held hostage by this power elite that are using materialism as a tool to limit scientific progress? Is it not the very essence of the scientific method that no ideology, no belief system, should be allowed to limit scientific inquiry? Is that not why science challenged Catholic doctrines in the first place? So is it not the next logical step to use science to challenge the materialist doctrines that are also limiting scientific inquiry? And even challenge the existence of a power elite, which scientists and historians and psychologists could very quickly bring awareness about if they only would make a slight shift and focus on how elitism has been one of the driving forces in human history, and how people can free themselves from this influence.

Do the people need an elite if you take what Jesus has said about Christianity, about there being this small elite that are setting themselves up, wanting to control people, wanting to create a problem and present themselves as solutions to the problem? Then you can see that this pattern can be seen in human society as far back as you have recorded history. The elite will always try to create one simple illusion: that the people need the elite, that they could not do this or that or the next thing without the elite, that you could not be saved without the elite, that you could not govern society without the elite, that you could not know truth without the elite.

The inconsistencies of materialism

This is, of course, completely untrue, and you will see when you look at this materialistic theory of consciousness, how you have these so-called scientists who are claiming that all there is to you and your mind is a bundle of neurons. But they implicitly make themselves exceptions from this because if you are a materialist and if you truly believe that human beings are a bundle of neurons, then you must logically accept that you are also a bundle of neurons. That means you do not have a mind that is independent of your brain, and that means you cannot know truth. What you think is your superior materialistic truth is simply a product of the firing of your individual neurons. If someone believes in a religion, well, that is a product of their neurons. But how are your neurons, the firing of your neurons, superior to the neurons of another person?

In other words if you are a materialist, there is no meaning in saying there is an absolute truth. There can be no truth, and therefore there can be no people who are superior to others. There can really be no elite. It is a complete fiction. It is just an illusion created by the firing of the neurons of certain people, as it must be in serial killers and rapists and mass murderers. There is no meaning anywhere. There is no superiority. It is just that you may feel superior, but it is just your neurons that are giving you this illusion. It has no meaning. Of course, they do not see it that way because they think that they have superior minds, but those who disagree with them, it is just their neurons firing that way. Just as they say: “Ah, the religious people, it’s just all superstition.”

So the reality here is that all human beings have the potential to raise their consciousness, but how do you do it? Well, you must make contact with something from outside your own mind but also something from outside the material universe. You cannot use materialism to transcend the material universe, but you can use logic, rationality, to posit that there is something beyond the material universe. Then you can use intuition to direct the experience that there is something beyond your mind, something beyond the material universe.

This is because the Conscious You can step outside of the outer mind. The Conscious You can step outside of the neurons of the brain because the Conscious You, the core of your identity and your mind, is more than the neurons of the brain. For that matter, even your subconscious selves are more than the neurons of the brain. The only way that these materialists can deny consciousness as an independent phenomenon, as a phenomenon independent of the brain, is because they have a consciousness that is independent of the brain. But this they are not able to see, willing to see. They are not willing to make that logical shift and see the inconsistencies in their claims, which are really just beliefs, subjective beliefs.

Factors limiting human thought

The big shift that I look to see happen is indeed that there begins to be an awakening of how human thought has been limited historically. Not only through religion, although religion certainly has been a major factor in limiting human thought, but so have political ideologies, national pride or national identities, and so has now scientific materialism.

There has always been a tendency that human beings will limit their own thoughts, but also the tendency of the formulation of an elite, who will seek to limit the thoughts of the population without limiting their own thoughts. But, of course, the elite have always been limited in their thoughts because they are so focused on themselves, raising up themselves by putting other people down. Therefore they cannot think in holistic terms. They can only think in localized ways, focused on themselves. They are the ones who think the earth, or rather themselves, are the center of the universe, and that everything else revolves around them. This is, of course, narcissism to the extreme.

A new renaissance of thought

This is what people are beginning to see, and they will see it more and more clearly in the coming years and decades until there will be a shift. There will be a shift, and more and more people will refuse to let their thoughts be limited, as you indeed saw happen after the early scientific revolution. You saw it in the Renaissance, where there was much more freedom of thought. This is what created progress. In today’s world you have progress in terms of the development of technology, but not really in the freedom of thought that you, for example, saw in the Renaissance, where people were willing to think about things they could not even have thought about decades earlier.

This is the kind of new renaissance that I look to not only see but, of course, produce by working with the people who can tune into me and other masters so that we can release these ideas and they can be put out there into society. Naturally you are among those people in whatever way you can see yourself fitting into this picture. Certainly many of you have a potential to be a part of this renaissance of thought. This is not said to put any pressure on you, but it is a fact that many of you have a potential to be part of this renaissance of thought that can usher in the Golden Age, but you cannot exercise or fulfill that potential as long as you are hanging on the cross in your own minds. Therefore you need to implement the processes we have given you to free yourselves from these separate selves, these subconscious selves, and come to the point where your thought can be freed up, your imagination can be freed up, to reach up.

Horizontal and vertical imagination

Now, it has been said by some creative people that imagination is the greatest gift that human beings have, but this is a truth with modifications. Imagination can go in two directions: It can go vertically or horizontally. You can look at people who are in the duality consciousness, and you can see that many among the population do not have much imagination. They have hardly any imagination because their thoughts stay within the boundaries that they were brought up with. But you can look at the fallen beings and say they actually have a lot of imagination. That is why they can create all of these illusions to ensnare people. It is actually an observable fact that there are some people who are very much trapped in separation, who are very much trapped in a dualistic way of using their minds, but within the boundaries set by this way of thinking they do have a lot of imagination. That is why they can come up with all these conspiracy theories, for example, and that is why they can get many people to believe in them.

It is simply this: When you go into duality, your mind, as we said, becomes a closed system, but a closed system can be narrow, or it can be wider. It is just that a closed system can only expand in a horizontal way. It cannot transcend itself. Therefore it cannot rise up, it cannot reach up for the Christ mind, it cannot contact the Christ mind. But there are very few limits to how far it can go in a horizontal direction, and that is why you will see, when you look at some of these people that believe in some of these conspiracy theories, that they can always invent. Even though they would not call it that, they can always come up with some justification for why their system, their world view, is not wrong even though it might be contradicted by facts.

The prison of a closed mind

This messenger this morning looked at a video of a group of people who call themselves the Flat Earthers. They were exposed to an experiment where boats sailed away with a big sign that had horizontal stripes, and it sailed out over a lake. As it sailed further and further away, the bottom stripes became invisible. They were hidden from view. Of course, the common explanation of this fact, or this observation, is that the earth curves so as the boat moves further away, the bottom of this big poster was below the curvature of the earth and therefore became invisible. Even though they saw this, they would not accept that their view that the earth is flat was incorrect. Neither could they actually produce an explanation for how a flat earth could produce this effect.

Instead they created this conspiracy theory that, regardless of what was just observed, there was this huge conspiracy that had kept the truth that the earth is flat hidden from the population for five hundred years. As part of this they had financed NASA, created the entire space agency, in order to hide the truth that the earth is actually flat. They could not really produce a motivation for why a power elite would do this, but they were convinced that there was this hidden conspiracy that was doing all kinds of things to keep people from accepting that the earth actually is flat.

This is an example of how, once you move beyond this boundary where you have no contact with anything above your own state of mind, there is no limit to how far you can go into creating illusions, epicycles, more and more complexity. Of course, when you can stand there and look at a demonstration and refuse to accept even what is observable, then you lose all touch with reality. When you lose touch with a reality outside your own mind, you can create any reality inside your mind, and it can never be disproven from inside your mind.

Which means what? You can never escape the prison that your own mind has become. You can never get down from the cross that you have nailed yourself to in your own mind. No matter what evidence there is to the contrary, you can imagine some kind of scenario that supposedly proves what you want to believe. Whether this is the United States election, whether it is the Russian special military operation in Ukraine, you can see how people can invent these seeming justifications. What is all this a proof of?

Plausible deniability and plausible plausibility

Well, if you take our teachings, what have we said? The earth is a reality simulator. You must be allowed to create any experience you want to have and to maintain that until you have had enough of it. So there has to be plausible deniability and plausible plausibility. It must be possible for you to deny any evidence that contradicts your experience, and it must be possible for you to produce evidence that supposedly validates your experience. In a reality simulator anything you want to be real, it must be possible for you to be convinced that it is real.

Now again, I represent freedom to the earth. It is not my desire to limit anyone’s imagination, even if it is horizontal, even if it is completely disconnected from reality. If people in today’s age have a need to experience that they are superior because they belong to this very little group that believes the earth is flat, well, I have no problem with them having that experience. I am only saying these are obviously not ascended master students. They are obviously not people who are walking the path to Christhood. And they are obviously not among those who will drive the shift to the Golden Age. They cannot move into the Golden Age consciousness. They cannot help society move forward into the Golden Age, which means they will be left behind by the Golden Age. They will be comparable to people who live deep in some rainforest and have no contact with civilization. They are still living like hunter-gatherers and have no idea of the progress that has actually been made in society at large. They are simply left behind by growth.

Now these people may still live in modern society. They may have a job, they may make money, but in their minds they are going to be left behind by the Golden Age mindset. How can it be otherwise when their minds are closed to Saint Germain? Unfortunately there are some people who know the name Saint Germain, who have studied ascended master teachings, but their minds are still closed to me because they have created an image of me, of the Golden Age, even an image of what it means to have Christhood. And they have not had enough of that image. Now again, what can I do but accept their freedom to create that experience and to keep it up for as long as they need to? Anyway, how could I reach them? No matter what I say, they can find a way to still maintain their world view.

Aligning your imagination with the vision of Saint Germain

What does this have to do with taking yourself down from the cross? Well, you cannot take yourself down from the cross through the mind that put you on the cross. You need something from outside, the Christ mind, some representative of the Christ mind, be it Jesus, be it myself, be it Master More, Mother Mary, any representative of the Christ mind. Otherwise, you will just keep building more and more complex illusions in a horizontal way that take you further and further away from the center of being.

So with this I have given you what I wanted to give you in this installment. There is, of course, much more to be said about the Golden Age. There is much more to be said about the mindset and the technology of the Golden Age. But as I said, the vision that I have is so far beyond what people can imagine, and why is it so far beyond? Because most people on earth can only imagine in this horizontal way. Which means what? It means they must look at current technology and use current technology to project what could happen with future technology. Which means they can only see that current technology becomes more and more complex, more and more capable within the boundaries of current technology.

But I am talking about revolutionary technology, transcendental technology, that goes way beyond current technology. Very few people have the vertical imagination to tune into this. You can debate whether vertical imagination is imagination or whether it is simply tuning in to a vision that already exists in the ascended realm, as opposed to tuning in to a vision of the fallen beings in a material realm. So my desire for all of you is that you can tune into me, that you cannot just listen to these words spoken by an outer person, but that you can actually tune in, in a vertical way. But that requires you to be willing to let die the selves that are based on this horizontal imagination springing from separation.

So with this I seal you in that joyful freedom flame that I AM. Freedom is not really imagination. You cannot imagine freedom. You can be free, or you cannot be free. And how are you free? By aligning your imagination with something that is real rather than fictional. I am not looking to manifest a fiction as the Golden Age. I am looking to manifest the Golden Age as a reality, a tangible reality.

 

Copyright © 2023 Kim Michaels

 

Back to Taking Christianity and yourself down from the cross

It is time Christians saw through the layers of deception in Christianity


Listen to a recording of this dictation (subscribers only)

Ascended Master Jesus Christ through Kim Michaels, April 9, 2023. This dictation was given during the 2023 Easter webinar – Taking Christianity and yourself down from the cross.

I AM the Ascended Master Jesus Christ.

You cannot understand the mission that I carried out 2,000 years ago unless you understand that I often talked about forces, beings, and people that opposed my mission. You cannot get a full grasp of the mission of Christ, unless you understand that in the world there is a force of antichrist, which I called the prince of this world, or the devil, or Satan; and there are people who can be tools of this force, which are, of course, the people who opposed me at every turn, the scribes and Pharisees, whom I called the sons of the devil and, of course, the people who wanted me condemned, arrested, and put to death. But if you look at contemporary Christianity, how much talk is there of such a force? How much understanding is there of such a force? And this is one of the reasons why this force has been able to put Christianity on the cross in the first place and keep it there for 17 centuries.

Christians talk about the devil, but the devil they talk about is often seen as being just as remote as the God they talk about. There is a remote God up in heaven, there is a devil down in hell and he can tempt people, but there is not sufficient understanding of how this actually works, so this is what I will give you some thoughts on.

The power elite in embodiment

First of all, we need to recognize that there are people in this world who have reached an extreme level of self-centeredness, selfishness, and they are what psychology today calls the narcissists, the sociopaths and psychopaths, or a combination of all three. These are beings that, to begin with, were not fundamentally different than other beings, other self-aware beings. But they have gone so far into the death consciousness, the consciousness of antichrist, that they have a completely different way of looking at life than what most people on the planet have. They are firmly convinced that they are superior to other human beings, that they have a right to set themselves up as an elite, that they are right in the excuses they used for setting themselves up in these powerful and privileged positions. And they believe that the ends can justify the means, therefore they have a right to use anything that appeals to people in order to achieve the ends that they see.

You need to recognize that throughout history, there has been a certain group of people in embodiment who have formed this power elite, who have attempted to set themselves up in a powerful and privileged position, where they are above the general population and where the general population cannot challenge them. You see an example of this, as we have mentioned many times before, in the feudal societies of Europe, where there was a small elite consisting of the kings, the noblemen and also the clergy of the church. And most of the people were in all practical practicality, the slaves of this elite, and therefore you could say that the people were crucified by the elite. They were fixated on the cross, spending all of their waking hours, all of their energy, all of their time, on working for the benefit of the elite. The elite, in physical embodiment, had crucified the people in a quite physical way.

The hierarchy of the non-embodied fallen beings

Yet, why could the elite that was in embodiment do this—only because there are beings that are not in embodiment who are working through the elite in embodiment. And these non-embodied beings are what I called the prince of this world, the antichrist, Satan, the devil, the sons of the devil. They are what we today call the fallen beings, who have fallen from grace out of their own choosing and therefore have taken on this mindset of working against God, working against God’s purpose, and therefore of course, working against Christ and the purpose of sending Christ into this world.

You cannot fully understand Christianity and my mission if you do not understand that there is a force of disembodied beings who form this force of antichrist, who were doing everything they could to prevent me from being the Christ in embodiment and who have since then done everything they could to prevent the success of my mission.

You can see, if you look at the scriptures, how King Herod was one of these embodied beings whose mind was taken over by the disembodied beings and that is why he believed in this idea that someone would be, a child would be born, that would challenge his reign, and therefore he was willing to kill all male babies of a certain age group in order to take out of embodiment the one being that could be the Christ. He did not understand this consciously, he did not have a sophisticated understanding of it, but he was willing to act based on these non-embodied fallen beings taking over his mind.

You see that the fallen beings were willing to kill a large number of male babies in order to be sure that they had killed the one that had the Christ potential. Why did they eventually kill me, kill my physical body? Because again, the disembodied fallen beings were working with the fallen beings in embodiment to kill me before I could fulfill my mission. They, of course, did not fully understand what my mission was about, but they did understand that I came to set the people free from being dominated by these fallen beings, the sons of the devil.

Why does Christ come to earth? Why does God send someone? Why does the hierarchy of light send someone to earth who can bring forth some kind of teaching that can set the people free? Well, of course, this is done because the people have become enslaved and you look back throughout history and see that there was a point in the distant past where, for reasons we have already explained and that I will not go into, these fallen beings, these dark beings were allowed to come to earth.

What we need to recognize is, that at the time that I was born 2000 years ago in a physical body, there were already fallen beings in embodiment and out of embodiment in the emotional, mental and identity realms. They have been here for a long time and what they had achieved in that time was to basically make all people their slaves, set themselves up as a powerful and privileged elite and the people were virtually the slaves. Why? Because the people were crucified.

How co-creation works

We have given many teachings on the four levels of matter. We have said that you who are self-aware beings are actually created to be co-creators with God or at least co-creators with the ascended masters who have created the earth. The earth is created as an environment where you can exercise your creative abilities, your co-creative abilities and thereby grow in consciousness.

How do you exercise your co-creative abilities, your receiving light from your higher self, your spiritual self? It first enters your identity body, where you superimpose certain images on the light, then it goes into your mental body, where you superimpose more concrete images, then in your emotional body, where you superimpose a certain momentum and direction, and then the energy goes into the physical spectrum where it takes on physical form, at least in the ideal scenario.

The earth is meant to be a co-creative environment. You are meant to, and I say all people, are meant to exercise their co-creative abilities and to enjoy doing so. You are meant to get fulfillment out of it. When you exercise your co-creative abilities, you improve your physical situation, you improve your emotions, you improve your thoughts, you improve your sense of identity. You grow in your sense of identity and therefore, as I described in a parable about the talents, the more you multiply the talents you are given, the more you will receive, to him that has more shall be added.

Co-creation as a struggle

The original design for the earth was to create this co-creative environment where people could exercise their abilities and there was no suffering. There was no conflict, there was no warfare. Again, without going into how the fallen beings came to earth, there came a shift where humankind has lowered the collective consciousness, the fallen beings came to earth and ever since they came, they have managed to enslave people so that people are crucified in their four bodies, their four levels of their minds.

Now co-creation is not an enjoyable process, it is a struggle, it causes suffering and therefore, people are literally crucified in the four levels of matter, crucified in the four levels of their minds. And that is why God sends someone to earth. That someone is the only begotten son, but that only begotten son is not and can never be confined to one human being. It is the Christ consciousness, the universal non-personal Christ consciousness. This consciousness can be expressed in the physical octave by a human being, but only when that human being has taken embodiment as other human beings and has raised his or her consciousness to the sufficient level where that person can be an open door for the non-personal Christ mind to express itself on earth.

The example of Christ

Why is the Christ mind sent to earth in a personalized form? Because, first of all, people are trapped, they are crucified, they cannot take themselves down from the cross once they are nailed to the cross, they need something from outside their own minds so they have a frame of reference from outside their own minds. And they need this in a form that they can recognize and understand and grasp, because people cannot connect to some remote God up in heaven. They need to see an example, a demonstration of the path that you can follow so that all people can escape the cross, escape the suffering and be reborn into a higher sense of identity, but it cannot be enslaved by the fallen beings. Because, now they know and accept that they are sons and daughters of God and not sinners.

This is the basic dynamic. From time to time, the hierarchy of light sends someone, or rather you could say that from time to time, one person raises his or her consciousness where they can serve as the open door so they bring forth something that gives people a frame of reference from outside the mindset that makes them slaves to the power elite and fixates them on the cross of the four levels of matter.

What do the fallen beings do? Well, I said their first consideration is to prevent that person that has that potential from even being born. They can know this because some of them can read the consciousness of those who embody, they can know that someone had reached a high level and therefore, in his or her next embodiment, has the potential to be the open door. And they will therefore try to prevent that from being born as they did with me. But if they cannot prevent this, then they will, of course, prevent, try to prevent, this person from being acknowledged by the people. And in order to do this, they have created this elaborate scheme of beliefs, religions, ideologies, thought systems to try to prevent the people from recognizing the Christ.

The fall into duality

Now, as I have said, you can never actually lose the opportunity to recognize Christ. But you can be programmed to then do what I described in my previous discourse that Peter did, where he recognized Christ as being someone special, but then he tried to pull me into his mental box, his expectations, his view of what should or should not happen to Christ. And this is what the fallen beings do.

Let us take a look at this. There are several elements. The first element is that the fallen beings will take advantage of the fact that all people have descended below the 48th level of consciousness, so they now experience themselves as separate beings. Most people on earth see themselves as separated from their higher selves. And this makes them susceptible to the ideology, the beliefs of the fallen beings that says there is a God, but he is up there in the sky and you are down here on earth. And you are separated from him by this gap, this chasm, this distance.

They have, throughout the ages, had various explanations for why people are separated. But in the Christian religion, it is because you are sinners, you have sinned and as a result of having sinned, you have been cast out of paradise, cast out of the Garden of Eden where Adam and Eve walked and talked with God. But you are now separated, you are outside the Garden of Eden, and there are angels with flaming swords, keeping you outside.

Now, there is, of course, a certain reality that people have made these choices to go below that level of consciousness where they do not experience themselves as connected beings but as separate beings. Some people have made their choice even before the fallen beings came here. But what is depicted, somewhat accurately in Genesis, is the temptation in the Garden of Eden. Of course, it was both Adam and Eve that were tempted equally, it was not Eve who caused the fall of man, but this is again a perversion of the fallen beings. And what is portrayed there is that there was the fruit of the knowledge of good and evil. They were not allowed to eat of it. The reality was, actually, they were not allowed to eat of it until they were ready, because it was a particular initiation. And the Garden of Eden was a school room, where they would go through levels of initiations and the fruit of the knowledge of good and evil represented one of the more advanced initiations that people were not meant to take before they were ready.

The serpent, which is a representative or symbol for the fallen beings, tempted people to go into, to partake of the fruit, which is to go into the duality consciousness, that we have explained many times. When you go into duality, there are two opposite polarities, they are both relative, none of them are ultimately true but you take one and elevate it to the status of infallibility or superiority by putting the other one down. You are creating these two polarities and this is what allows you to become as a God, knowing good and evil, but you are not knowing good and evil, you are defining good and evil. And of course, most people on earth are not able to do this, but the fallen beings are able to do this. What has happened is that instead of following a true teacher that seeks to help you come back to oneness, they are following the false teacher that seeks to take people deeper and deeper into separation and, of course, it is the illusion of separation that makes you crucified to the four levels of matter.

This is the first element. You are separated from God. This separation is in large part created by the fallen beings that have led people deeper and deeper into separation, making it more and more difficult for people to walk the path towards oneness. Some people throughout the ages, in every age, have discovered the path, but the vast majority have not. This is important to grasp it because then you realize one fundamental truth. The problem on earth is created and exacerbated by the fallen beings.

Redemption through the outer religion

Now comes the next level of deception. They say you can actually be redeemed, but you can only be redeemed through an external religion and the hierarchy of that religion, the priests of that religion. This is what you saw in the Jewish religion when I took embodiment. The Jewish religion claimed you have sinned, therefore you are outside the kingdom of God, but if you follow the Jewish religion, obey the priests, by taking all of the rituals, you can be redeemed and go into, go back into the kingdom of God.

Yet, who were the priests of the Jewish religion? They were fallen beings in embodiment. Who was behind the Jewish religion? The fallen beings out of embodiment. What you see now is that the fallen beings have first created the problem that people have gone into separation and now they attempt to set themselves up as the ones who have a monopoly, a patent on the solution for how people can get back to the kingdom of God. This is the essential dynamic that should have been grasped by the Christian church, but has not been grasped by the Christian church. Why have they not grasped this? Why has not this been shouted from the rooftops since my mission on earth?

Destroying the example of Christ

Well, partly because many of the early followers of Christianity did not fully grasp it, but it really became cemented, you might say, with the formation of the Roman Catholic Church which elevated me to the status of being an exception, the only son of God, of the same substance of the Father, begotten, not made, setting me in a special category. Thereby, nobody could see me as an example to follow, nobody could see that I had demonstrated the path that all can follow. And we were back in a situation where the Catholic Church from its inception has been built on this idea that the only way for Christians to enter heaven is through the outer church and its hierarchy.

In other words, after 300 years, the Christian religion became the exact same kind of religion as the Jewish religion that had me killed. An irony of history you can say, but when you understand what I am telling you here, you see that it is just the simple fact that history repeats itself and if you do not learn from the mistakes of history, you are destined to repeat them.

The reality of my mission was that I came to set people free from the fallen beings in embodiment and out of embodiment, the prince of this world, the sons of the devil. And yet after 300 years, the Christian church had been taken over by these fallen beings and has now, from then on, been used to keep people as trapped as they were before I came. In some ways, even more trapped.

God vs. devil

Now, there are these two elements. The fallen beings seek to create a problem. They also seek to project a false view of what the problem is and then they seek to set themselves up as the solution. But how, what is the next element of their deception? Well, they create this dualistic polarity saying: “Yes, there is a God, but there is also a devil who is his opposite.” Well, the devil who is opposite of God does not exist, for nothing can be opposite of the real God. But the fallen beings have created a false image of God that people have worshipped for a long time and they have created this being in the emotional, mental and identity realm that can take on the form of various gods. This is a false god. This is a dualistic god, and therefore this god does have an opposite, namely the devil which is also created through the image of the fallen beings. You have a certain temporary reality to god and the devil, but the real God is beyond this polarity and is beyond all human images and projections.

The fallen beings have created a god in their own image and after their own likeness and they have created a devil in the image and after the likeness of another group of fallen beings. You have these two groups of fallen beings representing the opposite polarities and how are they using this? Well, first of all, they have the ‘devil fallen beings’ seek to commit and get people to commit all kinds of atrocities on earth. And then the ‘god fallen beings’ are seeking to scare people with this, use this to scare people into fearing that they could go to hell or they could be taken over by the devil and tempted by the devil even while they are in embodiment. But they could also, after leaving embodiment, go to hell and stay there for all eternity and be tortured by the devil. Naturally, this scares people if they believe this, so what do they then do? They say: “Well, there is a way to escape the devil. There is a way to avoid being tempted by the devil while you are in embodiment and there is a way to permanently escape the devil by going to heaven after you leave embodiment.”

And what is that way? It is the outer church and its religion, you must completely obey it, follow its rituals, then the church will protect you against the devil while you are in embodiment and the church will take you to heaven after embodiment. Both these claims are fictitious. The church on earth, no church on earth, be it the Catholic religion or any other religion that has ever existed can take you to heaven. Because what did I say: “Where is heaven? The kingdom of God is within you”, because the kingdom of God is the state of consciousness. It is the state of non-separation. It is getting back to your innocence, the innocence with which you were created.

The ultimate trap of a closed system

But of course, the fallen beings have also obscured that fact by saying that: “No, you were not created as a son or daughter of God, you were created as a sinner through this original sin going back to Adam and Eve.” You see the picture that is beginning to emerge is how the fallen beings, the forces of antichrist, have used the Christian religion to crucify people so that anyone who believes in its Christian religion is truly crucified because they dare not open their emotional, mental and identity minds to anything beyond that outer religion and its doctrines. For after all, if it is not in compliance with the Christian religion, it must come from the devil and it is the devil attempting to tempt you so that you will be pulled into hell where you will suffer for all eternity.

Now you can see how total this deception has been for many people by looking at what the Christian religion specifically, or especially the Catholic church, has actually done. Look at the whole concept of that there are heretics leading to the Inquisition, the Crusades, the witch hunts. Look at then the split between Catholicism and Lutheranism and the wars that ensued from this when they were trying to kill each other after having tried to kill all Muslims and so forth. You see all of these actions committed by Christians and you can ask yourself: “Could Christ really approve of this?” You can go all the way up to today with the pedophilia scandal in the Catholic church and ask yourself: “Could Christ approve of this? Is this really what Christ wants his church to do?”

And some people dare not even ask that question because they think it must come from the devil who is trying to tempt them to doubt the church and therefore go to heaven. People can be trapped in this for lifetimes.

Why is it that at least some people have moved out of it today? Some people have even abandoned Christianity, but some people have started to question it. Well, it is because of the reality of reincarnation. Reincarnation of course, has also been denied by the fallen beings because if you accept that a human being can have more than one lifetime, you must accept that this is a condition that was created by God and this leads to the question: Why? Why would God set it up so that you can have more than one lifetime? Well, the most plausible explanation is that life is actually meant to be a path where you can raise your consciousness until you qualify to enter the kingdom of God. If you cannot qualify in one lifetime, you get additional opportunities.

But this is not what the fallen beings want because if people believe that: “I am born a Catholic in this lifetime, but I do not have to obey the church 100% because I can get an opportunity in my next lifetime where I might not be born as a Catholic.” Well, then the fallen beings cannot get total unquestioning obedience from people so they very quickly took out the concept of reincarnation from the Catholic religion and even all Lutheran religions that have not put it back in. Again, another way to keep people firmly nailed to that cross that they have created.

A broken promise

But the reality is, of course, that reincarnation is real and so what has happened? Well, what is it that the fallen beings have found it necessary to promise people? Well, in order to get them to totally obey them in this lifetime, they make people believe that if they do follow the fallen beings in this lifetime, then they are guaranteed to be saved and go to heaven after this lifetime.

What has, of course, happened to people, is that they have lived an entire lifetime completely obeying the church. They leave embodiment, they expect to go to heaven, but they are told they have to go back into embodiment. And although they come back not remembering that they have lived before, they will gradually, as this repeats over several lifetimes, be some residual memory and understanding where they do not remember the specifics, but they come back with a distrust of the promise made by the Christian religion. And now they become somewhat open to looking at the actions of the Christian religion and saying: “Does this really make sense? Can this come from Christ? Are the doctrines consistent or are they contradictory? Can the priests answer my questions? Or can I see that I can find better answers elsewhere, whether it be in science, some other religion or a mystical teaching?”

Questioning a closed system

You see that the fallen beings cannot keep people trapped forever. They cannot prevent them from questioning their illusions forever. But they can prevent it for a very long time as envisioned by the fact that from the year 381 and until the Reformation and even until the advent of science and the modern secular democracies, Christianity had an incredible hold over the minds of most people in the Western world. You see here how incredibly dangerous this is and how the fallen beings, once they have created this closed system, where people are afraid to question it and look outside, they can keep a very large group of people trapped in such a system for a very long period of time.

Christianity is of course, not the only example. Many others—Islam, Hinduism, some aspects of Buddhism, scientific materialism, communism, are many other examples throughout the ages. But I am, of course, primarily concerned about taking Christianity down from the cross and one potential is that more and more people will wake up, start questioning the church, first of all the Catholic church, but also the Lutheran churches and the Orthodox churches, questioning the doctrines, questioning some of these beliefs that do not make sense. And it could potentially change the church, lead to the creation of a new Christian church or several new Christian churches or at least free people to move on into a more mystical teaching. It is not that I am particularly concerned about preserving the Catholic church or renewing the Catholic church.

The Catholic church–beyond reform?

The Catholic church is so steeped in the mindset of the fallen beings that even if you had a sincere desire to reform the Catholic church, it is doubtful that it could be done but we could ask the question: “Does anyone in the Catholic church see the need to reform the church? Do they see a problem at all?” And of course, many lay people do see a problem with the Catholic church. Many people have been awakened by the pedophilia scandal and other scandals to see that there is a problem. But what is the typical response of such people? They feel you cannot fight City Hall and you cannot fight the Vatican so you cannot really reform the church. What is the only option they can see? Well, they leave. They might go to other Christian churches, they might go to other religions, they might go to some mystical or new age teaching, or they might become entirely non-religious, but they leave. If you see the need to reform the Catholic church and you leave, how can you be part of reforming the Catholic church?

Now what is it that the fallen beings want to do? Well, they want to create a closed system and once they have created it, they want to maintain it by keeping people trapped in the system. What have they done not only in the Catholic church but in many other of these structures they have created? Well, they have set up what we might call a process of unnatural selection. Natural selection supposedly selects out those who are most fit for survival. Unnatural selection does not select the people who are fit to survive individually. They select the people who are fit to ensure the survival of the organization, the structure. What do you have in the Catholic church? You have a situation where nobody who is a lay person has any say in the Catholic church. Only those who are educated and trained by the Catholic church to hold some kind of position, from priests and deacons up to cardinals and popes, can have a say in the Catholic church. What does that mean? It means only those at the top have the power to change the Catholic church. But what does it take to get to the top of this fallen structure?

Well, the only way to get to the top is to demonstrate complete loyalty to the survival of the structure. The system selects out anyone who has a desire or a potential to reform the structure. Meaning, that you can become Pope as you see the present Pope and you can have some desire to create reforms in the Catholic church. But you cannot become Pope if you have a real desire and if you are willing to do what needs to be done to bring the church in alignment with the mind of Christ instead of being controlled by the mind of antichrist.

It does not mean I am saying that only fallen beings can become Popes. But you have to have demonstrated this loyalty to the survival of the organization, otherwise you cannot reach higher levels in the organization. That means that you cannot become a cardinal if you have not demonstrated loyalty. If you have a true desire to reform the Catholic church you cannot become a cardinal. And who selects the Pope? Well, of course, the cardinals and it is one of the cardinals that becomes Pope so you see those who might have a true desire and a true ability to reform the church would never attain a position where they have the power to reform the Catholic church and the same, of course, in most other Christian churches.

But what is it that they really are seeking to do, the fallen beings, by creating this structure? Well, let us say as a thought experiment that it would be possible to reform the Catholic church. How could it be done? Who could do it? What kind of person could do it? Well, a person who had the potential to raise his consciousness, because it would have to be a man as the Catholic church is right now, to the level of the Christ consciousness. You would have to have some level of Christ consciousness in order to bring the Catholic church back into alignment with the Christ mind. This I trust should be possible to see. Yet what is the underlying purpose of the entire structure and doctrines of the Catholic church that the fallen beings have created? It is to make sure that no one with a sufficient level of Christhood could ever rise to a position in the Catholic church.

They want to shut out the Christ from the Catholic church so that the fallen beings can remain in control. Would it be possible to revert this, to change this? Not very likely. One Christed being could not even do it because how could one Christed being be elected Pope if you have all of these cardinals that are trapped in the fallen mindset? The person could not be recognized by the cardinals as having anything of value to offer the church. They would instead see him as a threat. They would see his desire for reform as a threat and his vision of how the church needed to be reformed as a threat to the survival of the structure and what would they say? “Well, the Catholic church has survived for 2000 years and we cannot change it because it would endanger the survival of the church.” It hasn’t, of course, survived for 2000 years, only for 1700, but that is what they will often say because they, of course, claim it goes back to Peter which as I have already said is not the case.

Layers of deception

What is another level of deception that we need to look at? Well, the hierarchy of light sends a Christed being to set the people free from the fallen beings. But what have the fallen beings done with Christianity? They have created a church that keeps people trapped as slaves of the fallen beings but they claim that this church not only represents Christ but was actually created and ordained and is to this day supported by Christ. In other words, they claim that Christ approves of the church of antichrist. The deception that the fallen beings have achieved through the Christian religion is almost complete. If you really accept the claims made by the Catholic church you are nailed to a cross and you are not going to get out of it in this lifetime and potentially not in many coming lifetimes. That is why you saw the Catholic church dominate the life of Europe for over a thousand years virtually unchallenged. I talked about the feudal society of the kings and the noblemen enslaving the people physically, but this would not have been possible if the Catholic church had not enslaved them in their emotional, mental and identity bodies.

How do they do it? At the emotional level they create the fear of hell and the fear of the devil. At the mental level they ensnare people with all these subtle doctrines, all these argumentations and reasonings that the church is built on and then at the identity level they ensnare people by this false identity that you are created as sinners and therefore it was not that you were created in innocence and descended into the consciousness of death and can ascend back out of it. No, you were created in sin and therefore you were created to need salvation and you can only achieve it through the outer church.

The inner path of Christ

What did I say when I was in embodiment? “The kingdom of God is within, he who is willing to lose his life for my sake shall find it.” Many other statements that demonstrate that you can walk a path that qualifies you to enter heaven and that in order to do this, you do not need the external church here on earth. You do need Christ, not as an external savior that does it for you, but as the redeemer that helps you see through the illusions of separation and duality so you can free yourself from them, so you can have those scales fall from your eyes, you can cast off the shackles and therefore rebuke the devil when he comes to tempt you in the form of the Catholic church, the very church that claims to represent Christ. You have the Christ discernment to rebuke the devil as you saw me rebuke the devil when I was tempted after fasting in the wilderness and many other situations.

This is what all can do, “He that believeth on me, the works that I do shall ye do also, and greater works.” This was the path I demonstrated. This was the path I talked about, but despite the fact that there are still some remnants of my words and the descriptions, the Catholic church has completely obliterated this idea that you can walk a path and that you can therefore free yourself without the external church here on earth, because the only thing you need to free yourself is Christ and Christ is beyond anything on earth.

What did I demonstrate by letting myself be crucified and being resurrected afterwards and then ascending to heaven? I demonstrated that the force of antichrist does not have power over Christ. You can kill the body of a Christed being but you cannot kill the spirit. This is the power of the Easter story that you can through Christ rise above death. What is death? The consciousness of separation, duality, the consciousness of the fallen beings and all of the lies that spring from it. What is life? It is to be reborn in Christ.

Now take the concept of original sin, that you were created as sinners and compare it to what I said to Nicodemus. When I said to him you shall be reborn, unless you are reborn you cannot enter the kingdom and he being a very literal person said: “Well how can a man be reborn? Can he enter his womb a second time?” And I said to him: “Only he that descended from heaven can ascend back to heaven.” What does that statement say? You were not created in sin because nobody in heaven is in sin and is created in sin. You descended from heaven. As we now say, the Conscious You descended from heaven and it is that “you” that can ascend back to heaven when it overcomes the illusions of death, the consciousness of death and it does that through the consciousness of Christ, the consciousness of life.

When you follow me, when you are willing to let the death consciousness, the self created out of the death consciousness, die, you are reborn into the eternal life of Christ and then you can ascend back to heaven. Once you are in death, you cannot do it without Christ, but you can certainly do it without an earthly institution controlled by the fallen beings who are in the consciousness of death.

The consciousness of death in Christian religions

If you go to Rome today, which is considered the center of Christendom, at least the center of the Catholic Church, what is it you see there? You see this famous church, St. Peter’s. But when you go in, what do you see? You see dead popes that are lying there on display, their mummified bodies. Because it is after all, not St. Peter’s Cathedral but St. Peter’s Basilica. You will have to look long and hard to find a picture of the resurrected Christ or rather a statue of the resurrected Christ. You can find a big statue of Peter and you can find dead popes but very few images of the resurrected Christ. There is one of the dead Christ lying on the lap of Mother Mary.

What is it you see when you go in there and you are sensitive to vibration? What vibration do you sense in St. Peter’s Basilica? You sense the vibration of death because not only the Basilica but the entire Vatican is permeated by the consciousness of death, the vibration of death. And in fact, the entire Christian religion, not only the Catholic Church but also the Lutheran churches and the Eastern Orthodox churches are permeated by the consciousness of death.

Not even Christ can resurrect them because Christ does not work against the free will of people in embodiment. And the people are so attached to the consciousness of death, they are so afraid of questioning it that they cannot ask the one logical question: “How can they enter eternal life through the consciousness of death or an earthly structure permeated by the consciousness of death?”

Knowing truth from within

What is the entire message of Christ in a concentrated form? Christ comes to give you eternal life by taking you beyond death, the consciousness of death. Only Christ can do this, no structure on earth can gain you entry into the kingdom and no structure on earth can keep you out of the kingdom. But the fallen beings claim that they have the power to allow you to enter heaven or to prevent you from entering heaven and send you to hell. This is all a lie and if you believe it you will die. There is no way that you can ever enter heaven in any other way than going through the universal Christ consciousness, which, of course, has been expressed also through Buddhism and other religions where they did not use the word Christ. But it is the same consciousness because it is beyond words, it is beyond doctrines, it is beyond human beliefs. There is no other way.

Again, the way has been made plain for those who have eyes to see and ears to hear. You might say: “Well, have I not said this in different ways through this messenger now for many years,” and have you, who are the students, not heard this before—sure you have. But have you truly assimilated the words, truly grasped what it means? And of course the other reason for saying it is to send it, to send another wave of this into the collective consciousness. There is a certain tendency in the modern world that people will say: “Well, why are you repeating yourself? People have such a short attention span, they do not see the value of repetition, now that everything can be printed and put on the internet and therefore be read over and over again.”

But there is value in repeating it. For every time it is stated, every time it is stated more clearly, there is another rung of people who are able to grasp it in their identity bodies, in their mental bodies in their emotional bodies and slowly it starts that process whereby they begin to question, they begin to reconnect to something within themselves that makes them willing to recognize that they can actually know Christ, they can know truth within themselves. This is, of course, another deception of the fallen beings that has been projected by all of their structures, including the Christian religion, and it is what? It is that you, as an ordinary human being, as a sinner, you cannot know truth on your own. You can especially not know truth within yourself. Truth must come from an outer source, and it is the Christian church, or rather the fallen beings who control it.

Again, there is a truth and an error here. When you are in the consciousness of death, the consciousness of separation, truth can only come from an outer source because it cannot come from the separate self, but it can come from Christ, the Christ mind. The thing is, Christ cannot be confined to outer doctrines and rituals, not even words in a scripture. It can only come from within, in the sense that what will get you out of the consciousness of death is that you are reborn, psychologically, spiritually, but this means actually a shift in consciousness.

The process of inner rebirth

Well, how can your consciousness shift? It cannot be done as a result of an outer process. You cannot create an educational institution and all people who go through it will be guaranteed to shift their consciousness and attain the Christ consciousness. You can create mystery schools that can help people if that is the purpose of them, but you cannot even then guarantee results, because people must be willing to look within, to look at the beam in their own eye, and to shift. And this is an inner experience. It can only be an inner experience. Christ cannot do it for you, but Christ can show you that there is something outside of your separate self, the death consciousness.

If you are willing, then you can use that frame of reference to gradually shift your sense of identity, shift your beliefs, shift your feelings and then you are reborn into a higher sense of self. But it must be voluntary. It must be conscious. It must be an inner process. It cannot be any other way. And this is another lie of the Christian religion—that salvation is an outer process whereby I come as the all-powerful Son of God and take you to heaven. This is the dream of the fallen beings that they can somehow force their way, cheat their way into heaven. They can fool Christ into taking them into heaven because they have such a good appearance on earth.

Look how many Christians believe this. They live an entire lifetime believing, “Oh, I have been such a good Christian, I have been loyal to the church, I have given money to the church. I have been engaged in charity. I have gone to Mass and said prayers and lit candles and I have done all of these outer things. Surely, Jesus will meet me when I leave the body and take me to heaven.” They come up there leaving the body and they are shown that they must go back into embodiment because all of the outer things they have done have not shifted their consciousness and therefore, how can you enter the kingdom that is within you when you have not shifted your consciousness? How can you enter the kingdom that is within you through external means? It cannot be done. You see the many layers of deception created by the fallen beings and it is all of these layers of deception that are putting the Christian church on the cross, that are putting Christianity on the cross and that are putting most Christians on the cross.

I have found it important to talk about this at this occasion of Easter. And I am grateful that so many of you have been willing to tune in, so that by you hearing this live and by those who will hear or read it later, these words will be reinforced over your attention, over your four lower bodies and therefore are projected into the collective consciousness where another group of people can be freed from this hypnotic state that the fallen beings have put so many Christians in for such a long time.

It is time, it is high time, it is past time that the captives be set free, that the prodigal sons and daughters return, that the lost sheep are returned to the shepherd. For Christianity is not the shepherd. Christ is the shepherd and I AM the Ascended Master Jesus Christ. I AM He.

 

Copyright © 2023 Kim Michaels

 

Back to Taking Christianity and yourself down from the cross

Will you let the world crucify you?


Listen to a recording of this dictation (subscribers only)

Ascended Master Mother Mary through Kim Michaels, April 9, 2023. This dictation was given during the 2023 Easter webinar – Taking Christianity and yourself down from the cross.

I AM the Ascended Master Mother Mary.

Let us take a look at the world and the world situation. Or rather, let us look at how you, ascended-master students, look at the world and the world situation. How do you react, how do you feel about the world? Surely when you look at the world right now, you can see that there are certain conflicts, certain problems, that seem to be getting worse. You have the war in Ukraine, of course. You have the situation in Israel in Jerusalem where the conflict is boiling over between Jews and Palestinians, but even between different factions of the Jewish society. You have the situation in the United States with the court cases against Trump and the reaction of his supporters. You have the situation with the recent bank collapses and the potential that there are other banks, even those called shadow banks or non-banks, that could collapse and drag the regular banks down with them.

You can look at the world as it is right now and say: “There is cause for concern. There is cause to be concerned about the future developments and what might and might not happen.” But the perspective I want to give you here is that if you step back a few years, a few decades, 50 years, 100 years, 200 years, 500 years, 1,000 years, 2,000 years–at any point between now and then, there were people who looked at the world with the same concern, the same fear of what would happen in the future, the same sense of panic or dread about potential conflicts or the conflicts they already saw.

What have we said that the world is? A reality simulator where you must be able to create any situation that you can imagine and then, inside your own mind, you have the sense that this is real, that this situation is real and that the way you look at it is real. Have we not given you this teaching over and over through this messenger now for several years, even going back beyond several years? Have we not, in various contexts, with various words and descriptions, given you this teaching about the cosmic mirror, about the reality simulator, about your perception filter, about free will and that people must be given the opportunity to create any life experience they want and to have it for as long as they want it?

The phase of being focused on world conditions

So what life experience do you, as ascended master students, desire to have? Not all of you have this pattern, but some of you have this pattern that you are very focused on, very concerned about the outer world and what is happening in the world. And I know very well that we, as ascended masters and I myself in my dictations and my books, have told you that you have an important mission to change the world by giving the calls and invocations, but also by raising your consciousness thereby pulling up on the collective. So I am fully aware, which is partly why I am giving this talk, that you could say we have put you in a dilemma, but it would be more correct to say that some of you have taken our teachings, interpreted them a certain way and put yourselves in a dilemma.

On the one hand, you are here on earth to have a positive impact on world conditions. You are here on earth to make the calls, thereby authorizing us of the ascended masters to step in and use our power to change conditions. Yet does that necessarily mean that you have to be focused on outer conditions, concerned about outer conditions, fearing for the future? Is that what we want as ascended masters for our students? What is it that happens when you go into this state of being very focused on the world, on world conditions, how important it is to do something about world conditions and how you must make a sacrifice and you must always seek to be focused on what could happen next so you can make the calls and be mentally prepared for what might happen?

Well, the messenger himself knows this very well because he was in that state of mind for many years when he was in a previous ascended master movement where they gave many, many hours of decrees for world conditions. He knows very well that you can put yourself in this frame of mind where so much of your attention is directed outwards. And what you are actually feeling, what your state of mind actually is, is that until conditions in the world change you cannot really be at peace. You cannot really be yourself. You cannot really start the creative phase of your divine plan. You must focus on the work phase. This is how he felt for a number of years with giving all of these decrees, and many other ascended master students in that dispensation felt the same and some still do.

We also know that in this dispensation some people have felt this way and I am not here saying that this is wrong. It was for the messenger a phase that has for many other people been a phase that you had to go through and it is part of your divine plan to go through this for a variety of reasons. But a phase is not forever. A phase is a temporary condition.

I cannot be at peace until the world has changed

What is it that actually happens when you put yourself in this frame of mind where you are essentially saying: “I have to focus on world conditions and therefore I cannot be at peace inside myself?” What is it that happens? Well, you are crucified. You are hanging on a cross because your inner state of mind depends on external conditions, which means other people and their free will. You are making your state of mind dependent on conditions outside your mind and this is what makes you crucified. This is what fixates you on the cross, made up of the four levels of your mind, physical, emotional, mental, identity. You see that there are two ways to crucify yourself, an alpha and an omega. Well, you could even say there are more, but let us at least look at this.

There is one where you are crucified by your own psychology and this is the case with many, many people in the world who have a difficult psychology, who have experienced trauma, who are divided in their psychology. They are focused on themselves. They are focused on their own psychology their immediate situation and they are crucified by their own minds, the conditions in their own minds. Then there are those, and it of course applies not only to ascended master students who are focused outside themselves, they are focused on changing other people, changing the world and therefore they are crucified by conditions outside their own minds. But of course, you can say: “What is it that crucifies you when you are in this state of mind?” Is it the outer conditions or is it your reaction to the outer conditions? And where does your reaction to outer conditions come from? It comes from the conditions in your own mind, the separate selves, the subconscious reactionary patterns.

What we are pointing out to you at this conference is that you are crucified by some condition in your psychology that you have not yet looked at. And as this messenger was willing to admit to himself some time ago, he had used the teachings of the ascended masters and the need to decree for world conditions as an excuse for not looking at himself, his own psychology. He decided to change this, go into therapy and start a process of healing and some of you could benefit from taking this as an example, looking at yourselves and saying: “What are my concerns about the world? Are there certain conditions in the world that I am very, very concerned about and I am very, very attached to seeing a specific outcome? And have I put myself in a condition where I feel that I cannot be at peace until this external outcome is manifest?” In other words, my internal state cannot change until the external state has changed.

The attachment to the outer results

This is why you see, as Jesus mentioned, that some people become very, very attached to a particular view of external conditions. It can be the war in Ukraine, the COVID pandemic, the US election and the Trump controversy. It can be any number of other things. But the basic psychology is that if you look at yourself and see that you have certain issues that seem very important to you, more important than attaining peace of mind, for example, then you are crucified. You are hanging on a cross. And you may think that it is the world that has put you on the cross because after all, your concern is only there because of external conditions so if the war stopped, if there was no pandemic, if Trump was president, then you would not feel what you feel. But this is not the reality. If a specific outer condition changed, you would not feel what you feel about that condition. But I can assure you that your mind would then instantly move on and pick another condition that you would be concerned about and attached to an outcome and you would again project that until that external condition was changed, your internal condition could not change.

Your inner state vs. external conditions

Do you see what I am saying? Do you hear what I am saying? The psychology that puts you on the cross is that you think your internal state depends on an external state and that your internal state will automatically and will only change when the external state changes. But this is not reality. Your internal state is your internal state. The external state is just camouflage, an excuse. It is just what focuses your internal state right now. But your internal state would persist after the external state was changed, and you would find another external state to focus on. There are people who have found an ascended master teaching, followed it, practiced the decrees and invocations for decades but they have not made that switch. They are still hanging on the cross of their own making and they have not begun to truly grasp a very, very simple fact. There is a different way to react to external conditions than the one that you have had for this lifetime or perhaps for many lifetimes. There is a different way to react.

And what is the spiritual path all about? It is raising your consciousness. But what does that mean? When you raise your consciousness, will your reaction to certain external conditions stay the same? This is what some people seem to think. But of course, as we have said so many times, by giving the examples of the Buddha overcoming attachments, being confronted with the demons of Mara. When your consciousness is raised, your reaction to external conditions will change. It must change. If you look at yourself and see that you have a certain issue that you have been attached to for some time, then you need to seriously consider: “Have I made progress in raising my consciousness? Have I actually made progress? Have I really overcome the illusion I need to overcome, the separate self I need to overcome? Have I really raised my consciousness?”

Expanding your understanding vs. raising your consciousness

You can say: “But I have expanded my understanding of the world and of the spiritual path and of the teaching so much.” But you can expand your understanding of the world and spiritual teachings in a horizontal way, in an intellectual way by looking at it from a distance, by looking at yourself as a subject, looking at an object. But this is not the same as raising your consciousness, transcending your previous level and rising to a new level. And some of you understand this intellectually, but you have not applied it to yourselves. You have not seen that intellectual understanding is not enough. You need to switch and therefore you are still hanging on the cross. And the proof is your internal tension, your attachment to a specific outcome, your attachment to being right, being seen as right, and proving wrong anyone who either has a different opinion or does not validate your opinion.

If you can see yourself in this pattern, it may be that you have still grown somewhat on the path, but there is clearly a separate self that you have not seen and that you have not overcome. I am not saying this to blame anyone. I am saying it to free you, by making you aware of this. An attachment always comes from a separate self. It cannot be any other way. The Conscious You is not attached to anything on earth. It can experience itself as attached only through a separate self and the attachment resides in the separate self. When you step outside of it, you do not experience the attachment. There is no magic here. It is not that the Buddha was so much more advanced than you. He just did, even though he would not have used those words 2,500 years ago, he just did what we have described. He came to see a separate self, separated himself from it and let it die. And that is why when he sat under the Bo tree, was facing the demons of Mara, they could not tempt him into reacting because he had no selves that were attached to anything on earth. What is the way to truly free yourself from the cross? Free yourselves from these selves, especially the reactionary selves.

Knowing that there is an alternative to the conditions on earth

Now, there are of course, different types of these selves. We have hinted at it before, but I will say it again and it is easiest to explain with an avatar because you come to earth from a natural planet. You have not been here on earth before and now you face the situation of having to take embodiment on earth and in order to take embodiment, you have to first go to the 144th level, where you take on a particular illusion. That allows you to go to the 143rd level where you take on another illusion and you keep going until you reach the 48th level. However, this does not mean that you as an avatar, look at and experience life the same way as a person who was created as the original inhabitant of earth, and who has perhaps, after going below the 48th level, risen back up to the 48th level.

You can have an original inhabitant at the 48th level and an avatar at the 48th level and they have the same illusions above them and in order to follow the path of the ascension, they have to overcome these illusions. But it does not mean they have the same worldview, the same attitude, the same approach to life on earth. Why? Because the original inhabitant has never experienced an alternative, a different environment than earth but the avatar has. And even though you do not remember this consciously, you still have a certain sense that there is something beyond earth and therefore you are not as attached to earth as the original inhabitant.

Reactionary selves based on the illusions of separation

That is why, as is described in the My Lives book, when the protagonist descended to the first embodiment, he had a greater awareness than most people on earth. But he still had taken on those specific illusions. What does that mean? It means that the illusions you take on from the 144th level to the 48th level are illusions based on the current conditions on earth, meaning the density of matter, how the earth is designed, how your physical body is designed and functions. But above the 48th level, these illusions are not based on duality and the illusion of separation. Those you only take on when you go below the 48th level, or you can also take them on at the 48th level and higher by reacting to those people who are trapped in duality and therefore, as we have explained with the fallen beings, expose you to this very dramatic situation that causes your cosmic birth trauma.

These are not the same selves that you take on in order to descend to the 48th level. They are what I would call reactionary selves, where you are reacting to those in the duality consciousness, whether it is the original inhabitants or the fallen beings. The original inhabitants often ignore an avatar or put you down in various ways. But the fallen beings will often attack you directly and seek to destroy you to the best of their ability. As an avatar who starts at the 48th level, it is impossible to not react to this, given the density of the collective consciousness on earth.

The reactionary outlook on life

You now start the path at the 48th level, you go up to the 49th, the 50th, you keep going above but what you need to recognize here is that as you create these reactionary selves you shift, and this is again almost inevitable. You shift your outlook, your worldview, your approach to life on earth. You come here as an avatar, you have a positive view of earth, positive view of what you can do here and you shift this as you are exposed to the birth trauma. It is almost impossible to maintain a positive outlook on earth after you have been exposed to the birth trauma. You can regain it when you overcome the birth trauma, but this does not happen at the 48th level.

So, you start the spiritual path, you find the spiritual movement and you are going up, you are rising in consciousness because you are overcoming some of these illusions, some of these selves that you took on to go down to the 48th level. You can come to a point where you are now at the 96th level of consciousness, meaning you overcome all the illusions between the 48th and 96th level. Now, most people when they go through this they do also change at least somewhat their outlook on life, their approach to earth but not all. You can maintain the reactionary outlook on life, the not so positive outlook on earth that you took on after the birth trauma.

The question is, as you come closer and closer to the 96th level, can you let go of this? This reactionary worldview, can you let it go and return to the original view that you came with as an avatar? If you cannot, then you cannot pass that initiation at the 96th level and stop focusing on yourself. You cannot go to the 97th level unless you overcome that not so positive outlook, the reactionary outlook you took on. That is where students can then start going down again because they become so attached to validating and proving right the outlook on life that they accepted as a result of reacting to the fallen beings. Not only what the fallen beings did to you, but some of the illusions that the fallen being used to attack you, to try to fool you or to just get you to react. You have adopted a reactionary outlook which you are meant to overcome, that is what the spiritual path is all about. But if you do not see this, if you are not willing to question it and overcome it, then you can start going down from whatever level you are at and you are now so focused on validating this self, that you are not as Jesus described it, you cannot follow Christ. You are more concerned about validating your negative outlook on earth than following Christ, overcoming the outlook, letting it die, letting it go. You cannot say: “What is that to me? I will follow thee,” you cannot let that separate self die.

Overcoming attachments to conditions on earth

Now, of course, I am not hereby saying that when you return to the positive outlook you had when you came as an avatar, you are home free because what you need to do above the 96th level is that you need to start considering: “But why did I come to earth? What was the outlook I had on earth? And how was that actually limiting me?” Because you thought that you have to do specific things on earth, you have to change other people according to the vision you had from a natural planet. You need to step up, as we have explained also several times, to fully grasping free will, to fully accepting that free will must be allowed to outplay itself. That is when you need to reconsider again, why should your inner state be linked to, be dependent on, an outer state on earth?

Basically, you can say that it is when you go above the 96th level that you really start the path of Christhood, before that it is the path of self-mastery as we have named it with the Chohans but up above that, you start the path of Christhood. But what is Christhood? What is Christhood? It is for an avatar, overcoming all identification, not only with the earth, but with a natural planet. If you are an original inhabitant of earth, you need to overcome all identification with the earth. This means that you come to this point that Jesus demonstrated, that the Buddha demonstrated, when the prince of this world has nothing in you, because you have no attachments to conditions on earth. You are basically saying, regardless of what conditions are on earth: “I will manifest my Christhood. I will walk the path of Christhood. I will take the next step up on Christhood, even though there are these external conditions on earth that I clearly see are not ideal and really should not be there.” But you will not let it hold you back from taking the next step up, which means overcoming the next illusion, overcoming the next step itself.

The essence of the path to Christhood

There is nothing glamorous as such, about walking the path of Christhood. As you saw, there was nothing particularly glamorous about Jesus and his path. You may say, yes, it was glamorous when he was received as a king when he entered Jerusalem riding on a donkey, but then see how quickly that changed and now he was arrested, the people denied him, he was tortured, he had to walk and carry the cross and he was crucified. The symbol of the crucifixion is that hopefully you will not have to go through a physical crucifixion, physically being tortured and killed, but you are still going through it in your mind. You are still going through this and the question is always, will you let the world crucify you? Or will you strive to attain inner psychological spiritual independence so that no matter what the world does, you are not feeling that you are held fixated on a cross.

You have transcended that level of consciousness where the world can stop your growth or where the world can define you, what you are and what you are not. This is the key consideration. If you find yourself having an attachment to a particular outcome on earth, you can see if you are willing, that this comes because you have not transcended the attitude, the approach, the outlook that you took on after you came to earth and were exposed to the fallen beings and the original inhabitants and what they did to you. I am not blaming you. It is very natural that you had that reaction. We all had a reaction. We all had our individual reaction but they followed the same pattern. It is not that I was so sophisticated that I did not react when I first came to earth. It is not that Jesus or the Buddha was so sophisticated that they did not react. This is in fact one of the important aspects of the My Lives book, showing that Jesus took embodiment like everybody else and that he had a certain reaction so that you can all see that it is perfectly fine that you reacted.

But you can also see why did Mother Mary ascend, why did Jesus ascend, why did the Buddha ascend, why did Saint Germain and Master More ascend? Because we overcame the reaction. We came to a point of saying: “We will not let conditions on this planet and we will not let our reaction to conditions on this planet define us anymore.” That is the path to Christhood, or at least part of it, when you stop letting external states determine your internal state. As long as you are reacting to anything on earth, you are crucified. You are on some kind of cross. You may go up in consciousness, you may overcome the illusions I have talked about, but if you still carry with you that reactionary self, you are crucified by that self and you will remain crucified until you make that shift. And as Jesus said, you can make that shift basically at any time above the 48th level, but certainly as you get closer to the 96th level, it becomes easier to make it. But you need to make it in order to get down from the cross, in order to transcend the cross and of course, we want our direct students to get down from the cross.

Getting down from the cross

Now again, the reactionary self cannot take you down from the cross. You need the perspective from outside your own mind. That is what we offer you with our teachings and with our willingness to assist you personally. But for you to receive our assistance and make use of it, the Conscious You has to be willing to separate itself from the reactionary self. You have to be willing to look at it and say: “Oh, I do have a reactionary self, that is why I am so concerned about the world, that is why I am so attached to the world.” And when you are willing to make that shift, where you are willing to look at the self instead of defending it, then we can help you and you can fairly quickly get down from that cross. This means that now you can actually really start having an impact on changing the earth. Your invocations and decrees will have a much greater effect. But not only that, you will also have a much greater effect on pulling up on the collective consciousness. So long as you are in this reactionary self, there is a limit to the effect you can have on the collective consciousness, even if you raise your consciousness above the 48th level, because you are reacting just like most people on earth are reacting and that doesn’t raise the consciousness, at least not in that aspect of it. Of course, it raises the consciousness somewhat, but not to the full extent that it could if you shift it out of that reactionary self.

This also means that you can now start what we have called the creative phase of your divine plan or the revolutionary phase of your divine plan because you can now start acting instead of reacting. What the fallen beings have done on earth is to put most people on earth in a reactionary mode where they are always reacting to the fallen beings. As an avatar, how are you going to help raise the earth if you are also reacting to the fallen beings? It cannot be done. We have given you the tools, we have given you the teachings, and all we are trying to say is, consider whether it is time for you to make this switch that will take you down from the cross so you are no longer hanging on it, you are free to be yourself.

Just let it flow

If you want a simple measure, watch the messenger’s videos where he talks about his path. Monitor yourself, your own reactions, whatever you feel, whatever thoughts come up and see how you react to the way he talks, the way he talks about himself. If you look at these, you will see that as he is perfectly well aware, that he could not have made these videos very long ago because he was not free. But now he has attained a high degree of freedom, non-attachment, so he can just speak without any predefined script and just let it flow. You can do the same. All of you have the same potential to speak freely, to express yourself freely, without being so concerned about the reactions, the standards of this world, whether they do this, whether they say that. Does it matter? Does it matter to you, all of these human reactions? If you see that you have a reaction to this, that you do not feel free, that you would not be able to speak so freely, then that is part of this reactionary self because you are concerned about: “How would the world react to my speaking about myself?” Then you can use our tools to go after that so that you can gradually come to the point where you can be free, you can be at peace to express yourself. Just express yourself and let this flow based on your experiences, but also coming from your I AM Presence, let the spirit flow through you. That is what we desire for all of you.

It is good that one person can do it, but it is better that many people can do it and you will all feel more free if you can do it, even if you do not do it. The fact that you are free to do it means you are free in many other ways to do other things in life. It is that freedom that we have and that we desire to see you have. In a sense, you could say that everything we have ever done as ascended masters is to help people attain the same freedom that we have. You cannot quite achieve the same freedom while you are still in embodiment, but you can certainly achieve as great of a freedom as it is possible to have on a planet like earth.

Giving decrees and invocations with a positive attitude

So this is what we desire for you and again, I am not thereby saying you should ignore conditions in the world. It is important that you give your decrees, your invocations, your Mother Mary 500 vigil for the economy (I know it has been going on for a long time, but it is because it is a very important topic as you can see by these latest bank failures and how this is sending shockwaves through the entire financial system).

Your work has a very important impact. The vigil for spiritual healing that some of you have participated in also has an important impact on the collective consciousness. Our webinars and our conferences have a very important impact. All of these things are important. I am not trying to say here that you should not be doing it. I am only saying  that you can actually do the same work with a more positive attitude and that this will make you feel better about yourself and about being on earth. Some of you have this attitude that you cannot really enjoy life on earth because the planet is so dark. In fact, the messenger  had for many years this attitude that he was not here for his own enjoyment, he was here to make a positive difference and that is why he could set aside so much of his personal life to focus on moving to the United States, living near the headquarters of his movement and giving all of these hours of decrees. Although this was necessary for, and part of his Divine Plan, it was not necessary or mandated that he do it with this sense that he could not allow himself to enjoy life on earth.

Enjoying life on earth

You are on earth. You are in a physical body. Earth is a very difficult planet to be on. It is actually difficult to be in a body as dense as the bodies you have on earth but you can still find enjoyment and it is not sinful and it is not anti-spiritual. Certainly beyond just even enjoying life on earth, you can enjoy being alive, being conscious, being self-aware. Self-awareness is an incredible gift. Self-awareness, being aware as a being, as an individual expression of the one being, the one mind of God, is an incredible gift. But as long as you are trapped in this reactionary self, you cannot see that. You cannot experience it because for you, self-awareness is a burden because there are all these outer states that are affecting your inner state, so you are not really self-aware. You are aware of a self, you are aware through a self, but you are not “self-aware” as the Conscious You being aware of itself as not being all of these selves, but being an extension of the I AM Presence and being pure awareness, meaning you have not become the selves you have created in order to take embodiment on earth or the selves you have created in reaction.

The conscious self creates these selves, but it does not become the selves and it is when you realize that, when you acknowledge that consciously, that you can start enjoying self-awareness even in an environment like earth. This is what I, who holds the office as the Divine Mother, desire. I desire it for all people, but the vast majority of people on earth are very far from being able to achieve it. But you who are our direct students, you could achieve it fairly quickly if you are willing to go through this switch that we have been talking about.

Why are we talking about it at this conference? Because many of you, by following the path, by using the tools, you are ready to make that switch. Not necessarily right now, not necessarily tomorrow, but within a short period of time, you can make that switch.

 

Copyright © 2023 Kim Michaels

 

Back to Taking Christianity and yourself down from the cross

What happens to the soldiers who died in the war in Ukraine?


Listen to a recording of this dictation (subscribers only)

Ascended Master Elohim Astrea through Kim Michaels, April 8, 2023. This dictation was given during the 2023 Easter webinar – Taking Christianity and yourself down from the cross.

I AM the Ascended Master Elohim Astrea. I have decided to take this opportunity to give you some insights into how the Karmic Board evaluates situations on earth and seeks to help people, including how I seek to cut people free so that after they leave embodiment they can go to the highest possible place that will help them move forward in their individual paths.

Ascended masters want to help all people grow

I will focus on the war in Ukraine and I will, at least to begin with, focus on what happens to soldiers who leave embodiment. First of all, you need to recognize that we who are the ascended masters do not have the same view of situations on earth as human beings do. This is not said to blame human beings. It is natural that when you are inside a physical body, you come from a specific background, you look at situations in a specific way. But we, of course, have transcended all of these human biases and viewpoints, so we look at it from the perspective of the Christ mind. The Christ mind sees, of course, the oneness between all expressions of God’s consciousness because without Him was not anything made that was made, so God’s consciousness is within everything and everyone.

We see that all human beings are sons and daughters of God, or at least started out that way, and they have since then descended, many of them, to a lower sense of identity. Our task as ascended masters is to help all people make progress towards coming to the point where they can recognize their origin, their identity, and they do this, of course, by coming to see beyond these outer divisions that divide people and put them in conflicts on earth. What I am saying here is that when we look at a situation like the war in Ukraine, we do not have human judgments. We are not judging that this is wrong, that is right, although we, of course, clearly see that what Russia as a nation is doing in Ukraine is a violation of the law of free will. Nevertheless, what I am specifically focused on here is how do we seek to help the individual people, and especially the soldiers, the civilians that have gone out of embodiment as a result of this war. For us there is no difference in our desire to help both Ukrainians and Russians, but there are some differences in how we can go about this. But these differences in how we seek to help people, they are not coming from us or from our consciousness. They are coming because the people on the two sides have different approaches, different states of mind.

Let me begin by talking about Russian soldiers. Many of you who live outside of Russia have studied what has happened. You know that many thousands, tens of thousands of Russian soldiers, have been killed. You also know that there have been some atrocities, some war crimes, committed by Russian soldiers against civilians and of course, against Ukrainian soldiers. You know that in medicine they have a principle called a triage. If they have a large number of casualties, they rank them in three different categories based on whether they can be helped and how they might best be helped. In a sense we have a similar evaluation when we look at Russian soldiers, and we must look at their state of consciousness: the state of consciousness they had before they entered the war, what has happened to them in the time they have been in the war and of course the state of consciousness they now have when they leave embodiment.

Russian soldiers who cannot be helped

There are some Russian soldiers that we cannot help. This applies specifically to those who have committed the worst kind of atrocities or war crimes. Those who have killed civilians, raped women, targeted civilian buildings and infrastructure even if they have done it with rockets at a distance. They are often so entrenched in a certain mindset, and the mindset is basically this: at a deeper level of their being they know that what they are doing is a violation of free will, but at the surface levels of their minds they will not, they cannot, bear to admit this. There are especially many among the professional soldiers used by the Wagner group that fall into this category. In other words, we have to look at: can we help people at all? And if their minds are completely closed, if they are not at all willing to consider what they are doing from a higher perspective, we cannot help them. What I am explaining here is that if you look universally at human beings, you will see that when a human being leaves the physical body, that human being has a unique opportunity to look at its life and its state of consciousness from the outside, so to speak, from a higher perspective. However, if the person was in a very closed state of mind before the person left embodiment, then they will be unable or unwilling to do this. They will be unwilling to look at their life because they could not bear to see from a neutral perspective what they are actually doing, what effect it had on other people and what effect it will have on themselves in the future. You could say they cannot bear to acknowledge what karma they made.

These people we cannot help. Therefore, where do they go when they leave embodiment? They go to various levels of what we have called the astral plane which is the lower emotional realm where people with a closed mind have gone. Some have been there for a long time because they are in such a low state that they cannot go back into embodiment. There are realms in the astral plane that are like the hell that many people envision. In fact, the poet Dante who saw the nine circles of hell had a vision of some of these levels, not all of them but some of them. There are these levels of the astral plane that have a certain hellish appearance and these very closed-minded soldiers, they go there. And there they are exposed to people or lifestreams at the same level of consciousness. And they are even exposed to some of the same dynamic that they were exposed to in the Russian army or in the Wagner group where they have superiors who are very abusive, who do not care about them, who will abuse them in various ways and so they find themselves in conflict. As they were in conflict while they were alive they are in conflict after they leave the body.

There is not much more to say about this. The specific conditions in the astral plane are not particularly important other than to say that people are, of course, attracted to a specific level that corresponds to their own level of consciousness, where they are confronted with beings who are doing to them what they did to others in their last embodiment, especially during the war. In other words, they are experiencing that they are on the receiving end of what they did to others so they can experience what it is like to be exposed to basically themselves. What was it like to be on the receiving end of what they did in the war? Because this is, and we look at this with a long history of working with human beings, sometimes the only way that a lifestream can be turned around, can turn itself around, can come to see that: “I no longer want to experience this, which means I have to change myself.” It does not work for all of them but it works for some. The specific conditions they experience are not that important.

Russian soldiers who are confused

Now there is another category of lifestreams, of soldiers, and they are the ones who, in some way or other, have bought into the mindset behind the Russian invasion. There is a certain mindset in the army and among the population that have bought into the idea of Russian superiority, the Russian empire, that Russia has a right to invade Ukraine for various reasons. In other words, they have entered the war with a certain, what we might call, ideological mindset, even though it is not what you would traditionally call an ideology such as communism. But it is still an ideological mindset where they have bought into this narrative that Putin and the Russian power elite have created around the war about Russia’s greatness and the Russian empire, and the need to restore the Russian empire and to defend Russia against NATO or even liberate the Ukrainian people from the Nazis in Kiev.

Whatever excuses are out there in the Russian propaganda space, we might say, they have bought into it. They have believed in it. But they have experienced that the war was not at all what they expected, so when they leave embodiment they are somewhat confused. And the confusion means that their minds are open. There is at least some openness in their minds. And this means that we now have an opportunity to work with such people. And what is then done is that the soul or the lifestream is taken to a place that is pleasant to the lifestream. This does not mean that they get 70 virgins in heaven as the Muslims imagine, but they are taken to a place that we might call a place of peace and rest where they can receive healing at a psychological level. And then, gradually as they calm down, as they feel some rest and healing, we offer them the opportunity of looking at their life, looking at their mindset, the mindset they were brought up with, the mindset they had during the war, looking at it from a neutral perspective. And if they take this opportunity then some of them can be helped, some of them cannot. Those who cannot be helped, in other words those who are not willing to accept what they see from a neutral perspective, they go back into the same mindset they had when they were in embodiment and refuse to question it. There are also some that do not even take the opportunity to look at it neutrally. They want to hold on to that mindset. In that case we again cannot help them. We must let them go and they will also gravitate to a certain level of the astral plane.

Russian soldiers who can make a shift

But those who take the opportunity, those who are willing to look at their mindset from a neutral perspective, even look at their actions and even look at the greater context of Russia and why Russia entered this war, they will be helped to very gradually, and this does not happen all at once, but it happens very gradually, come to see more and more, come to, so to speak, look at certain elements of their mindset and their actions, and Russia, from a neutral perspective. This means they will make some kind of shift. How big of a shift they are able or willing to make is an individual matter. But those who at least make some shift, some of them stop at a certain point. They are willing to make some shift, but they are not willing to go further. They then go to a level of the astral plane that is higher than the people with entirely closed minds. They are not quite exposed to exactly the same, but they are exposed to what corresponds to the level of consciousness they did not want to transcend, they did not want to look at.

But there are others who are willing to look and who gradually go up to where they can see that they had allowed themselves as they were growing up, as they were drafted for the war, as they entered the war, they had allowed themselves to come to believe in a complete illusion, a complete fabrication. The entire Russian mindset, justification, propaganda apparatus around the war is completely unreal, complete fiction. It is a complete lie. And some of these soldiers that were killed at the war can rise to that level where they eventually become able to see this. And this means they can now go to a higher level.

They do not actually even go to the emotional realm. They go to the mental realm where they can now receive help in greatly expanding their understanding of the world and how the world works and how they can come to see through the illusions that they could not see through while they were in embodiment. There are special levels of the mental realm that are set up directly to help this. They are somewhat similar to the retreats of the ascended masters, but they are, of course, not ascended master retreats because those are only found in the higher identity realm. But they are specific, you might say, a combination of a school and a healing center where people can receive help to expand their understanding of how the world works, how they can avoid in their next embodiment being pulled into a similar complete fiction. It does not have to be in Russia, it can be elsewhere.

Russian soldiers who believed official propaganda

Then there is a third category and they are the people who, before they entered the war, did not actually buy into the Russian propaganda. They could see that it was not justified to launch a war against the neighboring nation and some of them could see this because they grew up in a Christian environment and despite what the patriarch of the Russian Orthodox Church has said about the war being justified by God, they could see that as a Christian it can never be justified to kill other people.

Some of them had still volunteered to be in the army because they were willing to defend their home country, but they could also see that when you are attacking another country, you are not actually defending your home country. There were others that simply did not believe in what they were told, that had their own opinions as they were growing up and many of these had not volunteered for the army, but they were drafted into the army. This category of people were already open to seeing through the illusions before they left embodiment, and they often conducted themselves in the war in such a way that they did not commit any war crimes or cruelty, and they tried to the best of their ability to avoid killing anyone. When these soldiers leave embodiment, they are already ready to receive our help, so they can very quickly come to look at the entire situation from a neutral perspective and therefore they can quickly rise to this level of the mental realm where they can receive further education and healing.

The punishment of your own state of mind

Now, even though we cannot help the lowest category of soldiers, I still want to make a few remarks about what actually happens to them. They go to a level of the astral plane where they are exposed to the exact same kind of mindset, the exact same kind of insensitivity to life, the exact same kind of cruelty that they had. But now, instead of being the perpetrators who had victims such as unarmed civilians, they are the victims, and there are others who are insensitive to them, cruel to them, exposing them to all these things that they themselves did. The question now is, how long do they stay in this environment? And that depends very much on how closed their minds are, and how closed their minds are depends very much on what they had actually done while they were still in embodiment. How many people had they killed or tortured or raped or whatever they did? Because the more actions you commit that you know at a deeper level are not right, the more closed your mind becomes. There is a consideration you can make here and it is not really something we need to make as ascended masters, but I want to make you aware of it because it can help you understand the situation.

You have, of course, the traditional teachings about karma and many people see karma as a form of punishment. You do something wrong such as killing other people and you are sent to this level of the astral plane in this hellish environment exposed to this torture as a form of punishment. This is how many people come to see what they call bad karma. But this is, of course, not how we of the ascended masters see it. Nevertheless, if you take this traditional view of karma you would say that if you look at a particular soldier, the more people he killed in the war, the more severe of a karma he made and the longer time he would have to spend in this hellish environment before he had been punished sufficiently. Therefore from this perspective, it was actually better that he was killed when he was because if he had stayed in embodiment he could have killed more people and therefore made more karma.

As I said, karma is not, from the ascended perspective, punishment. But what is punishment, even though nobody does this to anybody, the ascended masters are not inflicting punishment, what is punishment is your own state of mind, so as I said, the more people you kill the more entrenched you become in your state of mind, the state of mind that allows you to kill people and justify it, or continue to do it even if you do not need to justify it. The more entrenched you become in your state of mind and therefore in a sense it is easier for the people who were killed quickly than it is for those who stayed in embodiment longer and killed more people. You can see how you can say, as many among the Russian people say: “Oh, it was so sad that our soldiers were killed.” But in some cases it was actually a grace that they were killed because they would have been much worse off if they had stayed in embodiment and killed more people.

This, of course, does not mean that we of the ascended masters wish that people die or go out of embodiment. I am simply giving you this consideration because part of what I am attempting to do here is give you a different perspective on situations like this. What can we say now? We can say that from the ascended perspective we only have one concern, and that is: How can we help people grow? How can we help everyone grow? And as I said, some people we cannot help directly, they must simply continue in the school of hard knocks as they have been in, often for lifetimes, in order to get to that low state of consciousness where they can do what they did.

But there are some we can help and we attempt to help them, and our purpose is always to help them grow. And our purpose is when a person has gone out of embodiment that we can help them heal and grow to the point where when they come into their next embodiment, they can come into a higher situation than what they came into in their last embodiment. Those who we cannot help, who go to these hellish levels, they stay there for a certain time and then at least some of them will at some point go back into embodiment. But they will not come back into a better situation than they had in their last lifetime. They might actually come back in a worse situation. And some of them will embody in Russia again, some of them will embody in North Korea, some of them will embody in China, but many of them will embody in Africa in areas with this tribal warfare.

Those whom we can help and who raise their level of consciousness, they will embody in more beneficial situations that are more beneficial for growth. Some of them will still embody in Russia, but come in with a higher level of consciousness and of course Russia will change, but others will embody in other nations, some even in the western democracies. Of course, a considerable portion of the Russian soldiers who die in Ukraine and are willing to be helped will in their next lifetime embody in Ukraine. Such is the case in many cases where there has been war between nations. As we have said before, many of the Nazi soldiers and officials from the Second World War have embodied in Israel.

The change is coming in Russia

Another consideration that I want to bring to your attention here is that there are some of you that look at Russia and you think that: “Well, nothing much has changed. Most people are still positive towards the war, the economy is not doing so badly, when will it ever change?” Well, as Mother Mary actually said in an answer at the last webinar, if you could see what is happening at the identity, mental and emotional levels, you will see that change is coming in Russia, and Russia will change in the coming years. Regardless of how long the war keeps going, Russia will change. The change has already begun. It has already become irreversible. And you can see this on the outer by the fact that the authorities are becoming more and more frantic on clamping down on anybody who criticizes the war. You can see that even some teenagers have been arrested for just mentioning the forbidden word on social media. And what kind of nation does that except a nation that is desperate? It is a sign of desperation. In fact, any nation that kills or imprisons its own citizens is a clear act of desperation. And desperation comes because even though they do not acknowledge this consciously, they know it is slipping away from them. They cannot keep this up indefinitely.

The pull on the collective consciousness of Russia

But what I wanted to talk about here is that when you look at these soldiers that have left embodiment as a result of the war, they are no longer in a physical body. But you should not think that means that they are completely disconnected from Russia. As we have explained, every nation has a collective consciousness. It has an emotional, a mental and an identity component. And the Russian soldiers that have been killed in Ukraine are still tied into that collective consciousness, in the emotional, mental and identity realms. Even the soldiers who have gone to these hellish realms are tied into the Russian consciousness. They are pulling on the Russian consciousness. Those soldiers who have received our help, accepted our help and have risen to higher levels of consciousness, they are pulling the collective consciousness up. But those soldiers who have gone into the astral plane, they are pulling the collective consciousness down. And what this means is that they are pulling on the decision makers from Putin and all the way down, and the other soldiers in the army that are in these very closed states of mind. This means they are pulling them to become more and more extreme, willing to take more and more extreme measures, which you have already seen, but will see more and more, depending on how long the war goes on. And the purpose of this, of course, if there was a purpose, it is really the outplaying of free will, but the potential positive outcome that can come out of this is that things can become so extreme that those who are still in embodiment start to see it, start to acknowledge that this is too much, this is too extreme.

Why are they doing this to me?

Many of the soldiers who are still in Ukraine and who have not been killed, and many of the soldiers who have been wounded and have gone to Russia or are still in Ukraine, they have started to see this. For example, you have a soldier who has bought into the entire Russian propaganda effort that he is there to fight for his country and do something important for his country, risking his life to do something important for his country. He comes into Ukraine. He is, first of all, not given any training, not given proper equipment, maybe not even good food, tents or sleeping bags. He is thrown out there in a group of people. They do not have the right weapons. They do not have the right support. They might even not have the right leadership or not have good leadership. And then he is told to run over an open field towards Ukrainian soldiers who are sitting in fortified positions in trenches. And he might have a rifle, but they have machine guns. And anybody who has minimum intelligence can see this is suicide. And anybody can see that you are not serving your country this way. You are not helping your country because you will be shot and you have no chance of shooting the enemy.

What could possibly be the purpose of this? If you survive this situation, then it does start a thinking process. It cannot help but start a thinking process that says: “Why? Why do they want me to die without even having a chance of fighting? Why are they sending me out to die? Why don’t they care about giving us training and equipment? Why don’t they have good leaders? What is the purpose of this war? Why are we doing this?” All of these kinds of questions. And they may not be willing to talk about it. They may not even really be willing to think about it consciously, but the questions are percolating in their subconscious minds. It cannot be any other way because you cannot face death without having a question come up in your mind: “Why? Why is this happening to me?” And when you see that your country is forcing you into the situation, you cannot help but wonder: “Why are they doing this to me? They say that Russia is an important nation. Therefore, I am important as a Russian and it is important that I serve my country. But then they put me in a situation where I am not serving my country. I am just dying for no purpose whatsoever. Why are they doing this to me?”

A great upheaval

And you will see, if you could see what we see from the ascended realm, how in the mental body of Russians, of Russia as a nation, all of these questions are swirling around. They are gaining momentum. It started with the soldiers at the front and with the more aware people, but it is percolating through wider and wider rings of the population, depending on their level of consciousness. Those at the highest levels see it first. Those at the lower levels will be the last to see it. But it is moving through the consciousness. Then, of course, you have at the emotional level, how can you be sent against machine guns without proper equipment, without having feelings? How can you feel that you narrowly escape death without having strong feelings? Well, you cannot, except if you are a psychopath or a narcissist who is completely numb. But normal people will have very strong feelings.

You might be a Russian mother who is patriotic, and therefore, you are proud when your son goes to war. But when he comes back wounded, or when he is reported dead, or when he is reported missing, or when you do not receive any information about where he is and whether he is alive or not, you cannot help but have strong feelings. The same for any kind of relative. If you could see the Russian collective emotional body, you would see this great upheaval. You would see the forming of these vortexes that are pulling more and more people into them every day. Then you could go to the identity level, and you can see that, again, there are questions arising about the Russian national identity. And this actually started when the war started, because the people who had the highest level of awareness, many of them left. But you may think they are outside of Russia, but of course, they are still tied in to the emotional, mental, and identity bodies, and they are also pulling on them.

The irreversible cycle of change in Russia

After the war started, many people in Russia started quietly questioning the national identity: “Do we really need to see ourselves as an empire? Do we really need to seek superiority? And especially, do we need to seek it through force?” What does this all lead to? Well, it leads to the consideration that when Putin made the decision, and the people around him made the decision, to invade Ukraine, he started an irreversible cycle that will bring change to Russia. It was not that change was not already happening in Russia, primarily because of all the many spiritual people in Russia, whether they are following this dispensation or other spiritual teachings. There was growth in Russia, and as we have said before, the ideal scenario was that this had continued gradually. But what Putin did was put Russia into a spiral where the gradual change has been suspended, and instead more dramatic changes will happen. There will have to be a more dramatic outer event that wakes up the majority of the Russian population quicker than they otherwise would have done. And this is irreversible. It cannot be stopped.

Naturally, from the ascended perspective, we would have preferred a peaceful, gradual growth of both Ukraine and Russia. But again, everything is subject to the law of free will, and the Russian people are certainly not without responsibility for the power elite doing what they did, and therefore the Russian people will also be affected and will have to change much faster and in a much more abrupt way than they otherwise would. Even in Ukraine, as we have talked about with the division before the war, this has now been accelerated to the point where Ukraine needs to develop a national identity that it did not have before.

The situation of deceased Ukrainian soldiers

What about Ukrainian soldiers? Much the same considerations apply there in the sense that there are a small number of Ukrainian soldiers who are in a very low state of consciousness. They are killing without feeling any empathy or remorse. And they, of course, will also, if they are not willing to change, go to these levels of the astral plane. But the vast majority of Ukrainian soldiers that have left embodiment have been in a category where they have immediately been willing to receive our help, because they have not been in the mindset that the Russian soldiers are in. They have seen that they are being attacked and they are defending their own country, their own family, against the attackers. It is not that they cannot see that killing people is wrong. They know this. They just feel that they have no other option than to defend themselves.

The healing process and the sense of brotherhood

When they leave embodiment, they are generally more open to looking at their state of mind and actions from a neutral perspective, so many more of them can actually be helped and rise up to these levels of the mental realm. And what happens in these retreats in the mental realm, it is not that we have one for Russian soldiers and one for Ukrainian soldiers. They are put together. And now they interact and they come to look at the situation with a common understanding. They actually often forgive each other and they come to a greater sense of brotherhood and oneness as a result of this.

There is a certain healing process that is starting there that in the coming years can influence both nations and hopefully help them move on quicker than otherwise. Because once these soldiers leave embodiment, the Russian soldiers who can be helped, they do not have a desire for Russia to win and for Ukraine to be conquered or destroyed. And the Ukrainian soldiers that leave embodiment, they do not have a hatred of Russians. They do not want Russia to be destroyed, but they, of course, want Ukraine to remain as a separate nation. And most of the Russian soldiers reach the same conclusion. They see that this was simply a move that was a complete fiction. The justification for the war was a complete fiction because Russians and Ukrainians should be able to live together in peace and see each other as brothers. And they want this much more than they want Ukraine to be conquered and Russia to be a great empire. These soldiers can come to an understanding. There are examples of a Russian soldier killed a Ukrainian soldier and the Russian soldier was later killed or even the other way around. And they meet in this retreat, and now they can reconcile. They can forgive each other. They can realize that this was not personal, that this was something they were forced to do by circumstances. There is a healing process that is beginning from the soldiers from both sides who have accepted our help and risen to a higher level.

Rising above all attachments and conditions on earth

These are some of the considerations that we wanted to give you in order to give you a different perspective. You understand that when you are in human incarnation, when you are in embodiment, you look at situations and you often form a specific outcome of what you want to see happen. And even from the ascended perspective, we look at the situation and we want the Ukrainian people to have their own separate nation and we want the Russian people to grow as much as possible as a result of this. Whether they can maintain Russia as a collective nation is not a given. It is an insecurity right now what will happen to Russia as a result of this war. But beyond such concerns, and you can say even these concerns are based on the desire to help as many people as possible grow, our overall concern is to help people grow. It is not that we are attached to, or focused on, a specific outcome. We always focus on helping people grow and then the actual outcome in the physical is of secondary importance, because the way we look at the world is that everything is an opportunity to grow.

And what did Jesus say in his first dictation today about the Easter story? The purpose of any story is to have a positive impact on those who receive the story. Well, everything on earth is a story, so we are looking at all conditions as just a story that has the purpose of giving people an opportunity to grow. And we are always seeking to help any group of people grow and therefore use whatever story they accept to help them grow. And therefore, the actual physical conditions, the actual physical outcomes, are for us a means to an end.

Of course, you can look at human history and see that when people go into the duality consciousness, when they go into the illusion of separation, then they cannot see the outer conditions as a means to an end. They become an end in itself. And that is why they become so attached to manifesting a specific outcome that they are willing to kill or go to war in order to manifest it. You can become so attached to your dream of creating a great empire that you are willing to go to extreme measures in order to manifest it. But of course, when you do this, you also encounter an extreme opposition and therefore you usually end up destroying yourself and often the empire you were seeking to create, as you clearly saw with Hitler and his desire to create a nazi empire that enveloped the entire earth.

If there is a lesson of history, this is certainly one of them: that if you become attached to an outcome, then that outcome must at some point be shattered for you to become free of your attachment. And that is why as a spiritual student it is so important to look at your attachments. Are you attached to a specific outcome? And then begin to question it. But that is, of course, what Jesus has already expounded upon, so I will not go into it further, even though it is, of course, my role as the Elohim of the Fourth Ray to cut spiritual people free from their attachments, from the collective consciousness, from the astral plane, from the mental realm, from the identity realm.

With this, I thank you for your attention. I thank you for your willingness to wrestle with these conditions. And I hope that those of you who are from Russia and Ukraine can see beyond this conflict and see that you are not first of all Ukrainians and Russians. You are first of all spiritual people and you all came from the same source and you are all on the path of returning to that source by rising above all attachments, conditions, sense of identity on earth. This I will gladly help you accomplish as you call to me to be cut free.

Astrea, I AM.

 

Copyright © 2023 Kim Michaels

 

Back to Taking Christianity and yourself down from the cross

Experiencing yourself as you are


Listen to a recording of this dictation (subscribers only)

Ascended Master Jesus Christ through Kim Michaels, April 8, 2023. This dictation was given during the 2023 Easter webinar – Taking Christianity and yourself down from the cross.

I AM the Ascended Master Jesus Christ.

As I have hinted at in my previous discourse, what really keeps you fixated on the cross is your own mind. Not, of course, the Conscious You, but the separate selves that you have created as you were reacting to conditions on earth or as you descended to the 48th level of consciousness or descended below it. We might say that an image of this would be that you are not crucified on a cross made of wooden beams. Instead, you are crucified on a cross made of thin steel wires. Each wire is thin and is flexible, but because they are all bundled together, the entire structure is quite rigid and stiff and can therefore hold you fixated. As you overcome one separate self at a time, rising up to the 48th and beyond the 48th and beyond the 96th, you are pulling some of these steel wires out of the cross. And therefore, after some time, the cross that you are hanging on becomes more flexible, more soft, less rigid. It becomes bendable and gives you some freedom of movement.

You can say that as you walk the path, you are gradually taking yourself down from the cross. And in a sense, you can say you will be on a cross until you reach the 144th level and overcome the last illusion. However, this does not mean that you have to be fixated on the cross for the rest of your time in embodiment, for it is possible to step down from the cross at earlier stages. I am not saying you can do this at the 48th level or even at the 96th level, but as you go above the 96th level, you can certainly take yourself down from the cross at any time. Even between the 48th and the 96th level, you can seek to consciously make a switch that will make your personal cross less rigid. In a sense, what we have attempted to give you with the teachings about the Conscious You is a method for taking yourself down from the cross. But this cannot be done intellectually. It can only be done experientially.

Experiencing Christ on the path to self-mastery

Now, I know that there are some students that have studied the teachings about the Conscious You, you have accepted these teachings and you understand and grasp them intellectually. But what is the essence of the teachings about the Conscious You? It is that the Conscious You is not the outer self, the separate selves. The Conscious You creates a self as a pair of colored glasses, it steps into the self and experiences the world through the glasses. But it does not become the self, which means that the Conscious You has the ability to step outside, if only in a glimpse, and experience itself from outside the separate selves. This is what I, in my previous discourse, said is the potential all people have that no matter how trapped you are in the duality consciousness, you can never lose the ability to recognize Christ.

Now, when I say this, I, of course, use a specific terminology common to the Christian religion. But really, how do you then recognize Christ when you are still in this state of illusion in the consciousness of death? Only by the Conscious You stepping outside of your normal state of consciousness, your normal sense of self. Your separate selves are created out of the consciousness of separation, which is the consciousness of antichrist.

Well, antichrist cannot recognize Christ. Antichrist can see Christ as a mental image, as a concept. And this is why if you have the experience that you recognize Christ, and then as Peter did, you superimpose a mental image upon Christ, this is done through the separate selves. In other words, the Conscious You can step outside of your separate selves, experience Christ, but you can only stay there for a moment, then you go back into the separate selves, and now you start superimposing the images and beliefs of the separate selves upon the experience you had from outside the separate selves. And this is why people can go back and forth, experience Christ, superimpose an image, experience Christ again, superimpose another image, and it can keep going like that for a long time. In fact, you can do this until you reach the 96th level, and if you do not pass the initiation at the 96th level, where you let go of your graven images, then you will continue to impose an image, and you will make that image more and more sophisticated until you go towards the lower levels of consciousness, where you are absolutely convinced that your image is an absolute truth.

Even between the 48th and the 96th level, you are going back and forth. You have some glimpses, and then you superimpose an image. Of course, many people below the 48th level can have an experience of Christ, but as soon as they go back into their normal state of awareness, they superimpose an image that makes it difficult for them to have another experience. Now, what can be more difficult to grasp here is that even when you are above the 48th level, even if you know about ascended masters, even if you have these teachings about the Conscious You, it is still possible to understand these teachings intellectually, but you have not actually had the conscious experience of being outside your normal state of mind.

This can be a bit tricky to understand, and this is where words have some limitations. Can you rise to the 48th level without having an encounter with Christ? You can say you cannot. You must experience that there is something beyond your present opinions, your present view of the world, and you must be willing to change your view of the world in order to rise to the 48th level. But you may not have a conscious experience or grasp of what that means. In other words, you can also say that the encounter with Christ is so brief that it does not quite register in the conscious mind. You register there was some shift, you saw something you did not see before, but you are not really aware of yourself as the Conscious You that has stepped outside your four lower bodies, your normal state of mind.

Studying the Conscious You from a distance

You can understand intellectually that we have explained that the Conscious You is pure awareness. You can understand intellectually what it means to step outside of your normal sense of self because you also understand intellectually that you have these selves that color your perception. But it is a different experience when you consciously realize that you have stepped outside your normal state of awareness. And be careful to consider what that means. What is it that happens when you study a spiritual teaching and you formulate a mental image based on the teaching?

Well, whenever you formulate a mental image of anything, and it can be a spiritual teaching, or it can be a rock or a mountain in the distance, you are looking at it from a distance. You are a subject perceiving an object that you see as distinct from yourself. When you get the teaching we have given through this messenger, that you have all these separate selves that color your perception, but that you also have a Conscious You that is not the separate selves, that the core of your identity is the Conscious You, that the Conscious You can step outside of the selves, what can you do? Well, you can formulate an intellectual understanding and mental image of this. What is it that happens here? Well, you are experiencing yourself as a subject who is studying an object, and the object becomes or is the Conscious You. You as a subject are studying the Conscious You as an object, you are understanding it, you are formulating a mental image of it. But what does this mean?

It means you are looking at the Conscious You from a distance. You are studying an object. We tell you that the Conscious You can step outside of your normal state of awareness, but what can you do? You can use your normal state of awareness to create a mental image of what it means to step outside your normal state of awareness. You can formulate a mental image of what it is like to be outside your normal state of awareness. You can hear us say that the Conscious You is pure awareness, but to you this is just a concept, so you formulate a mental image of what pure awareness means, and you might try to use this concept of pure awareness to experience pure awareness. But you see, this cannot be done. This cannot be done. Why? Because the Conscious You is not an object that you, the subject, can study. As long as you think the Conscious You is an object remote from yourself that you are studying from a distance, you cannot experience the Conscious You. You cannot step outside of your normal state of awareness because in your normal state of awareness you see yourself as a subject studying objects or ideas.

Experiencing yourself as the Conscious You

What is it that needs to happen in order for the Conscious You to step outside your normal state of awareness? Well, you have to have what some of my early followers and other mystics have called Gnosis. What is Gnosis? It is that the separation, the barrier between subject and object, breaks down. What have I just said? You are studying our teaching about the Conscious You. But who is studying the teaching? Who is deciding: “I will study this abstract teaching”? It is the Conscious You. Now, it may be looking at the teaching through the filter of one or several of these separate selves, but it is the Conscious You. In a sense we can say that the Conscious You is studying itself. But as long as the Conscious You is studying itself, it cannot experience itself. What needs to happen is that this illusion that you are a subject studying an object has to break down. You have to switch out of it so that instead of the Conscious You looking at itself from a distance, there is no longer any distance.

You are experiencing yourself as the Conscious You, not as a concept, not as a mental image, not as some intellectual understanding. There are various meditation methods that have been developed over time going all the way back to ancient times for helping people achieve this. The koans known from Buddhism is one way to confuse the outer mind so you switch out of it and experience something else. There are various methods for this. They all have a certain validity, a certain use, but there is not one method that is a guaranteed automatic way for you to step outside of this.

Neutralizing your analytical mind

I will give you, and we have given you methods over time, but I will give you a simple one. We have given you the image that you live in a material world, above it is the spiritual realm, but even the spiritual realm is not one whole, there is a progression of different vibrations leading through the previous spheres that have now ascended all the way up to the Creator. We have given you the image that your world of form started with your Creator.

But now consider a simple question. Where did your Creator come from? Well, we have given you some images there that the Creator evolved in another world of form and that, that world of form even came out of something called the Allness. But consider this, what came before your Creator? Where did your Creator come from? What was before? What created God? Well, another God, but what created the first God? Where was the first God? Where did the first God come from?

And just think about this question with your analytical mind and you will see that there comes a point where the analytical mind is paralyzed, it stops, it does not know what to do. Because the analytical mind, the linear mind, is very attached to this idea that everything must have had a beginning. If the Creator created your world, what created the Creator? If there is creation, there must have been something that created the first creation, but what would that something be? It is sort of a cosmic version of the old question, what came first, the chicken or the egg? And you can even use this metaphor, where did the first chicken come from? Well, it must have come out of an egg because that is where chickens come from. But wait a minute, before the first chicken, there were no chickens. Who laid the first egg? Well a chicken, but there were no chickens because this was the first egg. Where did that come from? And you can create these kinds of paradoxes and by contemplating them, you might be able to switch out of this linear mindset that keeps you trapped in thinking about something as an object, thereby seeing yourself as a subject.

Taking Conscious You down from the cross

We might say, what is it that keeps you on your personal cross? Well, who is the you that is on your personal cross? Is it the Conscious You? No, the Conscious You is pure awareness. The Conscious You has no form. How are you going to take something formless and find a hand that you can hammer a nail through or a leg that you can hammer a nail through? How will you do that to something formless? The formless cannot be on the cross. It can only be the selves that are on the cross. And until you reach the 144th level, you will have selves and they will be on the cross. But it does not mean that Conscious You has to be on the cross until you reach the 144th level.

But in order to avoid experiencing itself as being on the cross, you have to stop seeing yourself as a subject studying objects. The Conscious You cannot actually study itself as an object. It can only see itself as an object for study through a separate self. And that is why as long as you are looking through that separate self, you cannot experience yourself as the conscious self. You cannot step outside the self. What can help you? Well, all of the teachings we have given on the separate selves and the Conscious You will help you. You can say that as you walk the path, there will come this point where the Conscious You is no longer so identified with these selves that you can begin to step outside of the selves and experience, glimpses in the beginning, of pure awareness that can then become more frequent until you can have this underlying sense that you know you are not the selves, you are not identified with the selves. You can see that in your container self, in your four lower bodies, you still have selves and you cannot resolve them all at once. You focus on one at a time.

You are at a certain level of the path, say the 108th level. You focus on the self at that level, overcome it and rise to the 109th where you look at the next self and so forth. But you can overcome the identification [with selves] where you see yourself, experience yourself as the Conscious You and you realize these selves are not who you are. You are not identified with them. You still have them, you understand, but you are not identified with them. It is as if you are wearing colored glasses over your eyes and they are coloring everything you see. But now you take the glasses off with your hand and you hold them at a distance. The glasses are still there. They are coloring what you see, but they are not coloring everything because you see that there is something outside the glasses that are not colored by the glasses.

This is what will naturally happen as you walk the path and rise above the 96th level. But what can you do in the meantime? Well, you can come to a conscious decision ultimately, but in the beginning an understanding. And it is the understanding, it can be expressed in different ways, but let me refer to one of my statements. “What is that to thee? Follow thou me.” You can decide that it is important to you to follow Christ or to follow the spiritual path or to follow your higher self or your ascended teachers, whomever you see as your teacher. It is more important to follow the teacher than anything else.

The ego: the ultimate control freak

But what is it you then have to start looking at? You have to start looking at: what is the essence of the separate selves? What is the essence of what we used to call the ego? It is that it wants to control everything. The selves below the 48th level, what most people and most spiritual teachings call the ego, are control freaks. The ego is the ultimate control freak. It creates a mental image of seeing itself as a subject, studying, for example, a spiritual teaching, and now it needs to elevate this to some ultimate status: This is an absolute truth, this is the highest spiritual teaching on the planet, whatever it may be. And this is done for one reason only, control. The ego needs to feel it is in control. We have talked about the duality consciousness. It can feel control by elevating one dualistic polarity to the status of infallibility, thereby denying the validity of the opposite polarity. But there is always tension. Your ego is in constant tension because it always wants to be in control, it has to be right.

What is most important to you?

And you can come to see this consciously. You can come to recognize that you have this need to be in control, to feel that you are right. And then you can, as you contemplate this compared to our teachings, you can come to the point where you can make that decision: What is most important to me? To be right or to follow Christ? To be right among men, to be right in my own mind or to follow Christ? Is it more important to me to be right according to the definition of my separate selves and the ego or to discover what is the higher view of Christ?

And of course, the primary way for you to see this control aspect of the ego is to look at what the Buddha called attachments. Are you attached to your opinions, your beliefs? You have a concept in Zen Buddhism: “I clutch my ideas.” Well, this is what the scribes and the Pharisees did. This is what Peter did. This is why he could recognize me, but he could never really follow me because he always had to be right in his mind. And there are Gospels, the Gospel of Mary Magdalene, for example, where you see that he was often in conflict with the other disciples because he had this need to feel he was right. If you see this pattern in yourself, then you know you have this, you have not overcome this self for whom control is so important. And you can then start working on it using the tools we have for exposing selves. You can make calls on it, and you can eventually come to a point where you can decide that this is no longer as important as following Christ.

What is that to thee? Follow thou me

Now, you can see when you look at the situation over these past three years, you can see that there are people who had followed the spiritual path for many years. They had followed ascended masters for many years. They had even followed the teachings we have given through this messenger for many years. But then suddenly comes a situation where they become very, very attached to being right about a specific condition in the world. It could be the United States election. It could be wearing a mask or getting vaccinated. It could be the war in Ukraine. It could be any number of other things. But you see that even a person who has followed the path for quite some time can suddenly find itself being very, very attached to being right about a particular issue in the world.

And you can even see it to the point where these people launch a campaign to prove other people wrong. Even some prove the messenger wrong, or even some that step back and say: “Oh, Kim got it wrong on this issue. We know better. We are his older brothers holding the balance for him until he sees what we see.” But what they forget is that I am standing there, I, the Ascended Master Jesus Christ, I am standing there saying: “What is that to thee? Follow thou me.” Is it really more important for you to be right about this condition in the world than to follow Christ? And some of these students will say: “But I am following Christ; that is why I have this opinion.”

Get thee behind me, Satan

And that is where they are wrong. And I need to use the strong word wrong, because you are wrong. You are in fact in the Peter consciousness. And you deserve to hear the same words that I said to Peter: “Get thee behind me, Satan.” Because you are trying to pull me into agreeing with your worldly opinions. Well, my beloved, there is absolutely no worldly opinion or condition that is an absolute truth. There is absolutely no worldly opinion or condition that is more important than you following Christ. And what is it that Christ wants? Well, what did I say in my previous discourse when I talked about the Christians? And some of you were sitting there hearing this and thinking: “Yeah, the Christians do not see this, but we, of course, understand it.” But some of you do not understand it. You have not grasped it. Christ always comes to disturb you. Christ always comes to disturb your sense of being in control because that is the only way you can grow. As long as your ego thinks it is in control and you have the highest possible view of something in the world, you cannot grow. You are not walking the path of Christ. Because what is the path of Christ? It is to free yourself from all of the opinions of the world, all of the opinions of men. The scribes and the Pharisees thought they knew everything, and I had nothing to teach them or help them with, because their egos had this obsessive-compulsive need to be in control. They could refute anything I said because their egos had the overarching view: “I cannot be wrong. It does not matter what anybody says, I cannot be wrong.” And this is fine.

You may see yourself as an ascended master student, and you may be absolutely convinced that “I am right about Trump, I am right about Russia, I am right about vaccines.” But my beloved, I can only react in one way. He who denies me before men, him must I deny before the Father. You are not ready to enter the kingdom. Why not? Because you are attached to some opinion on earth. But in the kingdom of God, none of the opinions on earth matter. What have we said over and over and over again? How do you ascend? By overcoming all attachments to anything on earth. It all has to go. All of the ghosts have to go until you can give up that last ghost. And when you are standing there at the 144th level, you have to look back at earth. In fact, you have to do this at every level above the 96th level especially. You have to look at earth and say: “Is there anything I am attached to? Is there anything that is unfinished? Anything that I want to experience? Anything I want to do? Anything I want to prove right?”

And if there is, you are not ready to take the next step and you are certainly not ready to ascend. What did I say in my previous discourse? When I, who was at a very high level of consciousness back then 2000 years ago, towards the end of my mission, when I was hanging on the cross, I still had a ghost that I had to give up. By the fact that you are in a physical body, you still have something to give up. And how can you give up that to which you are attached? Why did I say: “He who seeks to save his life shall lose it?” Well, he who seeks to save his opinions, his viewpoints, his sense of being right, more right than Christ, will lose his life because you cannot enter and you will stay in a consciousness of death and you cannot enter the kingdom of life. You cannot be reborn in Christ because you are holding on to that old sense of identity.

Using a spiritual teaching to be right

This messenger, as most of you know, has recently recorded all of these YouTube videos and he actually describes in one of these videos how he, just a few days ago, came to an important breakthrough on the path. And it relates to this topic that he had observed from his earliest forays on the spiritual path and up through the present, that there are some people who are spiritual students, they study a spiritual teaching, they are often very eager to practice the practices, but they are still trapped, their minds are closed, they are still stuck, there is something they cannot get beyond. And it is precisely this, the need to feel that you are right, so your ego can feel it is in control.

And the messenger had a breakthrough where he saw that what he had not connected to was that, we have talked about the world being a reality simulator where you can have an immersion experience and an awakening experience. And he thought that in order to discover the spiritual path and follow it, you would have to be in the awakening phase, you could not be in the immersion phase still. But you see, what is the characteristic of the immersion phase? It is that you take some criteria here on earth and you use that, you use an ideology, a religion, a spiritual teaching, to build up your sense that you are superior to other people. He explains how this is a compensation game, which I will not go into here, but you build up the sense that you are superior to other people, but how can you build the sense that you are superior to other people? Only when you see yourself as a separate being, because only a separate being can be superior. But when you are on a path of oneness, you have less and less need to feel superior until it drops away completely.

It is quite possible that you can be in this frame of mind, and you can find a spiritual teaching, and you can have the idea, which many, many spiritual and religious people have, that the purpose of a spiritual teaching is to perfect your soul as many people see it, but even yourself. And therefore, you think that the more sophisticated you make yourself, the closer it is to being able to enter heaven.

But what have we said? Between the 48th and the 96th level, you are pulling yourself above the mass consciousness. As a result of this, you have to build a self that sees itself as different from the mass consciousness. But then at the 96th level comes the crucial initiation. Will you now be willing to let that self die, at least die gradually, to dismantle it in order to go higher? And if you are not willing, you go into this state of mind of becoming one of these disciples that are using a spiritual teaching, which is meant to help them come closer to oneness, to actually go deeper and deeper into separation, setting themselves up as being more and more sophisticated, because they are right, and they have this viewpoint, and they know even better than all of these people, or they know better than the messenger.

What the messenger realized was that he had not grasped this, he had not put this together, because he was hoping that it would not be possible to walk the spiritual path and not grasp this. He was hoping that all people who would take these teachings we have given would get it, that they would break through and see this. But it is not the case. It is not the case as Peter proved. He claimed to be one of my disciples. He followed me for the three years of my outer mission. He claimed to even go around and propagate the Christian teachings after my ascension. But at the very last moment when he was facing crucifixion in Rome, he insisted on being crucified upside down because he was not worthy to be crucified the same way as Christ. And what does it show you? Well, when you are crucified upside down, what direction does your head point in? It points towards the earth. When you are crucified as I was, where is your head pointing? Towards the heavens.

What is better if you want to enter the kingdom? He wanted to stay with earth and he is still in embodiment, still convinced that he is right. I should say she, but nevertheless. How do you take yourself down from the cross? By coming to see this self that has an obsessive, compulsive need to be in control by always being right and then deciding: “I do not care about being right. I do not care about being right among men. I do not care about proving an outer opinion right. I care about following Christ. What is that to me? I will follow thee.”

It is a matter of surrender

This is how you can come to the point where now the Conscious You can switch out of the control self and experience itself as pure awareness. And you can become aware that this is who you are. You see what I have been saying. You can take the common concept, especially in the western world, that if you have a goal you want to achieve, you need to do something. You need to make an effort. You need to find some kind of secret way or technique for achieving it. But as long as the Conscious You is inside a separate self, there is nothing you can do to get out of there, to experience yourself as pure awareness. Because experiencing yourself as pure awareness is not a matter of doing. It is a matter of undoing. It is a matter of surrender. You are surrendering into the experience. But people who are in this state of having this obsessive-compulsive need to be in control, to be right, they cannot surrender.

You cannot look at a situation where you have a strong opinion and somebody else has the opposite opinion, and you cannot just look at it and say: “I will surrender it. I will let it go. I am not going to argue. I am not going to try and convince the other person. I am not going to try and seem right. I will just surrender. And I will look to Christ and say to Christ, help me take this step. Help me take the next step. Help me see what it is I am attached to and let it go”.

You cannot do that if you are attached to being right, because then being in control is more important than following Christ. Now you may, as Peter did, create a mental image of what it means to follow Christ, so that you think that because you are so right in how you are looking at it, you are still following Christ. And therefore, you think, as Peter did, you see the situation. What did Peter think when he said: “Be it far from thee, Lord”. He thought he knew better than the Living Christ. He thought he knew better than the teacher. And that is why I rebuked him as strongly as I could think of —“Get thee behind me, Satan” — in an attempt to shake him out of that state of mind. Did it work? No. Has it worked in the past 2,000 years? No. Will it ever work? Well, we will just have to see.

Will we also have to see about you? Or will you finally shift so you are consciously willing to look at this mechanism, which everybody has. The messenger had it. It took him many years to be willing to look at it, but he was willing to look at it. Others have done the same. They have looked at it, and then you can start separating yourself from it. As long as you are not willing, you will remain stuck.

The natural state of the Conscious You

I propose to you this. Of course, I am describing a more extreme situation here. And I am not thereby saying to you that all of you have this very strong, obsessive-compulsive need to be right. But what I am proposing is this. If you find yourself looking at these teachings about the Conscious You and pure awareness and thinking: ”But I have not really experienced it”, then I suggest to you that you consider that you have some kind of self that has a need to be in control, that has a need to be right. And therefore, there is something you cannot surrender. You cannot just let it go.

Why am I saying this? Because what have we said over and over again? The Conscious You is; The Conscious You is pure awareness. The natural state for the Conscious You is to either experience itself as pure awareness or at least experience that it is outside of all of these outer opinions and selves. The natural state is that the Conscious You is not wearing the glasses right over its eyes, but has them at a distance. That is the natural state.

There are even teachings in the Vedas that talk about the two types of Samadhi. There is Samadhi without an object and there is Samadhi with an object. Well, Samadhi without an object is when the Conscious You experiences itself as pure awareness. There are no objects in consciousness, no thoughts, no feelings. You are not aware of the outer world. But the other state is Samadhi with an awareness of objects, which means that you can now experience the world, experience your daily life, but you are not inside of it. You are not identified with it. You know you are just experiencing this. It is just an experience that you have from a distance. It can sound contradictory because I said that when you are in a separate self, you see yourself as a subject that is experiencing an object at a distance. And now I am saying that the natural state for the Conscious You is to experience the world from a distance. But the difference is that when you are inside the self, you are inside the world. But here you are outside, you do not even see yourself as a subject experiencing objects. You are just experiencing the world and you do not have these strong opinions. You do not have this need to be in control, to prove yourself right, to prove other people wrong. You are not identified with it. Even your own life, even your own psychology, you are not identified with it. It is sort of happening at a certain surface level of awareness, but you are always aware that there is a deeper level where you are at peace.

And this is the state that you can come to. And you can come to it before you reach the 96th level because it is really a matter of switching out of this identification with the outer selves. It is more difficult above the 48th level, but it can still be done. But certainly as you go above the 96th level, it is more easy to consciously make that switch. And it is a conscious switch. You can even say that it is not an automatic thing. You can go above the 96th level and it does not mean that there comes a point where you can say: “Oh, now you are guaranteed to make the switch.”

The prince of this world cometh and has nothing in you

You have to recognize—you do not have to recognize, but it is helpful to recognize—that there is a difference between what we call a self and then the way you look at life. In other words, you can be in physical embodiment and you are completely inside of and identified with all of these selves. You are seeing everything, including yourself, through the coloring of these selves. But it is also possible for the Conscious You to be in embodiment. You have the selves. And in certain situations, you might go into a self and it colors your view of the situation. But in the background, you know you are not the selves. There is a backdrop of pure awareness of an inner sense of peace, detachment, and everything else is just in the foreground. Sometimes you are more focused on the foreground, but you can always go back and realize you are more. And this is, of course, the experience I would like all of you who have followed these and applied them to have, because it makes life much easier.

You are not so attached to things. It does not matter so much to you whether your spouse does this or your spouse does that, or somebody at work says this, or you read something in the paper. It is like you can look at everything more neutrally. It does not pull you in. And therefore, you are in this state that I talked about, “The prince of this world cometh and has nothing in me.”

This has been my effort, at least for now, to help you take yourself down from the cross. Words are only words until you transcend the word and have an experience. May you be willing to transcend the word and have the experience of Christ. For I am constantly in that experience of Christ, and I am willing to share it with anyone and everyone. I could, in this very instant, share the experience of Christ with every human being on earth. But I would be very gratified if I could share it with even a few hundred ascended master students. May you be willing to let go of everything that stands in the way of you experiencing yourself as you are—experiencing yourself as I see you from the mind of Christ and not as the separate selves see you from the mind of antichrist.

What greater wish could I have at this time of Easter than to see the students who are willing to recognize me as an ascended master, escape the cross and be resurrected into a higher experience of self.

 

Copyright © 2023 Kim Michaels

 

Back to Taking Christianity and yourself down from the cross

The symbols behind the Easter story


Listen to a recording of this dictation (subscribers only)

Ascended Master Jesus Christ through Kim Michaels, April 8, 2023. This dictation was given during the 2023 Easter webinar – Taking Christianity and yourself down from the cross.

I AM the Ascended Master Jesus Christ. What would be the reaction of most Christians if they heard that statement? They would say: “There is no mention of ascended masters in the Bible, therefore this cannot be the real Jesus.” What does this mean? Consider what I could say that Christians would accept. They would not even accept my name, my title, my present function in the cosmic hierarchy of God. Then what else could they possibly accept that I, the Ascended Jesus, could say? Did I not say two thousand years ago: “I will be with you always”? How could I be with you if you are not open to my Presence, or anything I could say through a human messenger or in other ways bring forth?

The shift from death to life

Consider those who have eyes to see and ears to hear. Consider how often I said this when I walked the earth in a physical body. Those who have ears to hear had better hear. Do Christians today have ears to hear the Living Christ, the Ascended Christ? Do they have ears to hear? Most Christians think they would recognize me if I appeared in some way in this world. But consider a fact that anyone can read in the scriptures. Two thousand years ago when I appeared in a physical body, the vast majority of people, even those who met me in the flesh, did not recognize me as being anything special, certainly not as being the Messiah that many of the Jews were waiting for. Consider therefore how many of those who call themselves Christians today would recognize me when I appear in some tangible form. They would say: “This does not conform to our scriptures, our literal interpretation of them, our doctrines, our dogmas, our expectations. Therefore, it cannot be the Living Christ.”

Well, what was it that prevented people from recognizing the Living Christ two thousand years ago? It was that they were in the death consciousness. What is it that prevents most Christians from recognizing the Living Christ today? They are in the death consciousness. Why were people in the death consciousness back then? Because the Jewish religion said: “You, as a human being, cannot reach God or Spirit without going through the hierarchy of the outer religion.” But do most Christian churches say today: “You, as a human being, cannot reach God, Christ or Spirit without going through the outer religion and its hierarchy of priests”? Is it not the same claim? Is it not the same consciousness? And what is that consciousness? The consciousness of death.

Why is it so? Because where did I say the kingdom is to be found? Not through observation of the outer churches and rituals, for the kingdom of God is within you. If the kingdom of God is within you, and I did not say it was only in the priests or the pope or the cardinals, I said it is within you, meaning every human being. Then does it not stand to reason that you do not need an outer church to reach the kingdom that is within you? There is no outer ritual you can follow that will guarantee your entry into the kingdom. Why not? Because the kingdom of God that is within you is a state of consciousness, the state of consciousness that is in contrast to the consciousness of death.

It is the consciousness of life whereby you are reborn in Christ. You take in the body and blood of Christ, which is not an outer ritual. Somehow the bread and the wine is transformed into the body of Christ. It is an inner ritual whereby you absorb the spirit of Christ, the consciousness of Christ, and that is what transforms you so that you are reborn into life. This does not happen all at once; it is a process. It is a process that takes time. It has many stages.

The Living Christ vs. the mental image of Christ

The death consciousness was promoted by the Jewish religion at the time. The death consciousness is promoted by most Christian churches today. This is what most Christians would not even be willing to consider. They do not have ears to hear the Living Christ who always appears in some unexpected form. Consider how many among the Jews did not recognize me 2,000 years ago, why did they not recognize me? Because based on the doctrines and rituals and teachings of their religion they had formed an expectation of how the Messiah should appear, what he should do. Look at the scriptures and see how I said about the scribes and Pharisees and other people, why they rejected me because of this or that outer thing.

And today what have Christians done? They have taken my own words, the scriptures that were written down that were clearly incomplete, but they have still created this mental image of doctrines and rituals and expectations of how the Living Christ should appear in this world if he were to appear. And it would be impossible for me to live up to the expectations of most Christians. Why? What did I come to do 2,000 years ago? To demonstrate to people that there is a different state of consciousness than the one they are trapped in, that there is a consciousness that is not the consciousness of death but the consciousness of life. How could I demonstrate this to people if my appearance lived up to the expectations based on the consciousness of death? How could I then demonstrate to them that there is a state of consciousness beyond death, a state of consciousness that is life? And it is exactly the same dynamic today with Christians. They are as trapped now as the Jews were 2,000 years ago, and for that matter the Jews still are.

The first challenge of Christ

But should that be the concern of Christians? Nay. Why are you looking at the splinter in the eye of your brother instead of looking at the beam in your own eye, in your own religion? This is Easter. What is it they always hear about Easter? The Easter story. What is a story? Look it up in the dictionary. It is a narrative designed to interest, entertain or educate the audience. It can be fictional or it can be based on fact or a true story, but it is still in the way it is told designed to create some change in the minds of the audience. What is the Easter story? It is a story. Is it meant to be an absolutely factual account of actual factual events? Or is it meant to have an impact on the consciousness of the audience?

What then was my entire mission for those three years designed to do? To have an impact on the consciousness of the audience, to help them shift from the consciousness of death to the consciousness of life. This is no more clearly demonstrated, that in the account of how I first say to Peter that I will give him the keys to the kingdom because he is the rock upon which I will build my church, and then just a few passages later say to him: “Get thee behind me Satan.” Why is Christ the open door that no man can shut? Because all people have the opportunity, the ability, to recognize an appearance of the Living Christ as being something beyond their own state of mind. Peter had that ability. There was nothing special about Peter having that ability. All people have it. I am the open door which no man can shut. You can ignore it, you can deny it, you can refuse to walk through it, you can refuse to look through it, you can even refuse to look through the keyhole but you cannot shut the door permanently.

The consciousness of Satan

The Living Christ can come and the Living Christ can disturb you and the Living Christ has a right to disturb you. And Peter was willing to be somewhat disturbed. He was willing to follow me and be one of my disciples but he was not willing to be disturbed enough to make the shift from death unto life. And that is why when I began to tell my disciples that I would go to Jerusalem and go through what is now known as the Easter story, he objected: “Be it far from thee Lord, this shall not happen to you.” And my response: “Get thee behind me Satan.” Why? Because he was the representative of the consciousness of Satan, the consciousness of death, which is that after you have recognized the Living Christ as something beyond your own state of consciousness, you refuse to let Christ take you beyond your current state of consciousness. That you use your own state of consciousness to project a mental image of Christ demanding that Spirit should conform to the image you have created out of matter.  That Spirit, who is the Living Spirit, should conform to the dead image springing from the consciousness of Satan, the death consciousness.

This is the dynamic that virtually no Christian minister has grasped for 2,000 years and certainly very few if any have preached from the pulpit. Why have they not grasped this? Because when the Catholic Church was formed, they institutionalized the Peter consciousness and they turned Christianity from a living religion into a dead religion, as the Jewish religion that had me killed. The Jewish religion killed Christ physically. The Catholic Church killed Christ psychologically in people’s minds. The killing of Christ had two aspects, the physical killing of the outer body and then the killing of my example that all people who believed on me could do the works that I did. Meaning they could walk the path that I walked until I had permanently attained the Christ consciousness and therefore, were living spirits in embodiment, Living Christs in embodiment.

The meaning of the cross

What happened in those 381 years from my birth to the birth of the Catholic Church, the Roman Catholic Church? What happened was that when the Catholic Church was formed Christianity as a religion was crucified, and Christianity has been hanging on the cross since the year 381. I said everything is a symbol. Everything I did, everything I said has a deeper meaning. This is certainly scriptural if you consider that even the Bible says that Jesus taught the multitude in parables and expounded all things to his disciples. Clearly there are layers of understanding of the message of Christ. And how will you grasp it? Not through the intellectual mind as the scribes and Pharisees interpreted old doctrines and used them against me. You will grasp them through the Spirit, through the Holy Spirit, through the Comforter that God would send in my name and has sent in my name. I have upheld my promise, my end of the bargain. God has upheld his end of the bargain. How many human beings have upheld their end of the bargain and been willing to let the Comforter expound to them the mysteries that are hidden behind the outer symbols?

What is the cross? Well, the cross of course is a symbol, a symbol for what? Well, you cannot understand this unless you understand, and it might be helped by the discoveries of modern science, that everything is energy and energy has different levels so you can grasp that there is not simply the physical world here, heaven up there and hell down there. There is a spectrum of vibrations and above the physical material is the emotional realm corresponding to your own emotions. Then above that is the mental and above that is the identity realm and then above that is the spiritual. When you grasp this you see there are four levels of the material world. There are four levels of the mind, the human mind.

The cross symbolizes these four as you saw in the old teachings, mystical teachings about fire, earth, water and air, the four elements. The cross has a vertical beam. One end is anchored in the earth, obviously representing the earth, the material world, the physical world. The upper end of the vertical beam represents the identity level, the identity mind. Then the right is the mental, the left is the emotional as seen from a person who is hanging on the cross opposite when you are facing the cross.

What does it mean to be crucified? It means that you are fixated. When your physical body is nailed to a cross and a cross is hoisted up, you are fixated. You cannot move. You cannot get down by your own power. What does this mean? What is it a symbol of? It is a symbol of the fact that when people are in the death consciousness, they are crucified in their own minds. They are fixated in their own minds. They cannot move beyond certain boundaries. And it is because they have certain beliefs and images in the physical mind, certain feeling patterns in the emotional mind, certain thought patterns in the mental, and even at the identity level they have a certain fixed sense of who they are. They see themselves as mortal human beings who are sinners by nature and therefore they cannot overcome their state of sin, the consciousness of death.

What do you see even outplayed in the physical crucifixion? I could not take my body down from the cross. When you are hanging on the cross, there is no way you can move one hand to pull out the nail in the other hand or pull out the nail in your feet. You cannot physically take yourself down from the cross. How did I escape the cross? By giving up the spirit, by giving up the ghost. What is the ghost? It is your worldly sense of identity, your mortal sense of identity in your physical, emotional, mental and identity bodies or minds. The way you see yourself, the way you see God, the way you see your relationship to God, see the world and your relationship to the world.  It is these inner images that you have that crucify you. There is no external force that crucifies you. That is why when people focus on the crucifixion as they so often do around Easter, they miss the point. They miss the symbol of the story.

The mission of Jesus

Look at Christian churches today. How many of them have an image or a painting or a sculpture of the resurrected Christ or the ascended Christ? Some do, but the vast majority of them, what image of Christ do they have? Christ on the cross with nails in his arms and legs, a wound in his side and the blood running down. What are people indoctrinated with when they come into a Christian church? That the most important aspect of the life of Jesus Christ was that he was nailed to two sticks of wood and hung there for a few hours. Those few hours on the cross have overshadowed anything I said or did in the three full years of my mission and even in my entire life. They have been so focused on my suffering on the cross that they forget that I did not come to suffer. I did not come to show people how to suffer. Why would that be necessary when people already know what it is to suffer? I came to show them how to transcend suffering, how to be free of suffering. But how do you become free of suffering? What is it that causes you to suffer?

It is that you are experiencing life through the structures in your own mind. The ghost in your own mind, the mental images in your mind. And how do you become free of it? Not by some magic, but by you giving up the ghost, consciously giving up the ghost. That is the only way to be free. You may say, “Well Jesus could not free himself from the cross, he had to be taken down from the cross.” No, Jesus’ body could not free itself from the cross. It had to be taken down from the cross but Jesus was not the body. That is the whole point of my example. I am more than the body. You can kill the body, but you cannot kill the Spirit. How did I escape from the cross? By letting the ghost die souI returned to a state of pure spirit and that is the potential that all people have. And that is the only way that you will get into the kingdom of God that is within you, by letting the outer ghost die, the outer sense of self.

The role of Christ

Now comes the subtle part, for nothing is as straightforward as the outer mind wants it to be. You can let the ghost die, but you cannot do it alone. I am not, by what I have said so far, saying that you do not need Christ in order to enter the kingdom. You do need Christ, but what is Christ? Christ is more than any person. Christ is a universal state of consciousness. Christ is the only begotten son of God, because when God gave human beings free will, he knew they had the potential to use that free will to eat of the forbidden fruit, to eat of the fruit of the knowledge of good and evil and therefore enter into the death consciousness, which is a state of mind where you think you can define reality. You even think you can define what God is like, which is why human beings have created gods in their own image and after their own likeness.

God knew this, God foresaw what could happen and therefore the only begotten Son of God is the Christ consciousness, which is the open door that no man can shut. Because no matter how deeply you go into the consciousness of death, no matter how elaborate the mental images you create, you can never lose the ability to step outside your own mind if only for a split second, and make contact with a greater mind that is beyond the outer mind that you identify yourself with. This is what happened to Paul on the road to Damascus. The scales fell from his eyes. He was able to step outside of the ghost that he had identified himself with, therefore make direct contact with the Christ mind, and through that he was converted.

Now Peter had that experience as well, but the contrast between Paul and Peter was that Paul was willing to fundamentally change his lifestyle to stop persecuting Christians and become one of my Evangelists, whereas Peter was not willing to do this evidenced by the fact that he denied me three times after my arrest. Evidenced by the fact that even when he was crucified in Rome, he insisted on being crucified upside down because he was not worthy in his own mind to do the works that I did. No, the outer mind is not worthy, so how can you say about yourself that you are not worthy? Only when you are still identified with the outer mind because you have not been willing to step out of it like Paul was, and some of the other disciples were. And as some people have been willing to do in the two thousand years, even some who were priests or ministers or monks or nuns, often called the Christian mystics.

The Catholic Church and the Peter consciousness

Some people have grasped the reality I have just explained over these past two thousand years, but the vast majority of them have not, and why not? Because the Catholic Church has from its very creation promoted this false image of Christ, the Peter consciousness, the succession of Popes going back to Peter. Not that anyone can find the word Pope in the Bible, certainly I cannot. And so what do they really have to base this on? This one statement: “Thou art the rock upon which I will build my church, and I will give unto thee the kingdom, the keys to the kingdom.” This is what they base the church on, and what must they do to uphold the belief that the Catholic Church is the only true church of Christ and the only road to salvation? They must ignore, explain away and deny everything else I said, for so many things I said, including what I have mentioned here, contradict the claim of the Catholic Church.

The Catholic Church is not the rock upon which I will build my church.  The Catholic Church is, get thee behind me Satan, it is the satanic consciousness. It has been so from 325, especially from 381. And it has been so throughout its history, reaching darker and darker stages as you see, the split from the Orthodox Church, the persecution of the early Christian mystics, the concept of heretics, the inquisition, the crusades, the witch hunts, all of these things that have been done in my name but surely could not come from the mind of Christ.

The one thing that is missing, or at least the one thing that might make Christians today think a little bit was if they would just imagine, what kind of beings are in the kingdom of Heaven? And if they would then look around on earth and look at people, surely they would all point the finger to someone else but if they would even look at themselves as Christians and other Christians that they know of. You have many examples of even those who claim to be Christians who turned out to do things that were clearly abusive of others. You have the Catholic Church and the sex abuse scandals. Certain fundamentalist Christian ministers that claim to be men of God, but clearly do actions that cannot come from the consciousness of Christ.

You have all of these examples and you can ask yourself: “Is the kingdom of God populated by people like this”? So what kind of beings are inside the kingdom of God? Well, certainly not people who do the things that many people do. But where do the actions come from? They come from a state of consciousness that is the death consciousness that make people self-centered and make them self-deluded, self-deceived. They think they can get away with this. An extreme example, here is a Catholic priest during the Inquisition. He spends his day torturing people in a most insane manner imaginable. And then after a day’s work, he is tired, he is fatigued, he is worn out, so he goes into his church, he kneels before the altar, he looks up on the crucified Christ and he imagines that I, the Living ascended Christ, am looking back at him with approval. He thinks I was approving of him torturing other human beings.

How can anyone think this unless they are in a fundamentally different state of consciousness than the Christ consciousness? Because in the Christ consciousness you cannot torture or kill other people, it cannot be done. That is why when Peter cut off the ear of the soldier I put it back on. How can you torture and kill other people and even believe that this is done in the name of Christ and that Christ approves? Only when you have completely deluded yourself, and what allows you to delude yourself? The consciousness of death, the consciousness of Satan, which can elevate any illusion, any lie to being truth.

Giving up the ghost

During this Easter period, Christians in many places, Rome, Jerusalem, the Philippines, they re-enact the crucifixion. Some even allow themselves to be crucified with nails hammered through their hands and feet. Some are tied to the cross. Others walk the Stations of the Cross. And again, what is the main focus for them? The crucifixion. But what is the real significance of the Easter story? It is the resurrection, but how was Christ resurrected? Because while hanging on the cross, he gave up the ghost and it was in giving up the ghost that I was set free to rise above the consciousness of death, the consciousness of Satan, even the physical plane and that is the significance of the Easter story.

That is what people should focus on: How can I be resurrected? Oh, I must come to see my ghost and let it die, give it up so that instead of trying to fight the cross, fight the crucifixion, I just let the ghost die because I realize nobody has crucified me except myself in my own mind. I am not physically crucified. I am psychologically, spiritually crucified in my own mind and I must give up the ghost before I can be free. Why do you need Christ then? Because you cannot give up the ghost unless you experience that there is something more than the ghost. If you are completely identified with the ghost, you will think that if you give up the ghost you will die, you will disappear. There will be nothing more to your identity than the ghost and then as an act of self-preservation, psychological self-preservation, you cannot give up the ghost.

Why do you need Christ? Because Christ is the only begotten Son of God, the very level of consciousness that is meant to maintain oneness between spirit and matter, that is meant to be the open door that no man can shut because no matter how much you have deluded yourself, you can step outside of that ghost and experience that you are more. And that is why Christ comes to earth and that is also why Christ can take on many forms to appear to people in different levels of consciousness, different aspects of the death consciousness and show them simply this one thing: There is more to life than what you call life! For what you call life is actually a state of death, psychological, spiritual death. And that is why I said: “He who seeks to save his life shall lose it” because he who seeks to save this false life, this ghost-life shall lose it.

The lies behind the Catholic Church

You cannot enter the kingdom of God but he who is willing to give up his life for my sake shall find eternal life because if you are willing to give up the ghost, the outer identity, then you can be reborn and then you will not disappear, you will not die as a self-aware being, you will be reborn into a new sense of identity based on oneness with your own higher being, with your God, with the Christ mind. That is what Peter was not willing to do. That is what the Catholic Church has not been willing to do for 17 centuries. That is why if you go to Rome and look at this enormous citadel, this fortification that they have built, you can see that it is a completely false approach. It is springing from the death consciousness.

Why do you build these thick walls that can withstand even an attack from a tank? You might say it is to keep the world out. Yes, it is to keep the world out so no one can disturb their sense that they are saved but it is also to keep the Christians in so that they do not dare to look beyond the doctrines, the rituals, the dogmas and the claim that the Catholic Church will save them. And therefore they dare not question, they dare not see how nonsensical is the doctrines and the rituals, how they cannot explain their questions. They are trapped, they are crucified because they think they cannot question, they cannot go beyond because then they will not go to Heaven.

This is a lie as it was the lie when the Jewish religion made the same claim. That is why the Jewish leaders felt so threatened when I said: “The kingdom of God is within you” and when I gave my disciples the power to omit sins, they felt that their monopoly on God was threatened. But you see, no one in the physical realm has ever been given a monopoly on spirit and no one ever will. Christ, the universal Christ consciousness has a monopoly on spirit but not in the sense that you have to call it the Christ consciousness. There is a universal consciousness meant to bridge the gap between the Creator and its creation, between God and the self-aware beings that come out of God’s one mind.

The second challenge of Christ

It can be called the Christ, it can also be called the Buddhic consciousness or the Buddha nature as the Buddha called it. It can be called many other names and has been called many other names in both religious and mystical traditions. It is not the name that matters. It is the experience of that consciousness of oneness. That is what matters. If you have not had a direct experience of the consciousness of Christ, you are not a Christian. And if you have had the experience of the consciousness of Christ but you have crucified that experience through the mental images in your own consciousness as Peter did, well then you are actually worse off than if you have not even had the experience.

The consciousness of Satan is not the ignorance of Christ. The consciousness of Satan is the denial of Christ because you would rather hold on to your idol than follow the Living Christ into the kingdom. Accepting Christ or even being born again in Christ is not a one-time event. Nobody can be reborn instantly because you would lose your sense of continuity and identity. The only way to enter the kingdom is to follow a gradual path whereby you gradually overcome the illusions in the four levels of your mind and you are reborn many times over so that you never lose your sense of continuity. You are reborn into a new sense of identity but it is not such a shock that you do not know who you are. There are smaller steps on the path, there are bigger turning points but still it is not a one-time event. Paul did not instantly become elevated to a higher state on the road to Damascus. He had to walk a path that he described somewhat in a veiled form in some of his writings that really came from a specific person that had this real experience.

These are in a very concentrated form an unveiling of the symbols behind the Easter story. How many Christians would be willing to even listen to this, to read it, to study it and to consider it with a neutral state of mind? Why did I say: “Unless you become as little children you shall not in no way enter the kingdom?” What is it that children have? A neutral state of mind, an open state of mind, they are curious, they are inquisitive and they are willing to listen to the answer. They do not have a preconceived opinion about what the answer should be as you clearly saw with Peter. He had a preconceived opinion of what should and should not happen to the Christ and he would not listen to what I actually said. Most Christians are like that today. They could come across this and read it or hear it and they would find all kinds of reasons and excuses for why this cannot possibly be the Living Christ speaking through a human person.

Plausible deniability and denial of Christ

But you see, why was it that I appeared in a human form 2,000 years ago? Why didn’t I appear in the heavens in some manifestation that no one could deny? Look at how many Christians today dream about the second coming of Christ and they project these images that Christ will appear in the sky in some undeniable manifestation that no one can deny and therefore all people will wake up and realize that the Christians were right all along and they were the true followers of Christ. But why did not I do this 2,000 years ago? Because the law of free will must be outplayed. There must be the possibility that people can deny Christ. God has given people free will. God will not force your free will. Christ will not force your free will. Christ can challenge you and demonstrate that there is a higher state of consciousness but Christ cannot force you to recognize this and to be willing to follow Christ into life. You must make that decision and therefore there must be plausible deniability.

It must be possible for people to deny Christ and how do they do it? They take some of what they already know, some of their religious doctrines or their scientific materialist doctrines or their Marxist doctrines or whatever you have. And they create criteria that say that: “If this appearance really was the Living Christ he should live up to our criteria”. And this is allowed. It is allowed by the law of God which is why it was possible for people to meet me physically 2.000 years ago and not recognize me or not be willing to follow me as Peter demonstrated. And so the same today, if I were to appear in the sky in some undeniable manifestation it would be a violation of the law of God. Therefore I must appear through human beings who may speak the Word, the Living Word, who may be inspired by the Comforter or who may be trained to be a messenger and take a more direct dictation. But there are many ways that people can be the open doors for the Christ to express itself in this world but they all have the characteristic that it is possible, perhaps even easy for people to deny it and say: “Nay, this outer form does not live up to my expectations therefore it cannot be the Living Christ.”

But you see what I said, the Living Christ comes to free you from the death consciousness! If the Living Christ lives up to the expectations based on the death consciousness how can the Living Christ free you? The Living Christ must always challenge your ghosts! And those who are not willing to be challenged like the scribes and Pharisees have an easy way to deny the Living Christ and therefore the Living Christ can only say: “Those who have denied me before men then must I deny before the Father.” And this is not nearly as ominous as it says it simply means they cannot enter the Kingdom because they are not willing to let the ghost die, to give up the ghost and therefore they must remain in the outer kingdom where there is weeping and gnashing of teeth. The Living Christ will never live up to the expectations based on the consciousness of death, the consciousness of antichrist, the consciousness of Satan.

Thus there is only one way to deny the Living Christ and that is through the consciousness of antichrist. And the entire spectacle you see outplayed now by the Christian churches throughout the world, whether it be this church or that church, it is all a spectacle created from the consciousness of antichrist. They claim that they believe it represents Christ. How could it? Can this be proven? Could I make a statement here that would prove this to anybody? No, and this is what I have been trying to explain here. Christ is the open door, which no man can shut. It is not possible you could be so trapped in the death consciousness that you could not experience Christ, but you can only do so if you are willing to at least momentarily question your ghost, your view of life, your mental image. If you are not willing to question, you cannot experience Christ. But even if you do have a glimpse where you experience Christ, it is still possible to use the death consciousness to deny Christ, to deny that you need to change because you have encountered Christ. And it must remain that way because the entire purpose of the earth is to give people the opportunity to experience what it is like to define their own God, to define what Christ is like, to define what they are like, to define what life is like, to define how the universe works.

The scientific materialists are using science, which was actually meant to free people’s minds from superstition, to deny Christ, but the Christians are using the Christian scriptures and their interpretations of them to deny Christ. And the Christian, not so much the scriptures, but certainly the example of Christ, was meant to free them from the consciousness of antichrist. You can say it is an irony, you can say it is a tragedy, but it really is just the consequence of the law of free will. God wants people to enter his kingdom because in God’s kingdom there is no suffering and there is no death. Those who are outside God’s kingdom do suffer, and they do go through death. God would ideally like people, all people, to enter the kingdom but God does not want to force people to enter. God wants people to do this voluntarily, and Christ comes to demonstrate that there is a way.

Freeing yourself from the cross

You may know, it is a historical fact, that my early followers were not called Christians, they were called ‘Followers of the Way’ because what I expounded to my disciples, the all things that I expounded to my disciples, was to tell them about the Way. I AM the Way, the truth and the life and this is what has been lost in Christianity starting with the Catholic Church and the Emperor Constantine’s need to create this superior religion that the Roman people would accept as being superior to the old gods and therefore he had to create this all powerful God and the one who was representing this God also had to be powerful, therefore had to be special and therefore the Catholic Church turned me into the exception instead of the example to follow. The example that all people can follow if they are willing to lose their lives, their mortal sense of identity, to give up the ghost so that they can transcend the cross.

No external force can take you down from the cross, not even Christ can take you down from the cross because Christ will not violate your free will. You are fixated on the cross because of the choices you have made, the ghosts you have created in the identity, mental, emotional and physical levels of the mind and you will not be free until you voluntarily give up the ghost. Even I, when I was hanging on the cross, had some expectations that God would send his angels to save me from dying and thereby demonstrate another miracle. But as I was hanging there I suddenly realized God will not do this because I am the one who had to give up my last ghost, my last expectation of what my mission was like. And when I was willing to look at that beam in my own eye and give it up, that is when I was free of the cross. Because I, Jesus, who was embodied 2,000 years ago was not the only son of God, was not the perfect human being, I was not free while I was still in embodiment. I still had some human expectations based on the consciousness of antichrist. Even though I had made progress on the path of Christhood it was not until I gave up that last ghost that I fully became the Christ.

Anger against Christianity

This is, of course, what Christians would again call heresy, they would say this is of the devil, so you are now using some written down scriptures, some interpretations of these scriptures to call Jesus Christ the devil. Well, well, what can I do? You cannot with that mindset enter the kingdom so I must just let you stay outside the kingdom. And you will go through what so many Christians have gone through, where they have lived their lifetimes growing up in a Christian religion, they have believed the promise: “If you are a good Christian you will go to heaven after this lifetime.” Then they leave the body, the soul rises and they expect that St. Peter is going to stand there at the door to heaven because he has the keys to heaven, right? And he is going to say: “Go in, go in.”

Instead they find not St. Peter because he is not actually in heaven, having not yet ascended after 2,000 years. They find instead some other beings of light that say: “You are not ready to enter the kingdom, you have to go back into embodiment until you are ready.” And this has caused many people to become angry and feel betrayed. Some of the most prominent atheists you see in the world, they have believed in the Christian promise for lifetimes, finally got to a point where they became so angry that when they came into their next embodiment they were angry at the Christian church and they had this desire to disprove all religion because they felt they had been fooled.

And, of course, many other people who are not on a crusade to disprove religion have still become disillusioned with all religion, all spirituality because they have so many times experienced going out of the body and the Christian promise was not fulfilled. They have to go back in another body and live through this whole circus of growing up from an infant to an adult, having to make a living, being forced to make a living, being forced by outer situations in their societies into a certain role and they have come to resent it and therefore resent all religion. Which you can say: “Are they worse off than when they were believing Christians?” Not particularly, maybe some of them even become open to some teachings that are beyond religion, which is why you have many people today who call themselves “I am spiritual but not religious.” Which is much, much, closer to the childlike mindset than the vast majority of Christians.

The purpose of the Easter story

So what is the purpose of the Easter story? It is to educate those who hear it but how can you be educated? Only if you see that it is all symbols. It may be, as they say in some movies, based on a true story. But a true story is still a story and the purpose of any story is to have a transformative effect on those who hear it. You will see if you look historically that many civilizations have had their stories, their narratives, their epic narratives. All throughout history you see that any civilization that rose to a certain level of complexity, even more primitive societies, what you call primitive, have had a story. And what is the purpose of this story? Well, ultimately it is to help people go through a transformation of consciousness until they are ready to enter the Kingdom of Heaven.

But you also see historically that many times these stories have become a trap. They have trapped people. Some of these stories are very focused on making a certain group of people seem like they are the superior people. They are, as the Jews believed and still believe, God’s chosen people and that is how people become trapped in the story. Trapped in the narrative because they are so attached to the outer narrative, that they do not see beyond the symbols to the real story that is behind it. Which is, how you can go from being a human being in the death consciousness to following a gradual path whereby you are reborn into your true identity as a spiritual being, as a son or daughter of God.

This is the purpose of all of these stories that you see in the world but unfortunately so many of them have become dead ends and, of course, the very story that claims to tell the story of the life of Christ has been turned into one of the most efficient dead ends ever seen on the planet. One of the most efficient tools for Satan, the forces of antichrist, the prince of this world to keep people trapped in this world. And therefore for the vast majority of Christians, when the prince of this world comes to them he has something in them and it is the Christian story. You may say it is an irony but from my perspective as an ascended master I have complete respect for free will and so I simply must bow to free will and once again say: “Those who deny me before men those must I deny before the Father” and thus they cannot enter the kingdom.

 

Copyright © 2023 Kim Michaels

 

Back to Taking Christianity and yourself down from the cross

 

Accepting that people are in the School of Hard Knocks

Listen to a recording of this dictation (subscribers only)

Ascended Master Padmasambhava through Kim Michaels, January 8, 2023. This dictation was given during the 2023 New Year’s webinar – Being a spiritual person in a chaotic world.

I AM the Ascended Master Padmasambhava.

I have given you the perspective that is sort of focused on your individual situation, how you can look at yourself and your situation as being in embodiment on earth. But now let us take a different perspective and look at the overall situation of earth.

You are a spiritual student. Many of you have been spiritual students for lifetimes, that is why you can even recognize a higher teaching in this lifetime. You cannot remember how it was when you, in perhaps a very distant past, were not a spiritual student—what state of mind you were in. You can barely remember this. You may have some intellectual understanding that many people on earth are in a lower state of mind, but you have very little direct remembrance of it.

People resisting change

Now what have we said? The earth is a schoolroom, and there are two ways to learn in the schoolroom of earth. One is through higher direction, spiritual teaching, spiritual practices, self-observation, working on your psychology, walking a path. But the other is the School of Hard Knocks. Well, it may have been a very long time and many embodiments since you were in the School of Hard Knocks, so you do not remember it, and you understand intellectually that most people are in the School of Hard Knocks, but do you really grasp what it means? What is the consequence of this?

Now, you look at yourself and how you can accept the concepts of a golden age, and that we are moving towards a golden age. But you do realize, do you not, that the vast majority of people on this planet would have no concept of what you are talking about if you attempted to explain to them the golden age and what it is—the potential to move into a golden age. They would have no clue as the saying goes.

Because they cannot fathom that you can raise your consciousness and therefore systematically bring the earth higher into a higher state. They are not even considering that they could deliberately raise their consciousness. They are not willing to look at themselves, look at the beam in their own eye, as Jesus called it. And therefore, how could they be brought into the golden age, and how can the earth be brought into the golden age as long as they are in that state of mind?

Many of these people live what you would call an impoverished existence but they are still holding onto it. Look at many people in the poor part of the world who have grown up poor, who have the vision they can only be poor and who are actually resisting changes in their country that could give them more affluence or give them more freedom. Look at how many people around the world are resisting progress. How can you manifest the golden age on a planet as long as so many people, a majority of the people are resisting progress, any kind of progress? They have no vision of a golden age but they resist progress because they hold onto whatever they have.

How can you manifest the golden age on a planet like this? Well, you can only do it when these people shift their consciousness and become willing to experience progress, to become willing to experience an improvement in their conditions. Now, you are saying as a spiritual student: “But if people are suffering why wouldn’t they want to improve their conditions?” But they do not. That is the difference between you and most people on this planet.

You want to improve your life, you want to overcome suffering, you want to attain freedom and you are willing to change yourself to attain it. That is why you are a spiritual student. But most people are not at that level of awareness yet. They cannot see any vision of a golden age or a spiritual path. They just know what they have. They do not want to lose it so they resist the change—they think a change could only mean a loss rather than a gain.

The dynamic on earth

How do you manifest a golden age on a planet like this? Well, you must find a way to shift people’s consciousness. And here is where you need to understand the dynamic of free will. Two thousand years ago, three thousand years ago it would not have been possible to manifest the golden age that Saint Germain envisioned. Why is that? Because back then very, very few people could grasp the concept of a golden age, the concept of a spiritual path, the concept of changing themselves and the concept that changing their consciousness can influence planetary conditions.

But today many, many people have moved into that awareness. Many people who have never heard of ascended masters or even heard about the spiritual path have become open to change, have realized that conditions can change. They look at how much progress has happened over the last several centuries and they see that this can continue into the future, they accept it, they want it.

The earth has passed this critical mass where there are enough people who want change that the law does not allow that the people who resist change can hold back the progress towards the golden age. Even though there is a majority of people who resist change, there is still a critical mass of people who embrace change that they are the ones who are driving the dynamic towards the golden age.

They are the ones who are determining–because they are the top 10%, and more than the top 10%–they are the ones who are determining the overall direction of the planet. Therefore, the law of free will is set up so that when a certain critical mass of people on a planet want change then that change must be allowed to unfold.

But what does that mean? That means that the part of the population that is resisting the change, they will not be forced to change as such but what will happen is that their karma will not be held back, to explain it in one way. You can say that there is a certain grace period where people’s karma is held back so that they can have an opportunity to grow. But when the cycles turn, the karma will be released. This means that the School of Hard Knocks will give them hard knocks.

You could also look at it in another way and say that the reflection back from the cosmic mirror is accelerated so that again the School of Hard Knocks gives them harder knocks in a shorter period of time. Thereby they are forced to change their consciousness but what is forcing them—[is] not the critical mass of people that want change, not the ascended masters—what is forcing them is their own past choices. They are, instead of being allowed to ignore their own past choices, they are now being confronted with those past choices and can no longer ignore them.

The shadows on the wall

This is the dynamic that is happening on earth. How does that help you as a spiritual student change your view of the earth? Well, let’s start with Plato’s cave, this old analogy given by the philosopher Plato. You have a cave. Inside of it is a group of people who are chained in such a way that they cannot turn their heads. They are facing a wall in the cave.

Outside of the cave the sun is shining, there are people walking by the opening in the cave and as the sun shines in it casts shadows onto the walls of the cave. The people can, in a sense, realize there must be something behind them, something outside of their cave, but they cannot see exactly what it is, they can only see the shadows on the wall.

Plato, of course, meant this to illustrate that what you see with the outer mind and the physical senses is only a shadow of causes that exist in the higher realms, what he called the “realm of ideal forms.” This is comparable to what we have called the emotional, mental and identity realms where the images held there by individual people, by humankind is what is projected onto the Ma-ter light in the physical octave. The material world is just the shadows of the images and the forms in the three higher levels.

Map of levels of human consciousness

Now you know that science has created many different measuring instruments. You have satellites that are constantly orbiting the earth, scanning the earth to look for very specific things. You can imagine that you are orbiting the earth in the space station looking down on earth as a human being. What are you seeing? Well, you are seeing the landscape, you are seeing forests, you are seeing oceans, you are seeing cities, you are seeing roads, you are seeing people. As a human being you naturally tend to focus on the activity of people.

Now you have a satellite that is scanning and it is scanning for temperature. You are seeing a certain outlay of the earth. But this satellite is only seeing temperature differences. Some zones are colder, they are blue. Some are warmer, they are red. It does not see the people, it does not see cities, it does not see roads, it just sees temperature differences.

Another scans for minerals, it sees rock formations, certain kinds of iron ore. Another may scan for oil, another may scan for elevation. It sees only differences in elevation.

You can create a man-made map of the earth. It has cities and roads and national boundaries or you can create many different other kinds of maps on the earth based on these different criteria. Temperature, elevation, rainfall, minerals, whatever you have. There are many different ways to look at the earth. And what you can do as a spiritual student is you can incorporate this and you can step back and you can say: “What is the earth? What is the earth, especially in this period where we are moving further into the golden age”?

We are approaching the point where the golden age will start manifesting but in order for the golden age to manifest, many changes will have to be made. Well, you can step back and acquire a different way to look at the earth. You can say: “What will it take for the golden age to be manifest? It will take that this large number of people will have to shift their awareness.”

You could even create a map of the earth that shows you where there are concentrations of people and what their level of consciousness is. How close are the people to manifesting the golden age consciousness? How far are they from it? And you could create a map with different colors that would show that in some parts of the world many people are close to the golden age consciousness. In other parts most people are far away from it. And thus you can say: “What will it take for the people who are far from the golden age consciousness to shift their consciousness”?

The School of Hard Knocks

Well, a spiritual teaching is not going to do it. Other kinds of teachings, even ideas about democracy for example, are not going to do it. The teachings about the liberation of women, equality between men and women, greater humanity, treating all people with honesty and decency, such teachings and ideas are not going to do it because if they could do it, they would have done it so far.

What will it take for these people to shift? Well, they are in the School of Hard Knocks, so the knocks have to become so hard that people actually notice. Right now, you may say these people are suffering, they have been suffering for a long time, they might experience various hard knocks, various disasters, various calamities, but it has not been enough of a hard knock to shake them out of their present state of consciousness, to make them realize: “No, we have to change.” The question is really how hard of a knock do various groups of people have to experience before they come to that recognition: “We have to change, we cannot continue being the way we are.”

Life on earth is a performance

And when you realize this you can say: “Well, what is the earth”? You can go back to ancient Greece. They had amphitheaters where they performed various plays. One kind of play was a tragedy. The purpose of the tragedy — and those who wrote and performed these plays knew this — the purpose of the tragedy was to out-picture certain situations in life, to out-picture certain emotions, certain dilemmas that people had, so that the audience could actually resolve something in their consciousness by watching the play, so they did not have to experience it in real life or they could perhaps learn something from the play that can apply in real life.

Well, in a sense the School of Hard Knocks is like a play. The purpose is to awaken the audience to the need for change. The question is what kind of a performance needs to be enacted for a specific group of people to be awakened to the need for change. And therefore, you can see that the outer events that take place on earth, they may seem very dramatic, they may seem disturbing, but they are just a means to an end. In fact, the outer physical events that are taking place on earth can be compared to a theater performance.

Now, when you are in a physical theater watching a theater performance, you know what is going on on the stage is not real, it is not real life that is happening. Why do you not realize that about so called real life — that the appearances that are taking place on earth are really no more real than a theater performance. It is just that there is not a stage, it is an immersive environment and therefore, it seems more real. I am not talking about the majority of the people realizing this, but I am talking about you as the spiritual students realizing that what is happening on earth is a theater performance for the purpose of awakening certain people who are resisting progress towards the golden age. And therefore, it is simply a matter of how strong is the people’s resistance, how hard do the knocks have to become before they are awakened.

“This should not be happening”

And when you realize this, when you accept this you can then say: “Well, why should I take this seriously? Why should I take it personally? Why should I resist what is happening? Why should I use the spiritual teaching to evaluate: – Oh, this should not be happening.” This messenger when the invasion of Ukraine happened, he clearly felt: “Oh, this should not have happened.” Before it happened despite the warnings, he thought “This is not going to happen. There is no way that Putin cannot see the consequences of this, that the Russian leadership cannot see the consequences. They cannot be that blind.” But they were that blind as you can all see today.

The messenger could see the consequences and projected his own state of consciousness that surely somebody in the Russian leadership could see the consequences and would stop this. But he was wrong and he has been willing to admit that he was wrong. Likewise, you can come to that admission that there are many people on earth who need to see enacted in what they see as real life, in the material world, on this stage of earth, very dramatic scenarios before they can awaken to the need for change.

But you are not among them. You are a spiritual person. You are open to direction from beyond your own mind and the material universe. You are not in the School of Hard Knocks. Why should you take this so seriously or even take it personally? Why should you resist it? Why should you seek to change it? This is actually part of the process of moving the earth closer to the golden age. Surely you cannot expect that everybody on earth can move towards the golden age the way you are doing it.

You need to recognize that many people need the School of Hard Knocks in order to move. What you can do is you can step back from this and realize no matter how real it seems, it is a theater performance being outplayed. I know, this will seem insensitive to many people because there is some real-life suffering that is happening and people are being killed and blown up and all of these things. I am not asking you to be insensitive. But I am asking you to step back and realize that as a spiritual person you need to allow this theater performance to unfold so that those people who cannot be awakened by a spiritual teaching can be awakened by this outplaying of events in what they think is the real world.

Avoid being pulled into the performance

Of course, it has tragic consequences for many people. Of course, you would like to avoid it. Of course, we of the ascended masters would like to avoid it. But when it cannot be avoided, you can avoid that you are pulled into it, pulled into the feelings, the thoughts, the vortexes or even the physical vortex of such events. You can stand back and observe and watch as you would sit in a theater and watch a Greek tragedy unfolding on the stage. I am not saying you need to enjoy the performance but you can see it as a performance and then you can avoid being pulled into it. You can avoid reacting to it as something that should not happen.

From a certain perspective, yes it would be better that it did not happen. It would be better if people could grow without the suffering. But if they cannot, then it actually, in the very long run of the golden age, produces less suffering in the long run than it otherwise would if people did not change. It is a matter of realizing that when you know about reincarnation, you realize that even if someone goes out of embodiment prematurely because of a war this is not the end of their opportunity. They will have an opportunity to come back into embodiment in a different circumstance and therefore they can move on.

So even if you look at the perspective of one soul you can say the person might suffer intensely for a short period of time in this lifetime but this could prevent a much more prolonged suffering in several future lifetimes. What is from the overall perspective the more constructive outcome.

You understand that I am not sitting here as an ascended master and making these evaluations. I am presenting them to you as a way for you to avoid being pulled into fear, a fear-based reaction or anger or resentment or whatever reactions you can be pulled into when you witness such events. You can stay centered; you can stay focused on moving the planet further towards the golden age. You can give your invocations and decrees, you can raise your consciousness, you can work on your divine plan and therefore move the planet forward instead of being derailed or going into a detour because of a strong reaction to such events.

Everything is an appearance

You take the line in my decree: “Earth is an appearance where nothing is real.” This is a statement that disturbs many people but you as a spiritual student, you can step up to a different perspective on it and you can realize that everything people see, everything people experience is an appearance. The appearance is created by a combination of what is happening outside people’s minds and what is happening inside people’s minds. In other words, there are external events but then there is people’s perception filter which color the way they look at those events.

There are scientists who are seriously debating that when two people look at a lawn they might agree that it is green but do they actually see the exact same shade of green or do they have an individual perception of the color green? This is, believe it or not, the subject of serious scientific debate, and it is not an invalid debate because it is the beginning of this realization that people have individual perception filters. And it is not just a matter of looking at a certain color but if even looking at a color is individual and subjective, then how much more is it when people look at events and ideas and their own lives?

You realize that when you look at this from an ascended perspective you can say: “The Elohim have manifested planet Earth. Given their level of awareness the Earth is real, there is a planet that is real.” But when you look at this from the perspective of human beings in embodiment, they are not seeing the real planet, they are seeing an appearance that is produced inside their minds. From the perspective of a person in embodiment, earth is an appearance where nothing is real, because what they perceive is not what the Elohim created but an appearance strongly influenced by their own minds, and the more people are in a lower state of consciousness, the more closed their minds are, the more they resist change, the more they see only the appearance and not the reality.

What is real?

Now, you can apply other considerations here and say: “What does it mean that something is real”? And many people would say it is something that has an objective experience independent of mind. There is some validity to this if you realize that human beings who are in the duality consciousness, their minds are entirely subjective and everything they see is subjective. You can say that outside of that mind—that dualistic separate mind—there is some objective existence. But you cannot say that only that which is not influenced or created by a mind is real because how did the Elohim create the earth? Through the power of their minds. They formulated mental images, they projected them upon the Mat-er light and manifested the planet.

Well, the same with the rest of the universe. Everything is created out of mind so if you say that that which is created out of mind is not ultimately real then nothing is real in the entire universe. But, of course, it is more practical, on a planet like earth, to realize that the more subjective, the more closed a mind is, the more it will see only an appearance where nothing is real.

What can you use this for as a spiritual student? Well, you can then lock into again the theater analogy, and say in a theater nothing is ultimately real—it is a performance that is meant to have an influence on the mind of the spectators. The entire planet is a performance but the difference between a theater and the planet is that people on earth are not just passive onlookers, they are participating in the performance. They are on the stage, so to speak, they are all part of the performance but they, of course, think it is real life. But you as a spiritual student can free your mind from this illusion that this is a real world. And the benefit of doing this is that you can then realize that if something is not real how can it influence your mind?

The illusion of an objective world

You have been brought up for many lifetimes programmed by the fallen beings to think that there is a real world, there is an objective world and your mind has no power over that objective world but the objective world has power over your mind. It can influence your mind. This is what the fallen beings want you to believe—that there is an objective world that is not created by the mind and therefore there is a limit to how much you can change your personal situation or how much humankind can change the planet.

The fallen beings want you to believe that you live in a real world. You cannot change it and therefore the influence that this world has so far had on your mind cannot be changed by you. You do not have the power to change this. The world is in a certain way. There is warfare in the world. This influences your mind in a certain way, and as long as there is warfare in the world you cannot change how it influences your mind. This is what the fallen beings want you to believe and it is, of course, an insidious lie.

The reality taught by the ascended masters for a very long time is that you have the power to change your mind so that you change the way that the world outside your mind influences the world inside your mind. In fact you can attain a state of mind where nothing in the world can influence your state of mind. You are choosing your state of mind independently of external events happening in the world.

This is what the Gautama Buddha talked about as the “path”, the “eightfold path”, where you gradually come to this point where nothing in the world influences you. The demons of Mara, the prince of this world they cannot influence you and force you into a certain reaction.

Buddhahood and Christhood

Many of you have not even started grasping this. Some of you have understood it intellectually but you have not fully internalized it. Buddhahood, Christhood means that you come to a point where nothing that happens in this world can control your state of mind. Nothing can force you into a certain reaction. You are free so that you can look at any event that happens on earth and you have complete freedom to choose your reaction, to choose what you feel about it, what you think about it, how you identify yourself in relation to it and how you act in relation to it. You are free. You are not forced by external events.

How can you come to that state? By realizing that you have certain selves—separate selves that are based on this illusion that your mind must be influenced by external conditions—and that they can only be influenced in a certain way. This goes back to when you first came to earth and you received these shocks. You experienced there was warfare on earth. You experienced the absolute ruthlessness that certain fallen beings were willing to kill tens or hundreds or thousands or millions of people for their own ego gratification. You were so shocked by this that you created a separate self to deal with this so that you can still maintain some sense of equilibrium that even though you are on a difficult planet, it is not a completely insane planet where you cannot survive psychologically.

This was an understandable reaction when you first came to earth, but you have been here a long time, you have walked the spiritual path and it is time to look at this separate self, these separate selves and let them die. This does not mean that you become insensitive in the sense that you deny that suffering is happening or you do not feel compassion for people. But it does mean that you realize that even though there is still warfare on earth, you can choose your reaction or you can choose not to react with fear, with separation. You can instead choose to say: “I will hold the vision. I will give the decrees and invocations that this will be transcended. I will work on raising the collective consciousness so that this will be transcended and become an impossibility.”

But you are not disturbed, you are not pulled into this negative reaction of anger, fear or hatred. You remain non-attached. It does not mean you are not acting, you are not doing whatever can be done to change the situation, but you are not acting from this state of being attached, being disturbed. Because that state comes from a separate self and when you act based on this, your impact is much smaller than when you can act from this higher state of Christhood and Buddhahood.

You could say also that your I AM Presence might send an impulse into the four levels of your mind that is aimed at transforming the energies that pull people into war but that energy has to pass through the identity, mental and emotional body and as it does so it will interact with whatever reactionary patterns you have there, which will reduce the force of the impulse. So, when you get rid of these reactionary patterns, these separate selves, the impulse can pass unhindered through your mind, from your higher self and therefore have an immensely greater impact.

Do not postpone your Christhood indefinitely

The other advantage, of course, of seeing that nothing is ultimately real is that it can help you attain this state of being at peace with being on earth even in the present conditions.

What is it that is required for you to manifest Christhood or Buddhahood while you are still in a physical body? Well, one of the mechanisms created by the fallen beings is that they project that: “You are a responsible spiritual student. You are striving for a higher level of awareness. You have achieved a higher level of awareness but you need to engage yourself in what is happening on earth. You cannot just be aloof. You cannot withdraw, you cannot be non-attached and not care about other people.” So, as long as there are these terrible conditions on earth such as war you cannot manifest your Christhood. You need to first eradicate these outer conditions so there is more peace on earth, then you can manifest your Christhood.

The fallen beings are always saying: “You need to engage in current conditions and seek to change them and then after that, you can manifest your Christhood.” Thereby causing you, if you agree with this, to postpone your Christhood indefinitely: “There is something I have to take care of.” It is the parable of Jesus, where the young man comes to him and says: “I want to follow you, but let me bury my father first.” And what is Jesus’ reaction? “Let the dead bury their dead.” Because what the young man was saying is: “I want to follow you. I want to walk the path towards Christhood, but there is just something I have to take care of in the world first. There is something I have to do, then I can focus on Christhood.”

Well, there may be things that are a legitimate part of your divine plan that you have to do or that you have to experience in order to be free of it, and it is part of your path to Christhood. But what the fallen beings project at you is that there is some outer situation and as long as that situation is there you cannot manifest your Christhood. Of course, what is the only way to remove warfare on earth? It is that a critical mass of people manifests Christhood and therefore can pull up on the collective consciousness so that more and more people are awakening to a different view of warfare.

Catch-22

So if you postpone your Christhood because of war, how will war be removed? It is a dilemma, a catch-22 created by the fallen beings and they have created many of them. There comes a point where you need to look at this and you need to realize that regardless of what conditions are unfolding on the planet, you have a right to disengage from this and focus on your spiritual growth, manifesting your Christhood. Because when you reach a higher state of awareness you can have a greater impact in terms of changing conditions on earth but you cannot do this as long as you are attached, as long as you react based on a separate self.

Now, there is another perspective that we might consider. As I have said, the fallen beings have created many enigmas, a catch-22, an impossible situation, a dilemma. A classic example of this is the fallen beings attack you physically and threaten to kill you. What do you do? Do you let them kill you or do you strike back and kill them? This is just one situation. The fallen beings precipitate a war. One country attacks another. What do you do?

Accepting the fullness of free will

So these are dilemmas created by the fallen beings, and you are only pulled into them when you are in the duality consciousness and have these separate selves where you feel that you have to do something about this. The ultimate way is to, of course, resolve those outer selves. But you can also shift your attitude and say: “But I am living on a planet where the ultimate law is free will. If other people use their free will to do something, why do I have to do something about that? It is not my role to change other people’s free will. I have my own free will. My role, my authority is to make my own choices but I am not responsible for what other people do with their free will and I don’t have the authority to forcefully change their minds and their free will. So when other people do something, why do I have to react to this? Why do I have to seek to change their choices? Why can I not simply allow them to outplay this so they suffer the consequences?”

In some cases it is because you want to protect yourself from the consequences but as spiritual people, most of you, it is because you actually want to protect the people from the consequences of their choices because you see those consequences and you do not want them to suffer. But on a planet with free will, it is not your responsibility to prevent people from making certain choices or prevent people from suffering the consequences of those choices.

As we have said before, many avatars who came to earth came because they did not quite lock into, internalize the fullness of free will. This is one of the challenges that avatars face on this planet — to come to the point where you can look at what is happening, look at what people are doing and instead of trying to prevent them from making the choices that cause suffering, you step back and say: “Come what may. Let them experience the consequences because they will not listen to me anyway. They cannot learn from being told, they can only learn by experiencing the consequences. Why should I prevent them from learning in the only way that they can learn? Why is it my job to insert myself between people and the return of their karma? Is that really my role, as an avatar on earth, to prevent people from reaping the consequences of their choices by trying to prevent them from making those choices? Am I here to change the minds of other people or am I here to change my own mind, to raise my own consciousness, to escape whatever illusions I have about free will, to transcend them”? When you realize this, you can again step back, look at the earth and let things unfold.

Enigma built into free will

This is what relates to the dilemmas created by the fallen beings to trap you, to pull you into this endless spiral of reacting. But there are certain dilemmas that are not created by the fallen beings. They are actually, we might say, built into free will and the whole process of raising your consciousness. And there are several of such dilemmas or enigmas, but the one I want to touch upon here is: You are created, as we have said, as an individual being with an individual free will. We have said that you are an extension of your I AM Presence which exists in the spiritual realm. In the spiritual realm everybody, every being, feels connected to every other being, feels they are part of the one mind, they see the world as an interconnected whole. You are sent into an unascended sphere as an individual being. You have the option to go into duality and see yourself as a separate being but what I am talking about is the very fact that you come in as an individual being.

You are meant to experience this world as an individual being from your particular vantage point. You are meant to grow in awareness, expand your awareness, but still as an individual being. And then when you reach a certain level of awareness you can give up this individual existence and return to your I AM Presence or however we have attempted to explain this with words, that will always be inadequate. But the enigma that is built into this process is: how do you balance your individual free will with the fact that you are not alone in this world, that there are, on this planet, eight billion other individuals with free will? How do you balance that?

We have talked that on a natural planet you do not lose your sense of connection. But we have also said that on a natural planet you still start out with a point-like sense of identity. You see yourself as an individual being, you realize you are connected to something beyond your own mind—you are connected to other people, you are connected to your environment, but you are still an individual being. So even on a natural planet there is this dilemma, this enigma. How do you resolve the fact that you have an individual free will and that everybody in your environment has an individual free will? How do you deal with this?

Now, I am not presenting you with this based on some thought that there is a magical way to look at this that will resolve the enigma. I am not trying to say that you have a wrong perception, that you have a wrong view of this and that you should shift your view and then you can solve the enigma. The enigma is there and it will be there until you ascend. When you ascend you can say you resolve the enigma, but I cannot give you words and teachings as long as you are unascended that will resolve the enigma for you.

Balancing your will with the will of others

It is not possible to describe it in words, but what you can do is you can accept that the enigma is there. You can accept that as long as you are in embodiment, even when you reach the 144th level of consciousness, you will be dealing with this need to balance your free will with the free will of the people around you.

Look at two people who are in a relationship. They live together in the same house, they may have children, but they have a life together. Let us just simplify it, just look at two people. You may have great love for each other, you may know each other well, you may have respect for each other, but you are still two individuals. You have a different vantage point, a different perspective on life, you have an individual free will. How do you balance that? How do you deal with that when one person wants to do one thing and the other person wants to do something else?

Again, I am not saying there is some easy clear-cut solution that resolves it. I am just pointing out to you that this is an enigma that follows you as long as you have this individual existence in an unascended sphere, even on a natural planet, because it is still in an unascended sphere. Now, what can you do as a spiritual person about this? Why would I tell you this if you cannot resolve it or do anything about it?

Well, you can use it to look at the entire planet again and you can say: “Naturally I need to find a way to balance my free will with the free will of the people who are close to me, that I have a direct personal relationship with. But when it comes to the rest of humankind, I do not need to do the same thing. Therefore, I can step back and I can say: Those eight billion other people on this planet have an individual free will. But I am not responsible for their free will. I am not responsible for their choices. I do not need to adjust my free will based on the choices they make.”

When you are in a direct personal relationship, you need to adjust your free will and your choices based on the people around you. But you do not need to do that with humanity at large. When you think about it, how could you possibly do it? When there are so many different people, that want to do so many different things.

What you can do as a spiritual person is then step back and say: “I am not responsible for these people’s choices. I don’t need to react to the choices they make or the consequences of those choices. I need to remain non-attached and let those consequences unfold. They may affect me personally, but I need to be as non-attached as possible to this and realize that these people need to experience these consequences in order to shift their consciousness. And I need to be completely non-attached to this and focus on my own state of consciousness. I am not responsible for these people’s choices. I do not need to adjust my free will based on their choices. I have a right to focus on my own spiritual growth, my own spiritual path and pay minimum attention to other people’s choices. Even if they affect me physically, I can find a way to let them affect my mind, my state of mind as little as possible.”

How to be at peace in a chaotic world

This does not resolve the enigma, but it certainly makes it easier for you to exist on a planet where there is so much turmoil. And this has been part of the focus of what we wanted to give you at this conference. Our hope was that we could help you be more at peace in a chaotic world. And how do you do it? By accepting the chaos, by embracing the chaos, by realizing that regardless of what choices other people make, you can still make your own choices. And even if you cannot control your outer circumstances, you can control your state of mind independently of other people’s choices. In other words, you can say: “I am not allowing the chaos created by other people’s choices to enter my mind and influence my choices. I am still navigating in the River of Life with a clear sense of where I want to go. And whatever happens, whatever twists and turns, I simply turn back and go in the direction that I defined in my divine plan.”

Now, I know very well that what we have given you is not some magic bullet. It is not so that you can study the teachings given at this conference and you will instantly resolve your sense of being disturbed and now feel at peace. But there is no magic bullet. And we have explained why.

What is the real path all about?

You need to learn, you need to experience, you need to adjust your consciousness. That is how you grow in awareness. So many spiritual people come to the spiritual path and they have a certain goal to attain a certain state of mind. But that state of mind might be many steps above their current state of mind. But these people see that there is this goal, whether you call it Christhood or Buddhahood or enlightenment or higher consciousness, and they are saying to the spiritual teacher: “Give me the magic bullet so I can instantly step up from my present level to that level that I see up there. Show me how to jump from where I am to where you are.”

But how did I reach my present level of consciousness? By taking one step at a time. Because it was by taking one step at a time that I gradually transformed my consciousness. How could you possibly jump from your present level to the ultimate level in one big leap? It cannot be done. You need to be willing to go through the same process that all of the people who have ascended from earth have been willing to go through.

If you want a shortcut, if you want to skip steps, well you are not really ready for the real path that has been taught in many different contexts throughout the ages. You are in a sense looking for the left-handed path of the false teachers who make all kinds of promises that they know cannot be fulfilled.

A true teacher will not make a promise that cannot be fulfilled. Why would he? A true teacher does not need anything from the student. A false teacher needs something from the student. It might be your light, your energy, it might be your obedience, it might be certain actions you can take. But a true teacher that has transcended the duality consciousness and the unascended sphere needs nothing from you. The true teacher wants you to grow and therefore can only give you a path that describes the only way to grow—one step at a time.

For each step there is an enigma you need to resolve, an illusion you need to overcome. Sometimes students think: “Well, the end goal is to be free of the illusion, so why can’t I just jump up there and be free. Give me that magical insight so I am instantly enlightened.” But the goal is actually not to be free of the illusions. The goal is to go through the process of resolving the illusions one by one, because it is in resolving an illusion that you expand your awareness. It is not being free of the illusion that expands your awareness, it is resolving the illusion that expands your awareness. This is the real path.

It is the journey, not the destination

When you grasp this, when you accept it, you can be at peace of following that gradual path. You can accept, you can embrace the step you are on, you can focus on the current illusion. You do not have to worry about the bonds that are still above you. You focus on your current illusion, you work with this enigma, you come to see the separate self, you let it go, then you rise to the next level. You feel fulfillment in having risen to that level. But after some time, you say: “What is the next illusion? What is the enigma at this level”? And you focus on that. And you are at peace with the fact that you will be continuing to do this as long as you are in embodiment on earth.

Taking one step at a time, resolving one illusion at a time. And when you lock into this, when you embrace it, you can overcome this deficit attitude, where you feel incomplete as long as you know you are not at the ultimate goal. Instead, you can feel complete in participating in the process. It is, as the saying goes, which has become somewhat of a cliché: “It is the journey, not the destination.” But there is a truth there. Many, many people approach the spiritual path with this deficit attitude, that they will never be at peace, they will never feel fulfilled or whole until they are at the ultimate level of enlightenment.

Being neutral while observing events unfold

But you can shift your attitude so you are at peace, you feel fulfilled in walking the path, seeing the process unfold, feeling fulfillment every time you take a step up, even feeling fulfillment in being at your present level and observing the world through your present level of consciousness.

You can come to a point where you are at peace with observing the theater performance of earth unfolding, seeing how other people react to it, seeing what people are doing, observing, you do not need to judge it, you just observe how far into extremes do certain groups of people have to go before the knocks become hard enough that they actually notice and realize the need to change themselves. You can just observe this. Observe it unfold like you are watching a movie or a play in a theater.

Ultimately, the goal of any spiritual teacher is that we wish our students could have the same level of consciousness, the same awareness that we have. Ultimately, of course, I want you, each one of you, to ascend and experience the freedom and the joy that you have in the ascended realm, but I know, this is not realistic.

So the second thing I want, and we all want for our students, is that while you are still in embodiment in this chaotic world, you can attain a certain inner resolution, inner peace, inner acceptance of the world you are in, the events that are unfolding and the process of raising your awareness and participating in raising the world closer to the golden age.

We as ascended masters find a fulfillment in being part of this process. We hope that you can find also fulfillment, even though we know it is more difficult while you are still in the density of the material realm and the four levels. But still you can achieve this inner resolution where you stop resisting the process and instead you embrace it. You embrace the chaos, you embrace the fluctuations, the dynamism in your environment.

Longing for stillness

The interesting thing, and this is another enigma, is that you are sent into the world by your I AM Presence in order to give your I AM Presence experiences of moving through stages. Your I AM Presence is more in peace, you might say, it is more standing still, but an unascended sphere is moving in a different way. In a sense you are sent out of stillness into movement, but you have a longing back to stillness.

I am not saying that the ascended realm is stillstand, but I am just giving you a contrast that can be described in words. You come out of stillstand into a world of movement. You are a moving being, but you are longing for stillness and you think that the only way to achieve the stillness is to stop the movement, but this is an illusion. The only way to achieve stillness is to embrace the movement and see that the movement is only possible because there is a background of stillness.

And when you tune into the background, you can feel the peace even while you are moving. And that is what we all achieved at the higher levels of the path. But there is no law that says you have to be at the higher levels of the path to achieve this. You can achieve it at almost any level above the 48th level and certainly about the 96th level. This is what Gautama and I wish for you, that you can attain some sense of peace while being in movement.

With this, you have the gratitude of myself and Gautama for being willing to be the instruments for taking this into your minds and projecting it into the collective. We hope it has benefited you individually. We know it has benefited the collective and it is a major step forward to have a teaching like this released, not only in the physical but in the four levels of the material universe.

With this, our deep gratitude, both Gautama and I seal you in the peace that we are. We are at peace compared to people on earth but we are still moving for even in the ascended realm there is self-transcendence and we are embracing that process.

Be sealed in the movement of peace, the peaceful movement.

 

* As a thoughtform for this coming year we will use the Sun thoughtform from last year:

“Gautama Buddha, you are the perfect mirror for earth”.

“Saint Germain, you are the perfect mirror for the economy”.

“Mother Mary, you are the perfect mirror for women” .

 

Copyright © 2023 Kim Michaels

 

Back to Being a spiritual person in a chaotic world